diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c')
| -rw-r--r-- | ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c | 9374 |
1 files changed, 4687 insertions, 4687 deletions
diff --git a/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c b/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c index 9a8a0eac8c..53a3d6a2d2 100644 --- a/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c +++ b/ext/sqlite3/libsqlite/sqlite3.c @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ /****************************************************************************** ** This file is an amalgamation of many separate C source files from SQLite -** version 3.8.7.2. By combining all the individual C code files into this +** version 3.8.7.2. By combining all the individual C code files into this ** single large file, the entire code can be compiled as a single translation ** unit. This allows many compilers to do optimizations that would not be ** possible if the files were compiled separately. Performance improvements @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ ** ** This file is all you need to compile SQLite. To use SQLite in other ** programs, you need this file and the "sqlite3.h" header file that defines -** the programming interface to the SQLite library. (If you do not have +** the programming interface to the SQLite library. (If you do not have ** the "sqlite3.h" header file at hand, you will find a copy embedded within ** the text of this file. Search for "Begin file sqlite3.h" to find the start ** of the embedded sqlite3.h header file.) Additional code files may be needed @@ -259,8 +259,8 @@ extern "C" { ** function is provided for use in DLLs since DLL users usually do not have ** direct access to string constants within the DLL. ^The ** sqlite3_libversion_number() function returns an integer equal to -** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER]. ^The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns -** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the +** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER]. ^The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns +** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the ** [SQLITE_SOURCE_ID] C preprocessor macro. ** ** See also: [sqlite_version()] and [sqlite_source_id()]. @@ -273,20 +273,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_libversion_number(void); /* ** CAPI3REF: Run-Time Library Compilation Options Diagnostics ** -** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1 -** indicating whether the specified option was defined at -** compile time. ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the -** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used(). +** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1 +** indicating whether the specified option was defined at +** compile time. ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the +** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used(). ** ** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_get() function allows iterating ** over the list of options that were defined at compile time by ** returning the N-th compile time option string. ^If N is out of range, -** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer. ^The SQLITE_ -** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by +** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer. ^The SQLITE_ +** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by ** sqlite3_compileoption_get(). ** ** ^Support for the diagnostic functions sqlite3_compileoption_used() -** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifying the +** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifying the ** [SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS] option at compile time. ** ** See also: SQL functions [sqlite_compileoption_used()] and @@ -307,7 +307,7 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_compileoption_get(int N); ** SQLite can be compiled with or without mutexes. When ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] C preprocessor macro is 1 or 2, mutexes ** are enabled and SQLite is threadsafe. When the -** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0, +** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0, ** the mutexes are omitted. Without the mutexes, it is not safe ** to use SQLite concurrently from more than one thread. ** @@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3 sqlite3; ** ** ^The sqlite3_int64 and sqlite_int64 types can store integer values ** between -9223372036854775808 and +9223372036854775807 inclusive. ^The -** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values +** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values ** between 0 and +18446744073709551615 inclusive. */ #ifdef SQLITE_INT64_TYPE @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ typedef sqlite_uint64 sqlite3_uint64; ** destructors are called is arbitrary. ** ** Applications should [sqlite3_finalize | finalize] all [prepared statements], -** [sqlite3_blob_close | close] all [BLOB handles], and +** [sqlite3_blob_close | close] all [BLOB handles], and ** [sqlite3_backup_finish | finish] all [sqlite3_backup] objects associated ** with the [sqlite3] object prior to attempting to close the object. ^If ** sqlite3_close_v2() is called on a [database connection] that still has @@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_callback)(void*,int,char**, char**); ** The sqlite3_exec() interface is a convenience wrapper around ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()], [sqlite3_step()], and [sqlite3_finalize()], ** that allows an application to run multiple statements of SQL -** without having to use a lot of C code. +** without having to use a lot of C code. ** ** ^The sqlite3_exec() interface runs zero or more UTF-8 encoded, ** semicolon-separate SQL statements passed into its 2nd argument, @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_callback)(void*,int,char**, char**); ** from [sqlite3_column_name()]. ** ** ^If the 2nd parameter to sqlite3_exec() is a NULL pointer, a pointer -** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or +** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or ** SQL comments, then no SQL statements are evaluated and the database ** is not changed. ** @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_exec( /* ** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle ** -** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the +** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the ** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer]. Individual OS interface ** implementations will ** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields @@ -764,7 +764,7 @@ struct sqlite3_file { ** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations ** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object. ** -** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element +** If the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element ** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method ** may be invoked even if the [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] reported that it failed. The ** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed [sqlite3_vfs.xOpen] @@ -899,7 +899,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_CHUNK_SIZE]] ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_CHUNK_SIZE] opcode is used to request that the VFS ** extends and truncates the database file in chunks of a size specified -** by the user. The fourth argument to [sqlite3_file_control()] should +** by the user. The fourth argument to [sqlite3_file_control()] should ** point to an integer (type int) containing the new chunk-size to use ** for the nominated database. Allocating database file space in large ** chunks (say 1MB at a time), may reduce file-system fragmentation and @@ -917,24 +917,24 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_SYNC]] ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_SYNC] opcode is generated internally by SQLite and ** sent to the VFS immediately before the xSync method is invoked on a -** database file descriptor. Or, if the xSync method is not invoked -** because the user has configured SQLite with -** [PRAGMA synchronous | PRAGMA synchronous=OFF] it is invoked in place +** database file descriptor. Or, if the xSync method is not invoked +** because the user has configured SQLite with +** [PRAGMA synchronous | PRAGMA synchronous=OFF] it is invoked in place ** of the xSync method. In most cases, the pointer argument passed with ** this file-control is NULL. However, if the database file is being synced ** as part of a multi-database commit, the argument points to a nul-terminated -** string containing the transactions master-journal file name. VFSes that -** do not need this signal should silently ignore this opcode. Applications -** should not call [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may -** disrupt the operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it. +** string containing the transactions master-journal file name. VFSes that +** do not need this signal should silently ignore this opcode. Applications +** should not call [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may +** disrupt the operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO]] ** The [SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO] opcode is generated internally by SQLite ** and sent to the VFS after a transaction has been committed immediately ** but before the database is unlocked. VFSes that do not need this signal ** should silently ignore this opcode. Applications should not call -** [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may disrupt the -** operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it. +** [sqlite3_file_control()] with this opcode as doing so may disrupt the +** operation of the specialized VFSes that do require it. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_WIN32_AV_RETRY]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_WIN32_AV_RETRY] opcode is used to configure automatic @@ -981,13 +981,13 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_OVERWRITE] opcode is invoked by SQLite after opening ** a write transaction to indicate that, unless it is rolled back for some -** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current +** reason, the entire database file will be overwritten by the current ** transaction. This is used by VACUUM operations. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME]] ** ^The [SQLITE_FCNTL_VFSNAME] opcode can be used to obtain the names of ** all [VFSes] in the VFS stack. The names are of all VFS shims and the -** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from +** final bottom-level VFS are written into memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc()] and the result is stored in the char* variable ** that the fourth parameter of [sqlite3_file_control()] points to. ** The caller is responsible for freeing the memory when done. As with @@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** is intended for diagnostic use only. ** ** <li>[[SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA]] -** ^Whenever a [PRAGMA] statement is parsed, an [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] +** ^Whenever a [PRAGMA] statement is parsed, an [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] ** file control is sent to the open [sqlite3_file] object corresponding ** to the database file to which the pragma statement refers. ^The argument ** to the [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control is an array of @@ -1008,7 +1008,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** of the char** argument point to a string obtained from [sqlite3_mprintf()] ** or the equivalent and that string will become the result of the pragma or ** the error message if the pragma fails. ^If the -** [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control returns [SQLITE_NOTFOUND], then normal +** [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] file control returns [SQLITE_NOTFOUND], then normal ** [PRAGMA] processing continues. ^If the [SQLITE_FCNTL_PRAGMA] ** file control returns [SQLITE_OK], then the parser assumes that the ** VFS has handled the PRAGMA itself and the parser generates a no-op @@ -1046,7 +1046,7 @@ struct sqlite3_io_methods { ** The argument is a pointer to a value of type sqlite3_int64 that ** is an advisory maximum number of bytes in the file to memory map. The ** pointer is overwritten with the old value. The limit is not changed if -** the value originally pointed to is negative, and so the current limit +** the value originally pointed to is negative, and so the current limit ** can be queried by passing in a pointer to a negative number. This ** file-control is used internally to implement [PRAGMA mmap_size]. ** @@ -1155,14 +1155,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_mutex sqlite3_mutex; ** the [sqlite3_file] can safely store a pointer to the ** filename if it needs to remember the filename for some reason. ** If the zFilename parameter to xOpen is a NULL pointer then xOpen -** must invent its own temporary name for the file. ^Whenever the +** must invent its own temporary name for the file. ^Whenever the ** xFilename parameter is NULL it will also be the case that the ** flags parameter will include [SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE]. ** ** The flags argument to xOpen() includes all bits set in ** the flags argument to [sqlite3_open_v2()]. Or if [sqlite3_open()] ** or [sqlite3_open16()] is used, then flags includes at least -** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE]. +** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE]. ** If xOpen() opens a file read-only then it sets *pOutFlags to ** include [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY]. Other bits in *pOutFlags may be set. ** @@ -1204,10 +1204,10 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_mutex sqlite3_mutex; ** ^The [SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE] flag is always used in conjunction ** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE] flag, which are both directly ** analogous to the O_EXCL and O_CREAT flags of the POSIX open() -** API. The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the +** API. The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the ** SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, is used to indicate that file should always ** be created, and that it is an error if it already exists. -** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened +** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened ** for exclusive access. ** ** ^At least szOsFile bytes of memory are allocated by SQLite @@ -1245,16 +1245,16 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_mutex sqlite3_mutex; ** method returns a Julian Day Number for the current date and time as ** a floating point value. ** ^The xCurrentTimeInt64() method returns, as an integer, the Julian -** Day Number multiplied by 86400000 (the number of milliseconds in -** a 24-hour day). +** Day Number multiplied by 86400000 (the number of milliseconds in +** a 24-hour day). ** ^SQLite will use the xCurrentTimeInt64() method to get the current -** date and time if that method is available (if iVersion is 2 or +** date and time if that method is available (if iVersion is 2 or ** greater and the function pointer is not NULL) and will fall back ** to xCurrentTime() if xCurrentTimeInt64() is unavailable. ** ** ^The xSetSystemCall(), xGetSystemCall(), and xNestSystemCall() interfaces ** are not used by the SQLite core. These optional interfaces are provided -** by some VFSes to facilitate testing of the VFS code. By overriding +** by some VFSes to facilitate testing of the VFS code. By overriding ** system calls with functions under its control, a test program can ** simulate faults and error conditions that would otherwise be difficult ** or impossible to induce. The set of system calls that can be overridden @@ -1301,7 +1301,7 @@ struct sqlite3_vfs { /* ** The methods above are in versions 1 through 3 of the sqlite_vfs object. ** New fields may be appended in figure versions. The iVersion - ** value will increment whenever this happens. + ** value will increment whenever this happens. */ }; @@ -1345,7 +1345,7 @@ struct sqlite3_vfs { ** </ul> ** ** When unlocking, the same SHARED or EXCLUSIVE flag must be supplied as -** was given no the corresponding lock. +** was given no the corresponding lock. ** ** The xShmLock method can transition between unlocked and SHARED or ** between unlocked and EXCLUSIVE. It cannot transition between SHARED @@ -1487,7 +1487,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int, ...); ** [database connection] (specified in the first argument). ** ** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...) is the -** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code +** [SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE | configuration verb] - an integer code ** that indicates what aspect of the [database connection] is being configured. ** Subsequent arguments vary depending on the configuration verb. ** @@ -1505,7 +1505,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); ** This object is used in only one place in the SQLite interface. ** A pointer to an instance of this object is the argument to ** [sqlite3_config()] when the configuration option is -** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC]. +** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC]. ** By creating an instance of this object ** and passing it to [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC]) ** during configuration, an application can specify an alternative @@ -1535,7 +1535,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); ** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple ** of 8. Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2. ** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()] -** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0, +** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0, ** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail. ** ** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator. For example, @@ -1593,7 +1593,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** by a single thread. ^If SQLite is compiled with ** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then ** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default -** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return +** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return ** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD ** configuration option.</dd> ** @@ -1644,9 +1644,9 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** tracks memory usage, for example. </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS</dt> -** <dd> ^This option takes single argument of type int, interpreted as a -** boolean, which enables or disables the collection of memory allocation -** statistics. ^(When memory allocation statistics are disabled, the +** <dd> ^This option takes single argument of type int, interpreted as a +** boolean, which enables or disables the collection of memory allocation +** statistics. ^(When memory allocation statistics are disabled, the ** following SQLite interfaces become non-operational: ** <ul> ** <li> [sqlite3_memory_used()] @@ -1672,12 +1672,12 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** N should be set to twice the expected maximum number of threads. ** ^SQLite will never require a scratch buffer that is more than 6 ** times the database page size. ^If SQLite needs needs additional -** scratch memory beyond what is provided by this configuration option, then +** scratch memory beyond what is provided by this configuration option, then ** [sqlite3_malloc()] will be used to obtain the memory needed.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]] <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE</dt> ** <dd> ^This option specifies a static memory buffer that SQLite can use for -** the database page cache with the default page cache implementation. +** the database page cache with the default page cache implementation. ** This configuration should not be used if an application-define page ** cache implementation is loaded using the SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2 option. ** There are three arguments to this option: A pointer to 8-byte aligned @@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** <dd> The SQLITE_CONFIG_LOG option is used to configure the SQLite ** global [error log]. ** (^The SQLITE_CONFIG_LOG option takes two arguments: a pointer to a -** function with a call signature of void(*)(void*,int,const char*), +** function with a call signature of void(*)(void*,int,const char*), ** and a pointer to void. ^If the function pointer is not NULL, it is ** invoked by [sqlite3_log()] to process each logging event. ^If the ** function pointer is NULL, the [sqlite3_log()] interface becomes a no-op. @@ -1860,7 +1860,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { #define SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS 9 /* boolean */ #define SQLITE_CONFIG_MUTEX 10 /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */ #define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMUTEX 11 /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */ -/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */ +/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */ #define SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE 13 /* int int */ #define SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE 14 /* no-op */ #define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETPCACHE 15 /* no-op */ @@ -1888,7 +1888,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** ** <dl> ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE</dt> -** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the +** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the ** [lookaside memory allocator] configuration for the [database connection]. ** ^The first argument (the third parameter to [sqlite3_db_config()] is a ** pointer to a memory buffer to use for lookaside memory. @@ -1906,7 +1906,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mem_methods { ** when the "current value" returned by ** [sqlite3_db_status](D,[SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE],...) is zero. ** Any attempt to change the lookaside memory configuration when lookaside -** memory is in use leaves the configuration unchanged and returns +** memory is in use leaves the configuration unchanged and returns ** [SQLITE_BUSY].)^</dd> ** ** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_ENABLE_FKEY</dt> @@ -1956,18 +1956,18 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extended_result_codes(sqlite3*, int onoff); ** the table has a column of type [INTEGER PRIMARY KEY] then that column ** is another alias for the rowid. ** -** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface returns the [rowid] of the +** ^The sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) interface returns the [rowid] of the ** most recent successful [INSERT] into a rowid table or [virtual table] ** on database connection D. ** ^Inserts into [WITHOUT ROWID] tables are not recorded. ** ^If no successful [INSERT]s into rowid tables -** have ever occurred on the database connection D, +** have ever occurred on the database connection D, ** then sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(D) returns zero. ** ** ^(If an [INSERT] occurs within a trigger or within a [virtual table] ** method, then this routine will return the [rowid] of the inserted ** row as long as the trigger or virtual table method is running. -** But once the trigger or virtual table method ends, the value returned +** But once the trigger or virtual table method ends, the value returned ** by this routine reverts to what it was before the trigger or virtual ** table method began.)^ ** @@ -2018,7 +2018,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_last_insert_rowid(sqlite3*); ** mechanisms do not count as direct row changes.)^ ** ** A "trigger context" is a scope of execution that begins and -** ends with the script of a [CREATE TRIGGER | trigger]. +** ends with the script of a [CREATE TRIGGER | trigger]. ** Most SQL statements are ** evaluated outside of any trigger. This is the "top level" ** trigger context. If a trigger fires from the top level, a @@ -2061,7 +2061,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_changes(sqlite3*); ** the count does not include changes used to implement [REPLACE] constraints, ** do rollbacks or ABORT processing, or [DROP TABLE] processing. The ** count does not include rows of views that fire an [INSTEAD OF trigger], -** though if the INSTEAD OF trigger makes changes of its own, those changes +** though if the INSTEAD OF trigger makes changes of its own, those changes ** are counted.)^ ** ^The sqlite3_total_changes() function counts the changes as soon as ** the statement that makes them is completed (when the statement handle @@ -2101,7 +2101,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_total_changes(sqlite3*); ** ** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running ** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete. ^Any new SQL statements -** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the +** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the ** running statements reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been ** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call. ^New SQL statements ** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are @@ -2136,7 +2136,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_interrupt(sqlite3*); ** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus ** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL. ** -** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior +** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior ** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked ** automatically by sqlite3_complete16(). If that initialization fails, ** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero @@ -2179,7 +2179,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql); ** The presence of a busy handler does not guarantee that it will be invoked ** when there is lock contention. ^If SQLite determines that invoking the busy ** handler could result in a deadlock, it will go ahead and return [SQLITE_BUSY] -** to the application instead of invoking the +** to the application instead of invoking the ** busy handler. ** Consider a scenario where one process is holding a read lock that ** it is trying to promote to a reserved lock and @@ -2204,7 +2204,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_complete16(const void *sql); ** database connection that invoked the busy handler. In other words, ** the busy handler is not reentrant. Any such actions ** result in undefined behavior. -** +** ** A busy handler must not close the database connection ** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler. */ @@ -2579,7 +2579,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P); ** requested is ok. ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the ** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the ** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that -** access is denied. +** access is denied. ** ** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third ** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter @@ -2626,7 +2626,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_randomness(int N, void *P); ** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph. ** ** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the -** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a +** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a ** schema change. Hence, the application should ensure that the ** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()]. ** @@ -2753,8 +2753,8 @@ SQLITE_API SQLITE_EXPERIMENTAL void *sqlite3_profile(sqlite3*, ** database connection D. An example use for this ** interface is to keep a GUI updated during a large query. ** -** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the -** callback function X. ^The parameter N is the approximate number of +** ^The parameter P is passed through as the only parameter to the +** callback function X. ^The parameter N is the approximate number of ** [virtual machine instructions] that are evaluated between successive ** invocations of the callback X. ^If N is less than one then the progress ** handler is disabled. @@ -2780,7 +2780,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Opening A New Database Connection ** -** ^These routines open an SQLite database file as specified by the +** ^These routines open an SQLite database file as specified by the ** filename argument. ^The filename argument is interpreted as UTF-8 for ** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open_v2() and as UTF-16 in the native byte ** order for sqlite3_open16(). ^(A [database connection] handle is usually @@ -2805,7 +2805,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** except that it accepts two additional parameters for additional control ** over the new database connection. ^(The flags parameter to ** sqlite3_open_v2() can take one of -** the following three values, optionally combined with the +** the following three values, optionally combined with the ** [SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE], ** [SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE], and/or [SQLITE_OPEN_URI] flags:)^ ** @@ -2873,17 +2873,17 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** information. ** ** URI filenames are parsed according to RFC 3986. ^If the URI contains an -** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string -** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an -** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if +** authority, then it must be either an empty string or the string +** "localhost". ^If the authority is not an empty string or "localhost", an +** error is returned to the caller. ^The fragment component of a URI, if ** present, is ignored. ** ** ^SQLite uses the path component of the URI as the name of the disk file -** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character, -** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin +** which contains the database. ^If the path begins with a '/' character, +** then it is interpreted as an absolute path. ^If the path does not begin ** with a '/' (meaning that the authority section is omitted from the URI) -** then the path is interpreted as a relative path. -** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path +** then the path is interpreted as a relative path. +** ^(On windows, the first component of an absolute path ** is a drive specification (e.g. "C:").)^ ** ** [[core URI query parameters]] @@ -2903,13 +2903,13 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** ** <li> <b>mode</b>: ^(The mode parameter may be set to either "ro", "rw", ** "rwc", or "memory". Attempting to set it to any other value is -** an error)^. -** ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only -** access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the -** third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to -** "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create) -** access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had -** been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both +** an error)^. +** ^If "ro" is specified, then the database is opened for read-only +** access, just as if the [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY] flag had been set in the +** third argument to sqlite3_open_v2(). ^If the mode option is set to +** "rw", then the database is opened for read-write (but not create) +** access, as if SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE (but not SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE) had +** been set. ^Value "rwc" is equivalent to setting both ** SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE and SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE. ^If the mode option is ** set to "memory" then a pure [in-memory database] that never reads ** or writes from disk is used. ^It is an error to specify a value for @@ -2919,7 +2919,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** <li> <b>cache</b>: ^The cache parameter may be set to either "shared" or ** "private". ^Setting it to "shared" is equivalent to setting the ** SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE bit in the flags argument passed to -** sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is +** sqlite3_open_v2(). ^Setting the cache parameter to "private" is ** equivalent to setting the SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE bit. ** ^If sqlite3_open_v2() is used and the "cache" parameter is present in ** a URI filename, its value overrides any behavior requested by setting @@ -2945,7 +2945,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** property on a database file that does in fact change can result ** in incorrect query results and/or [SQLITE_CORRUPT] errors. ** See also: [SQLITE_IOCAP_IMMUTABLE]. -** +** ** </ul> ** ** ^Specifying an unknown parameter in the query component of a URI is not an @@ -2957,36 +2957,36 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(sqlite3*, int, int(*)(void*), void*); ** ** <table border="1" align=center cellpadding=5> ** <tr><th> URI filenames <th> Results -** <tr><td> file:data.db <td> +** <tr><td> file:data.db <td> ** Open the file "data.db" in the current directory. ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db<br> -** file:///home/fred/data.db <br> -** file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td> +** file:///home/fred/data.db <br> +** file://localhost/home/fred/data.db <br> <td> ** Open the database file "/home/fred/data.db". -** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td> +** <tr><td> file://darkstar/home/fred/data.db <td> ** An error. "darkstar" is not a recognized authority. -** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap"> +** <tr><td style="white-space:nowrap"> ** file:///C:/Documents%20and%20Settings/fred/Desktop/data.db ** <td> Windows only: Open the file "data.db" on fred's desktop on drive -** C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly +** C:. Note that the %20 escaping in this example is not strictly ** necessary - space characters can be used literally ** in URI filenames. -** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td> +** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=ro&cache=private <td> ** Open file "data.db" in the current directory for read-only access. ** Regardless of whether or not shared-cache mode is enabled by ** default, use a private cache. ** <tr><td> file:/home/fred/data.db?vfs=unix-dotfile <td> ** Open file "/home/fred/data.db". Use the special VFS "unix-dotfile" ** that uses dot-files in place of posix advisory locking. -** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td> +** <tr><td> file:data.db?mode=readonly <td> ** An error. "readonly" is not a valid option for the "mode" parameter. ** </table> ** ** ^URI hexadecimal escape sequences (%HH) are supported within the path and ** query components of a URI. A hexadecimal escape sequence consists of a -** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits +** percent sign - "%" - followed by exactly two hexadecimal digits ** specifying an octet value. ^Before the path or query components of a -** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all +** URI filename are interpreted, they are encoded using UTF-8 and all ** hexadecimal escape sequences replaced by a single byte containing the ** corresponding octet. If this process generates an invalid UTF-8 encoding, ** the results are undefined. @@ -3022,15 +3022,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2( ** CAPI3REF: Obtain Values For URI Parameters ** ** These are utility routines, useful to VFS implementations, that check -** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query +** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of that query parameter. ** -** If F is the database filename pointer passed into the xOpen() method of -** a VFS implementation when the flags parameter to xOpen() has one or +** If F is the database filename pointer passed into the xOpen() method of +** a VFS implementation when the flags parameter to xOpen() has one or ** more of the [SQLITE_OPEN_URI] or [SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB] bits set and ** P is the name of the query parameter, then ** sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns the value of the P -** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a +** parameter if it exists or a NULL pointer if P does not appear as a ** query parameter on F. If P is a query parameter of F ** has no explicit value, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns ** a pointer to an empty string. @@ -3039,7 +3039,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2( ** parameter and returns true (1) or false (0) according to the value ** of P. The sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routine returns true (1) if the ** value of query parameter P is one of "yes", "true", or "on" in any -** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number. The +** case or if the value begins with a non-zero number. The ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) routines returns false (0) if the value of ** query parameter P is one of "no", "false", or "off" in any case or ** if the value begins with a numeric zero. If P is not a query @@ -3050,7 +3050,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2( ** 64-bit signed integer and returns that integer, or D if P does not ** exist. If the value of P is something other than an integer, then ** zero is returned. -** +** ** If F is a NULL pointer, then sqlite3_uri_parameter(F,P) returns NULL and ** sqlite3_uri_boolean(F,P,B) returns B. If F is not a NULL pointer and ** is not a database file pathname pointer that SQLite passed into the xOpen @@ -3070,7 +3070,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_uri_int64(const char*, const char*, sqlite3_int ** associated with a [database connection]. If a prior API call failed ** but the most recent API call succeeded, the return value from ** sqlite3_errcode() is undefined. ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode() -** interface is the same except that it always returns the +** interface is the same except that it always returns the ** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are ** disabled. ** @@ -3143,7 +3143,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt; ** new limit for that construct.)^ ** ** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged. -** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a +** ^(For each limit category SQLITE_LIMIT_<i>NAME</i> there is a ** [limits | hard upper bound] ** set at compile-time by a C preprocessor macro called ** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_<i>NAME</i>]. @@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_stmt sqlite3_stmt; ** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are ** silently truncated to the hard upper bound. ** -** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the +** ^Regardless of whether or not the limit was changed, the ** [sqlite3_limit()] interface returns the prior value of the limit. ** ^Hence, to find the current value of a limit without changing it, ** simply invoke this interface with the third parameter set to -1. @@ -3311,12 +3311,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3*, int id, int newVal); ** </li> ** ** <li> -** ^If the specific value bound to [parameter | host parameter] in the +** ^If the specific value bound to [parameter | host parameter] in the ** WHERE clause might influence the choice of query plan for a statement, -** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been +** then the statement will be automatically recompiled, as if there had been ** a schema change, on the first [sqlite3_step()] call following any change -** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter]. -** ^The specific value of WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the +** to the [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of that [parameter]. +** ^The specific value of WHERE-clause [parameter] might influence the ** choice of query plan if the parameter is the left-hand side of a [LIKE] ** or [GLOB] operator or if the parameter is compared to an indexed column ** and the [SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3] compile-time option is enabled. @@ -3369,8 +3369,8 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** the content of the database file. ** ** Note that [application-defined SQL functions] or -** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect. -** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that +** [virtual tables] might change the database indirectly as a side effect. +** ^(For example, if an application defines a function "eval()" that ** calls [sqlite3_exec()], then the following SQL statement would ** change the database file through side-effects: ** @@ -3384,10 +3384,10 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** ^Transaction control statements such as [BEGIN], [COMMIT], [ROLLBACK], ** [SAVEPOINT], and [RELEASE] cause sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true, ** since the statements themselves do not actually modify the database but -** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the +** rather they control the timing of when other statements modify the ** database. ^The [ATTACH] and [DETACH] statements also cause ** sqlite3_stmt_readonly() to return true since, while those statements -** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make +** change the configuration of a database connection, they do not make ** changes to the content of the database files on disk. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_readonly(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); @@ -3396,17 +3396,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_readonly(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** CAPI3REF: Determine If A Prepared Statement Has Been Reset ** ** ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) interface returns true (non-zero) if the -** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using -** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has not run to completion and/or has not +** [prepared statement] S has been stepped at least once using +** [sqlite3_step(S)] but has not run to completion and/or has not ** been reset using [sqlite3_reset(S)]. ^The sqlite3_stmt_busy(S) -** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer. If S is not a +** interface returns false if S is a NULL pointer. If S is not a ** NULL pointer and is not a pointer to a valid [prepared statement] ** object, then the behavior is undefined and probably undesirable. ** ** This interface can be used in combination [sqlite3_next_stmt()] -** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database +** to locate all prepared statements associated with a database ** connection that are in need of being reset. This can be used, -** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared +** for example, in diagnostic routines to search for prepared ** statements that are holding a transaction open. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*); @@ -3431,7 +3431,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_busy(sqlite3_stmt*); ** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected ** sqlite3_value object. If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded ** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0) -** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes +** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD] ** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected ** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably. However, @@ -3517,7 +3517,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_context sqlite3_context; ** or sqlite3_bind_text16() or sqlite3_bind_text64() then ** that parameter must be the byte offset ** where the NUL terminator would occur assuming the string were NUL -** terminated. If any NUL characters occur at byte offsets less than +** terminated. If any NUL characters occur at byte offsets less than ** the value of the fourth parameter then the resulting string value will ** contain embedded NULs. The result of expressions involving strings ** with embedded NULs is undefined. @@ -3836,7 +3836,7 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_decltype16(sqlite3_stmt*,int); ** For all versions of SQLite up to and including 3.6.23.1, a call to ** [sqlite3_reset()] was required after sqlite3_step() returned anything ** other than [SQLITE_ROW] before any subsequent invocation of -** sqlite3_step(). Failure to reset the prepared statement using +** sqlite3_step(). Failure to reset the prepared statement using ** [sqlite3_reset()] would result in an [SQLITE_MISUSE] return from ** sqlite3_step(). But after version 3.6.23.1, sqlite3_step() began ** calling [sqlite3_reset()] automatically in this circumstance rather @@ -3966,7 +3966,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_data_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** the number of bytes in that string. ** ^If the result is NULL, then sqlite3_column_bytes16() returns zero. ** -** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and +** ^The values returned by [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and ** [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] do not include the zero terminators at the end ** of the string. ^For clarity: the values returned by ** [sqlite3_column_bytes()] and [sqlite3_column_bytes16()] are the number of @@ -4159,7 +4159,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** ^The second parameter is the name of the SQL function to be created or ** redefined. ^The length of the name is limited to 255 bytes in a UTF-8 ** representation, exclusive of the zero-terminator. ^Note that the name -** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes. +** length limit is in UTF-8 bytes, not characters nor UTF-16 bytes. ** ^Any attempt to create a function with a longer name ** will result in [SQLITE_MISUSE] being returned. ** @@ -4174,7 +4174,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** ^The fourth parameter, eTextRep, specifies what ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | text encoding] this SQL function prefers for ** its parameters. The application should set this parameter to -** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes +** [SQLITE_UTF16LE] if the function implementation invokes ** [sqlite3_value_text16le()] on an input, or [SQLITE_UTF16BE] if the ** implementation invokes [sqlite3_value_text16be()] on an input, or ** [SQLITE_UTF16] if [sqlite3_value_text16()] is used, or [SQLITE_UTF8] @@ -4205,13 +4205,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** callbacks. ** ** ^(If the ninth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2() is not NULL, -** then it is destructor for the application data pointer. +** then it is destructor for the application data pointer. ** The destructor is invoked when the function is deleted, either by being ** overloaded or when the database connection closes.)^ ** ^The destructor is also invoked if the call to ** sqlite3_create_function_v2() fails. ** ^When the destructor callback of the tenth parameter is invoked, it -** is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application data +** is passed a single argument which is a copy of the application data ** pointer which was the fifth parameter to sqlite3_create_function_v2(). ** ** ^It is permitted to register multiple implementations of the same @@ -4222,7 +4222,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_reset(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt); ** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with ** a negative nArg. ^A function where the preferred text encoding ** matches the database encoding is a better -** match than a function where the encoding is different. +** match than a function where the encoding is different. ** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be ** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is ** between UTF8 and UTF16. @@ -4282,7 +4282,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function_v2( /* ** CAPI3REF: Function Flags ** -** These constants may be ORed together with the +** These constants may be ORed together with the ** [SQLITE_UTF8 | preferred text encoding] as the fourth argument ** to [sqlite3_create_function()], [sqlite3_create_function16()], or ** [sqlite3_create_function_v2()]. @@ -4294,7 +4294,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function_v2( ** DEPRECATED ** ** These functions are [deprecated]. In order to maintain -** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue +** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue ** to be supported. However, new applications should avoid ** the use of these functions. To help encourage people to avoid ** using these functions, we are not going to tell you what they do. @@ -4373,7 +4373,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value*); ** Implementations of aggregate SQL functions use this ** routine to allocate memory for storing their state. ** -** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called +** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called ** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite ** allocates N of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer ** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to @@ -4386,7 +4386,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value*); ** In those cases, sqlite3_aggregate_context() might be called for the ** first time from within xFinal().)^ ** -** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer +** ^The sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine returns a NULL pointer ** when first called if N is less than or equal to zero or if a memory ** allocate error occurs. ** @@ -4395,10 +4395,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value*); ** value of N in subsequent call to sqlite3_aggregate_context() within ** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory ** allocation.)^ Within the xFinal callback, it is customary to set -** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no +** N=0 in calls to sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) so that no ** pointless memory allocations occur. ** -** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by +** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by ** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes. ** ** The first parameter must be a copy of the @@ -4445,7 +4445,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*); ** some circumstances the associated metadata may be preserved. An example ** of where this might be useful is in a regular-expression matching ** function. The compiled version of the regular expression can be stored as -** metadata associated with the pattern string. +** metadata associated with the pattern string. ** Then as long as the pattern string remains the same, ** the compiled regular expression can be reused on multiple ** invocations of the same function. @@ -4469,10 +4469,10 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3_context_db_handle(sqlite3_context*); ** <li> when [sqlite3_reset()] or [sqlite3_finalize()] is called for the ** SQL statement, or ** <li> when sqlite3_set_auxdata() is invoked again on the same parameter, or -** <li> during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory +** <li> during the original sqlite3_set_auxdata() call when a memory ** allocation error occurs. </ul>)^ ** -** Note the last bullet in particular. The destructor X in +** Note the last bullet in particular. The destructor X in ** sqlite3_set_auxdata(C,N,P,X) might be called immediately, before the ** sqlite3_set_auxdata() interface even returns. Hence sqlite3_set_auxdata() ** should be called near the end of the function implementation and the @@ -4680,7 +4680,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_zeroblob(sqlite3_context*, int n); ** deleted. ^When all collating functions having the same name are deleted, ** that collation is no longer usable. ** -** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg +** ^The collating function callback is invoked with a copy of the pArg ** application data pointer and with two strings in the encoding specified ** by the eTextRep argument. The collating function must return an ** integer that is negative, zero, or positive @@ -4710,36 +4710,36 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_zeroblob(sqlite3_context*, int n); ** calls to the collation creation functions or when the ** [database connection] is closed using [sqlite3_close()]. ** -** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the +** ^The xDestroy callback is <u>not</u> called if the ** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() function fails. Applications that invoke -** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should +** sqlite3_create_collation_v2() with a non-NULL xDestroy argument should ** check the return code and dispose of the application data pointer ** themselves rather than expecting SQLite to deal with it for them. -** This is different from every other SQLite interface. The inconsistency -** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards +** This is different from every other SQLite interface. The inconsistency +** is unfortunate but cannot be changed without breaking backwards ** compatibility. ** ** See also: [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()]. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation( - sqlite3*, - const char *zName, - int eTextRep, + sqlite3*, + const char *zName, + int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ); SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2( - sqlite3*, - const char *zName, - int eTextRep, + sqlite3*, + const char *zName, + int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), void(*xDestroy)(void*) ); SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16( - sqlite3*, + sqlite3*, const void *zName, - int eTextRep, + int eTextRep, void *pArg, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ); @@ -4771,12 +4771,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16( ** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()]. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed( - sqlite3*, - void*, + sqlite3*, + void*, void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*) ); SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16( - sqlite3*, + sqlite3*, void*, void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*) ); @@ -4818,7 +4818,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rekey_v2( ); /* -** Specify the activation key for a SEE database. Unless +** Specify the activation key for a SEE database. Unless ** activated, none of the SEE routines will work. */ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_see( @@ -4828,7 +4828,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_see( #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD /* -** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless +** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless ** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work. */ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_cerod( @@ -4884,7 +4884,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_sleep(int); ** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string -** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from +** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory ** using [sqlite3_free]. ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be @@ -4941,7 +4941,7 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory; ** ^The [data_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause ** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore, ** the [data_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string -** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from +** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from ** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory ** using [sqlite3_free]. ** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be @@ -5123,7 +5123,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_rollback_hook(sqlite3*, void(*)(void *), void*); ** interfaces. */ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_update_hook( - sqlite3*, + sqlite3*, void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64), void* ); @@ -5198,7 +5198,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_release_memory(sqlite3*); ** as heap memory usages approaches the limit. ** ^The soft heap limit is "soft" because even though SQLite strives to stay ** below the limit, it will exceed the limit rather than generate -** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error. In other words, the soft heap limit +** an [SQLITE_NOMEM] error. In other words, the soft heap limit ** is advisory only. ** ** ^The return value from sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64() is the size of @@ -5426,7 +5426,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_auto_extension(void (*xEntryPoint)(void)); ** ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] interface unregisters the ** initialization routine X that was registered using a prior call to ** [sqlite3_auto_extension(X)]. ^The [sqlite3_cancel_auto_extension(X)] -** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully +** routine returns 1 if initialization routine X was successfully ** unregistered and it returns 0 if X was not on the list of initialization ** routines. */ @@ -5461,8 +5461,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_module sqlite3_module; ** CAPI3REF: Virtual Table Object ** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module} ** -** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module", -** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables]. +** This structure, sometimes called a "virtual table module", +** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables]. ** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module. ** ** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent @@ -5501,7 +5501,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module { void (**pxFunc)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value**), void **ppArg); int (*xRename)(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNew); - /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those + /* The methods above are in version 1 of the sqlite_module object. Those ** below are for version 2 and greater. */ int (*xSavepoint)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int); int (*xRelease)(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, int); @@ -5558,7 +5558,7 @@ struct sqlite3_module { ** ** ^The estimatedCost value is an estimate of the cost of a particular ** strategy. A cost of N indicates that the cost of the strategy is similar -** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N) +** to a linear scan of an SQLite table with N rows. A cost of log(N) ** indicates that the expense of the operation is similar to that of a ** binary search on a unique indexed field of an SQLite table with N rows. ** @@ -5567,8 +5567,8 @@ struct sqlite3_module { ** ** IMPORTANT: The estimatedRows field was added to the sqlite3_index_info ** structure for SQLite version 3.8.2. If a virtual table extension is -** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting -** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely +** used with an SQLite version earlier than 3.8.2, the results of attempting +** to read or write the estimatedRows field are undefined (but are likely ** to included crashing the application). The estimatedRows field should ** therefore only be used if [sqlite3_libversion_number()] returns a ** value greater than or equal to 3008002. @@ -5625,7 +5625,7 @@ struct sqlite3_index_info { ** preexisting [virtual table] for the module. ** ** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified -** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the +** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the ** second parameter. ^The third parameter is a pointer to ** the implementation of the [virtual table module]. ^The fourth ** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through @@ -5716,7 +5716,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3*, const char *zSQL); ** CAPI3REF: Overload A Function For A Virtual Table ** ** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions -** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module]. +** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module]. ** But global versions of those functions ** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^ ** @@ -5767,8 +5767,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_blob sqlite3_blob; ** ** ^If the flags parameter is non-zero, then the BLOB is opened for read ** and write access. ^If it is zero, the BLOB is opened for read access. -** ^It is not possible to open a column that is part of an index or primary -** key for writing. ^If [foreign key constraints] are enabled, it is +** ^It is not possible to open a column that is part of an index or primary +** key for writing. ^If [foreign key constraints] are enabled, it is ** not possible to open a column that is part of a [child key] for writing. ** ** ^Note that the database name is not the filename that contains @@ -5874,7 +5874,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *); /* ** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB ** -** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the +** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the ** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument. ^The ** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing ** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob. @@ -6245,7 +6245,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex*); /* ** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection ** -** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that +** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that ** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument ** when the [threading mode] is Serialized. ** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this @@ -6394,7 +6394,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status(int op, int *pCurrent, int *pHighwater, int resetF ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their ** internal equivalents). Only the value returned in the -** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. +** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_COUNT</dt> @@ -6403,11 +6403,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status(int op, int *pCurrent, int *pHighwater, int resetF ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the -** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using +** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using ** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]. The ** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^ ** -** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]] +** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW]] ** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_OVERFLOW</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of bytes of page cache ** allocation which could not be satisfied by the [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE] @@ -6420,7 +6420,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status(int op, int *pCurrent, int *pHighwater, int resetF ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to [pagecache memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the -** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. +** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt> @@ -6444,7 +6444,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status(int op, int *pCurrent, int *pHighwater, int resetF ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE</dt> ** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request ** handed to [scratch memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the -** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. +** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest. ** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt> @@ -6468,12 +6468,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_status(int op, int *pCurrent, int *pHighwater, int resetF /* ** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status ** -** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information +** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information ** about a single [database connection]. ^The first argument is the ** database connection object to be interrogated. ^The second argument ** is an integer constant, taken from the set of ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options], that -** determines the parameter to interrogate. The set of +** determines the parameter to interrogate. The set of ** [SQLITE_DBSTATUS options] is likely ** to grow in future releases of SQLite. ** @@ -6508,7 +6508,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r ** checked out.</dd>)^ ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_LOOKASIDE_HIT</dt> -** <dd>This parameter returns the number malloc attempts that were +** <dd>This parameter returns the number malloc attempts that were ** satisfied using lookaside memory. Only the high-water value is meaningful; ** the current value is always zero.)^ ** @@ -6536,7 +6536,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_SCHEMA_USED</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the approximate number of bytes of heap ** memory used to store the schema for all databases associated -** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^ +** with the connection - main, temp, and any [ATTACH]-ed databases.)^ ** ^The full amount of memory used by the schemas is reported, even if the ** schema memory is shared with other database connections due to ** [shared cache mode] being enabled. @@ -6551,13 +6551,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache hits that have -** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT +** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT ** is always 0. ** </dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS]] ^(<dt>SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS</dt> ** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pager cache misses that have -** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS +** occurred.)^ ^The highwater mark associated with SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS ** is always 0. ** </dd> ** @@ -6603,7 +6603,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(sqlite3*, int op, int *pCur, int *pHiwtr, int r ** statements. For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds ** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate ** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than -** an index. +** an index. ** ** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from ** a [prepared statement]. The first argument is the prepared statement @@ -6630,7 +6630,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg); ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in ** a table as part of a full table scan. Large numbers for this counter -** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through +** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through ** careful use of indices.</dd> ** ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt> @@ -6648,7 +6648,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_stmt_status(sqlite3_stmt*, int op,int resetFlg); ** [[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP]] <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP</dt> ** <dd>^This is the number of virtual machine operations executed ** by the prepared statement if that number is less than or equal -** to 2147483647. The number of virtual machine operations can be +** to 2147483647. The number of virtual machine operations can be ** used as a proxy for the total work done by the prepared statement. ** If the number of virtual machine operations exceeds 2147483647 ** then the value returned by this statement status code is undefined. @@ -6694,15 +6694,15 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** KEYWORDS: {page cache} ** ** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE2], ...) interface can -** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an +** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an ** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2 structure.)^ -** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by +** In many applications, most of the heap memory allocated by ** SQLite is used for the page cache. -** By implementing a +** By implementing a ** custom page cache using this API, an application can better control -** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which -** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to -** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for +** the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which +** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to +** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for ** how long. ** ** The alternative page cache mechanism is an @@ -6715,19 +6715,19 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** [sqlite3_config()] returns.)^ ** ** [[the xInit() page cache method]] -** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective +** ^(The xInit() method is called once for each effective ** call to [sqlite3_initialize()])^ ** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit() ** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods2.pArg value.)^ -** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures -** required by the custom page cache implementation. -** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the +** The intent of the xInit() method is to set up global data structures +** required by the custom page cache implementation. +** ^(If the xInit() method is NULL, then the ** built-in default page cache is used instead of the application defined ** page cache.)^ ** ** [[the xShutdown() page cache method]] ** ^The xShutdown() method is called by [sqlite3_shutdown()]. -** It can be used to clean up +** It can be used to clean up ** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required. ** ^The xShutdown() method may be NULL. ** @@ -6746,7 +6746,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** though this is not guaranteed. ^The ** first parameter, szPage, is the size in bytes of the pages that must ** be allocated by the cache. ^szPage will always a power of two. ^The -** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage +** second parameter szExtra is a number of bytes of extra storage ** associated with each page cache entry. ^The szExtra parameter will ** a number less than 250. SQLite will use the ** extra szExtra bytes on each page to store metadata about the underlying @@ -6759,7 +6759,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** it is purely advisory. ^On a cache where bPurgeable is false, SQLite will ** never invoke xUnpin() except to deliberately delete a page. ** ^In other words, calls to xUnpin() on a cache with bPurgeable set to -** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true. +** false will always have the "discard" flag set to true. ** ^Hence, a cache created with bPurgeable false will ** never contain any unpinned pages. ** @@ -6774,12 +6774,12 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** [[the xPagecount() page cache methods]] ** The xPagecount() method must return the number of pages currently ** stored in the cache, both pinned and unpinned. -** +** ** [[the xFetch() page cache methods]] -** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to +** The xFetch() method locates a page in the cache and returns a pointer to ** an sqlite3_pcache_page object associated with that page, or a NULL pointer. ** The pBuf element of the returned sqlite3_pcache_page object will be a -** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a +** pointer to a buffer of szPage bytes used to store the content of a ** single database page. The pExtra element of sqlite3_pcache_page will be ** a pointer to the szExtra bytes of extra storage that SQLite has requested ** for each entry in the page cache. @@ -6818,8 +6818,8 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_page { ** page cache implementation. ^The page cache implementation ** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time. ** -** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single -** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls +** The cache must not perform any reference counting. A single +** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls ** to xFetch(). ** ** [[the xRekey() page cache methods]] @@ -6859,7 +6859,7 @@ struct sqlite3_pcache_methods2 { int (*xPagecount)(sqlite3_pcache*); sqlite3_pcache_page *(*xFetch)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned key, int createFlag); void (*xUnpin)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, int discard); - void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, + void (*xRekey)(sqlite3_pcache*, sqlite3_pcache_page*, unsigned oldKey, unsigned newKey); void (*xTruncate)(sqlite3_pcache*, unsigned iLimit); void (*xDestroy)(sqlite3_pcache*); @@ -6904,7 +6904,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** ** The backup API copies the content of one database into another. ** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or -** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files. +** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files. ** ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API] ** @@ -6915,28 +6915,28 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** ^Thus, the backup may be performed on a live source database without ** preventing other database connections from ** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway. -** -** ^(To perform a backup operation: +** +** ^(To perform a backup operation: ** <ol> ** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the -** backup, -** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer +** backup, +** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer ** the data between the two databases, and finally -** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources -** associated with the backup operation. +** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources +** associated with the backup operation. ** </ol>)^ ** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each ** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init(). ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_init()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> ** -** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the -** [database connection] associated with the destination database +** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the +** [database connection] associated with the destination database ** and the database name, respectively. ** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the ** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in ** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database. -** ^The S and M arguments passed to +** ^The S and M arguments passed to ** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection] ** and database name of the source database, respectively. ** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D) @@ -6952,14 +6952,14 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an ** [sqlite3_backup] object. ** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and -** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup +** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup ** operation. ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_step()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> ** -** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between +** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between ** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B. -** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied. +** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there ** are still more pages to be copied, then the function returns [SQLITE_OK]. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages @@ -6981,8 +6981,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then ** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function] -** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the -** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then +** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the +** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then ** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to ** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source ** [database connection] @@ -6990,15 +6990,15 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this ** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If ** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or -** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then -** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These -** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept -** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle +** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then +** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These +** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept +** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle ** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources. ** ** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock -** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either -** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete +** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either +** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete ** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE]. ^Every call to ** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that ** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call. @@ -7007,18 +7007,18 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** through the backup process. ^If the source database is modified by an ** external process or via a database connection other than the one being ** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically -** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source +** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source ** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used ** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically ** updated at the same time. ** ** [[sqlite3_backup_finish()]] <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> ** -** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the +** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the ** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application ** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish(). ** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all -** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object. +** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object. ** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any ** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back. ** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid @@ -7058,8 +7058,8 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently ** from within other threads. ** -** However, the application must guarantee that the destination -** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after +** However, the application must guarantee that the destination +** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after ** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to ** sqlite3_backup_finish(). SQLite does not currently check to see ** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection] @@ -7070,11 +7070,11 @@ typedef struct sqlite3_backup sqlite3_backup; ** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must ** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database ** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means -** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being +** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being ** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process, ** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init(). ** -** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple +** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple ** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step(). ** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount() ** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the @@ -7098,8 +7098,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with ** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or ** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See -** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking. -** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke +** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking. +** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke ** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it. ** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the ** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined. @@ -7107,14 +7107,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature]. ** ** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes -** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back. +** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back. ** ** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a ** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the ** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that -** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an +** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an ** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the -** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as +** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as ** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked ** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The ** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close] @@ -7128,15 +7128,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** ** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a ** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds -** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of +** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of ** the other connections to use as the blocking connection. ** -** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a +** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a ** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the ** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback, ** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is ** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing -** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections +** unlock-notify callback is canceled. ^The blocked connections ** unlock-notify callback may also be canceled by closing the blocked ** connection using [sqlite3_close()]. ** @@ -7149,7 +7149,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** ** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b> ** -** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a +** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a ** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked. ** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass ** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to @@ -7162,12 +7162,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function ** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers ** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array. -** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions +** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions ** related to the set of unblocked database connections. ** ** <b>Deadlock Detection</b> ** -** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a +** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a ** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further ** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the ** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for @@ -7190,7 +7190,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** ** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b> ** -** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost +** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost ** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however, ** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement, ** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements @@ -7203,7 +7203,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p); ** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned ** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the ** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in -** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just +** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just ** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^ */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify( @@ -7268,10 +7268,10 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...); ** ^The [sqlite3_wal_hook()] function is used to register a callback that ** will be invoked each time a database connection commits data to a ** [write-ahead log] (i.e. whenever a transaction is committed in -** [journal_mode | journal_mode=WAL mode]). +** [journal_mode | journal_mode=WAL mode]). ** -** ^The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and -** the associated write-lock on the database released, so the implementation +** ^The callback is invoked by SQLite after the commit has taken place and +** the associated write-lock on the database released, so the implementation ** may read, write or [checkpoint] the database as required. ** ** ^The first parameter passed to the callback function when it is invoked @@ -7290,7 +7290,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...); ** that does not correspond to any valid SQLite error code, the results ** are undefined. ** -** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback +** A single database handle may have at most a single write-ahead log callback ** registered at one time. ^Calling [sqlite3_wal_hook()] replaces any ** previously registered write-ahead log callback. ^Note that the ** [sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint()] interface and the @@ -7298,7 +7298,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_log(int iErrCode, const char *zFormat, ...); ** those overwrite any prior [sqlite3_wal_hook()] settings. */ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wal_hook( - sqlite3*, + sqlite3*, int(*)(void *,sqlite3*,const char*,int), void* ); @@ -7310,7 +7310,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wal_hook( ** [sqlite3_wal_hook()] that causes any database on [database connection] D ** to automatically [checkpoint] ** after committing a transaction if there are N or -** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file. ^Passing zero or +** more frames in the [write-ahead log] file. ^Passing zero or ** a negative value as the nFrame parameter disables automatic ** checkpoints entirely. ** @@ -7358,15 +7358,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb); /* ** CAPI3REF: Checkpoint a database ** -** Run a checkpoint operation on WAL database zDb attached to database -** handle db. The specific operation is determined by the value of the +** Run a checkpoint operation on WAL database zDb attached to database +** handle db. The specific operation is determined by the value of the ** eMode parameter: ** ** <dl> ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE<dd> -** Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database +** Checkpoint as many frames as possible without waiting for any database ** readers or writers to finish. Sync the db file if all frames in the log -** are checkpointed. This mode is the same as calling +** are checkpointed. This mode is the same as calling ** sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(). The [sqlite3_busy_handler|busy-handler callback] ** is never invoked. ** @@ -7379,11 +7379,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb); ** but not database readers. ** ** <dt>SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART<dd> -** This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, except after -** checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the +** This mode works the same way as SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL, except after +** checkpointing the log file it blocks (calls the ** [sqlite3_busy_handler|busy-handler callback]) -** until all readers are reading from the database file only. This ensures -** that the next client to write to the database file restarts the log file +** until all readers are reading from the database file only. This ensures +** that the next client to write to the database file restarts the log file ** from the beginning. This call blocks database writers while it is running, ** but not database readers. ** </dl> @@ -7397,30 +7397,30 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb); ** before returning to communicate this to the caller. ** ** All calls obtain an exclusive "checkpoint" lock on the database file. If -** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the -** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. Even if there is a +** any other process is running a checkpoint operation at the same time, the +** lock cannot be obtained and SQLITE_BUSY is returned. Even if there is a ** busy-handler configured, it will not be invoked in this case. ** -** The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL and RESTART modes also obtain the exclusive +** The SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_FULL and RESTART modes also obtain the exclusive ** "writer" lock on the database file. If the writer lock cannot be obtained ** immediately, and a busy-handler is configured, it is invoked and the writer ** lock retried until either the busy-handler returns 0 or the lock is ** successfully obtained. The busy-handler is also invoked while waiting for ** database readers as described above. If the busy-handler returns 0 before ** the writer lock is obtained or while waiting for database readers, the -** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as -** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible +** checkpoint operation proceeds from that point in the same way as +** SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE - checkpointing as many frames as possible ** without blocking any further. SQLITE_BUSY is returned in this case. ** ** If parameter zDb is NULL or points to a zero length string, then the ** specified operation is attempted on all WAL databases. In this case the -** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. If -** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the -** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining -** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned to the caller. If any other -** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned -** and the error code returned to the caller immediately. If no error -** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached +** values written to output parameters *pnLog and *pnCkpt are undefined. If +** an SQLITE_BUSY error is encountered when processing one or more of the +** attached WAL databases, the operation is still attempted on any remaining +** attached databases and SQLITE_BUSY is returned to the caller. If any other +** error occurs while processing an attached database, processing is abandoned +** and the error code returned to the caller immediately. If no error +** (SQLITE_BUSY or otherwise) is encountered while processing the attached ** databases, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If database zDb is the name of an attached database that is not in WAL @@ -7486,20 +7486,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_config(sqlite3*, int op, ...); ** If X is non-zero, then the virtual table implementation guarantees ** that if [xUpdate] returns [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], it will do so before ** any modifications to internal or persistent data structures have been made. -** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite +** If the [ON CONFLICT] mode is ABORT, FAIL, IGNORE or ROLLBACK, SQLite ** is able to roll back a statement or database transaction, and abandon -** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate. +** or continue processing the current SQL statement as appropriate. ** If the ON CONFLICT mode is REPLACE and the [xUpdate] method returns ** [SQLITE_CONSTRAINT], SQLite handles this as if the ON CONFLICT mode ** had been ABORT. ** ** Virtual table implementations that are required to handle OR REPLACE -** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the -** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON -** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should +** must do so within the [xUpdate] method. If a call to the +** [sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict()] function indicates that the current ON +** CONFLICT policy is REPLACE, the virtual table implementation should ** silently replace the appropriate rows within the xUpdate callback and ** return SQLITE_OK. Or, if this is not possible, it may return -** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT +** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, in which case SQLite falls back to OR ABORT ** constraint handling. ** </dl> */ @@ -7610,7 +7610,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_geometry { }; /* -** Register a 2nd-generation geometry callback named zScore that can be +** Register a 2nd-generation geometry callback named zScore that can be ** used as part of an R-Tree geometry query as follows: ** ** SELECT ... FROM <rtree> WHERE <rtree col> MATCH $zQueryFunc(... params ...) @@ -7625,7 +7625,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_query_callback( /* -** A pointer to a structure of the following type is passed as the +** A pointer to a structure of the following type is passed as the ** argument to scored geometry callback registered using ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback(). ** @@ -7690,7 +7690,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* -** +** ** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process. */ @@ -7738,9 +7738,9 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { #endif /* -** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to -** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might -** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an +** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to +** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might +** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an ** expression. ** ** A value of 0 used to mean that the limit was not enforced. @@ -7819,10 +7819,10 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at ** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates -** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library -** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database -** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite -** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback +** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library +** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database +** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite +** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback ** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption. */ #ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE @@ -7881,7 +7881,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { ** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers. ** ** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself -** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all +** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all ** may be executed. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH @@ -7916,7 +7916,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { ** to the next, so we have developed the following set of #if statements ** to generate appropriate macros for a wide range of compilers. ** -** The correct "ANSI" way to do this is to use the intptr_t type. +** The correct "ANSI" way to do this is to use the intptr_t type. ** Unfortunately, that typedef is not available on all compilers, or ** if it is available, it requires an #include of specific headers ** that vary from one machine to the next. @@ -7981,7 +7981,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { /* ** The SQLITE_DEFAULT_MEMSTATUS macro must be defined as either 0 or 1. -** It determines whether or not the features related to +** It determines whether or not the features related to ** SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS are available by default or not. This value can ** be overridden at runtime using the sqlite3_config() API. */ @@ -8051,7 +8051,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { ** is set. Thus NDEBUG becomes an opt-in rather than an opt-out ** feature. */ -#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) +#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) # define NDEBUG 1 #endif #if defined(NDEBUG) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) @@ -8066,7 +8066,7 @@ struct sqlite3_rtree_query_info { #endif /* -** The testcase() macro is used to aid in coverage testing. When +** The testcase() macro is used to aid in coverage testing. When ** doing coverage testing, the condition inside the argument to ** testcase() must be evaluated both true and false in order to ** get full branch coverage. The testcase() macro is inserted @@ -8112,7 +8112,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Coverage(int); #endif /* -** The ALWAYS and NEVER macros surround boolean expressions which +** The ALWAYS and NEVER macros surround boolean expressions which ** are intended to always be true or false, respectively. Such ** expressions could be omitted from the code completely. But they ** are included in a few cases in order to enhance the resilience @@ -8193,7 +8193,7 @@ typedef struct HashElem HashElem; ** element pointed to plus the next _ht.count-1 elements in the list. ** ** Hash.htsize and Hash.ht may be zero. In that case lookup is done -** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the +** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the ** Hash.ht table is never allocated because if there are few elements ** in the table, it is faster to do a linear search than to manage ** the hash table. @@ -8208,7 +8208,7 @@ struct Hash { } *ht; }; -/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following +/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following ** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list. ** ** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really @@ -8447,7 +8447,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3HashClear(Hash*); /* ** OMIT_TEMPDB is set to 1 if SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB is defined, or 0 -** afterward. Having this macro allows us to cause the C compiler +** afterward. Having this macro allows us to cause the C compiler ** to omit code used by TEMP tables without messy #ifndef statements. */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB @@ -8486,7 +8486,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3HashClear(Hash*); /* ** If no value has been provided for SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS, or if -** SQLITE_TEMP_STORE is set to 3 (never use temporary files), set it +** SQLITE_TEMP_STORE is set to 3 (never use temporary files), set it ** to zero. */ #if SQLITE_TEMP_STORE==3 || SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0 @@ -8625,7 +8625,7 @@ typedef INT8_TYPE i8; /* 1-byte signed integer */ ** 4 -> 20 1000 -> 99 1048576 -> 200 ** 10 -> 33 1024 -> 100 4294967296 -> 320 ** -** The LogEst can be negative to indicate fractional values. +** The LogEst can be negative to indicate fractional values. ** Examples: ** ** 0.5 -> -10 0.1 -> -33 0.0625 -> -40 @@ -8677,7 +8677,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const int sqlite3one; #define LARGEST_INT64 (0xffffffff|(((i64)0x7fffffff)<<32)) #define SMALLEST_INT64 (((i64)-1) - LARGEST_INT64) -/* +/* ** Round up a number to the next larger multiple of 8. This is used ** to force 8-byte alignment on 64-bit architectures. */ @@ -8773,7 +8773,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const int sqlite3one; /* ** An instance of the following structure is used to store the busy-handler -** callback for a given sqlite handle. +** callback for a given sqlite handle. ** ** The sqlite.busyHandler member of the sqlite struct contains the busy ** callback for the database handle. Each pager opened via the sqlite @@ -8818,9 +8818,9 @@ struct BusyHandler { /* ** The following value as a destructor means to use sqlite3DbFree(). -** The sqlite3DbFree() routine requires two parameters instead of the -** one parameter that destructors normally want. So we have to introduce -** this magic value that the code knows to handle differently. Any +** The sqlite3DbFree() routine requires two parameters instead of the +** one parameter that destructors normally want. So we have to introduce +** this magic value that the code knows to handle differently. Any ** pointer will work here as long as it is distinct from SQLITE_STATIC ** and SQLITE_TRANSIENT. */ @@ -8847,16 +8847,16 @@ struct BusyHandler { SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wsd_init(int N, int J); SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wsd_find(void *K, int L); #else - #define SQLITE_WSD + #define SQLITE_WSD #define GLOBAL(t,v) v #define sqlite3GlobalConfig sqlite3Config #endif /* ** The following macros are used to suppress compiler warnings and to -** make it clear to human readers when a function parameter is deliberately +** make it clear to human readers when a function parameter is deliberately ** left unused within the body of a function. This usually happens when -** a function is called via a function pointer. For example the +** a function is called via a function pointer. For example the ** implementation of an SQL aggregate step callback may not use the ** parameter indicating the number of arguments passed to the aggregate, ** if it knows that this is enforced elsewhere. @@ -8922,7 +8922,7 @@ typedef struct WhereInfo WhereInfo; typedef struct With With; /* -** Defer sourcing vdbe.h and btree.h until after the "u8" and +** Defer sourcing vdbe.h and btree.h until after the "u8" and ** "BusyHandler" typedefs. vdbe.h also requires a few of the opaque ** pointer types (i.e. FuncDef) defined above. */ @@ -9055,7 +9055,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p); /* ** The second parameter to sqlite3BtreeGetMeta or sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta -** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned +** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned ** to constants so that the offset of the corresponding field in an ** SQLite database header may be found using the following formula: ** @@ -9153,7 +9153,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCheckpoint(Btree*, int, int *, int *); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnter(Btree*); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(sqlite3*); #else -# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X) +# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X) # define sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(X) #endif @@ -9318,7 +9318,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList; #define P5_ConstraintFK 4 /* -** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the +** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the ** number of columns of data returned by the statement. */ #define COLNAME_NAME 0 @@ -9338,7 +9338,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList; /* ** The following macro converts a relative address in the p2 field -** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that +** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that ** sqlite3VdbeAddOpList() knows that the address is relative. Calling ** the macro again restores the address. */ @@ -9694,8 +9694,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetLineNumber(Vdbe*,int); #define _PAGER_H_ /* -** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative -** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the +** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative +** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the ** sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit() API. See also "PRAGMA journal_size_limit". */ #ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_JOURNAL_SIZE_LIMIT @@ -9721,9 +9721,9 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage; /* ** Page number PAGER_MJ_PGNO is never used in an SQLite database (it is ** reserved for working around a windows/posix incompatibility). It is -** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file +** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file ** is devoted to storing a master journal name - there are no more pages to -** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c +** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c ** for details. */ #define PAGER_MJ_PGNO(x) ((Pgno)((PENDING_BYTE/((x)->pageSize))+1)) @@ -9744,7 +9744,7 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage; #define PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE 1 /* -** Numeric constants that encode the journalmode. +** Numeric constants that encode the journalmode. */ #define PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY (-1) /* Query the value of journalmode */ #define PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE 0 /* Commit by deleting journal file */ @@ -9774,11 +9774,11 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage; /* ** The remainder of this file contains the declarations of the functions -** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for +** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for ** a detailed description of each routine. */ -/* Open and close a Pager connection. */ +/* Open and close a Pager connection. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( sqlite3_vfs*, Pager **ppPager, @@ -9806,7 +9806,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOkToChangeJournalMode(Pager*); SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit(Pager *, i64); SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_backup **sqlite3PagerBackupPtr(Pager*); -/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */ +/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno, DbPage **ppPage, int clrFlag); #define sqlite3PagerGet(A,B,C) sqlite3PagerAcquire(A,B,C,0) SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno); @@ -9819,8 +9819,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWrite(DbPage*); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(DbPage*); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager*,DbPage*,Pgno,int); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(DbPage*); -SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *); -SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *); +SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *); +SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *); /* Functions used to manage pager transactions and savepoints. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager*, int*); @@ -9901,7 +9901,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRefdump(Pager*); ** ************************************************************************* ** This header file defines the interface that the sqlite page cache -** subsystem. +** subsystem. */ #ifndef _PCACHE_H_ @@ -9977,7 +9977,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSetPageSize(PCache *, int); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void); /* One release per successful fetch. Page is pinned until released. -** Reference counted. +** Reference counted. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch(PCache*, Pgno, int createFlag); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(PCache*, Pgno, sqlite3_pcache_page**); @@ -10020,7 +10020,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache*); #if defined(SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) /* Iterate through all dirty pages currently stored in the cache. This -** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the +** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the ** library is built. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHdr *)); @@ -10173,10 +10173,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void); ** 2006-10-31: The default prefix used to be "sqlite_". But then ** Mcafee started using SQLite in their anti-virus product and it ** started putting files with the "sqlite" name in the c:/temp folder. -** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a +** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a ** Google search for "sqlite", find the telephone numbers of the ** developers and call to wake them up at night and complain. -** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite" +** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite" ** spelled backwards. So the temp files are still identified, but ** anybody smart enough to figure out the code is also likely smart ** enough to know that calling the developer will not help get rid @@ -10217,9 +10217,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void); ** UnlockFile(). ** ** LockFile() prevents not just writing but also reading by other processes. -** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen -** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at -** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the +** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen +** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at +** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the ** same time, unless they are unlucky and choose the same lock byte. ** An EXCLUSIVE_LOCK is obtained by locking all bytes in the range. ** There can only be one writer. A RESERVED_LOCK is obtained by locking @@ -10238,7 +10238,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void); ** The following #defines specify the range of bytes used for locking. ** SHARED_SIZE is the number of bytes available in the pool from which ** a random byte is selected for a shared lock. The pool of bytes for -** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST. +** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST. ** ** The same locking strategy and ** byte ranges are used for Unix. This leaves open the possibility of having @@ -10254,7 +10254,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void); ** that all locks will fit on a single page even at the minimum page size. ** PENDING_BYTE defines the beginning of the locks. By default PENDING_BYTE ** is set high so that we don't have to allocate an unused page except -** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic +** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic ** by setting PENDING_BYTE low and running the entire regression suite. ** ** Changing the value of PENDING_BYTE results in a subtly incompatible @@ -10278,8 +10278,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void); */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsInit(void); -/* -** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods +/* +** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsClose(sqlite3_file*); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsRead(sqlite3_file*, void*, int amt, i64 offset); @@ -10303,8 +10303,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFetch(sqlite3_file *id, i64, int, void **); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsUnfetch(sqlite3_file *, i64, void *); -/* -** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods +/* +** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file*, int, int *); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, int); @@ -10321,7 +10321,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsSleep(sqlite3_vfs *, int); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *, sqlite3_int64*); /* -** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using +** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using ** sqlite3_malloc() to obtain space for the file-handle structure. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file **, int,int*); @@ -10391,9 +10391,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCloseFree(sqlite3_file *); */ #define sqlite3_mutex_alloc(X) ((sqlite3_mutex*)8) #define sqlite3_mutex_free(X) -#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X) +#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X) #define sqlite3_mutex_try(X) SQLITE_OK -#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X) +#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X) #define sqlite3_mutex_held(X) ((void)(X),1) #define sqlite3_mutex_notheld(X) ((void)(X),1) #define sqlite3MutexAlloc(X) ((sqlite3_mutex*)8) @@ -10429,7 +10429,7 @@ struct Db { ** the Schema for the TEMP databaes (sqlite3.aDb[1]) which is free-standing. ** In shared cache mode, a single Schema object can be shared by multiple ** Btrees that refer to the same underlying BtShared object. -** +** ** Schema objects are automatically deallocated when the last Btree that ** references them is destroyed. The TEMP Schema is manually freed by ** sqlite3_close(). @@ -10454,7 +10454,7 @@ struct Schema { }; /* -** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the +** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the ** Db.pSchema->flags field. */ #define DbHasProperty(D,I,P) (((D)->aDb[I].pSchema->schemaFlags&(P))==(P)) @@ -10613,9 +10613,9 @@ struct sqlite3 { void *pTraceArg; /* Argument to the trace function */ void (*xProfile)(void*,const char*,u64); /* Profiling function */ void *pProfileArg; /* Argument to profile function */ - void *pCommitArg; /* Argument to xCommitCallback() */ + void *pCommitArg; /* Argument to xCommitCallback() */ int (*xCommitCallback)(void*); /* Invoked at every commit. */ - void *pRollbackArg; /* Argument to xRollbackCallback() */ + void *pRollbackArg; /* Argument to xRollbackCallback() */ void (*xRollbackCallback)(void*); /* Invoked at every commit. */ void *pUpdateArg; void (*xUpdateCallback)(void*,int, const char*,const char*,sqlite_int64); @@ -10660,8 +10660,8 @@ struct sqlite3 { i64 nDeferredImmCons; /* Net deferred immediate constraints */ int *pnBytesFreed; /* If not NULL, increment this in DbFree() */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY - /* The following variables are all protected by the STATIC_MASTER - ** mutex, not by sqlite3.mutex. They are used by code in notify.c. + /* The following variables are all protected by the STATIC_MASTER + ** mutex, not by sqlite3.mutex. They are used by code in notify.c. ** ** When X.pUnlockConnection==Y, that means that X is waiting for Y to ** unlock so that it can proceed. @@ -10792,7 +10792,7 @@ struct FuncDef { ** This structure encapsulates a user-function destructor callback (as ** configured using create_function_v2()) and a reference counter. When ** create_function_v2() is called to create a function with a destructor, -** a single object of this type is allocated. FuncDestructor.nRef is set to +** a single object of this type is allocated. FuncDestructor.nRef is set to ** the number of FuncDef objects created (either 1 or 3, depending on whether ** or not the specified encoding is SQLITE_ANY). The FuncDef.pDestructor ** member of each of the new FuncDef objects is set to point to the allocated @@ -10831,10 +10831,10 @@ struct FuncDestructor { ** used to create the initializers for the FuncDef structures. ** ** FUNCTION(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc) -** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName +** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName ** implemented by C function xFunc that accepts nArg arguments. The ** value passed as iArg is cast to a (void*) and made available -** as the user-data (sqlite3_user_data()) for the function. If +** as the user-data (sqlite3_user_data()) for the function. If ** argument bNC is true, then the SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL flag is set. ** ** VFUNCTION(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc) @@ -10847,8 +10847,8 @@ struct FuncDestructor { ** FUNCTION(). ** ** LIKEFUNC(zName, nArg, pArg, flags) -** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName -** that accepts nArg arguments and is implemented by a call to C +** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName +** that accepts nArg arguments and is implemented by a call to C ** function likeFunc. Argument pArg is cast to a (void *) and made ** available as the function user-data (sqlite3_user_data()). The ** FuncDef.flags variable is set to the value passed as the flags @@ -10959,7 +10959,7 @@ struct CollSeq { ** ** These used to have mnemonic name like 'i' for SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER and ** 't' for SQLITE_AFF_TEXT. But we can save a little space and improve -** the speed a little by numbering the values consecutively. +** the speed a little by numbering the values consecutively. ** ** But rather than start with 0 or 1, we begin with 'A'. That way, ** when multiple affinity types are concatenated into a string and @@ -10978,7 +10978,7 @@ struct CollSeq { /* ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK values masks off the significant bits of an -** affinity value. +** affinity value. */ #define SQLITE_AFF_MASK 0x47 @@ -10998,20 +10998,20 @@ struct CollSeq { /* ** An object of this type is created for each virtual table present in -** the database schema. +** the database schema. ** ** If the database schema is shared, then there is one instance of this ** structure for each database connection (sqlite3*) that uses the shared ** schema. This is because each database connection requires its own unique -** instance of the sqlite3_vtab* handle used to access the virtual table -** implementation. sqlite3_vtab* handles can not be shared between -** database connections, even when the rest of the in-memory database +** instance of the sqlite3_vtab* handle used to access the virtual table +** implementation. sqlite3_vtab* handles can not be shared between +** database connections, even when the rest of the in-memory database ** schema is shared, as the implementation often stores the database ** connection handle passed to it via the xConnect() or xCreate() method ** during initialization internally. This database connection handle may -** then be used by the virtual table implementation to access real tables -** within the database. So that they appear as part of the callers -** transaction, these accesses need to be made via the same database +** then be used by the virtual table implementation to access real tables +** within the database. So that they appear as part of the callers +** transaction, these accesses need to be made via the same database ** connection as that used to execute SQL operations on the virtual table. ** ** All VTable objects that correspond to a single table in a shared @@ -11023,19 +11023,19 @@ struct CollSeq { ** sqlite3_vtab* handle in the compiled query. ** ** When an in-memory Table object is deleted (for example when the -** schema is being reloaded for some reason), the VTable objects are not -** deleted and the sqlite3_vtab* handles are not xDisconnect()ed +** schema is being reloaded for some reason), the VTable objects are not +** deleted and the sqlite3_vtab* handles are not xDisconnect()ed ** immediately. Instead, they are moved from the Table.pVTable list to ** another linked list headed by the sqlite3.pDisconnect member of the -** corresponding sqlite3 structure. They are then deleted/xDisconnected +** corresponding sqlite3 structure. They are then deleted/xDisconnected ** next time a statement is prepared using said sqlite3*. This is done ** to avoid deadlock issues involving multiple sqlite3.mutex mutexes. ** Refer to comments above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an ** explanation as to why it is safe to add an entry to an sqlite3.pDisconnect ** list without holding the corresponding sqlite3.mutex mutex. ** -** The memory for objects of this type is always allocated by -** sqlite3DbMalloc(), using the connection handle stored in VTable.db as +** The memory for objects of this type is always allocated by +** sqlite3DbMalloc(), using the connection handle stored in VTable.db as ** the first argument. */ struct VTable { @@ -11072,10 +11072,10 @@ struct VTable { ** in sqlite.aDb[]. 0 is for the main database and 1 is for the file that ** holds temporary tables and indices. If TF_Ephemeral is set ** then the table is stored in a file that is automatically deleted -** when the VDBE cursor to the table is closed. In this case Table.tnum +** when the VDBE cursor to the table is closed. In this case Table.tnum ** refers VDBE cursor number that holds the table open, not to the root ** page number. Transient tables are used to hold the results of a -** sub-query that appears instead of a real table name in the FROM clause +** sub-query that appears instead of a real table name in the FROM clause ** of a SELECT statement. */ struct Table { @@ -11205,7 +11205,7 @@ struct FKey { ** key is set to NULL. CASCADE means that a DELETE or UPDATE of the ** referenced table row is propagated into the row that holds the ** foreign key. -** +** ** The following symbolic values are used to record which type ** of action to take. */ @@ -11226,7 +11226,7 @@ struct FKey { /* ** An instance of the following structure is passed as the first -** argument to sqlite3VdbeKeyCompare and is used to control the +** argument to sqlite3VdbeKeyCompare and is used to control the ** comparison of the two index keys. ** ** Note that aSortOrder[] and aColl[] have nField+1 slots. There @@ -11285,7 +11285,7 @@ struct UnpackedRecord { ** In the Table structure describing Ex1, nCol==3 because there are ** three columns in the table. In the Index structure describing ** Ex2, nColumn==2 since 2 of the 3 columns of Ex1 are indexed. -** The value of aiColumn is {2, 0}. aiColumn[0]==2 because the +** The value of aiColumn is {2, 0}. aiColumn[0]==2 because the ** first column to be indexed (c3) has an index of 2 in Ex1.aCol[]. ** The second column to be indexed (c1) has an index of 0 in ** Ex1.aCol[], hence Ex2.aiColumn[1]==0. @@ -11293,7 +11293,7 @@ struct UnpackedRecord { ** The Index.onError field determines whether or not the indexed columns ** must be unique and what to do if they are not. When Index.onError=OE_None, ** it means this is not a unique index. Otherwise it is a unique index -** and the value of Index.onError indicate the which conflict resolution +** and the value of Index.onError indicate the which conflict resolution ** algorithm to employ whenever an attempt is made to insert a non-unique ** element. */ @@ -11342,7 +11342,7 @@ struct Index { #define IsUniqueIndex(X) ((X)->onError!=OE_None) /* -** Each sample stored in the sqlite_stat3 table is represented in memory +** Each sample stored in the sqlite_stat3 table is represented in memory ** using a structure of this type. See documentation at the top of the ** analyze.c source file for additional information. */ @@ -11437,9 +11437,9 @@ typedef int ynVar; ** to represent the greater-than-or-equal-to operator in the expression ** tree. ** -** If the expression is an SQL literal (TK_INTEGER, TK_FLOAT, TK_BLOB, +** If the expression is an SQL literal (TK_INTEGER, TK_FLOAT, TK_BLOB, ** or TK_STRING), then Expr.token contains the text of the SQL literal. If -** the expression is a variable (TK_VARIABLE), then Expr.token contains the +** the expression is a variable (TK_VARIABLE), then Expr.token contains the ** variable name. Finally, if the expression is an SQL function (TK_FUNCTION), ** then Expr.token contains the name of the function. ** @@ -11450,7 +11450,7 @@ typedef int ynVar; ** a CASE expression or an IN expression of the form "<lhs> IN (<y>, <z>...)". ** Expr.x.pSelect is used if the expression is a sub-select or an expression of ** the form "<lhs> IN (SELECT ...)". If the EP_xIsSelect bit is set in the -** Expr.flags mask, then Expr.x.pSelect is valid. Otherwise, Expr.x.pList is +** Expr.flags mask, then Expr.x.pSelect is valid. Otherwise, Expr.x.pList is ** valid. ** ** An expression of the form ID or ID.ID refers to a column in a table. @@ -11461,8 +11461,8 @@ typedef int ynVar; ** value is also stored in the Expr.iAgg column in the aggregate so that ** it can be accessed after all aggregates are computed. ** -** If the expression is an unbound variable marker (a question mark -** character '?' in the original SQL) then the Expr.iTable holds the index +** If the expression is an unbound variable marker (a question mark +** character '?' in the original SQL) then the Expr.iTable holds the index ** number for that variable. ** ** If the expression is a subquery then Expr.iColumn holds an integer @@ -11501,7 +11501,7 @@ struct Expr { /* If the EP_TokenOnly flag is set in the Expr.flags mask, then no ** space is allocated for the fields below this point. An attempt to - ** access them will result in a segfault or malfunction. + ** access them will result in a segfault or malfunction. *********************************************************************/ Expr *pLeft; /* Left subnode */ @@ -11559,7 +11559,7 @@ struct Expr { #define EP_Constant 0x080000 /* Node is a constant */ /* -** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the +** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the ** Expr.flags field. */ #define ExprHasProperty(E,P) (((E)->flags&(P))!=0) @@ -11578,8 +11578,8 @@ struct Expr { #endif /* -** Macros to determine the number of bytes required by a normal Expr -** struct, an Expr struct with the EP_Reduced flag set in Expr.flags +** Macros to determine the number of bytes required by a normal Expr +** struct, an Expr struct with the EP_Reduced flag set in Expr.flags ** and an Expr struct with the EP_TokenOnly flag set. */ #define EXPR_FULLSIZE sizeof(Expr) /* Full size */ @@ -11587,7 +11587,7 @@ struct Expr { #define EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE offsetof(Expr,pLeft) /* Fewer features */ /* -** Flags passed to the sqlite3ExprDup() function. See the header comment +** Flags passed to the sqlite3ExprDup() function. See the header comment ** above sqlite3ExprDup() for details. */ #define EXPRDUP_REDUCE 0x0001 /* Used reduced-size Expr nodes */ @@ -11778,12 +11778,12 @@ struct SrcList { ** pEList corresponds to the result set of a SELECT and is NULL for ** other statements. ** -** NameContexts can be nested. When resolving names, the inner-most +** NameContexts can be nested. When resolving names, the inner-most ** context is searched first. If no match is found, the next outer ** context is checked. If there is still no match, the next context ** is checked. This process continues until either a match is found ** or all contexts are check. When a match is found, the nRef member of -** the context containing the match is incremented. +** the context containing the match is incremented. ** ** Each subquery gets a new NameContext. The pNext field points to the ** NameContext in the parent query. Thus the process of scanning the @@ -11806,7 +11806,7 @@ struct NameContext { ** ** Note: NC_MinMaxAgg must have the same value as SF_MinMaxAgg and ** SQLITE_FUNC_MINMAX. -** +** */ #define NC_AllowAgg 0x0001 /* Aggregate functions are allowed here */ #define NC_HasAgg 0x0002 /* One or more aggregate functions seen */ @@ -11881,7 +11881,7 @@ struct Select { ** by one of the following macros. The "SRT" prefix means "SELECT Result ** Type". ** -** SRT_Union Store results as a key in a temporary index +** SRT_Union Store results as a key in a temporary index ** identified by pDest->iSDParm. ** ** SRT_Except Remove results from the temporary index pDest->iSDParm. @@ -11905,7 +11905,7 @@ struct Select { ** of the query. This destination implies "LIMIT 1". ** ** SRT_Set The result must be a single column. Store each -** row of result as the key in table pDest->iSDParm. +** row of result as the key in table pDest->iSDParm. ** Apply the affinity pDest->affSdst before storing ** results. Used to implement "IN (SELECT ...)". ** @@ -11973,7 +11973,7 @@ struct SelectDest { }; /* -** During code generation of statements that do inserts into AUTOINCREMENT +** During code generation of statements that do inserts into AUTOINCREMENT ** tables, the following information is attached to the Table.u.autoInc.p ** pointer of each autoincrement table to record some side information that ** the code generator needs. We have to keep per-table autoincrement @@ -11996,7 +11996,7 @@ struct AutoincInfo { #endif /* -** At least one instance of the following structure is created for each +** At least one instance of the following structure is created for each ** trigger that may be fired while parsing an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE ** statement. All such objects are stored in the linked list headed at ** Parse.pTriggerPrg and deleted once statement compilation has been @@ -12009,7 +12009,7 @@ struct AutoincInfo { ** values for both pTrigger and orconf. ** ** The TriggerPrg.aColmask[0] variable is set to a mask of old.* columns -** accessed (or set to 0 for triggers fired as a result of INSERT +** accessed (or set to 0 for triggers fired as a result of INSERT ** statements). Similarly, the TriggerPrg.aColmask[1] variable is set to ** a mask of new.* columns used by the program. */ @@ -12050,7 +12050,7 @@ struct TriggerPrg { ** is constant but the second part is reset at the beginning and end of ** each recursion. ** -** The nTableLock and aTableLock variables are only used if the shared-cache +** The nTableLock and aTableLock variables are only used if the shared-cache ** feature is enabled (if sqlite3Tsd()->useSharedData is true). They are ** used to store the set of table-locks required by the statement being ** compiled. Function sqlite3TableLock() is used to add entries to the @@ -12197,10 +12197,10 @@ struct AuthContext { /* * Each trigger present in the database schema is stored as an instance of - * struct Trigger. + * struct Trigger. * * Pointers to instances of struct Trigger are stored in two ways. - * 1. In the "trigHash" hash table (part of the sqlite3* that represents the + * 1. In the "trigHash" hash table (part of the sqlite3* that represents the * database). This allows Trigger structures to be retrieved by name. * 2. All triggers associated with a single table form a linked list, using the * pNext member of struct Trigger. A pointer to the first element of the @@ -12226,7 +12226,7 @@ struct Trigger { /* ** A trigger is either a BEFORE or an AFTER trigger. The following constants -** determine which. +** determine which. ** ** If there are multiple triggers, you might of some BEFORE and some AFTER. ** In that cases, the constants below can be ORed together. @@ -12236,15 +12236,15 @@ struct Trigger { /* * An instance of struct TriggerStep is used to store a single SQL statement - * that is a part of a trigger-program. + * that is a part of a trigger-program. * * Instances of struct TriggerStep are stored in a singly linked list (linked - * using the "pNext" member) referenced by the "step_list" member of the + * using the "pNext" member) referenced by the "step_list" member of the * associated struct Trigger instance. The first element of the linked list is * the first step of the trigger-program. - * + * * The "op" member indicates whether this is a "DELETE", "INSERT", "UPDATE" or - * "SELECT" statement. The meanings of the other members is determined by the + * "SELECT" statement. The meanings of the other members is determined by the * value of "op" as follows: * * (op == TK_INSERT) @@ -12254,7 +12254,7 @@ struct Trigger { * target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to insert into. * pExprList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... VALUES ... statement, then * this stores values to be inserted. Otherwise NULL. - * pIdList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... (<column-names>) VALUES ... + * pIdList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... (<column-names>) VALUES ... * statement, then this stores the column-names to be * inserted into. * @@ -12262,7 +12262,7 @@ struct Trigger { * target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to delete from. * pWhere -> The WHERE clause of the DELETE statement if one is specified. * Otherwise NULL. - * + * * (op == TK_UPDATE) * target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to update rows of. * pWhere -> The WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement if one is specified. @@ -12270,7 +12270,7 @@ struct Trigger { * pExprList -> A list of the columns to update and the expressions to update * them to. See sqlite3Update() documentation of "pChanges" * argument. - * + * */ struct TriggerStep { u8 op; /* One of TK_DELETE, TK_UPDATE, TK_INSERT, TK_SELECT */ @@ -12288,7 +12288,7 @@ struct TriggerStep { /* ** The following structure contains information used by the sqliteFix... ** routines as they walk the parse tree to make database references -** explicit. +** explicit. */ typedef struct DbFixer DbFixer; struct DbFixer { @@ -12570,7 +12570,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3HeapNearlyFull(void); #ifdef SQLITE_USE_ALLOCA # define sqlite3StackAllocRaw(D,N) alloca(N) # define sqlite3StackAllocZero(D,N) memset(alloca(N), 0, N) -# define sqlite3StackFree(D,P) +# define sqlite3StackFree(D,P) #else # define sqlite3StackAllocRaw(D,N) sqlite3DbMallocRaw(D,N) # define sqlite3StackAllocZero(D,N) sqlite3DbMallocZero(D,N) @@ -12965,7 +12965,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3HexToBlob(sqlite3*, const char *z, int n); SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3HexToInt(int h); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3TwoPartName(Parse *, Token *, Token *, Token **); -#if defined(SQLITE_TEST) +#if defined(SQLITE_TEST) SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3ErrName(int); #endif @@ -12993,7 +12993,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetBoolean(const char *z,u8); SQLITE_PRIVATE const void *sqlite3ValueText(sqlite3_value*, u8); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueBytes(sqlite3_value*, u8); -SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetStr(sqlite3_value*, int, const void *,u8, +SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetStr(sqlite3_value*, int, const void *,u8, void(*)(void*)); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetNull(sqlite3_value*); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueFree(sqlite3_value*); @@ -13051,7 +13051,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3KeyInfoOfIndex(Parse*, Index*); #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3KeyInfoIsWriteable(KeyInfo*); #endif -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *, +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *, void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), void (*)(sqlite3_context*), FuncDestructor *pDestructor @@ -13112,7 +13112,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8To8(unsigned char*); # define sqlite3VtabRollback(X) # define sqlite3VtabCommit(X) # define sqlite3VtabInSync(db) 0 -# define sqlite3VtabLock(X) +# define sqlite3VtabLock(X) # define sqlite3VtabUnlock(X) # define sqlite3VtabUnlockList(X) # define sqlite3VtabSavepoint(X, Y, Z) SQLITE_OK @@ -13168,7 +13168,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse*, With*, u8); ** no-op macros if OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY is defined. In this case no foreign ** key functionality is available. If OMIT_TRIGGER is defined but ** OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY is not, only some of the functions are no-oped. In -** this case foreign keys are parsed, but no other functionality is +** this case foreign keys are parsed, but no other functionality is ** provided (enforcement of FK constraints requires the triggers sub-system). */ #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) @@ -13273,7 +13273,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserTrace(FILE*, char *); /* ** If the SQLITE_ENABLE IOTRACE exists then the global variable ** sqlite3IoTrace is a pointer to a printf-like routine used to -** print I/O tracing messages. +** print I/O tracing messages. */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_IOTRACE # define IOTRACE(A) if( sqlite3IoTrace ){ sqlite3IoTrace A; } @@ -13307,7 +13307,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void (*sqlite3IoTrace)(const char*,...); ** that allocations that might have been satisfied by lookaside are not ** passed back to non-lookaside free() routines. Asserts such as the ** example above are placed on the non-lookaside free() routines to verify -** this constraint. +** this constraint. ** ** All of this is no-op for a production build. It only comes into ** play when the SQLITE_MEMDEBUG compile-time option is used. @@ -13354,7 +13354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadJoin(SQLiteThread*, void**); */ /* An array to map all upper-case characters into their corresponding -** lower-case character. +** lower-case character. ** ** SQLite only considers US-ASCII (or EBCDIC) characters. We do not ** handle case conversions for the UTF character set since the tables @@ -13420,7 +13420,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3UpperToLower[] = { ** Standard function tolower() is implemented using the sqlite3UpperToLower[] ** array. tolower() is used more often than toupper() by SQLite. ** -** Bit 0x40 is set if the character non-alphanumeric and can be used in an +** Bit 0x40 is set if the character non-alphanumeric and can be used in an ** SQLite identifier. Identifiers are alphanumerics, "_", "$", and any ** non-ASCII UTF character. Hence the test for whether or not a character is ** part of an identifier is 0x46. @@ -13579,7 +13579,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PendingByte = 0x40000000; ** Properties of opcodes. The OPFLG_INITIALIZER macro is ** created by mkopcodeh.awk during compilation. Data is obtained ** from the comments following the "case OP_xxxx:" statements in -** the vdbe.c file. +** the vdbe.c file. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3OpcodeProperty[] = OPFLG_INITIALIZER; @@ -13605,7 +13605,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3OpcodeProperty[] = OPFLG_INITIALIZER; /* -** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should +** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should ** be sorted A-Z. ** ** This array looks large, but in a typical installation actually uses @@ -14079,7 +14079,7 @@ typedef struct AuxData AuxData; ** ** Cursors can also point to virtual tables, sorters, or "pseudo-tables". ** A pseudo-table is a single-row table implemented by registers. -** +** ** Every cursor that the virtual machine has open is represented by an ** instance of the following structure. */ @@ -14133,7 +14133,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeCursor VdbeCursor; ** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type ** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as ** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific -** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished, +** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished, ** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure, ** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program ** began executing. @@ -14216,7 +14216,7 @@ struct Mem { ** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation. ** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main ** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also -** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real +** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real ** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag. */ #define MEM_Null 0x0001 /* Value is NULL */ @@ -14263,7 +14263,7 @@ struct Mem { #endif /* -** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function +** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function ** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance ** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM ** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed @@ -14330,7 +14330,7 @@ typedef unsigned bft; /* Bit Field Type */ ** set to 2 for xDestroy method calls and 1 for all other methods. This ** variable is used for two purposes: to allow xDestroy methods to execute ** "DROP TABLE" statements and to prevent some nasty side effects of -** malloc failure when SQLite is invoked recursively by a virtual table +** malloc failure when SQLite is invoked recursively by a virtual table ** method function. */ struct Vdbe { @@ -14625,7 +14625,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status( break; } - /* + /* ** Return an approximation for the amount of memory currently used ** by all pagers associated with the given database connection. The ** highwater mark is meaningless and is returned as zero. @@ -14664,7 +14664,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status( HashElem *p; nByte += sqlite3GlobalConfig.m.xRoundup(sizeof(HashElem)) * ( - pSchema->tblHash.count + pSchema->tblHash.count + pSchema->trigHash.count + pSchema->idxHash.count + pSchema->fkeyHash.count @@ -14714,7 +14714,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status( /* ** Set *pCurrent to the total cache hits or misses encountered by all - ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set + ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set ** to zero. */ case SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT: @@ -14770,7 +14770,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status( ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains the C functions that implement date and time -** functions for SQLite. +** functions for SQLite. ** ** There is only one exported symbol in this file - the function ** sqlite3RegisterDateTimeFunctions() found at the bottom of the file. @@ -14779,7 +14779,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status( ** SQLite processes all times and dates as Julian Day numbers. The ** dates and times are stored as the number of days since noon ** in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C. according to the Gregorian -** calendar system. +** calendar system. ** ** 1970-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2440587.5 ** 2000-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2451544.5 @@ -15069,7 +15069,7 @@ static int setDateTimeToCurrent(sqlite3_context *context, DateTime *p){ ** The following are acceptable forms for the input string: ** ** YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.FFF +/-HH:MM -** DDDD.DD +** DDDD.DD ** now ** ** In the first form, the +/-HH:MM is always optional. The fractional @@ -15079,8 +15079,8 @@ static int setDateTimeToCurrent(sqlite3_context *context, DateTime *p){ ** as there is a year and date. */ static int parseDateOrTime( - sqlite3_context *context, - const char *zDate, + sqlite3_context *context, + const char *zDate, DateTime *p ){ double r; @@ -15161,14 +15161,14 @@ static void clearYMD_HMS_TZ(DateTime *p){ /* ** On recent Windows platforms, the localtime_s() function is available -** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to -** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the +** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to +** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the ** order of the parameters is reversed. ** ** See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/a442x3ye(VS.80).aspx. ** ** If the user has not indicated to use localtime_r() or localtime_s() -** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides +** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides ** localtime_s(). */ #if !defined(HAVE_LOCALTIME_R) && !defined(HAVE_LOCALTIME_S) && \ @@ -15225,7 +15225,7 @@ static int osLocaltime(time_t *t, struct tm *pTm){ /* ** Compute the difference (in milliseconds) between localtime and UTC ** (a.k.a. GMT) for the time value p where p is in UTC. If no error occurs, -** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK. +** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK. ** ** Or, if an error does occur, set *pRc to SQLITE_ERROR. The returned value ** is undefined in this case. @@ -15515,9 +15515,9 @@ static int parseModifier(sqlite3_context *pCtx, const char *zMod, DateTime *p){ ** then assume a default value of "now" for argv[0]. */ static int isDate( - sqlite3_context *context, - int argc, - sqlite3_value **argv, + sqlite3_context *context, + int argc, + sqlite3_value **argv, DateTime *p ){ int i; @@ -15922,7 +15922,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterDateTimeFunctions(void){ ** So we test the effects of a malloc() failing and the sqlite3OsXXX() ** function returning SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM using the DO_OS_MALLOC_TEST macro. ** -** The following functions are instrumented for malloc() failure +** The following functions are instrumented for malloc() failure ** testing: ** ** sqlite3OsRead() @@ -16008,8 +16008,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST if( op!=SQLITE_FCNTL_COMMIT_PHASETWO ){ /* Faults are not injected into COMMIT_PHASETWO because, assuming SQLite - ** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding - ** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point + ** is using a regular VFS, it is called after the corresponding + ** transaction has been committed. Injecting a fault at this point ** confuses the test scripts - the COMMIT comand returns SQLITE_NOMEM ** but the transaction is committed anyway. ** @@ -16078,10 +16078,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsUnfetch(sqlite3_file *id, i64 iOff, void *p){ ** VFS methods. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen( - sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, - const char *zPath, - sqlite3_file *pFile, - int flags, + sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, + const char *zPath, + sqlite3_file *pFile, + int flags, int *pFlagsOut ){ int rc; @@ -16100,18 +16100,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, const char *zPath, int dir return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync); } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsAccess( - sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, - const char *zPath, - int flags, + sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, + const char *zPath, + int flags, int *pResOut ){ DO_OS_MALLOC_TEST(0); return pVfs->xAccess(pVfs, zPath, flags, pResOut); } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFullPathname( - sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, - const char *zPath, - int nPathOut, + sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, + const char *zPath, + int nPathOut, char *zPathOut ){ DO_OS_MALLOC_TEST(0); @@ -16157,9 +16157,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, sqlite3_int64 *p } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc( - sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, - const char *zFile, - sqlite3_file **ppFile, + sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, + const char *zFile, + sqlite3_file **ppFile, int flags, int *pOutFlags ){ @@ -16301,17 +16301,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vfs_unregister(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs){ ** ************************************************************************* ** -** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign" +** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign" ** malloc failures (when the xMalloc() or xRealloc() method of the ** sqlite3_mem_methods structure fails to allocate a block of memory -** and returns 0). +** and returns 0). ** ** Most malloc failures are non-benign. After they occur, SQLite ** abandons the current operation and returns an error code (usually ** SQLITE_NOMEM) to the user. However, sometimes a fault is not necessarily -** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this -** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The -** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure +** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this +** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The +** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure ** during a hash table resize is a benign fault. */ @@ -16508,7 +16508,7 @@ static malloc_zone_t* _sqliteZone_; #else /* if not __APPLE__ */ /* -** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems. +** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems. ** Also used by Apple systems if SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC is defined. */ #define SQLITE_MALLOC(x) malloc(x) @@ -16685,13 +16685,13 @@ static int sqlite3MemInit(void *NotUsed){ /* defer MT decisions to system malloc */ _sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone(); }else{ - /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks, + /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks, ** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */ bool success; malloc_zone_t* newzone = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0); malloc_set_zone_name(newzone, "Sqlite_Heap"); do{ - success = OSAtomicCompareAndSwapPtrBarrier(NULL, newzone, + success = OSAtomicCompareAndSwapPtrBarrier(NULL, newzone, (void * volatile *)&_sqliteZone_); }while(!_sqliteZone_); if( !success ){ @@ -16817,7 +16817,7 @@ struct MemBlockHdr { ** when this module is combined with other in the amalgamation. */ static struct { - + /* ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem. */ @@ -16828,7 +16828,7 @@ static struct { */ struct MemBlockHdr *pFirst; struct MemBlockHdr *pLast; - + /* ** The number of levels of backtrace to save in new allocations. */ @@ -16841,7 +16841,7 @@ static struct { int nTitle; /* Bytes of zTitle to save. Includes '\0' and padding */ char zTitle[100]; /* The title text */ - /* + /* ** sqlite3MallocDisallow() increments the following counter. ** sqlite3MallocAllow() decrements it. */ @@ -16900,7 +16900,7 @@ static struct MemBlockHdr *sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(void *pAllocation){ pU8 = (u8*)pAllocation; assert( pInt[nReserve/sizeof(int)]==(int)REARGUARD ); /* This checks any of the "extra" bytes allocated due - ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure + ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure ** they haven't been overwritten. */ while( nReserve-- > p->iSize ) assert( pU8[nReserve]==0x65 ); @@ -17029,7 +17029,7 @@ static void *sqlite3MemMalloc(int nByte){ p = (void*)pInt; } sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex); - return p; + return p; } /* @@ -17039,7 +17039,7 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){ struct MemBlockHdr *pHdr; void **pBt; char *z; - assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0 + assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0 || mem.mutex!=0 ); pHdr = sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(pPrior); pBt = (void**)pHdr; @@ -17065,15 +17065,15 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){ randomFill(z, sizeof(void*)*pHdr->nBacktraceSlots + sizeof(*pHdr) + (int)pHdr->iSize + sizeof(int) + pHdr->nTitle); free(z); - sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex); + sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex); } /* ** Change the size of an existing memory allocation. ** ** For this debugging implementation, we *always* make a copy of the -** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the -** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is +** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the +** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is ** much more likely to break and we are much more liking to find ** the error. */ @@ -17207,7 +17207,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugSync(){ } /* -** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory +** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory ** allocations into that log. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){ @@ -17224,7 +17224,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){ for(pHdr=mem.pFirst; pHdr; pHdr=pHdr->pNext){ char *z = (char*)pHdr; z -= pHdr->nBacktraceSlots*sizeof(void*) + pHdr->nTitle; - fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n", + fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n", pHdr->iSize, &pHdr[1], pHdr->nTitle ? z : "???"); if( pHdr->nBacktrace ){ fflush(out); @@ -17237,7 +17237,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){ fprintf(out, "COUNTS:\n"); for(i=0; i<NCSIZE-1; i++){ if( mem.nAlloc[i] ){ - fprintf(out, " %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n", + fprintf(out, " %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n", i*8, mem.nAlloc[i], mem.nCurrent[i], mem.mxCurrent[i]); } } @@ -17278,12 +17278,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){ ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory -** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. +** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. ** ** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all ** use of malloc(). The SQLite user supplies a block of memory ** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations -** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() +** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() ** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called, ** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot ** be changed. @@ -17313,8 +17313,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){ #define N_HASH 61 /* -** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or -** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes. The first 8 bytes are +** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or +** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes. The first 8 bytes are ** a header that is not returned to the user. ** ** A chunk is two or more blocks that is either checked out or @@ -17337,10 +17337,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemdebugMallocCount(){ ** ** The second block of free chunks is of the form u.list. The ** two fields form a double-linked list of chunks of related sizes. -** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[] +** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[] ** for smaller chunks and mem3.aiHash[] for larger chunks. ** -** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked +** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked ** out. If a chunk is checked out, the user data may extend into ** the u.hdr.prevSize value of the following chunk. */ @@ -17376,12 +17376,12 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem3Global { ** True if we are evaluating an out-of-memory callback. */ int alarmBusy; - + /* ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem. */ sqlite3_mutex *mutex; - + /* ** The minimum amount of free space that we have seen. */ @@ -17397,7 +17397,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem3Global { u32 szMaster; /* - ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size + ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size ** for smaller chunks, or a hash on the block size for larger ** chunks. */ @@ -17428,7 +17428,7 @@ static void memsys3UnlinkFromList(u32 i, u32 *pRoot){ } /* -** Unlink the chunk at index i from +** Unlink the chunk at index i from ** whatever list is currently a member of. */ static void memsys3Unlink(u32 i){ @@ -17512,8 +17512,8 @@ static void memsys3OutOfMemory(int nByte){ /* -** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked. Adjust its -** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the +** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked. Adjust its +** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the ** user portion of the chunk. */ static void *memsys3Checkout(u32 i, u32 nBlock){ @@ -17566,12 +17566,12 @@ static void *memsys3FromMaster(u32 nBlock){ /* ** *pRoot is the head of a list of free chunks of the same size ** or same size hash. In other words, *pRoot is an entry in either -** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[]. +** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[]. ** ** This routine examines all entries on the given list and tries -** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks. +** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks. ** -** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces +** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces ** the current mem3.iMaster with the new larger chunk. In order for ** this mem3.iMaster replacement to work, the master chunk must be ** linked into the hash tables. That is not the normal state of @@ -17662,7 +17662,7 @@ static void *memsys3MallocUnsafe(int nByte){ } - /* STEP 3: + /* STEP 3: ** Loop through the entire memory pool. Coalesce adjacent free ** chunks. Recompute the master chunk as the largest free chunk. ** Then try again to satisfy the allocation by carving a piece off @@ -17769,7 +17769,7 @@ static void *memsys3Malloc(int nBytes){ memsys3Enter(); p = memsys3MallocUnsafe(nBytes); memsys3Leave(); - return (void*)p; + return (void*)p; } /* @@ -17850,7 +17850,7 @@ static void memsys3Shutdown(void *NotUsed){ /* -** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory +** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory ** allocations into that log. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){ @@ -17901,7 +17901,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){ fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j], (mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8); } - fprintf(out, "\n"); + fprintf(out, "\n"); } for(i=0; i<N_HASH; i++){ if( mem3.aiHash[i]==0 ) continue; @@ -17910,7 +17910,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){ fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j], (mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8); } - fprintf(out, "\n"); + fprintf(out, "\n"); } fprintf(out, "master=%d\n", mem3.iMaster); fprintf(out, "nowUsed=%d\n", mem3.nPool*8 - mem3.szMaster*8); @@ -17927,7 +17927,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){ } /* -** This routine is the only routine in this file with external +** This routine is the only routine in this file with external ** linkage. ** ** Populate the low-level memory allocation function pointers in @@ -17967,12 +17967,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){ ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory -** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. +** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite. ** ** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all ** use of malloc(). The application gives SQLite a block of memory ** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations -** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() +** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc() ** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called, ** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot ** be changed. @@ -17992,12 +17992,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){ ** This algorithm is described in: J. M. Robson. "Bounds for Some Functions ** Concerning Dynamic Storage Allocation". Journal of the Association for ** Computing Machinery, Volume 21, Number 8, July 1974, pages 491-499. -** +** ** Let n be the size of the largest allocation divided by the minimum ** allocation size (after rounding all sizes up to a power of 2.) Let M ** be the maximum amount of memory ever outstanding at one time. Let ** N be the total amount of memory available for allocation. Robson -** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to +** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to ** fragmentation as long as the following constraint holds: ** ** N >= M*(1 + log2(n)/2) - n + 1 @@ -18007,7 +18007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){ */ /* -** This version of the memory allocator is used only when +** This version of the memory allocator is used only when ** SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5 is defined. */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5 @@ -18052,7 +18052,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global { int szAtom; /* Smallest possible allocation in bytes */ int nBlock; /* Number of szAtom sized blocks in zPool */ u8 *zPool; /* Memory available to be allocated */ - + /* ** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem. */ @@ -18069,7 +18069,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global { u32 maxOut; /* Maximum instantaneous currentOut */ u32 maxCount; /* Maximum instantaneous currentCount */ u32 maxRequest; /* Largest allocation (exclusive of internal frag) */ - + /* ** Lists of free blocks. aiFreelist[0] is a list of free blocks of ** size mem5.szAtom. aiFreelist[1] holds blocks of size szAtom*2. @@ -18248,7 +18248,7 @@ static void memsys5FreeUnsafe(void *pOld){ u32 size, iLogsize; int iBlock; - /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in + /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in ** the array of mem5.szAtom byte blocks pointed to by mem5.zPool. */ iBlock = (int)(((u8 *)pOld-mem5.zPool)/mem5.szAtom); @@ -18314,7 +18314,7 @@ static void *memsys5Malloc(int nBytes){ p = memsys5MallocUnsafe(nBytes); memsys5Leave(); } - return (void*)p; + return (void*)p; } /* @@ -18327,14 +18327,14 @@ static void memsys5Free(void *pPrior){ assert( pPrior!=0 ); memsys5Enter(); memsys5FreeUnsafe(pPrior); - memsys5Leave(); + memsys5Leave(); } /* ** Change the size of an existing memory allocation. ** ** The outer layer memory allocator prevents this routine from -** being called with pPrior==0. +** being called with pPrior==0. ** ** nBytes is always a value obtained from a prior call to ** memsys5Round(). Hence nBytes is always a non-negative power @@ -18469,7 +18469,7 @@ static void memsys5Shutdown(void *NotUsed){ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST /* -** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory +** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory ** allocations into that log. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){ @@ -18511,7 +18511,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){ #endif /* -** This routine is the only routine in this file with external +** This routine is the only routine in this file with external ** linkage. It returns a pointer to a static sqlite3_mem_methods ** struct populated with the memsys5 methods. */ @@ -18563,11 +18563,11 @@ static SQLITE_WSD int mutexIsInit = 0; /* ** Initialize the mutex system. */ -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){ +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( !sqlite3GlobalConfig.mutex.xMutexAlloc ){ /* If the xMutexAlloc method has not been set, then the user did not - ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to + ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to ** sqlite3_initialize() being called. This block copies pointers to ** the default implementation into the sqlite3GlobalConfig structure. */ @@ -18661,7 +18661,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_try(sqlite3_mutex *p){ /* ** The sqlite3_mutex_leave() routine exits a mutex that was previously -** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex +** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex ** is not currently entered. If a NULL pointer is passed as an argument ** this function is a no-op. */ @@ -18726,9 +18726,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex *p){ */ static int noopMutexInit(void){ return SQLITE_OK; } static int noopMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; } -static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){ +static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(id); - return (sqlite3_mutex*)8; + return (sqlite3_mutex*)8; } static void noopMutexFree(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; } static void noopMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; } @@ -18793,7 +18793,7 @@ static int debugMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; } /* ** The sqlite3_mutex_alloc() routine allocates a new ** mutex and returns a pointer to it. If it returns NULL -** that means that a mutex could not be allocated. +** that means that a mutex could not be allocated. */ static sqlite3_mutex *debugMutexAlloc(int id){ static sqlite3_debug_mutex aStatic[SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_APP3 - 1]; @@ -18956,7 +18956,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mutex { ** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to ** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is ** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery -** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a +** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a ** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic. But we are ** told that HPUX is not such a platform. If so, then these routines ** will not always work correctly on HPUX. @@ -19022,7 +19022,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; } ** ** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST ** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc() -** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static +** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static ** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has ** the same type number. */ @@ -19117,7 +19117,7 @@ static void pthreadMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){ ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. - ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that + ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same ** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result. @@ -19160,7 +19160,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexTry(sqlite3_mutex *p){ ** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self ** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values ** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place. - ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that + ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that ** separate processes cannot read different values from the same ** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions ** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result. @@ -19322,8 +19322,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex_methods const *sqlite3DefaultMutex(void){ */ #ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE -/* -** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing +/* +** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing ** high-performance timing routines. */ /************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/ @@ -19381,7 +19381,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex_methods const *sqlite3DefaultMutex(void){ __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val)); return val; } - + #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__)) __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ @@ -19999,7 +19999,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem0Global { ** limit. */ static void softHeapLimitEnforcer( - void *NotUsed, + void *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 NotUsed2, int allocSize ){ @@ -20041,7 +20041,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_memory_alarm( #endif /* -** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or +** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or ** negative value indicates no limit. */ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64(sqlite3_int64 n){ @@ -20155,7 +20155,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_memory_highwater(int resetFlag){ } /* -** Trigger the alarm +** Trigger the alarm */ static void sqlite3MallocAlarm(int nByte){ void (*xCallback)(void*,sqlite3_int64,int); @@ -20476,7 +20476,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3Realloc(void *pOld, u64 nBytes){ sqlite3_mutex_enter(mem0.mutex); sqlite3StatusSet(SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE, (int)nBytes); nDiff = nNew - nOld; - if( sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >= + if( sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >= mem0.alarmThreshold-nDiff ){ sqlite3MallocAlarm(nDiff); } @@ -20518,7 +20518,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_realloc64(void *pOld, sqlite3_uint64 n){ /* ** Allocate and zero memory. -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3MallocZero(u64 n){ void *p = sqlite3Malloc(n); if( p ){ @@ -20592,7 +20592,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3DbMallocRaw(sqlite3 *db, u64 n){ if( !p && db ){ db->mallocFailed = 1; } - sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p, + sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p, (db && db->lookaside.bEnabled) ? MEMTYPE_LOOKASIDE : MEMTYPE_HEAP); return p; } @@ -20647,9 +20647,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(sqlite3 *db, void *p, u64 n){ } /* -** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These +** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These ** functions call sqlite3MallocRaw() directly instead of sqliteMalloc(). This -** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are +** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are ** called via macros that record the current file and line number in the ** ThreadData structure. */ @@ -20707,13 +20707,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int apiOomError(sqlite3 *db){ } /* -** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e. +** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e. ** returning control to the user) that has called sqlite3_malloc or ** sqlite3_realloc. ** ** The returned value is normally a copy of the second argument to this ** function. However, if a malloc() failure has occurred since the previous -** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead. +** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead. ** ** If the first argument, db, is not NULL and a malloc() error has occurred, ** then the connection error-code (the value returned by sqlite3_errcode()) @@ -20721,7 +20721,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int apiOomError(sqlite3 *db){ */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){ /* If the db handle is not NULL, then we must hold the connection handle - ** mutex here. Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed + ** mutex here. Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed ** is unsafe, as is the call to sqlite3Error(). */ assert( !db || sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); @@ -20983,7 +20983,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VXPrintf( break; } /* Find out what flags are present */ - flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign = + flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign = flag_alternateform = flag_altform2 = flag_zeropad = 0; done = 0; do{ @@ -22062,7 +22062,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadCreate( p->pIn = pIn; if( sqlite3FaultSim(200) ){ rc = 1; - }else{ + }else{ rc = pthread_create(&p->tid, 0, xTask, pIn); } if( rc ){ @@ -22270,7 +22270,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadJoin(SQLiteThread *p, void **ppOut){ ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* -** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8, +** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8, ** UTF-16, UTF-16BE, and UTF-16LE. ** ** Notes on UTF-8: @@ -22449,7 +22449,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3Utf8Read( /* ** If the TRANSLATE_TRACE macro is defined, the value of each Mem is ** printed on stderr on the way into and out of sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(). -*/ +*/ /* #define TRANSLATE_TRACE 1 */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 @@ -22480,7 +22480,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired } #endif - /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then + /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then ** all that is required is to swap the byte order. This case is handled ** differently from the others. */ @@ -22558,13 +22558,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired if( pMem->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ){ /* UTF-16 Little-endian -> UTF-8 */ while( zIn<zTerm ){ - READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); + READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); WRITE_UTF8(z, c); } }else{ /* UTF-16 Big-endian -> UTF-8 */ while( zIn<zTerm ){ - READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); + READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c); WRITE_UTF8(z, c); } } @@ -22593,7 +22593,7 @@ translate_out: } /* -** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the +** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the ** UTF-16 string stored in *pMem. If one is present, it is removed and ** the encoding of the Mem adjusted. This routine does not do any ** byte-swapping, it just sets Mem.enc appropriately. @@ -22616,7 +22616,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemHandleBom(Mem *pMem){ bom = SQLITE_UTF16LE; } } - + if( bom ){ rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(pMem); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -22636,7 +22636,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemHandleBom(Mem *pMem){ ** pZ is a UTF-8 encoded unicode string. If nByte is less than zero, ** return the number of unicode characters in pZ up to (but not including) ** the first 0x00 byte. If nByte is not less than zero, return the -** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to +** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to ** the first 0x00, whichever comes first). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8CharLen(const char *zIn, int nByte){ @@ -22656,7 +22656,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8CharLen(const char *zIn, int nByte){ return r; } -/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite. +/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite. ** Hence it is only available in debug builds. */ #if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) @@ -22718,7 +22718,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(const void *zIn, int nChar){ int c; unsigned char const *z = zIn; int n = 0; - + if( SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE==SQLITE_UTF16BE ){ while( n<nChar ){ READ_UTF16BE(z, 1, c); @@ -22862,15 +22862,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsNaN(double x){ ** ** This option [-ffast-math] should never be turned on by any ** -O option since it can result in incorrect output for programs - ** which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO + ** which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO ** rules/specifications for math functions. ** ** Under MSVC, this NaN test may fail if compiled with a floating- - ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise. From the MSDN + ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise. From the MSDN ** documentation: ** - ** The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons - ** involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN + ** The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons + ** involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN ** ... */ #ifdef __FAST_MATH__ @@ -23219,7 +23219,7 @@ do_atof_calc: result = 1e308*1e308*s; /* Infinity */ } }else{ - /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be + /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be ** represented exactly. */ while( e%22 ) { scale *= 1.0e+1; e -= 1; } while( e>0 ) { scale *= 1.0e+22; e -= 22; } @@ -23279,11 +23279,11 @@ static int compare2pow63(const char *zNum, int incr){ ** Convert zNum to a 64-bit signed integer. zNum must be decimal. This ** routine does *not* accept hexadecimal notation. ** -** If the zNum value is representable as a 64-bit twos-complement +** If the zNum value is representable as a 64-bit twos-complement ** integer, then write that value into *pNum and return 0. ** ** If zNum is exactly 9223372036854775808, return 2. This special -** case is broken out because while 9223372036854775808 cannot be a +** case is broken out because while 9223372036854775808 cannot be a ** signed 64-bit integer, its negative -9223372036854775808 can be. ** ** If zNum is too big for a 64-bit integer and is not @@ -23510,7 +23510,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE putVarint64(unsigned char *p, u64 v){ v >>= 7; } return 9; - } + } n = 0; do{ buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80); @@ -23719,8 +23719,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint(const unsigned char *p, u64 *v){ ** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned ** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff. ** -** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the -** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as +** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the +** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as ** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){ @@ -23917,7 +23917,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3HexToBlob(sqlite3 *db, const char *z, int n){ ** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid". */ static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){ - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, "API call with %s database connection pointer", zType ); @@ -23988,7 +23988,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AddInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){ if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1; } *pA += iB; - return 0; + return 0; } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){ testcase( iB==SMALLEST_INT64+1 ); @@ -24035,7 +24035,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MulInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){ } /* -** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or +** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or ** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647 */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){ @@ -24075,11 +24075,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FileSuffix3(const char *zBaseFilename, char *z){ } #endif -/* +/* ** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values. This computation is ** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic ** value. -** +** */ SQLITE_PRIVATE LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){ static const unsigned char x[] = { @@ -24269,7 +24269,7 @@ static int rehash(Hash *pH, unsigned int new_size){ /* The inability to allocates space for a larger hash table is ** a performance hit but it is not a fatal error. So mark the - ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of + ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of ** sqlite3MallocZero() to make the allocation, as sqlite3MallocZero() ** only zeroes the requested number of bytes whereas this module will ** use the actual amount of space allocated for the hash table (which @@ -24319,7 +24319,7 @@ static HashElem *findElementWithHash( *pHash = h; while( count-- ){ assert( elem!=0 ); - if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){ + if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){ return elem; } elem = elem->next; @@ -24337,7 +24337,7 @@ static void removeElementGivenHash( ){ struct _ht *pEntry; if( elem->prev ){ - elem->prev->next = elem->next; + elem->prev->next = elem->next; }else{ pH->first = elem->next; } @@ -24659,7 +24659,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){ ** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE ** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic ** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem -** where the database is located. +** where the database is located. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE) # if defined(__APPLE__) @@ -24670,7 +24670,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){ #endif /* -** Define the OS_VXWORKS pre-processor macro to 1 if building on +** Define the OS_VXWORKS pre-processor macro to 1 if building on ** vxworks, or 0 otherwise. */ #ifndef OS_VXWORKS @@ -24748,7 +24748,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){ #define MAX_PATHNAME 512 /* -** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not +** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not ** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK */ #define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x) ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY)) @@ -24815,7 +24815,7 @@ struct unixFile { ** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will ** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction ** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the - ** one described by ticket #3584. + ** one described by ticket #3584. */ unsigned char transCntrChng; /* True if the transaction counter changed */ unsigned char dbUpdate; /* True if any part of database file changed */ @@ -24824,7 +24824,7 @@ struct unixFile { #endif #ifdef SQLITE_TEST - /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that + /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that ** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c. */ char aPadding[32]; @@ -24906,8 +24906,8 @@ static int randomnessPid = 0; */ #ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE -/* -** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing +/* +** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing ** high-performance timing routines. */ /************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/ @@ -24965,7 +24965,7 @@ static int randomnessPid = 0; __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val)); return val; } - + #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__)) __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ @@ -25177,7 +25177,7 @@ static struct unix_syscall { #ifdef __DJGPP__ { "fstat", 0, 0 }, #define osFstat(a,b,c) 0 -#else +#else { "fstat", (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat, 0 }, #define osFstat ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent) #endif @@ -25354,7 +25354,7 @@ static const char *unixNextSystemCall(sqlite3_vfs *p, const char *zName){ /* ** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid -** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for +** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for ** standard input, output, and error. */ #ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR @@ -25393,7 +25393,7 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){ } if( fd>=SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR ) break; osClose(fd); - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING, "attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd); fd = -1; if( osOpen("/dev/null", f, m)<0 ) break; @@ -25401,9 +25401,9 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){ if( fd>=0 ){ if( m!=0 ){ struct stat statbuf; - if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0 + if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0 && statbuf.st_size==0 - && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m + && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m ){ osFchmod(fd, m); } @@ -25418,11 +25418,11 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){ /* ** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The ** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and -** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be +** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be ** shared by multiple threads. ** -** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex -** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert() +** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex +** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert() ** statements. e.g. ** ** unixEnterMutex() @@ -25530,7 +25530,7 @@ static int lockTrace(int fd, int op, struct flock *p){ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){ int rc; #ifdef __ANDROID__ - /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if + /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if ** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to ** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any ** such attempts. */ @@ -25546,9 +25546,9 @@ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){ ** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something ** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions. Specifically, it is ** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY -** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into +** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into ** SQLITE_IOERR -** +** ** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks, ** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately. */ @@ -25566,7 +25566,7 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) { ** propagated back to the caller. Commenting this branch out means errno==0 ** will be handled by the "default:" case below. */ - case 0: + case 0: return SQLITE_OK; #endif @@ -25574,31 +25574,31 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) { case ETIMEDOUT: case EBUSY: case EINTR: - case ENOLCK: - /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support + case ENOLCK: + /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support * introspection, in which it actually means what it says */ return SQLITE_BUSY; - - case EACCES: + + case EACCES: /* EACCES is like EAGAIN during locking operations, but not any other time*/ - if( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) || - (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) || + if( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) || + (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) || (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) || (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } /* else fall through */ - case EPERM: + case EPERM: return SQLITE_PERM; - + #if EOPNOTSUPP!=ENOTSUP - case EOPNOTSUPP: - /* something went terribly awry, unless during file system support + case EOPNOTSUPP: + /* something went terribly awry, unless during file system support * introspection, in which it actually means what it says */ #endif #ifdef ENOTSUP - case ENOTSUP: - /* invalid fd, unless during file system support introspection, in which + case ENOTSUP: + /* invalid fd, unless during file system support introspection, in which * it actually means what it says */ #endif case EIO: @@ -25613,8 +25613,8 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) { #endif case ENOSYS: /* these should force the client to close the file and reconnect */ - - default: + + default: return sqliteIOErr; } } @@ -25629,7 +25629,7 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) { ** ** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a ** unique file ID in VxWorks. Each instance of this structure contains -** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count. +** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count. ** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to ** zero. ** @@ -25645,7 +25645,7 @@ struct vxworksFileId { }; #if OS_VXWORKS -/* +/* ** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this ** variable: */ @@ -25717,7 +25717,7 @@ static struct vxworksFileId *vxworksFindFileId(const char *zAbsoluteName){ */ unixEnterMutex(); for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){ - if( pCandidate->nName==n + if( pCandidate->nName==n && memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0 ){ sqlite3_free(pNew); @@ -25810,7 +25810,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){ ** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file. ** ** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking -** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a +** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a ** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between ** a locked and an unlocked state. ** @@ -25843,7 +25843,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){ ** ** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads. But support for LinuxThreads ** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0. SQLite will still work with -** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection +** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection ** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections ** do not move across threads. */ @@ -25906,7 +25906,7 @@ static unixInodeInfo *inodeList = 0; ** strerror_r(). ** ** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that -** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN). +** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN). ** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that ** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path, ** if any. @@ -25924,7 +25924,7 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine( /* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use ** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message ** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r(). - */ + */ #if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R) char aErr[80]; memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr)); @@ -25932,18 +25932,18 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine( /* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined, ** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that - ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer - ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere. - ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of + ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer + ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere. + ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of ** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[]. ** ** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is ** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a - ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available + ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available ** could lead to a segfault though. */ #if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU) - zErr = + zErr = # endif strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1); @@ -25986,7 +25986,7 @@ static void robust_close(unixFile *pFile, int h, int lineno){ /* ** Close all file descriptors accumuated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list. -*/ +*/ static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){ unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode; UnixUnusedFd *p; @@ -26212,7 +26212,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ } } #endif - + unixLeaveMutex(); OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); @@ -26221,7 +26221,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ } /* -** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is +** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is ** described by pLock. ** ** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock @@ -26309,7 +26309,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ ** ** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock. ** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the - ** 'reserved byte'. + ** 'reserved byte'. ** ** A process may only obtain a PENDING lock after it has obtained a ** SHARED lock. A PENDING lock is implemented by obtaining a write-lock @@ -26323,7 +26323,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ ** implemented by obtaining a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte ** range'. Since all other locks require a read-lock on one of the bytes ** within this range, this ensures that no other locks are held on the - ** database. + ** database. ** ** The reason a single byte cannot be used instead of the 'shared byte ** range' is that some versions of windows do not support read-locks. By @@ -26368,7 +26368,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile* ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY. */ - if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && + if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK)) ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; @@ -26379,7 +26379,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and ** return SQLITE_OK. */ - if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && + if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){ assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 ); @@ -26397,7 +26397,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ */ lock.l_len = 1L; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; - if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK + if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK) ){ lock.l_type = (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK); @@ -26436,7 +26436,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* This could happen with a network mount */ tErrno = errno; - rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; + rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; } if( rc ){ @@ -26478,7 +26478,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ } } } - + #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when @@ -26507,7 +26507,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ end_lock: unixLeaveMutex(); - OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), + OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); return rc; } @@ -26531,11 +26531,11 @@ static void setPendingFd(unixFile *pFile){ ** ** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below ** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op. -** +** ** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED ** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then -** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works -** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to +** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works +** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to ** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set. */ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){ @@ -26573,7 +26573,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){ /* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock ** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade - ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a + ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a ** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock: ** 1: [WWWWW] ** 2: [....W] @@ -26590,7 +26590,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){ if( handleNFSUnlock ){ int tErrno; /* Error code from system call errors */ off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1; - + lock.l_type = F_UNLCK; lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET; lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST; @@ -26636,11 +26636,11 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){ lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE; if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){ /* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another - ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this + ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this ** indicates that the other process is not following the locking ** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning - ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes - ** an assert to fail). */ + ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes + ** an assert to fail). */ rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK; pFile->lastErrno = errno; goto end_unlock; @@ -26716,7 +26716,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd); #endif /* -** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation +** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation ** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file ** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile ** structure to 0. @@ -26774,7 +26774,7 @@ static int unixClose(sqlite3_file *id){ if( ALWAYS(pFile->pInode) && pFile->pInode->nLock ){ /* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just ** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file - ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed + ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed ** when the last lock is cleared. */ setPendingFd(pFile); @@ -26873,7 +26873,7 @@ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); - + assert( pFile ); /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ @@ -26937,7 +26937,7 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { #endif return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* grab an exclusive lock */ rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777); if( rc<0 ){ @@ -26952,8 +26952,8 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { } } return rc; - } - + } + /* got it, set the type and return ok */ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return rc; @@ -26977,7 +26977,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, getpid())); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); - + /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; @@ -26990,7 +26990,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */ assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK ); rc = osRmdir(zLockFile); @@ -27004,7 +27004,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){ pFile->lastErrno = tErrno; } - return rc; + return rc; } pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; @@ -27055,7 +27055,7 @@ static int robust_flock(int fd, int op){ #else # define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b) #endif - + /* ** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified @@ -27067,16 +27067,16 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; - + SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); - + assert( pFile ); - + /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } - + /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ /* attempt to get the lock */ @@ -27087,7 +27087,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ if ( lrc ) { int tErrno = errno; /* unlock failed with an error */ - lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; + lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK; if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){ pFile->lastErrno = tErrno; rc = lrc; @@ -27097,7 +27097,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int tErrno = errno; reserved = 1; /* someone else might have it reserved */ - lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); + lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){ pFile->lastErrno = tErrno; rc = lrc; @@ -27151,15 +27151,15 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { assert( pFile ); - /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. + /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */ if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* grab an exclusive lock */ - + if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) { int tErrno = errno; /* didn't get, must be busy */ @@ -27171,7 +27171,7 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { /* got it, set the type and return ok */ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; } - OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), + OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS if( (rc & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR ){ @@ -27191,23 +27191,23 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { */ static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; - + assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, getpid())); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); - + /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */ if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* no, really, unlock. */ if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){ #ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS @@ -27261,14 +27261,14 @@ static int semCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) { unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); - + assert( pFile ); /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } - + /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; @@ -27327,14 +27327,14 @@ static int semLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem; int rc = SQLITE_OK; - /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. + /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive. ** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */ if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; rc = SQLITE_OK; goto sem_end_lock; } - + /* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */ if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; @@ -27364,18 +27364,18 @@ static int semUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock, pFile->eFileLock, getpid())); assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK ); - + /* no-op if possible */ if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){ return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */ if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) { pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return SQLITE_OK; } - + /* no, really unlock. */ if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) { int rc, tErrno = errno; @@ -27383,7 +27383,7 @@ static int semUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){ pFile->lastErrno = tErrno; } - return rc; + return rc; } pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK; return SQLITE_OK; @@ -27448,7 +27448,7 @@ struct ByteRangeLockPB2 /* ** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an ** AFP filesystem. -** +** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure. */ static int afpSetLock( @@ -27460,14 +27460,14 @@ static int afpSetLock( ){ struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb; int err; - + pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1; pb.startEndFlag = 0; pb.offset = offset; - pb.length = length; + pb.length = length; pb.fd = pFile->h; - - OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n", + + OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n", (setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""), offset, length)); err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0); @@ -27502,9 +27502,9 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ int reserved = 0; unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; afpLockingContext *context; - + SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; ); - + assert( pFile ); context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext; if( context->reserved ){ @@ -27512,17 +27512,17 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ return SQLITE_OK; } unixEnterMutex(); /* Because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */ - + /* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */ if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){ reserved = 1; } - + /* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */ if( !reserved ){ /* lock the RESERVED byte */ - int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1); + int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1); if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){ /* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore ** the original state */ @@ -27535,10 +27535,10 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){ rc=lrc; } } - + unixLeaveMutex(); OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved)); - + *pResOut = reserved; return rc; } @@ -27572,7 +27572,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode; afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext; - + assert( pFile ); OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock), @@ -27596,7 +27596,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK ); assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); - + /* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */ unixEnterMutex(); @@ -27605,18 +27605,18 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ /* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile* ** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY. */ - if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && + if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock && (pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK)) ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto afp_end_lock; } - + /* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already ** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and ** return SQLITE_OK. */ - if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && + if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK && (pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){ assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ); assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 ); @@ -27626,12 +27626,12 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ pInode->nLock++; goto afp_end_lock; } - + /* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before ** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will ** be released. */ - if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK + if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLock<PENDING_LOCK) ){ int failed; @@ -27641,30 +27641,30 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ goto afp_end_lock; } } - + /* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make ** operating system calls for the specified lock. */ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK ){ int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno = 0; long lk, mask; - + assert( pInode->nShared==0 ); assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 ); - + mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff; /* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */ /* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */ - lk = random(); + lk = random(); pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1); - lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, + lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1); if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){ lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno; } /* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */ lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0); - + if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) { pFile->lastErrno = lrc1Errno; rc = lrc1; @@ -27699,34 +27699,34 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ } if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) { /* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */ - - /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to + + /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to ** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the afpUnlock */ if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){ int failed2 = SQLITE_OK; /* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */ - failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, + failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 1); - if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, + if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){ /* Can't reestablish the shared lock. Sqlite can't deal, this is ** a critical I/O error */ - rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 : + rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 : SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; goto afp_end_lock; - } + } }else{ - rc = failed; + rc = failed; } } if( failed ){ rc = failed; } } - + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock; @@ -27734,10 +27734,10 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK; pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK; } - + afp_end_lock: unixLeaveMutex(); - OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), + OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock), rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed")); return rc; } @@ -27776,7 +27776,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { SimulateIOErrorBenign(1); SimulateIOError( h=(-1) ) SimulateIOErrorBenign(0); - + #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start ** reading the database file again, make sure that the @@ -27791,7 +27791,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { || pFile->transCntrChng==1 ); pFile->inNormalWrite = 0; #endif - + if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){ @@ -27804,11 +27804,11 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0); - } + } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){ rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0); - if( !rc ){ - context->reserved = 0; + if( !rc ){ + context->reserved = 0; } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){ @@ -27843,14 +27843,14 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) { } } } - + unixLeaveMutex(); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock; return rc; } /* -** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context +** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context */ static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) { int rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -27903,7 +27903,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ /* ** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific ** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative -** is available. +** is available. ** ********************* End of the NFS lock implementation ********************** ******************************************************************************/ @@ -27911,7 +27911,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ /****************************************************************************** **************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods ***************************** ** -** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the +** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the ** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods. The locking ** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per ** division). Those methods that are common to all locking modes @@ -27919,7 +27919,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){ */ /* -** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt +** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt ** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read. ** ** NB: If you define USE_PREAD or USE_PREAD64, then it might also @@ -27986,8 +27986,8 @@ static int seekAndRead(unixFile *id, sqlite3_int64 offset, void *pBuf, int cnt){ ** wrong. */ static int unixRead( - sqlite3_file *id, - void *pBuf, + sqlite3_file *id, + void *pBuf, int amt, sqlite3_int64 offset ){ @@ -28002,7 +28002,7 @@ static int unixRead( #if 0 assert( pFile->pUnused==0 || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512 - || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE + || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE ); #endif @@ -28040,7 +28040,7 @@ static int unixRead( /* ** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to ** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from -** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise, +** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise, ** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than ** nBuf). */ @@ -28100,10 +28100,10 @@ static int seekAndWrite(unixFile *id, i64 offset, const void *pBuf, int cnt){ ** or some other error code on failure. */ static int unixWrite( - sqlite3_file *id, - const void *pBuf, + sqlite3_file *id, + const void *pBuf, int amt, - sqlite3_int64 offset + sqlite3_int64 offset ){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; int wrote = 0; @@ -28115,7 +28115,7 @@ static int unixWrite( #if 0 assert( pFile->pUnused==0 || offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512 - || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE + || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE ); #endif @@ -28223,8 +28223,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0; ** ** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged. ** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content -** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is -** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However, +** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is +** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However, ** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the ** file size has changed. The only real difference between fdatasync() ** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the @@ -28238,7 +28238,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){ int rc; /* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as - ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering + ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering ** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros. */ #ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC @@ -28252,7 +28252,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly); #endif - /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and + /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and ** FULLSYNC. This is used during testing to verify that this procedure ** gets called with the correct arguments. */ @@ -28273,11 +28273,11 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){ rc = 1; } /* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync(). - ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local + ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local ** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC - ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync - ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call. - ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid + ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync + ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call. + ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid ** the fcntl call every time sync is called. */ if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd); @@ -28287,7 +28287,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){ ** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync */ rc = fsync(fd); -#else +#else rc = fdatasync(fd); #if OS_VXWORKS if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){ @@ -28443,7 +28443,7 @@ static int unixTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, i64 nByte){ #if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0 /* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently ** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will - ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on. + ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on. */ if( nByte<pFile->mmapSize ){ pFile->mmapSize = nByte; @@ -28489,8 +28489,8 @@ static int unixFileSize(sqlite3_file *id, i64 *pSize){ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*); #endif -/* -** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT +/* +** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT ** file-control operation. Enlarge the database to nBytes in size ** (rounded up to the next chunk-size). If the database is already ** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op. @@ -28499,15 +28499,15 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){ if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){ i64 nSize; /* Required file size */ struct stat buf; /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */ - + if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ) return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT; nSize = ((nByte+pFile->szChunk-1) / pFile->szChunk) * pFile->szChunk; if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){ #if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE - /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate() - ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success, + /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate() + ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success, ** or an error number on failure". See the manpage for details. */ int err; do{ @@ -28673,7 +28673,7 @@ static int unixFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){ ** a database and its journal file) that the sector size will be the ** same for both. */ -#ifndef __QNXNTO__ +#ifndef __QNXNTO__ static int unixSectorSize(sqlite3_file *NotUsed){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); return SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE; @@ -28690,7 +28690,7 @@ static int unixSectorSize(sqlite3_file *id){ unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id; if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){ struct statvfs fsInfo; - + /* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */ pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE; pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0; @@ -28791,7 +28791,7 @@ static int unixDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *id){ /* ** Return the system page size. ** -** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file. +** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file. ** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize(). */ static int unixGetpagesize(void){ @@ -28807,7 +28807,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* -** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer. +** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer. ** ** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread ** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance @@ -28827,7 +28827,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){ ** nRef ** ** The following fields are read-only after the object is created: -** +** ** fid ** zFilename ** @@ -28952,7 +28952,7 @@ static int unixShmSystemLock( } #endif - return rc; + return rc; } /* @@ -29004,20 +29004,20 @@ static void unixShmPurge(unixFile *pFd){ } /* -** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd. +** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd. ** This particular implementation uses mmapped files. ** ** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory ** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database ** file with the "-shm" suffix added. For example, if the database file ** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped -** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm". +** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm". ** ** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an ** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory ** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions ** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same -** database to end up using different files for shared memory - +** database to end up using different files for shared memory - ** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting ** in database corruption. Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage ** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm" @@ -29083,7 +29083,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){ memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename); zShmFilename = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1]; #ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY - sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename, + sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename, SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x", (u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev); #else @@ -29116,9 +29116,9 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){ ** the original owner will not be able to connect. */ osFchown(pShmNode->h, sStat.st_uid, sStat.st_gid); - + /* Check to see if another process is holding the dead-man switch. - ** If not, truncate the file to zero length. + ** If not, truncate the file to zero length. */ rc = SQLITE_OK; if( unixShmSystemLock(pShmNode, F_WRLCK, UNIX_SHM_DMS, 1)==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -29146,7 +29146,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){ ** the cover of the unixEnterMutex() mutex and the pointer from the ** new (struct unixShm) object to the pShmNode has been set. All that is ** left to do is to link the new object into the linked list starting - ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex + ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex ** mutex. */ sqlite3_mutex_enter(pShmNode->mutex); @@ -29164,22 +29164,22 @@ shm_open_err: } /* -** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the -** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions -** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion +** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the +** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions +** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion ** bytes in size. ** ** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL. ** ** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory ** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a -** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If -** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet +** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If +** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet ** been allocated, it is allocated by this function. ** ** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by -** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes -** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped +** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes +** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped ** memory and SQLITE_OK returned. */ static int unixShmMap( @@ -29229,7 +29229,7 @@ static int unixShmMap( rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE; goto shmpage_out; } - + if( sStat.st_size<nByte ){ /* The requested memory region does not exist. If bExtend is set to ** false, exit early. *pp will be set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. @@ -29277,7 +29277,7 @@ static int unixShmMap( void *pMem; if( pShmNode->h>=0 ){ pMem = osMmap(0, nMap, - pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, + pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->h, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion ); if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){ @@ -29368,7 +29368,7 @@ static int unixShmLock( if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ p->exclMask &= ~mask; p->sharedMask &= ~mask; - } + } }else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){ u16 allShared = 0; /* Union of locks held by connections other than "p" */ @@ -29407,7 +29407,7 @@ static int unixShmLock( break; } } - + /* Get the exclusive locks at the system level. Then if successful ** also mark the local connection as being locked. */ @@ -29426,7 +29426,7 @@ static int unixShmLock( } /* -** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory. +** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory. ** ** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before ** any load or store begun after the barrier. @@ -29440,7 +29440,7 @@ static void unixShmBarrier( } /* -** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying +** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying ** storage if deleteFlag is true. ** ** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this @@ -29511,7 +29511,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd){ } /* -** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file +** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file ** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded. ** ** If successful, this function sets the following variables: @@ -29601,14 +29601,14 @@ static void unixRemapfile( /* ** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file -** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if -** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still +** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if +** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still ** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op. ** -** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of -** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the +** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of +** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the ** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the -** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured +** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured ** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not @@ -29655,7 +29655,7 @@ static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nByte){ ** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final ** value of *pp is undefined in this case. ** -** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually +** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually ** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch(). */ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){ @@ -29680,13 +29680,13 @@ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){ } /* -** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a +** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a ** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second ** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding -** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation. +** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation. ** -** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called -** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping +** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called +** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping ** may now be invalid and should be unmapped. */ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){ @@ -29694,7 +29694,7 @@ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){ unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd; /* The underlying database file */ UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff); - /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding + /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding ** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference), ** then there must be at least one outstanding. */ assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) ); @@ -29902,8 +29902,8 @@ IOMETHODS( #endif #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE -/* -** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy +/* +** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy ** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods ** object that implements that strategy. ** @@ -29945,8 +29945,8 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl( } /* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs". - ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds, - ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks. + ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds, + ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks. */ lockInfo.l_len = 1; lockInfo.l_start = 0; @@ -29962,14 +29962,14 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl( return &dotlockIoMethods; } } -static const sqlite3_io_methods +static const sqlite3_io_methods *(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl; #endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ #if OS_VXWORKS && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE -/* -** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy +/* +** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy ** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods ** object that implements that strategy. ** @@ -30000,7 +30000,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl( return &semIoMethods; } } -static const sqlite3_io_methods +static const sqlite3_io_methods *(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl; #endif /* OS_VXWORKS && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ @@ -30039,7 +30039,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile( ** include the special Apple locking styles. */ #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE - assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/' + assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/' || pVfs->pAppData==(void*)&autolockIoFinder ); #else assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/' ); @@ -30139,14 +30139,14 @@ static int fillInUnixFile( robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__); h = -1; } - unixLeaveMutex(); + unixLeaveMutex(); } } #endif else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){ /* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in - ** the dotlockLockingContext + ** the dotlockLockingContext */ char *zLockFile; int nFilename; @@ -30184,7 +30184,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile( unixLeaveMutex(); } #endif - + pNew->lastErrno = 0; #if OS_VXWORKS if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -30250,14 +30250,14 @@ static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){ /* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just ** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this - ** function failing. + ** function failing. */ SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR ); zDir = unixTempFileDir(); if( zDir==0 ) zDir = "."; - /* Check that the output buffer is large enough for the temporary file + /* Check that the output buffer is large enough for the temporary file ** name. If it is not, return SQLITE_ERROR. */ if( (strlen(zDir) + strlen(SQLITE_TEMP_FILE_PREFIX) + 18) >= (size_t)nBuf ){ @@ -30287,7 +30287,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*); #endif /* -** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database +** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database ** file (not a journal or master-journal file) identified by pathname ** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second ** argument to this function. @@ -30296,7 +30296,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*); ** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some ** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock. ** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment -** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for +** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for ** further details. Also, ticket #4018. ** ** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no @@ -30307,8 +30307,8 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){ /* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because ** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure), - ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better - ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure + ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better + ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure ** feature. */ #if !OS_VXWORKS struct stat sStat; /* Results of stat() call */ @@ -30348,16 +30348,16 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){ ** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions ** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned ** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is -** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is +** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is ** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified. ** ** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become ** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using ** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask. -** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then -** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the -** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever -** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions +** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then +** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the +** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever +** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions ** as the associated database file. ** ** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the @@ -30390,10 +30390,10 @@ static int findCreateFileMode( ** "<path to db>-journalNN" ** "<path to db>-walNN" ** - ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are + ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are ** used by the test_multiplex.c module. */ - nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1; + nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1; #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES while( nDb>0 && sqlite3Isalnum(zPath[nDb]) ) nDb--; if( nDb==0 || zPath[nDb]!='-' ) return SQLITE_OK; @@ -30422,7 +30422,7 @@ static int findCreateFileMode( /* ** Open the file zPath. -** +** ** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this ** one: ** @@ -30433,13 +30433,13 @@ static int findCreateFileMode( ** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags: ** ** ReadWrite() -> (READWRITE | CREATE) -** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY) +** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY) ** OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE) ** ** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If ** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the -** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new -** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for +** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new +** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for ** OpenExclusive(). */ static int unixOpen( @@ -30474,8 +30474,8 @@ static int unixOpen( ** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d. */ int syncDir = (isCreate && ( - eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL - || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL + eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL + || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL )); @@ -30485,9 +30485,9 @@ static int unixOpen( char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2]; const char *zName = zPath; - /* Check the following statements are true: + /* Check the following statements are true: ** - ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and + ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and ** (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and ** (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set. ** (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set. @@ -30497,7 +30497,7 @@ static int unixOpen( assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate); assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate); - /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never + /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never ** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files. */ assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB ); assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL ); @@ -30505,9 +30505,9 @@ static int unixOpen( assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ); /* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */ - assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB - || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL - || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL + assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB + || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL + || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL ); @@ -30557,7 +30557,7 @@ static int unixOpen( /* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function ** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as - ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the + ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the ** 'conch file' locking functions later on. */ if( isReadonly ) openFlags |= O_RDONLY; if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR; @@ -30630,7 +30630,7 @@ static int unixOpen( noLock = eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB; - + #if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){ ((unixFile*)pFile)->lastErrno = errno; @@ -30657,7 +30657,7 @@ static int unixOpen( char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING"); int useProxy = 0; - /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means + /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means ** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only. */ if( envforce!=NULL ){ useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0; @@ -30682,9 +30682,9 @@ static int unixOpen( if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:"); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ - /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile - ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically, - ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op + /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile + ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically, + ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op */ unixClose(pFile); return rc; @@ -30694,7 +30694,7 @@ static int unixOpen( } } #endif - + rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags); open_finished: @@ -30798,9 +30798,9 @@ static int unixAccess( /* ** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path ** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by -** zPath. +** zPath. ** -** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes +** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes ** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to ** this buffer before returning. */ @@ -30865,7 +30865,7 @@ static void unixDlError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBufOut){ unixLeaveMutex(); } static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){ - /* + /* ** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be ** cast into a pointer to a function. And yet the library dlsym() routine ** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function. So how do we @@ -30875,7 +30875,7 @@ static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){ ** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function. ** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function. ** (That assignment requires a cast.) Then we call the function that - ** x points to. + ** x points to. ** ** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where ** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*. But then, on the @@ -30918,7 +30918,7 @@ static int unixRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBuf){ ** tests repeatable. */ memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf); - randomnessPid = getpid(); + randomnessPid = getpid(); #if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) { int fd, got; @@ -30985,7 +30985,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_current_time = 0; /* Fake system time in seconds since 1 ** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the ** proleptic Gregorian calendar. ** -** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date +** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date ** cannot be found. */ static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){ @@ -31092,7 +31092,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ ** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking ** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a ** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file -** and onto a proxy file on the local file system. +** and onto a proxy file on the local file system. ** ** ** Using proxy locks @@ -31117,19 +31117,19 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ ** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the ** database file. For example: ** -** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db" +** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db" ** The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:") ** ** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not ** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via ** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another -** connection or process). +** connection or process). ** ** ** How proxy locking works ** ----------------------- ** -** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files: +** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files: ** ** * conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host ** at a time @@ -31156,11 +31156,11 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ ** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file). ** ** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is -** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made. +** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made. ** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where ** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it. -** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until -** the connection to the database is closed. +** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until +** the connection to the database is closed. ** ** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need ** to be created the first time they are used. @@ -31174,7 +31174,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ ** automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are ** named automatically using the same logic as ** PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:" -** +** ** SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG ** ** Enables the logging of error messages during host id file @@ -31189,8 +31189,8 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ ** ** Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the ** lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set. -** -** +** +** ** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING, ** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will ** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0 @@ -31200,12 +31200,12 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){ */ /* -** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX +** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX */ #if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE /* -** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote +** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote ** and local proxy files in it */ typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext; @@ -31220,10 +31220,10 @@ struct proxyLockingContext { sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod; /* Original I/O methods for close */ }; -/* -** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath, +/* +** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath, ** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length -** file path. +** file path. */ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){ int len; @@ -31240,7 +31240,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){ lPath, errno, getpid())); return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; } - len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen); + len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen); } # else len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen); @@ -31250,7 +31250,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){ if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){ len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen); } - + /* transform the db path to a unique cache name */ dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath); for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<(int)maxLen; i++){ @@ -31263,14 +31263,14 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* +/* ** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath */ static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){ int i, len; char buf[MAXPATHLEN]; int start = 0; - + assert(lockPath!=NULL); /* try to create all the intermediate directories */ len = (int)strlen(lockPath); @@ -31278,7 +31278,7 @@ static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){ for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){ if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){ /* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */ - if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/') + if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/') || (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){ buf[i]='\0'; if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){ @@ -31355,13 +31355,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile( switch (terrno) { case EACCES: return SQLITE_PERM; - case EIO: + case EIO: return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */ default: return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT; } } - + pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*pNew)); if( pNew==NULL ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; @@ -31375,13 +31375,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile( pUnused->fd = fd; pUnused->flags = openFlags; pNew->pUnused = pUnused; - + rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ *ppFile = pNew; return SQLITE_OK; } -end_create_proxy: +end_create_proxy: robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__); sqlite3_free(pNew); sqlite3_free(pUnused); @@ -31398,7 +31398,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_hostid_num = 0; /* Not always defined in the headers as it ought to be */ extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait); -/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN +/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN ** bytes of writable memory. */ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){ @@ -31425,7 +31425,7 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){ pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF)); } #endif - + return SQLITE_OK; } @@ -31436,14 +31436,14 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){ #define PROXY_PATHINDEX (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) #define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN) -/* -** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves +/* +** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves ** it back. The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the -** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is +** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is ** closed. Returns zero if successful. */ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){ - proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; + proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; char tPath[MAXPATHLEN]; char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; @@ -31457,7 +31457,7 @@ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){ /* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */ pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN); - if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 || + if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 || (strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen); goto end_breaklock; @@ -31499,24 +31499,24 @@ end_breaklock: return rc; } -/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the +/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the ** host id matches. */ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){ - proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; + proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; int rc = SQLITE_OK; int nTries = 0; struct timespec conchModTime; - + memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime)); do { rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType); nTries ++; if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){ /* If the lock failed (busy): - * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again. - * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait + * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again. + * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait * 10 sec and try again * 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed. */ @@ -31525,20 +31525,20 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){ pFile->lastErrno = errno; return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; } - + if( nTries==1 ){ conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec; usleep(500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/ - continue; + continue; } assert( nTries>1 ); - if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec || + if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec || conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } - - if( nTries==2 ){ + + if( nTries==2 ){ char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0); if( len<0 ){ @@ -31555,14 +31555,14 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } usleep(10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */ - continue; + continue; } - + assert( nTries==3 ); if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; if( lockType==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){ - rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK); + rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK); } if( !rc ){ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType); @@ -31570,19 +31570,19 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){ } } } while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 ); - + return rc; } -/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if -** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL -** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the -** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically +/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if +** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL +** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the +** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically ** and written to the conch file. */ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ - proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; - + proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; + if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){ return SQLITE_OK; }else{ @@ -31598,7 +31598,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ int readLen = 0; int tryOldLockPath = 0; int forceNewLockPath = 0; - + OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h, (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), getpid())); @@ -31618,21 +31618,21 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ pFile->lastErrno = conchFile->lastErrno; rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ; goto end_takeconch; - }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) || + }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) || readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){ - /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new - ** conch file. + /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new + ** conch file. */ createConch = 1; } /* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch - ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll - ** retry with a new auto-generated path + ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll + ** retry with a new auto-generated path */ do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */ if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){ - hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, + hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN); /* if the conch has data compare the contents */ if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){ @@ -31641,7 +31641,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ */ if( hostIdMatch ){ size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX); - + if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){ pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1; } @@ -31657,23 +31657,23 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX) ){ /* conch host and lock path match */ - goto end_takeconch; + goto end_takeconch; } } - + /* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */ if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; goto end_takeconch; } - + /* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */ if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){ proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN); tempLockPath = lockPath; /* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */ } - + /* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process ** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big ** stick. @@ -31684,7 +31684,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ /* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this ** same process is still holding a shared lock. */ rc = SQLITE_BUSY; - } else { + } else { rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); } }else{ @@ -31693,7 +31693,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN]; int writeSize = 0; - + writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION; memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN); if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){ @@ -31705,8 +31705,8 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize); rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0); fsync(conchFile->h); - /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a - ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database + /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a + ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){ struct stat buf; @@ -31730,14 +31730,14 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ } }else{ int code = errno; - fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n", + fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n", err, code, strerror(code)); #endif } } } conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK); - + end_takeconch: OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE %d\n", pFile->h)); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){ @@ -31760,7 +31760,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){ /* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path - ** so try again via auto-naming + ** so try again via auto-naming */ forceNewLockPath = 1; tryOldLockPath = 0; @@ -31780,7 +31780,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ pCtx->conchHeld = 1; - + if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){ afpLockingContext *afpCtx; afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext; @@ -31792,7 +31792,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){ OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d %s\n", conchFile->h, rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed")); return rc; - } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file - + } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file - ** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */ } } @@ -31808,7 +31808,7 @@ static int proxyReleaseConch(unixFile *pFile){ pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext; conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h, - (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), + (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), getpid())); if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK); @@ -31836,13 +31836,13 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){ char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */ /* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to - ** the name of the original database file. */ + ** the name of the original database file. */ *pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(len + 8); if( conchPath==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM; } memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1); - + /* now insert a "." before the last / character */ for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){ if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){ @@ -31865,7 +31865,7 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){ /* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches -** the local lock file path +** the local lock file path */ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext; @@ -31874,7 +31874,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; - } + } /* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */ if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") || @@ -31892,7 +31892,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { sqlite3_free(oldPath); pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path); } - + return rc; } @@ -31906,7 +31906,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){ #if defined(__APPLE__) if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){ - /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field + /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field ** of the struct */ assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN ); strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath, MAXPATHLEN); @@ -31926,9 +31926,9 @@ static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){ } /* -** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking +** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking ** will be performed on the local proxy lock file. The following fields -** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and +** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and ** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time: ** ->lockingContext ** ->pMethod @@ -31938,7 +31938,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1]; /* Name of the database file */ char *lockPath=NULL; int rc = SQLITE_OK; - + if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } @@ -31948,7 +31948,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { }else{ lockPath=(char *)path; } - + OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h, (lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), getpid())); @@ -31982,7 +31982,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { rc = SQLITE_OK; } } - } + } if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){ pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath); } @@ -31994,7 +31994,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { } } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ - /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned, + /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned, ** switch the locking context and pMethod then return. */ pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext; @@ -32002,12 +32002,12 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) { pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod; pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods; }else{ - if( pCtx->conchFile ){ + if( pCtx->conchFile ){ pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile); sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile); } sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath); - sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath); + sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath); sqlite3_free(pCtx); } OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d %s\n", pFile->h, @@ -32052,9 +32052,9 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){ }else{ const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg; if( isProxyStyle ){ - proxyLockingContext *pCtx = + proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext; - if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:") + if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:") || (pCtx->lockProxyPath && !strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN)) ){ @@ -32179,7 +32179,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) { unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy; unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile; int rc = SQLITE_OK; - + if( lockProxy ){ rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK); if( rc ) return rc; @@ -32216,7 +32216,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) { ** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems. ** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also ** restricted to MacOSX. -** +** ** ******************* End of the proxy lock implementation ********************** ******************************************************************************/ @@ -32234,8 +32234,8 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) { ** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they ** should not be used. */ -SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ - /* +SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ + /* ** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object. ** The name of the VFS is NAME. The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer ** to the "finder" function. (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because @@ -32251,7 +32251,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ ** ** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods ** object. But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little - ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the + ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the ** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for ** that filesystem time. */ @@ -32321,7 +32321,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ for(i=0; i<(sizeof(aVfs)/sizeof(sqlite3_vfs)); i++){ sqlite3_vfs_register(&aVfs[i], i==0); } - return SQLITE_OK; + return SQLITE_OK; } /* @@ -32331,10 +32331,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){ ** to release dynamically allocated objects. But not on unix. ** This routine is a no-op for unix. */ -SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ - return SQLITE_OK; +SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ + return SQLITE_OK; } - + #endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */ /************** End of os_unix.c *********************************************/ @@ -32407,8 +32407,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ */ #ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE -/* -** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing +/* +** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing ** high-performance timing routines. */ /************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/ @@ -32466,7 +32466,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val)); return val; } - + #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__)) __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ @@ -38116,8 +38116,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ ** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition. ** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality. ** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most -** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases, -** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs +** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases, +** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs ** to handle both cases well. ** ** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created. @@ -38137,12 +38137,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ /* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */ #define BITVEC_SZ 512 -/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how +/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how ** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */ #define BITVEC_USIZE (((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*)) -/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation. -** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE. +/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation. +** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE. ** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve ** performance. */ #define BITVEC_TELEM u8 @@ -38155,12 +38155,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){ /* Number of u32 values in hash table. */ #define BITVEC_NINT (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32)) -/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before +/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before ** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */ #define BITVEC_MXHASH (BITVEC_NINT/2) /* Hashing function for the aHash representation. -** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier -** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided +** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier +** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided ** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */ #define BITVEC_HASH(X) (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT) @@ -38206,7 +38206,7 @@ struct Bitvec { /* ** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize, -** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if +** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if ** malloc fails. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){ @@ -38459,7 +38459,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BitvecBuiltinTest(int sz, int *aOp){ break; } case 3: - case 4: + case 4: default: { nx = 2; sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i); @@ -38569,7 +38569,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){ if( addRemove & PCACHE_DIRTYLIST_REMOVE ){ assert( pPage->pDirtyNext || pPage==p->pDirtyTail ); assert( pPage->pDirtyPrev || pPage==p->pDirty ); - + /* Update the PCache1.pSynced variable if necessary. */ if( p->pSynced==pPage ){ PgHdr *pSynced = pPage->pDirtyPrev; @@ -38578,7 +38578,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){ } p->pSynced = pSynced; } - + if( pPage->pDirtyNext ){ pPage->pDirtyNext->pDirtyPrev = pPage->pDirtyPrev; }else{ @@ -38600,7 +38600,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){ } if( addRemove & PCACHE_DIRTYLIST_ADD ){ assert( pPage->pDirtyNext==0 && pPage->pDirtyPrev==0 && p->pDirty!=pPage ); - + pPage->pDirtyNext = p->pDirty; if( pPage->pDirtyNext ){ assert( pPage->pDirtyNext->pDirtyPrev==0 ); @@ -38645,7 +38645,7 @@ static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){ /*************************************************** General Interfaces ****** ** -** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these +** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these ** functions are threadsafe. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheInitialize(void){ @@ -38671,8 +38671,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void){ return sizeof(PCache); } /* ** Create a new PCache object. Storage space to hold the object -** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer. -** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by +** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer. +** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by ** calling sqlite3PcacheSize(). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheOpen( @@ -38770,7 +38770,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch( /* ** If the sqlite3PcacheFetch() routine is unable to allocate a new ** page because new clean pages are available for reuse and the cache -** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to +** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to ** try harder to allocate a page. This routine might invoke the stress ** callback to spill dirty pages to the journal. It will then try to ** allocate the new page and will only fail to allocate a new page on @@ -38787,13 +38787,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress( if( pCache->eCreate==2 ) return 0; - /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a + /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a ** page that does not require a journal-sync (one with PGHDR_NEED_SYNC - ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other + ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other ** unreferenced dirty page. */ - for(pPg=pCache->pSynced; - pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)); + for(pPg=pCache->pSynced; + pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)); pPg=pPg->pDirtyPrev ); pCache->pSynced = pPg; @@ -38803,7 +38803,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress( if( pPg ){ int rc; #ifdef SQLITE_LOG_CACHE_SPILL - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL, "spill page %d making room for %d - cache used: %d/%d", pPg->pgno, pgno, sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache.xPagecount(pCache->pCache), @@ -38967,7 +38967,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(PCache *pCache){ } /* -** Change the page number of page p to newPgno. +** Change the page number of page p to newPgno. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheMove(PgHdr *p, Pgno newPgno){ PCache *pCache = p->pCache; @@ -39021,7 +39021,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClose(PCache *pCache){ sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache2.xDestroy(pCache->pCache); } -/* +/* ** Discard the contents of the cache. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClear(PCache *pCache){ @@ -39109,7 +39109,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE PgHdr *sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(PCache *pCache){ return pcacheSortDirtyList(pCache->pDirty); } -/* +/* ** Return the total number of referenced pages held by the cache. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheRefCount(PCache *pCache){ @@ -39123,7 +39123,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePageRefcount(PgHdr *p){ return p->nRef; } -/* +/* ** Return the total number of pages in the cache. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache *pCache){ @@ -39199,7 +39199,7 @@ typedef struct PgHdr1 PgHdr1; typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot; typedef struct PGroup PGroup; -/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set +/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set ** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned ** pages when they are under memory pressure. A PGroup is an instance of ** the following object. @@ -39235,12 +39235,12 @@ struct PGroup { ** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which ** is an instance of this object. ** -** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as +** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as ** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles. */ struct PCache1 { /* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable - ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be + ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be ** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method. ** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax. */ @@ -39263,9 +39263,9 @@ struct PCache1 { }; /* -** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following +** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following ** structure. Unless SQLITE_PCACHE_SEPARATE_HEADER is defined, a buffer of -** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure +** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure ** in memory. */ struct PgHdr1 { @@ -39330,7 +39330,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal { /******** Page Allocation/SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE Related Functions **************/ /* -** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is +** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is ** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE ** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large ** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each. @@ -39360,8 +39360,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup(void *pBuf, int sz, int n){ /* ** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer -** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no -** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls +** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no +** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls ** back to sqlite3Malloc(). ** ** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time. Global variables @@ -39458,7 +39458,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1AllocPage(PCache1 *pCache){ void *pPg; /* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This - ** is because it may call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that + ** is because it may call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that ** this mutex is not held. */ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCache->pGroup->mutex) ); pcache1LeaveMutex(pCache->pGroup); @@ -39593,7 +39593,7 @@ static void pcache1ResizeHash(PCache1 *p){ } /* -** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the +** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the ** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup ** LRU list, then this function is a no-op. ** @@ -39628,7 +39628,7 @@ static void pcache1PinPage(PgHdr1 *pPage){ /* -** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table +** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table ** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in. ** ** The PGroup mutex must be held when this function is called. @@ -39663,8 +39663,8 @@ static void pcache1EnforceMaxPage(PGroup *pGroup){ } /* -** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value) -** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this +** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value) +** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this ** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded. ** ** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called. @@ -39677,7 +39677,7 @@ static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe( unsigned int h; assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCache->pGroup->mutex) ); for(h=0; h<pCache->nHash; h++){ - PgHdr1 **pp = &pCache->apHash[h]; + PgHdr1 **pp = &pCache->apHash[h]; PgHdr1 *pPage; while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){ if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){ @@ -39715,7 +39715,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){ /* ** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method. -** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does +** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does ** not need to be freed. */ static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){ @@ -39788,7 +39788,7 @@ static sqlite3_pcache *pcache1Create(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable){ } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method. ** ** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache. */ @@ -39807,7 +39807,7 @@ static void pcache1Cachesize(sqlite3_pcache *p, int nMax){ } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method. ** ** Free up as much memory as possible. */ @@ -39826,7 +39826,7 @@ static void pcache1Shrink(sqlite3_pcache *p){ } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method. */ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){ int n; @@ -39847,8 +39847,8 @@ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){ ** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster. */ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( - PCache1 *pCache, - unsigned int iKey, + PCache1 *pCache, + unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ unsigned int nPinned; @@ -39899,8 +39899,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( } } - /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found, - ** attempt to allocate a new one. + /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found, + ** attempt to allocate a new one. */ if( !pPage ){ if( createFlag==1 ) sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); @@ -39927,13 +39927,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method. ** ** Fetch a page by key value. ** ** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on ** the value of the createFlag argument. 0 means do not allocate a new -** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2 +** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2 ** means to try really hard to allocate a new page. ** ** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory @@ -39944,7 +39944,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( ** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page, ** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2). ** -** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a +** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a ** copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned. ** ** 2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is @@ -39958,13 +39958,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( ** PCache1.nMax, or ** ** (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than -** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of +** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of ** nMin for all other purgeable caches, or ** ** 4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked ** as purgeable, and if one of the following is true: ** -** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already +** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already ** PCache1.nMax, or ** ** (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is @@ -39976,13 +39976,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2( ** ** then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right ** size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and -** proceed to step 5. +** proceed to step 5. ** ** 5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer. */ static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch( - sqlite3_pcache *p, - unsigned int iKey, + sqlite3_pcache *p, + unsigned int iKey, int createFlag ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; @@ -40019,18 +40019,18 @@ static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch( ** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling). */ static void pcache1Unpin( - sqlite3_pcache *p, - sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, + sqlite3_pcache *p, + sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg, int reuseUnlikely ){ PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg; PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup; - + assert( pPage->pCache==pCache ); pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup); - /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already + /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already ** part of the PGroup LRU list. */ assert( pPage->pLruPrev==0 && pPage->pLruNext==0 ); @@ -40058,7 +40058,7 @@ static void pcache1Unpin( } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method. */ static void pcache1Rekey( sqlite3_pcache *p, @@ -40069,7 +40069,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey( PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p; PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg; PgHdr1 **pp; - unsigned int h; + unsigned int h; assert( pPage->iKey==iOld ); assert( pPage->pCache==pCache ); @@ -40094,7 +40094,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey( } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method. ** ** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to ** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number @@ -40111,7 +40111,7 @@ static void pcache1Truncate(sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iLimit){ } /* -** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method. +** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method. ** ** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create(). */ @@ -40163,7 +40163,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PCacheSetDefault(void){ ** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed. ** ** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has -** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number +** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number ** of bytes of memory released. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){ @@ -40252,7 +40252,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats( ** extracts the least value from the RowSet. ** ** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is -** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an +** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an ** upper bound on the size of allocated memory. No memory is freed ** until DESTROY. ** @@ -40298,7 +40298,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats( ** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused. The ** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list. */ -struct RowSetEntry { +struct RowSetEntry { i64 v; /* ROWID value for this entry */ struct RowSetEntry *pRight; /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */ struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */ @@ -40346,7 +40346,7 @@ struct RowSet { ** ** It must be the case that N is sufficient to make a Rowset. If not ** an assertion fault occurs. -** +** ** If N is larger than the minimum, use the surplus as an initial ** allocation of entries available to be filled. */ @@ -40442,7 +40442,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowSetInsert(RowSet *p, i64 rowid){ /* ** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates. ** -** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are +** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are ** assumed to each already be in sorted order. */ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge( @@ -40481,7 +40481,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge( /* ** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of ** increasing v. -*/ +*/ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){ unsigned int i; struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40]; @@ -40634,7 +40634,7 @@ static void rowSetToList(RowSet *p){ ** 0 if the RowSet is already empty. ** ** After this routine has been called, the sqlite3RowSetInsert() -** routine may not be called again. +** routine may not be called again. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetNext(RowSet *p, i64 *pRowid){ assert( p!=0 ); @@ -40669,7 +40669,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64 /* This routine is never called after sqlite3RowSetNext() */ assert( pRowSet!=0 && (pRowSet->rsFlags & ROWSET_NEXT)==0 ); - /* Sort entries into the forest on the first test of a new batch + /* Sort entries into the forest on the first test of a new batch */ if( iBatch!=pRowSet->iBatch ){ p = pRowSet->pEntry; @@ -40737,7 +40737,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64 ** ************************************************************************* ** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager". -** +** ** The pager is used to access a database disk file. It implements ** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that ** is separate from the database file. The pager also implements file @@ -40759,8 +40759,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64 ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* -** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging -** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to +** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging +** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to ** the implementation of each function in log.c for further details. */ @@ -40797,8 +40797,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64 #define WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA 4 -/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file. -** There is one object of this type for each pager. +/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file. +** There is one object of this type for each pager. */ typedef struct Wal Wal; @@ -40809,7 +40809,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalClose(Wal *pWal, int sync_flags, int, u8 *); /* Set the limiting size of a WAL file. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal*, i64); -/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot. A +/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot. A ** snapshot is like a read-transaction. It is the state of the database ** at an instant in time. sqlite3WalOpenSnapshot gets a read lock and ** preserves the current state even if the other threads or processes @@ -40844,7 +40844,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalSavepointUndo(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData); /* Write a frame or frames to the log. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(Wal *pWal, int, PgHdr *, Pgno, int, int); -/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */ +/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint( Wal *pWal, /* Write-ahead log connection */ int eMode, /* One of PASSIVE, FULL and RESTART */ @@ -40871,7 +40871,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op); /* Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the -** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. +** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal); @@ -40902,60 +40902,60 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFramesize(Wal *pWal); ** ** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if ** one or more of the following are true about the page: -** +** ** (a) The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of ** the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and ** synced. -** +** ** (b) The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction. -** +** ** (c) The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in ** the database file at the start of the transaction. -** +** ** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the ** following are true: -** +** ** (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable. -** +** ** (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire ** transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence ** number consists of a single page change. -** +** ** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches ** both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written ** and the content in the database at the beginning of the current ** transaction. -** +** ** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size ** in length and are aligned on a page boundary. -** +** ** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and ** an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the ** first 100 bytes of the database file. -** +** ** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal ** being deleted, truncated, or zeroed. -** +** ** (6) If a master journal file is used, then all writes to the database file ** are synced prior to the master journal being deleted. -** +** ** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time) ** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to ** all queries. Note in particular the content of freelist leaf ** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence ** of the database. -** +** ** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set, -** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the +** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the ** journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically ** equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction. -** +** ** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS ** is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at ** the beginning of the transaction. (In some VFSes, the xTruncate ** method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will ** invoke it.) -** +** ** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range ** of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing ** the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same @@ -40988,7 +40988,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ /* ** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above -** to print out file-descriptors. +** to print out file-descriptors. ** ** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The ** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file @@ -41009,7 +41009,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** | | | ** | V | ** |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR -** | | ^ +** | | ^ ** | V | ** |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->| ** | | | @@ -41021,7 +41021,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** ** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each: -** +** ** OPEN -> READER [sqlite3PagerSharedLock] ** READER -> OPEN [pager_unlock] ** @@ -41033,7 +41033,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** WRITER_*** -> ERROR [pager_error] ** ERROR -> OPEN [pager_unlock] -** +** ** ** OPEN: ** @@ -41047,9 +41047,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** READER: ** -** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in +** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in ** rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently -** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is +** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is ** open. The database size is known in this state. ** ** A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when @@ -41059,28 +41059,28 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way ** a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN ** is via the ERROR state (see below). -** +** ** * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot). ** * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file. -** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read +** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read ** transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables ** may not be trusted at this point. ** * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open. -** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that +** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that ** there is no hot-journal in the file-system. ** ** WRITER_LOCKED: ** ** The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction -** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks -** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual +** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks +** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual ** modifications to the cache or database have taken place. ** -** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with +** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with ** BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when -** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened -** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while -** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database +** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened +** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while +** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database ** file. ** ** IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file. @@ -41088,7 +41088,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. ** ** * A write transaction is active. -** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater +** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater ** lock is held on the database file. ** * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction ** is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully @@ -41107,7 +41107,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file. -** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written +** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written ** to it, but the header has not been synced to disk. ** * The contents of the page cache have been modified. ** @@ -41120,7 +41120,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** * A write transaction is active. ** * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file. -** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written +** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written ** and synced to disk. ** * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly ** written to disk). @@ -41132,8 +41132,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD ** state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the ** database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply -** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is -** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper +** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is +** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper ** layer must either commit or rollback the transaction. ** ** * A write transaction is active. @@ -41141,19 +41141,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished. ** If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to ** commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need -** to rollback the transaction. +** to rollback the transaction. ** ** ERROR: ** ** The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including -** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it -** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents, +** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it +** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents, ** db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system. ** ** Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers ** cannot. ** -** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback, +** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback, ** the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state. ** At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state ** (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might @@ -41163,13 +41163,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** instead of READER following such an error. ** ** Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager -** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all +** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all ** outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to -** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the +** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the ** page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything ** is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback peformed) ** when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning -** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered +** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered ** from the error. ** ** Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if: @@ -41185,21 +41185,21 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** memory. ** ** In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree -** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition +** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition ** persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above. ** ** Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only ** statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error ** code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not ** automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a -** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent +** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent ** state. ** ** * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK. ** * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the ** last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state). ** * The pager is not an in-memory pager. -** +** ** ** Notes: ** @@ -41209,7 +41209,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN ** state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has -** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are +** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are ** executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state". ** ** * See also: assert_pager_state(). @@ -41223,7 +41223,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ #define PAGER_ERROR 6 /* -** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the +** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the ** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on ** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. ** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by @@ -41238,20 +41238,20 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held ** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value. ** -** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may +** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may ** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than ** required, but nothing really goes wrong. ** ** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves -** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file +** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file ** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED ** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock() ** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this ** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part ** of hot-journal detection. ** -** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED -** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may +** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED +** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may ** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but ** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens ** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active @@ -41262,12 +41262,12 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It ** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call ** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition -** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK +** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK ** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE ** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function ** PagerSharedLock() for more detail. ** -** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in +** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in ** PAGER_OPEN state. */ #define UNKNOWN_LOCK (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1) @@ -41287,7 +41287,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ #endif /* -** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method +** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method ** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead. ** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on ** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit. @@ -41302,7 +41302,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ ** ** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is ** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while -** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset +** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset ** immediately following the last journal record written into the main ** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint ** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()). @@ -41352,34 +41352,34 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** ** changeCountDone ** -** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter -** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is -** not updated more often than necessary. +** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter +** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is +** not updated more often than necessary. ** -** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which +** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which ** can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file. -** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is +** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is ** relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed, ** The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of ** updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction. ** -** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection +** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection ** need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction ** committed. ** ** setMaster ** ** When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may -** (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the +** (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the ** journal file before it is synced to disk. ** -** Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects -** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is +** Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects +** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is ** committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode. ** If a journal file does not contain a master-journal pointer, it is ** finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If -** it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized -** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were +** it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized +** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were ** running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode. ** ** Journal files that contain master journal pointers cannot be finalized @@ -41405,12 +41405,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written ** while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback(). The SPILLFLAG_OFF ** case is a user preference. -** +** ** If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from pagerStress() ** is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not. This flag is set ** by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size is larger than -** the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync from happening -** in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector. +** the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync from happening +** in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector. ** ** subjInMemory ** @@ -41418,16 +41418,16 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory ** sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files. ** -** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new +** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new ** write-transaction is opened. ** ** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize ** ** Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file. ** It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for -** OPEN and ERROR). +** OPEN and ERROR). ** -** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be +** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be ** larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset ** 28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file ** is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in @@ -41438,10 +41438,10 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** ** During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than ** dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly. -** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(), +** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(), ** dbSize is updated. ** -** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states +** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states ** PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize ** variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback, ** and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before @@ -41450,12 +41450,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of ** the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the ** write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made -** to write or truncate the database file on disk. +** to write or truncate the database file on disk. ** -** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress -** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If, -** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates -** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize), +** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress +** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If, +** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates +** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize), ** pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize() ** to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required. ** dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case @@ -41466,20 +41466,20 @@ struct PagerSavepoint { ** dbHintSize ** ** The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to -** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method. +** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method. ** ** dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a ** write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and ** dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called, ** dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the -** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for +** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for ** details. ** ** errCode ** ** The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It -** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode -** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX +** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode +** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX ** sub-codes. */ struct Pager { @@ -41571,7 +41571,7 @@ struct Pager { /* ** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains -** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS +** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS ** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status(). */ #define PAGER_STAT_HIT 0 @@ -41628,7 +41628,7 @@ static const unsigned char aJournalMagic[] = { #define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8) /* -** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same +** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same ** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize(). */ #define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize) @@ -41690,7 +41690,7 @@ static int pagerUseWal(Pager *pPager){ # define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK #endif -#ifndef NDEBUG +#ifndef NDEBUG /* ** Usage: ** @@ -41719,24 +41719,24 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){ assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone ); - /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF". + /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF". ** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open. */ assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal ); assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) ); - /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since - ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter - ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing - ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may - ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It - ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR + /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since + ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter + ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing + ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may + ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It + ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR ** state. */ if( MEMDB ){ assert( p->noSync ); - assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY + assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ); assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN ); assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 ); @@ -41783,9 +41783,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){ ** to journal_mode=wal. */ assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK ); - assert( isOpen(p->jfd) - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + assert( isOpen(p->jfd) + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); } assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize ); @@ -41797,9 +41797,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){ assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); - assert( isOpen(p->jfd) - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + assert( isOpen(p->jfd) + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize ); break; @@ -41808,9 +41808,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){ assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); - assert( isOpen(p->jfd) - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + assert( isOpen(p->jfd) + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); break; @@ -41828,7 +41828,7 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){ } #endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */ -#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG +#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG /* ** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer ** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This @@ -41947,7 +41947,7 @@ static int write32bits(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 offset, u32 val){ ** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock. ** ** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is -** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of +** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of ** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this. */ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){ @@ -41970,11 +41970,11 @@ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){ /* ** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK, ** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the -** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state. +** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state. ** -** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is -** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. -** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation +** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is +** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. +** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation ** of this. */ static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){ @@ -42077,8 +42077,8 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){ /* ** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open. -** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the -** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied +** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the +** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied ** by the caller. See comments above writeMasterJournal() for the format ** used to store a master journal file name at the end of a journal file. ** @@ -42094,7 +42094,7 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){ ** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the master ** journal file name. ** -** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present +** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present ** zMaster[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. ** ** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite @@ -42112,8 +42112,8 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){ if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ)) || szJ<16 || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len)) - || len>=nMaster - || len==0 + || len>=nMaster + || len==0 || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum)) || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8)) || memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8) @@ -42135,13 +42135,13 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){ len = 0; } zMaster[len] = '\0'; - + return SQLITE_OK; } /* -** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately -** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector +** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately +** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector ** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes. ** ** i.e for a sector size of 512: @@ -42152,7 +42152,7 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){ ** 512 512 ** 100 512 ** 2000 2048 -** +** */ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){ i64 offset = 0; @@ -42174,12 +42174,12 @@ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){ ** ** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is ** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise, -** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case, -** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately +** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case, +** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately ** after writing or truncating it. ** ** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and -** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the +** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the ** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the ** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does ** not need to be synced following this operation. @@ -42204,8 +42204,8 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags); } - /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock - ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for + /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock + ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for ** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more ** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need ** to sync the file following this operation. @@ -42233,7 +42233,7 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){ ** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count. ** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal. ** - 4 bytes: Database page size. -** +** ** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space. */ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ @@ -42249,8 +42249,8 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); } - /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created - ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the + /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created + ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now. */ for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){ @@ -42261,10 +42261,10 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager); - /* + /* ** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this ** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time. - ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced, + ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced, ** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number ** of records (see syncJournal()). ** @@ -42283,7 +42283,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ */ assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync ); if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY) - || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) + || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND) ){ memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic)); put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff); @@ -42291,7 +42291,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4); } - /* The random check-hash initializer */ + /* The random check-hash initializer */ sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit); put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit); /* The initial database size */ @@ -42310,23 +42310,23 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){ memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0, nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20)); - /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the - ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the - ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next + /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the + ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the + ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next ** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file ** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS). ** - ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can + ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can ** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file, - ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of + ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of ** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what - ** is done. + ** is done. ** - ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the + ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the ** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize ** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required ** to populate the entire journal header sector. - */ + */ for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){ IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader)) rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff); @@ -42424,29 +42424,29 @@ static int readJournalHdr( /* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields ** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power - ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their + ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their ** respective compile time maximum limits. */ if( iPageSize<512 || iSectorSize<32 || iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE - || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0 + || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0 ){ - /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is - ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have - ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading + /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is + ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have + ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading ** the journal file here. */ return SQLITE_DONE; } - /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal. - ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within + /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal. + ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within ** PagerSetPagesize() is tested. */ rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1); testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK ); - /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by + /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by ** the process that created this journal. If this journal was ** created by a process other than this one, then this routine ** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value @@ -42476,7 +42476,7 @@ static int readJournalHdr( ** The master journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the master ** journal name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer. ** -** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction), +** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction), ** this call is a no-op. */ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ @@ -42489,8 +42489,8 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ assert( pPager->setMaster==0 ); assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); - if( !zMaster - || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY + if( !zMaster + || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ return SQLITE_OK; @@ -42525,16 +42525,16 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ } pPager->journalOff += (nMaster+20); - /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical + /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical ** journal-file may extend past the end of the master-journal name - ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is + ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is ** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file - ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine - ** whether or not the journal is hot. + ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine + ** whether or not the journal is hot. ** - ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal + ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal ** file to the required size. - */ + */ if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize)) && jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff ){ @@ -42571,7 +42571,7 @@ static void releaseAllSavepoints(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint +** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint ** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful ** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs. */ @@ -42600,8 +42600,8 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){ ** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is ** closed (if it is open). ** -** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the -** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to +** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the +** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to ** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode ** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated ** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction @@ -42609,9 +42609,9 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){ */ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){ - assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER - || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN - || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR + assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER + || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN + || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR ); sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal); @@ -42684,17 +42684,17 @@ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){ /* ** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires ** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may ahve occurred. -** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second -** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The -** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function. +** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second +** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The +** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function. ** ** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the ** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code ** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state, ** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode. ** -** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache -** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding +** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache +** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding ** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when ** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need ** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if @@ -42718,27 +42718,27 @@ static int pager_error(Pager *pPager, int rc){ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage); /* -** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by -** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called +** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by +** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called ** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening ** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a ** database transaction. -** +** ** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called ** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less ** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op. ** ** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released. ** -** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal -** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a +** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal +** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a ** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this ** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized ** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and ** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows: ** ** journalMode==MEMORY -** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an +** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an ** in-memory journal. ** ** journalMode==TRUNCATE @@ -42758,12 +42758,12 @@ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage); ** journalMode==PERSIST is used instead. ** ** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state. -** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is +** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is ** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during ** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the -** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the +** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the ** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still ** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the ** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related @@ -42782,9 +42782,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ ** 1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with ** eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. ** - ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE + ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE ** lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a - ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER + ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER ** and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed. */ assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); @@ -42826,12 +42826,12 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ /* This branch may be executed with Pager.journalMode==MEMORY if ** a hot-journal was just rolled back. In this case the journal ** file should be closed and deleted. If this connection writes to - ** the database file, it will do so using an in-memory journal. + ** the database file, it will do so using an in-memory journal. */ int bDelete = (!pPager->tempFile && sqlite3JournalExists(pPager->jfd)); - assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE - || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY - || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE + || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY + || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd); if( bDelete ){ @@ -42858,8 +42858,8 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ sqlite3PcacheTruncate(pPager->pPCache, pPager->dbSize); if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ - /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in - ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE + /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in + ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE ** lock held on the database file. */ rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal); @@ -42867,7 +42867,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ }else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){ /* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal ** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image. - ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction + ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction ** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the ** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum ** required size. */ @@ -42880,7 +42880,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK; } - if( !pPager->exclusiveMode + if( !pPager->exclusiveMode && (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0)) ){ rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); @@ -42893,19 +42893,19 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){ } /* -** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the -** database file. +** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the +** database file. ** -** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt +** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt ** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The ** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock -** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this -** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next -** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one) +** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this +** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next +** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one) ** will roll it back. ** ** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or -** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause +** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause ** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the ** call to pager_unlock(), as described above. */ @@ -42926,10 +42926,10 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){ /* ** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes -** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the +** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the ** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit. ** -** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the +** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the ** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte ** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200). ** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer. @@ -42937,8 +42937,8 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){ ** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an ** incompatible journal file format. ** -** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely -** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed. +** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely +** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed. ** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be ** correct and the middle be corrupt. Thus, this "checksum" scheme, ** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption. @@ -42974,7 +42974,7 @@ static void pagerReportSize(Pager *pPager){ ** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset ** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal. ** -** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does +** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does ** not. ** ** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file @@ -42994,7 +42994,7 @@ static void pagerReportSize(Pager *pPager){ ** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be ** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in ** two circumstances: -** +** ** * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_MJ_PGNO), or ** * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file ** and the checksum field does not match the record content. @@ -43029,7 +43029,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( assert( aData ); /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */ assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) ); - /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction + /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction ** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is ** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager ** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback @@ -43096,7 +43096,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( ** assert()able. ** ** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the - ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked + ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked ** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for ** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty ** if the pager is in OPEN state. @@ -43154,18 +43154,18 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( }else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){ /* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to ** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential - ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it - ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be - ** current. + ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it + ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be + ** current. ** ** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite - ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen + ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen ** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then ** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage(). ** ** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing - ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty - ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as + ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty + ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as ** requiring a journal-sync before it is written. */ assert( isSavepnt ); @@ -43190,14 +43190,14 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( memcpy(pData, (u8*)aData, pPager->pageSize); pPager->xReiniter(pPg); if( isMainJrnl && (!isSavepnt || *pOffset<=pPager->journalHdr) ){ - /* If the contents of this page were just restored from the main - ** journal file, then its content must be as they were when the + /* If the contents of this page were just restored from the main + ** journal file, then its content must be as they were when the ** transaction was first opened. In this case we can mark the page ** as clean, since there will be no need to write it out to the ** database. ** ** There is one exception to this rule. If the page is being rolled - ** back as part of a savepoint (or statement) rollback from an + ** back as part of a savepoint (or statement) rollback from an ** unsynced portion of the main journal file, then it is not safe ** to mark the page as clean. This is because marking the page as ** clean will clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag. Since the page is @@ -43233,26 +43233,26 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( ** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the master journal file, ** and does so if it is. ** -** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not +** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not ** available for use within this function. ** -** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names -** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8 -** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a +** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names +** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8 +** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a ** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a master journal ** file for a transaction involving two databases might be: ** ** "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00" ** -** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child +** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child ** journals have been rolled back. ** -** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into +** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into ** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For ** each child journal, it checks if: ** ** * if the child journal exists, and if so -** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal +** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal ** file zMaster ** ** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria @@ -43262,12 +43262,12 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page( ** ** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This ** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation -** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors +** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors ** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load ** the entire contents of the master journal file. This could be -** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page +** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page ** size. */ static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ @@ -43345,7 +43345,7 @@ static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ } zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1); } - + sqlite3OsClose(pMaster); rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zMaster, 0); @@ -43361,20 +43361,20 @@ delmaster_out: /* -** This function is used to change the actual size of the database +** This function is used to change the actual size of the database ** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction, ** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal). ** ** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either -** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size -** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes). +** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size +** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes). ** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS ** xTruncate() method to truncate it. ** -** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than -** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if -** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it -** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to +** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than +** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if +** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it +** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to ** the end of the new file instead. ** ** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying @@ -43384,9 +43384,9 @@ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR ); assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER ); - - if( isOpen(pPager->fd) - && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN) + + if( isOpen(pPager->fd) + && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN) ){ i64 currentSize, newSize; int szPage = pPager->pageSize; @@ -43430,8 +43430,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SectorSize(sqlite3_file *pFile){ /* ** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given ** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method -** of the open database file. The sector size will be used -** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and +** of the open database file. The sector size will be used +** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and ** master journal pointers within created journal files. ** ** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes. @@ -43454,7 +43454,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile ); if( pPager->tempFile - || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) & + || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) & SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0 ){ /* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file @@ -43468,15 +43468,15 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ /* ** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to -** the state it was in before we started making changes. +** the state it was in before we started making changes. ** -** The journal file format is as follows: +** The journal file format is as follows: ** ** (1) 8 byte prefix. A copy of aJournalMagic[]. ** (2) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records ** in the journal. If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the ** number of page records from the journal size. -** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the +** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the ** sanity checksum. ** (4) 4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the ** database to during a rollback. @@ -43505,7 +43505,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ ** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the ** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption ** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be -** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care. +** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care. ** ** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed ** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled @@ -43517,7 +43517,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){ ** and an error code is returned. ** ** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal -** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is +** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is ** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE. ** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling ** back any content. If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is @@ -43567,9 +43567,9 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){ pPager->journalOff = 0; needPagerReset = isHot; - /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or - ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error - ** occurs. + /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or + ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error + ** occurs. */ while( 1 ){ /* Read the next journal header from the journal file. If there are @@ -43578,7 +43578,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){ ** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back. */ rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg); - if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ rc = SQLITE_OK; } @@ -43606,7 +43606,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){ ** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But ** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in ** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional - ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages + ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages ** should be computed based on the journal file size. */ if( nRec==0 && !isHot && @@ -43625,7 +43625,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){ pPager->dbSize = mxPg; } - /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the + /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the ** database file and/or page cache. */ for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){ @@ -43674,10 +43674,10 @@ end_playback: } #endif - /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or - ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but - ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter - ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive + /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or + ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but + ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter + ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive ** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not ** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency ** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just @@ -43721,7 +43721,7 @@ end_playback: /* -** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file and into +** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file and into ** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database ** file before this function is called. ** @@ -43809,15 +43809,15 @@ static void pager_write_changecounter(PgHdr *pPg){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL /* -** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been +** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been ** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back. -** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument +** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument ** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure. ** ** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references, ** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding ** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the -** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails, +** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails, ** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. */ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){ @@ -43847,7 +43847,7 @@ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){ ** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the ** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as ** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one - ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore + ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore ** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction, ** the backups must be restarted. */ @@ -43864,7 +43864,7 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){ PgHdr *pList; /* List of dirty pages to revert */ /* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already - ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the + ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the ** following: ** ** + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or @@ -43886,11 +43886,11 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){ ** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging ** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty), ** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have -** changed. +** changed. ** ** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number. ** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page. -*/ +*/ static int pagerWalFrames( Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */ PgHdr *pList, /* List of frames to log */ @@ -43934,7 +43934,7 @@ static int pagerWalFrames( pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList; if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList); - rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal, + rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal, pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){ @@ -44052,9 +44052,9 @@ static int pagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, Pgno *pnPage){ ** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code. ** ** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this -** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete -** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition -** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some +** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete +** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition +** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some ** other connection. */ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){ @@ -44092,21 +44092,21 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){ /* ** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback -** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when -** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction +** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when +** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction ** savepoint. ** -** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is +** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is ** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages, ** performed in the order specified: ** ** * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte -** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to +** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal ** file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero. ** ** * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played -** back starting from the journal header immediately following +** back starting from the journal header immediately following ** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file. ** ** * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting @@ -44122,7 +44122,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){ ** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case. ** ** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable -** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint +** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint ** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value ** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped. */ @@ -44143,7 +44143,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){ } } - /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint + /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint ** being reverted was opened. */ pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize; @@ -44196,7 +44196,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){ ** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the ** pager_playback() function for additional information. */ - if( nJRec==0 + if( nJRec==0 && pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff ){ nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager)); @@ -44354,7 +44354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetFlags( /* ** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library ** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for -** testing and analysis only. +** testing and analysis only. */ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0; @@ -44363,8 +44363,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0; /* ** Open a temporary file. ** -** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success -** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically +** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success +** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically ** delete the temporary file when it is closed. ** ** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified @@ -44396,9 +44396,9 @@ static int pagerOpentemp( /* ** Set the busy handler function. ** -** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns +** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns ** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock, -** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE +** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE ** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from ** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE ** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary: @@ -44410,7 +44410,7 @@ static int pagerOpentemp( ** SHARED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | No ** RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | Yes ** -** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is +** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is ** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is ** returned to the caller of the pager API function. */ @@ -44431,16 +44431,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler( } /* -** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size +** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size ** is passed in *pPageSize. ** ** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it -** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e. +** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e. ** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL). ** ** Otherwise, if all of the following are true: ** -** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power +** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power ** of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and ** ** * there are no outstanding page references, and @@ -44450,14 +44450,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler( ** ** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize. ** -** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc() -** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt -** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged. +** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc() +** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt +** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged. ** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned. ** ** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated ** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this -** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed, +** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed, ** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){ @@ -44467,7 +44467,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR ** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state ** of the Pager object is internally consistent. ** - ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in + ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in ** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that ** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function ** is a no-op for that case anyhow. @@ -44476,8 +44476,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR u32 pageSize = *pPageSize; assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) ); if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0) - && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 - && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize + && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 + && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize ){ char *pNew = NULL; /* New temp space */ i64 nByte = 0; @@ -44528,7 +44528,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive. +** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive. ** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative. And never reduce the ** maximum page count below the current size of the database. ** @@ -44569,11 +44569,11 @@ void enable_simulated_io_errors(void){ /* ** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory -** that pDest points to. +** that pDest points to. ** ** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or ** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is -** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this +** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this ** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or ** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes. ** @@ -44606,7 +44606,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerReadFileheader(Pager *pPager, int N, unsigned cha ** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on ** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database. ** -** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then +** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then ** this is considered a 1 page file. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){ @@ -44621,19 +44621,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){ ** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op ** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately). ** -** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke -** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat -** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to +** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke +** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat +** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to ** obtain the lock succeeds. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain -** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state +** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state ** variable to locktype before returning. */ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){ int rc; /* Return code */ - /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is + /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is ** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler ** may be invoked during, according to the comment above ** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(). @@ -44650,10 +44650,10 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){ } /* -** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the +** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the ** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache: ** -** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the +** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the ** current database image, in pages, OR ** ** b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not @@ -44666,9 +44666,9 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){ ** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after ** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current ** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either -** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and +** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and ** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the -** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that +** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that ** this circumstance cannot arise. */ #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) @@ -44684,9 +44684,9 @@ static void assertTruncateConstraint(Pager *pPager){ #endif /* -** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This -** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It -** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the +** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This +** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It +** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the ** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed. ** ** This function is only called right before committing a transaction. @@ -44701,11 +44701,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){ /* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to ** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are, - ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint + ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint ** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled ** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only - ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the - ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0), + ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the + ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0), ** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call ** is no longer correct. */ } @@ -44717,12 +44717,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){ ** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows ** that the entire journal file has been synced. ** -** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures +** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures ** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that ** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal ** content as this process. ** -** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, +** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, ** an SQLite error code. */ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){ @@ -44737,7 +44737,7 @@ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno. +** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno. ** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch(). ** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference ** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set @@ -44785,7 +44785,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage( } /* -** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an +** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an ** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage(). */ static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){ @@ -44821,7 +44821,7 @@ static void pagerFreeMapHdrs(Pager *pPager){ ** result in a coredump. ** ** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt -** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback +** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback ** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned ** to the caller. */ @@ -44843,8 +44843,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager){ pager_unlock(pPager); }else{ /* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback. - ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal - ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs + ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal + ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs ** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt. ** ** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager @@ -44900,7 +44900,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){ ** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback. ** ** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op. -** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the +** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the ** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows: ** ** * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need @@ -44912,7 +44912,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){ ** been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync ** mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated. ** -** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then +** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then ** journal file is synced. ** ** Or, in pseudo-code: @@ -44921,11 +44921,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){ ** if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){ ** if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>); ** <update nRec field> -** } +** } ** if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>); ** } ** -** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every +** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every ** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO ** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller. */ @@ -44953,10 +44953,10 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ ** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger ** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal ** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the - ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure - ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes - ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its - ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the + ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure + ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes + ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its + ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the ** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all ** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old, ** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption. @@ -44966,7 +44966,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ ** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized. ** ** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this - ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used + ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used ** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of ** the potential journal header. */ @@ -44993,7 +44993,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ ** it as a candidate for rollback. ** ** This is not required if the persistent media supports the - ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible + ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible ** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field ** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written ** and never needs to be updated. @@ -45013,7 +45013,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){ PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager)) - rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags| + rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags| (pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0) ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; @@ -45030,8 +45030,8 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ } } - /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just - ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on + /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just + ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on ** all pages. */ sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache); @@ -45051,9 +45051,9 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ ** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock ** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained, ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file. -** +** ** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file -** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is +** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is ** written out. ** ** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened, @@ -45068,7 +45068,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){ ** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in ** the database file. ** -** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error +** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error ** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot ** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned. */ @@ -45093,7 +45093,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){ ** file size will be. */ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) ); - if( rc==SQLITE_OK + if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->dbHintSize<pPager->dbSize && (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize) ){ @@ -45115,7 +45115,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){ */ if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){ i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */ - char *pData; /* Data to write */ + char *pData; /* Data to write */ assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 ); if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList); @@ -45127,8 +45127,8 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){ rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset); /* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match - ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this - ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize. + ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this + ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize. */ if( pgno==1 ){ memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers)); @@ -45156,11 +45156,11 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){ } /* -** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this +** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this ** function is a no-op. ** -** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An -** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen() +** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An +** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen() ** fails. */ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){ @@ -45176,15 +45176,15 @@ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal. -** It is the callers responsibility to use subjRequiresPage() to check +** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal. +** It is the callers responsibility to use subjRequiresPage() to check ** that it is really required before calling this function. ** ** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs ** for all open savepoints before returning. ** ** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO -** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or +** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or ** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint ** bitvec. */ @@ -45197,9 +45197,9 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){ assert( pPager->useJournal ); assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) ); assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 ); - assert( pagerUseWal(pPager) - || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) - || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize + assert( pagerUseWal(pPager) + || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg) + || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize ); rc = openSubJournal(pPager); @@ -45209,7 +45209,7 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){ void *pData = pPg->pData; i64 offset = (i64)pPager->nSubRec*(4+pPager->pageSize); char *pData2; - + CODEC2(pPager, pData, pPg->pgno, 7, return SQLITE_NOMEM, pData2); PAGERTRACE(("STMT-JOURNAL %d page %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno)); rc = write32bits(pPager->sjfd, offset, pPg->pgno); @@ -45230,14 +45230,14 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){ ** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some ** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object ** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory -** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is +** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is ** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page -** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first +** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first ** argument. ** ** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents ** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the -** journal file. +** journal file. ** ** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and ** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the @@ -45262,7 +45262,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ ** a rollback or by user request, respectively. ** ** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could - ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it + ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it ** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3 ** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to ** be called in the error state. Nevertheless, we include a NEVER() @@ -45282,21 +45282,21 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ pPg->pDirty = 0; if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ /* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */ - if( subjRequiresPage(pPg) ){ - rc = subjournalPage(pPg); + if( subjRequiresPage(pPg) ){ + rc = subjournalPage(pPg); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0); } }else{ - + /* Sync the journal file if required. */ - if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC + if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD ){ rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1); } - + /* If the page number of this page is larger than the current size of ** the database image, it may need to be written to the sub-journal. ** This is because the call to pager_write_pagelist() below will not @@ -45319,9 +45319,9 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ ** was when the transaction started, not as it was when "SAVEPOINT sp" ** was executed. ** - ** The solution is to write the current data for page X into the + ** The solution is to write the current data for page X into the ** sub-journal file now (if it is not already there), so that it will - ** be restored to its current value when the "ROLLBACK TO sp" is + ** be restored to its current value when the "ROLLBACK TO sp" is ** executed. */ if( NEVER( @@ -45329,7 +45329,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ ) ){ rc = subjournalPage(pPg); } - + /* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 ); @@ -45343,7 +45343,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg); } - return pager_error(pPager, rc); + return pager_error(pPager, rc); } @@ -45355,8 +45355,8 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ ** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open. ** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created ** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted -** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then -** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk. +** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then +** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk. ** This can be used to implement an in-memory database. ** ** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated @@ -45368,13 +45368,13 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){ ** of the PAGER_* flags. ** ** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter -** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files. +** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files. ** -** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened +** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened ** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to ** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL ** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM -** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or +** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or ** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( @@ -45403,10 +45403,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( /* Figure out how much space is required for each journal file-handle ** (there are two of them, the main journal and the sub-journal). This - ** is the maximum space required for an in-memory journal file handle + ** is the maximum space required for an in-memory journal file handle ** and a regular journal file-handle. Note that a "regular journal-handle" ** may be a wrapper capable of caching the first portion of the journal - ** file in memory to implement the atomic-write optimization (see + ** file in memory to implement the atomic-write optimization (see ** source file journal.c). */ if( sqlite3JournalSize(pVfs)>sqlite3MemJournalSize() ){ @@ -45467,7 +45467,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( } /* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the - ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal + ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal ** file name. The layout in memory is as follows: ** ** Pager object (sizeof(Pager) bytes) @@ -45482,7 +45482,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( ROUND8(sizeof(*pPager)) + /* Pager structure */ ROUND8(pcacheSize) + /* PCache object */ ROUND8(pVfs->szOsFile) + /* The main db file */ - journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */ + journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */ nPathname + 1 + nUri + /* zFilename */ nPathname + 8 + 2 /* zJournal */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL @@ -45581,7 +45581,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen( ** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal. ** ** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable. - */ + */ act_like_temp_file: tempFile = 1; pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; /* Pretend we already have a lock */ @@ -45590,7 +45590,7 @@ act_like_temp_file: readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY); } - /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of + /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of ** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -45630,10 +45630,10 @@ act_like_temp_file: /* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */ /* pPager->errMask = 0; */ pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile; - assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL + assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL || tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE ); assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 ); - pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile; + pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile; pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile; pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb; pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly; @@ -45701,7 +45701,7 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){ /* ** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to ** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in -** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that +** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that ** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal ** file exists if the following criteria are met: ** @@ -45720,10 +45720,10 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){ ** at the end of the file. If there is, and that master journal file ** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this ** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback() -** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and -** will not roll it back. +** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and +** will not roll it back. ** -** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and +** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and ** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is ** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying ** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error @@ -45751,7 +45751,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){ int locked = 0; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */ /* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the - ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess() + ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess() ** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before ** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call. If that ** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when @@ -45783,7 +45783,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){ /* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved ** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is ** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file. - ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not, + ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not, ** it can be ignored. */ if( !jrnlOpen ){ @@ -45833,7 +45833,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){ ** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a ** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining ** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal, -** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal +** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal ** rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking ** the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and ** discarded if they are found to be invalid. @@ -45844,8 +45844,8 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){ ** the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal ** file. ** -** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error -** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or +** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error +** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or ** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ @@ -45853,7 +45853,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ /* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no ** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either - ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in + ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in ** exclusive access mode. */ assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 ); @@ -45891,12 +45891,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ ** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the ** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the ** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the - ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the + ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the ** hot-journal back. - ** + ** ** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any - ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to - ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock + ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to + ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock ** on the database file. ** ** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is @@ -45906,17 +45906,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto failed; } - - /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the - ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because - ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open - ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access - ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist + + /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the + ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because + ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open + ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access + ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist ** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems). ** - ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some - ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before - ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it + ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some + ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before + ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it ** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this ** function was called and the journal file does not exist. */ @@ -45937,7 +45937,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ } } } - + /* Playback and delete the journal. Drop the database write ** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before ** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with @@ -45962,8 +45962,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ ** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The ** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock ** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be - ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for - ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation). + ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for + ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation). ** ** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to ** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition @@ -45971,7 +45971,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ ** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very ** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling ** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible - ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page + ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page ** references. */ pager_error(pPager, rc); @@ -45985,8 +45985,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ } if( !pPager->tempFile && ( - pPager->pBackup - || sqlite3PcachePagecount(pPager->pPCache)>0 + pPager->pBackup + || sqlite3PcachePagecount(pPager->pPCache)>0 || USEFETCH(pPager) )){ /* The shared-lock has just been acquired on the database file @@ -46000,8 +46000,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ ** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The ** other bytes change randomly with each file change when ** a codec is in use. - ** - ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be + ** + ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be ** detected. The chance of an undetected change is so small that ** it can be neglected. */ @@ -46072,7 +46072,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){ ** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in ** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is ** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op. -*/ +*/ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){ if( pPager->nMmapOut==0 && (sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0) ){ pagerUnlockAndRollback(pPager); @@ -46081,25 +46081,25 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){ /* ** Acquire a reference to page number pgno in pager pPager (a page -** reference has type DbPage*). If the requested reference is +** reference has type DbPage*). If the requested reference is ** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned. ** -** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned. +** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned. ** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data ** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may ** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing ** object with no outstanding references. ** -** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the -** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is +** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the +** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is ** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra ** data is left as it was when the page object was last used. ** -** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if a -** non-zero value is passed as the noContent parameter and the -** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no -** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the -** page is initialized to all zeros. +** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if a +** non-zero value is passed as the noContent parameter and the +** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no +** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the +** page is initialized to all zeros. ** ** If noContent is true, it means that we do not care about the contents ** of the page. This occurs in two scenarios: @@ -46142,7 +46142,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire( /* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except ** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY - ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a + ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a ** temporary or in-memory database. */ const int bMmapOk = (pgno!=1 && USEFETCH(pPager) && (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY)) @@ -46159,7 +46159,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire( return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } - /* If the pager is in the error state, return an error immediately. + /* If the pager is in the error state, return an error immediately. ** Otherwise, request the page from the PCache layer. */ if( pPager->errCode!=SQLITE_OK ){ rc = pPager->errCode; @@ -46172,7 +46172,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire( if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){ void *pData = 0; - rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd, + rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd, (i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData ); @@ -46226,7 +46226,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire( return SQLITE_OK; }else{ - /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to + /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to ** be initialized. */ pPg = *ppPage; @@ -46246,9 +46246,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire( } if( noContent ){ /* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign. - ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a - ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure - ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set + ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a + ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure + ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set ** a bit in a bit vector. */ sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); @@ -46293,12 +46293,12 @@ pager_acquire_err: /* ** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do ** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page, -** or 0 if the page is not in cache. +** or 0 if the page is not in cache. ** ** See also sqlite3PagerGet(). The difference between this routine ** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read ** in the page if the page is not already in cache. This routine -** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error +** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error ** has ever happened. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){ @@ -46335,24 +46335,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerUnref(DbPage *pPg){ /* ** This function is called at the start of every write transaction. -** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database +** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database ** file when this routine is called. ** ** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header ** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal -** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being -** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used +** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being +** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used ** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back. ** ** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode), ** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the -** already open file. +** already open file. ** ** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated. ** -** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return -** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or +** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return +** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or ** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails. */ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ @@ -46362,7 +46362,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 ); - + /* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op. But on ** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in ** an error state. */ @@ -46373,7 +46373,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){ return SQLITE_NOMEM; } - + /* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */ if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){ if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){ @@ -46381,7 +46381,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ }else{ const int flags = /* VFS flags to open journal file */ SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE| - (pPager->tempFile ? + (pPager->tempFile ? (SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL): (SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL) ); @@ -46401,9 +46401,9 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ } assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) ); } - - - /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open + + + /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open ** the sub-journal if necessary. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -46428,12 +46428,12 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a +** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a ** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op. ** ** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED ** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least -** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking +** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking ** functions need be called. ** ** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened @@ -46441,7 +46441,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){ ** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when ** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a ** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required -** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database, +** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database, ** or using a temporary file otherwise. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){ @@ -46489,9 +46489,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory ** ** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD ** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED. - ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint - ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database - ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in + ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint + ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database + ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in ** WAL mode. */ pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED; @@ -46511,9 +46511,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory } /* -** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the +** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the ** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into -** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the +** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the ** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs ** of any open savepoints as appropriate. */ @@ -46522,7 +46522,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int inJournal; - /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already + /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already ** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point. ** It is never called in the ERROR state. */ @@ -46540,7 +46540,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ ** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the ** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case. ** - ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page. + ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page. ** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then ** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state ** with pages marked as dirty in the cache. @@ -46560,7 +46560,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ if( inJournal && (pPager->nSavepoint==0 || !subjRequiresPage(pPg)) ){ assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) ); }else{ - + /* The transaction journal now exists and we have a RESERVED or an ** EXCLUSIVE lock on the main database file. Write the current page to ** the transaction journal if it is not there already. @@ -46597,11 +46597,11 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; - IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, + IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize)); PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count); PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n", - PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, + PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, ((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg))); pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize; @@ -46624,7 +46624,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){ ((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0))); } } - + /* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it, ** then write the current page to the statement journal. Note that ** the statement journal format differs from the standard journal format @@ -46712,7 +46712,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){ } } - /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages + /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages ** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because ** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the ** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them @@ -46735,9 +46735,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){ } /* -** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before -** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value -** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless +** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before +** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value +** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless ** this routine returns SQLITE_OK. ** ** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this @@ -46782,7 +46782,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIswriteable(DbPage *pPg){ ** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so ** that it does not get written to disk. ** -** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large +** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large ** DELETE operations. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){ @@ -46796,17 +46796,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){ } /* -** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file -** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at +** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file +** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at ** byte offset 24 of the pager file. The secondary change counter at ** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96. ** ** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false. ** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once. -** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an +** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an ** unconditional update of the change counters. ** -** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling +** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling ** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the ** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current ** transaction is committed. @@ -46814,7 +46814,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){ ** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled ** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case, ** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly -** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the +** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the ** sqlite3OsWrite() function. */ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){ @@ -46853,7 +46853,7 @@ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){ assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK ); /* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not - ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in + ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in ** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet() ** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK. */ @@ -46917,20 +46917,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSync(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){ /* ** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in -** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op. -** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on +** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op. +** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on ** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one. ** ** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is ** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned. -** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is +** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is ** returned. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; - assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD - || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD - || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED + assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD + || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD + || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ); assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){ @@ -46949,12 +46949,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){ ** ** * The database file change-counter is updated, ** * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used), -** * all dirty pages are written to the database file, +** * all dirty pages are written to the database file, ** * the database file is truncated (if required), and -** * the database file synced. +** * the database file synced. ** -** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize -** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or +** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize +** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or ** delete the master journal file if specified). ** ** Note that if zMaster==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value @@ -46982,7 +46982,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( /* If a prior error occurred, report that error again. */ if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return pPager->errCode; - PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n", + PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n", pPager->zFilename, zMaster, pPager->dbSize)); /* If no database changes have been made, return early. */ @@ -47016,11 +47016,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( }else{ /* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it ** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization - ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the - ** runtime criteria to use the operation: + ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the + ** runtime criteria to use the operation: ** ** * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for - ** blocks of size page-size, and + ** blocks of size page-size, and ** * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and ** * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file. ** @@ -47030,7 +47030,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( ** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate() ** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call ** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect - ** mode. + ** mode. ** ** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable, ** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter @@ -47039,19 +47039,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE PgHdr *pPg; - assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) - || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) + || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ); - if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd) - && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager) + if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd) + && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager) && pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize && (0==(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty) ){ - /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The - ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1 - ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1 - ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write + /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The + ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1 + ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1 + ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write ** property of the host file-system, this is safe. */ rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1); @@ -47065,28 +47065,28 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0); #endif if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; - - /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master - ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file, + + /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master + ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file, ** or if zMaster is NULL (no master journal), then this call is a no-op. */ rc = writeMasterJournal(pPager, zMaster); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; - + /* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database. - ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not + ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not ** create the journal file or perform any real IO. ** ** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the ** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the ** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive - ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is + ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is ** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant - ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow. + ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow. */ rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; - + rc = pager_write_pagelist(pPager,sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_BLOCKED ); @@ -47094,7 +47094,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( } sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache); - /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use + /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use ** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database ** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the ** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the @@ -47106,7 +47106,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne( rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit; } - + /* Finally, sync the database file. */ if( !noSync ){ rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zMaster); @@ -47126,12 +47126,12 @@ commit_phase_one_exit: /* ** When this function is called, the database file has been completely ** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and -** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system +** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system ** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually ** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back. ** -** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting, -** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used +** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting, +** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used ** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is ** irrevocably committed. ** @@ -47156,15 +47156,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){ ** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is ** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op. ** - ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal + ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal ** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as ** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made - ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal + ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal ** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need ** to drop any locks either. */ - if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED - && pPager->exclusiveMode + if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED + && pPager->exclusiveMode && pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST ){ assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff ); @@ -47178,7 +47178,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the +** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the ** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed. ** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR ** state if an error occurs. @@ -47188,14 +47188,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){ ** ** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions: ** -** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and +** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and ** in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction ** was opened, and ** ** 2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot ** rollback at any point in the future. ** -** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the +** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the ** rollback is successful. ** ** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the @@ -47208,7 +47208,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){ PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager))); /* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If - ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not + ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not ** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller. */ assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) ); @@ -47224,7 +47224,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){ int eState = pPager->eState; rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0); if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){ - /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error + /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error ** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted. ** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT. */ @@ -47238,7 +47238,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK ); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT - || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR + || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR || rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN ); @@ -47306,8 +47306,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int *sqlite3PagerStats(Pager *pPager){ /* ** Parameter eStat must be either SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT or ** SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS. Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the -** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the -** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before +** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the +** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before ** returning. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){ @@ -47340,7 +47340,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(Pager *pPager){ ** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already ** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op. ** -** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error +** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error ** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is ** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. */ @@ -47356,7 +47356,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){ PagerSavepoint *aNew; /* New Pager.aSavepoint array */ /* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM - ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a + ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a ** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below. */ aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc( @@ -47395,7 +47395,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){ /* ** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint. -** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently +** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently ** created savepoint. ** ** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. @@ -47403,26 +47403,26 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){ ** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes ** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created. ** -** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter +** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter ** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint ** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate ** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than ** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op. ** ** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current -** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling +** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling ** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate -** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the -** contents of the database to its original state. +** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the +** contents of the database to its original state. ** -** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint +** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint ** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE), ** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed. ** ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails, -** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a +** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a ** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned. -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){ int rc = pPager->errCode; /* Return code */ @@ -47434,7 +47434,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){ int nNew; /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */ /* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this - ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated + ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated ** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation. */ nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1); @@ -47443,7 +47443,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){ } pPager->nSavepoint = nNew; - /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate + /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate ** the sub-journal to zero bytes in size. */ if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ if( nNew==0 && isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){ @@ -47577,8 +47577,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerState(Pager *pPager){ ** transaction is active). ** ** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being -** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction -** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page +** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction +** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page ** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction. ** ** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error @@ -47605,7 +47605,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i } /* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest - ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the + ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the ** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario: ** ** BEGIN; @@ -47629,7 +47629,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i return rc; } - PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n", + PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno)); IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno)) @@ -47637,7 +47637,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i ** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno. ** ** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that - ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno + ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it. */ if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){ @@ -47648,8 +47648,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i } /* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it - ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for - ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained + ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for + ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained ** for the page moved there. */ pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC; @@ -47681,9 +47681,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i } if( needSyncPgno ){ - /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be + /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be ** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno. - ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the + ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the ** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ** flag. @@ -47722,7 +47722,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *pPg){ } /* -** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space +** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space ** allocated along with the specified page. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){ @@ -47731,7 +47731,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){ /* ** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one -** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or +** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or ** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then ** the locking-mode is set to the value specified. ** @@ -47786,8 +47786,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(Pager *pPager, int eMode){ assert( eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST - || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF - || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL + || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF + || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ); /* This routine is only called from the OP_JournalMode opcode, and @@ -47960,7 +47960,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){ assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ - /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the + /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the ** pending lock that may have been obtained instead. */ pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK); } @@ -47969,7 +47969,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){ } /* -** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in +** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in ** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE ** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index ** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory. @@ -47980,8 +47980,8 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){ assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 ); assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ); - /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use - ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory + /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use + ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory ** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL ** file, to make sure this is safe. */ @@ -47989,7 +47989,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){ rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager); } - /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails, + /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails, ** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -48011,7 +48011,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){ ** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database ** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file ** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful, -** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does +** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does ** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is ** not modified in either case. ** @@ -48053,7 +48053,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenWal( ** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior ** to switching from WAL to rollback mode. ** -** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an +** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an ** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an ** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed. ** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning. @@ -48079,7 +48079,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager){ rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager); } } - + /* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on ** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted. */ @@ -48127,7 +48127,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** ************************************************************************* ** -** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in +** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in ** "journal_mode=WAL" mode. ** ** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT @@ -48136,7 +48136,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the ** database file. All changes to the database are recorded by writing ** frames into the WAL. Transactions commit when a frame is written that -** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record +** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record ** multiple transactions. Periodically, the content of the WAL is ** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a ** "checkpoint". @@ -48162,11 +48162,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** ** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each ** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a <page-size> bytes -** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned +** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned ** integer values, as follows: ** ** 0: Page number. -** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages +** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages ** after the commit. For all other records, zero. ** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the header) ** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the header) @@ -48192,7 +48192,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** the checksum. The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as ** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N]. The ** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows: -** +** ** for i from 0 to n-1 step 2: ** s0 += x[i] + s1; ** s1 += x[i+1] + s0; @@ -48200,7 +48200,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** ** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights ** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element -** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit +** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit ** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term. ** ** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the @@ -48233,19 +48233,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database ** content simultaneously. ** -** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but +** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but ** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the ** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames. If the ** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow, ** and read performance suffers. To overcome this problem, a separate ** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the ** search for frames of a particular page. -** +** ** WAL-INDEX FORMAT ** ** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations ** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file. Because -** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL +** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL ** on a network filesystem. All users of the database must be able to ** share memory. ** @@ -48259,28 +48259,28 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** byte order of the host computer. ** ** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly: Given -** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the +** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the ** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return ** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M. ** ** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or -** more index blocks. +** more index blocks. ** ** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL ** in the mxFrame field. ** -** Each index block except for the first contains information on +** Each index block except for the first contains information on ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on -** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and +** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and ** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and ** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the ** wal-index. ** ** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the -** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table +** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table ** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number. ** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE -** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the +** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the ** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the ** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block ** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in @@ -48301,8 +48301,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** ** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers. ** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the -** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash -** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions +** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash +** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions ** prior to finding a match is 1. Each entry of the hash table is an ** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same ** index block. Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in @@ -48321,12 +48321,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot ** be at index iUnused. (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was ** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full, -** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let +** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let ** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused, ** where aHash[iMax]==P. If there is no iMax entry (if there exists ** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the ** current index block. Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the -** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references +** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references ** page P. ** ** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the @@ -48351,7 +48351,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){ ** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table ** in the first place - which is what reader one wants. Meanwhile, the ** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted -** later, which is exactly what reader two wants. +** later, which is exactly what reader two wants. ** ** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries ** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed @@ -48378,7 +48378,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalTrace = 0; ** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not ** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN. ** -** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the +** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the ** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not ** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite ** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN. @@ -48412,7 +48412,7 @@ typedef struct WalCkptInfo WalCkptInfo; ** ** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive. ** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page. The latter case was -** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added. +** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added. */ struct WalIndexHdr { u32 iVersion; /* Wal-index version */ @@ -48444,7 +48444,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr { ** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock. If a reader ** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than ** the mxFrame for that reader. The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff) -** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is +** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is ** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder ** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexs by one. Readers holding ** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content @@ -48464,7 +48464,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr { ** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything ** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers ** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will -** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore +** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore ** the WAL. ** ** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL. However, @@ -48505,14 +48505,14 @@ struct WalCkptInfo { ** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file. ** ** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL -** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit -** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting +** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit +** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting ** all data as 32-bit little-endian words. */ #define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682 /* -** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file, +** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file, ** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned ** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header. */ @@ -48555,7 +48555,7 @@ struct Wal { ** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode. */ #define WAL_NORMAL_MODE 0 -#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1 +#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1 #define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2 /* @@ -48574,7 +48574,7 @@ typedef u16 ht_slot; /* ** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through ** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames -** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the +** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the ** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with ** the largest index). ** @@ -48610,7 +48610,7 @@ struct WalIterator { #define HASHTABLE_HASH_1 383 /* Should be prime */ #define HASHTABLE_NSLOT (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2) /* Must be a power of 2 */ -/* +/* ** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a ** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete ** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index. @@ -48655,7 +48655,7 @@ static int walIndexPage(Wal *pWal, int iPage, volatile u32 **ppPage){ pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ); if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; }else{ - rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ, + rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ, pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage] ); if( rc==SQLITE_READONLY ){ @@ -48699,7 +48699,7 @@ static volatile WalIndexHdr *walIndexHdr(Wal *pWal){ ) /* -** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in +** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in ** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or ** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL). ** @@ -48771,11 +48771,11 @@ static void walIndexWriteHdr(Wal *pWal){ /* ** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer -** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of +** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of ** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows: ** ** 0: Page number. -** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages +** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages ** after the commit. For all other records, zero. ** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header) ** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header) @@ -48822,7 +48822,7 @@ static int walDecodeFrame( assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 ); /* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header - ** match the salt values in the wal-header. + ** match the salt values in the wal-header. */ if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){ return 0; @@ -48836,15 +48836,15 @@ static int walDecodeFrame( } /* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header, - ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header, - ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8 + ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header, + ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8 ** bytes of this frame-header. */ nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN); walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum); walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum); - if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16]) - || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20]) + if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16]) + || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20]) ){ /* Checksum failed. */ return 0; @@ -48879,7 +48879,7 @@ static const char *walLockName(int lockIdx){ } } #endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */ - + /* ** Set or release locks on the WAL. Locks are either shared or exclusive. @@ -48936,15 +48936,15 @@ static int walNextHash(int iPriorHash){ return (iPriorHash+1)&(HASHTABLE_NSLOT-1); } -/* +/* ** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on ** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages ** numbered starting from 0. ** ** Set output variable *paHash to point to the start of the hash table -** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame +** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame ** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a -** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number +** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number ** (*piZero+N) in the log. ** ** Finally, set *paPgno so that *paPgno[1] is the page number of the @@ -48974,7 +48974,7 @@ static int walHashGet( }else{ iZero = HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE + (iHash-1)*HASHTABLE_NPAGE; } - + *paPgno = &aPgno[-1]; *paHash = aHash; *piZero = iZero; @@ -48985,7 +48985,7 @@ static int walHashGet( /* ** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table ** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame -** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages +** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages ** are numbered starting from 0. */ static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){ @@ -49037,7 +49037,7 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){ if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return; - /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing + /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing ** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed ** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped. */ @@ -49055,9 +49055,9 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){ aHash[i] = 0; } } - + /* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with - ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. + ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame. */ nByte = (int)((char *)aHash - (char *)&aPgno[iLimit+1]); memset((void *)&aPgno[iLimit+1], 0, nByte); @@ -49102,9 +49102,9 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){ idx = iFrame - iZero; assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 ); - + /* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the - ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding. + ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding. */ if( idx==1 ){ int nByte = (int)((u8 *)&aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8 *)&aPgno[1]); @@ -49113,8 +49113,8 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){ /* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer ** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after - ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory). - ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from + ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory). + ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from ** the hash-table before writing any new entries. */ if( aPgno[idx] ){ @@ -49164,7 +49164,7 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){ /* -** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file. +** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file. ** ** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the ** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything @@ -49224,16 +49224,16 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){ } /* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than - ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid + ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid ** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole ** WAL file. */ magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]); szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]); - if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC - || szPage&(szPage-1) - || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE - || szPage<512 + if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC + || szPage&(szPage-1) + || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE + || szPage<512 ){ goto finished; } @@ -49243,7 +49243,7 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){ memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8); /* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */ - walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN, + walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN, aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum ); if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24]) @@ -49307,7 +49307,7 @@ finished: pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1]; walIndexWriteHdr(pWal); - /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is + /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is ** currently holding locks that exclude all other readers, writers and ** checkpointers. */ @@ -49351,8 +49351,8 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){ } } -/* -** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must +/* +** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must ** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points ** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle. ** @@ -49362,7 +49362,7 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){ ** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the ** system would be badly broken. ** -** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and +** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and ** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs, ** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified. */ @@ -49522,7 +49522,7 @@ static void walMerge( ht_slot logpage; Pgno dbpage; - if( (iLeft<nLeft) + if( (iLeft<nLeft) && (iRight>=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]<aContent[aRight[iRight]]) ){ logpage = aLeft[iLeft++]; @@ -49616,7 +49616,7 @@ static void walMergesort( #endif } -/* +/* ** Free an iterator allocated by walIteratorInit(). */ static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){ @@ -49624,7 +49624,7 @@ static void walIteratorFree(WalIterator *p){ } /* -** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all +** Construct a WalInterator object that can be used to loop over all ** pages in the WAL in ascending order. The caller must hold the checkpoint ** lock. ** @@ -49652,7 +49652,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, WalIterator **pp){ /* Allocate space for the WalIterator object. */ nSegment = walFramePage(iLast) + 1; - nByte = sizeof(WalIterator) + nByte = sizeof(WalIterator) + (nSegment-1)*sizeof(struct WalSegment) + iLast*sizeof(ht_slot); p = (WalIterator *)sqlite3ScratchMalloc(nByte); @@ -49691,7 +49691,7 @@ static int walIteratorInit(Wal *pWal, WalIterator **pp){ } aIndex = &((ht_slot *)&p->aSegment[p->nSegment])[iZero]; iZero++; - + for(j=0; j<nEntry; j++){ aIndex[j] = (ht_slot)j; } @@ -49748,8 +49748,8 @@ static int walPagesize(Wal *pWal){ ** that a concurrent reader might be using. ** ** All I/O barrier operations (a.k.a fsyncs) occur in this routine when -** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL. That means that if -** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background +** SQLite is in WAL-mode in synchronous=NORMAL. That means that if +** checkpoints are always run by a background thread or background ** process, foreground threads will never block on a lengthy fsync call. ** ** Fsync is called on the WAL before writing content out of the WAL and @@ -49762,7 +49762,7 @@ static int walPagesize(Wal *pWal){ ** database file. ** ** This routine uses and updates the nBackfill field of the wal-index header. -** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill. +** This is the only routine that will increase the value of nBackfill. ** (A WAL reset or recovery will revert nBackfill to zero, but not increase ** its value.) ** @@ -50039,7 +50039,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){ return 1; /* Dirty read */ - } + } if( h1.isInit==0 ){ return 1; /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */ } @@ -50069,7 +50069,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ ** changed by this operation. If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged ** to 0. ** -** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK. +** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK. ** Otherwise an SQLite error code. */ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ @@ -50077,7 +50077,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ int badHdr; /* True if a header read failed */ volatile u32 *page0; /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */ - /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the + /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the ** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here. */ assert( pChanged ); @@ -50089,7 +50089,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ /* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the ** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually - ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently + ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently ** being modified by another thread or process. */ badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1); @@ -50150,10 +50150,10 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ ** ** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable ** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely -** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr() -** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the -** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication -** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be +** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr() +** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the +** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication +** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be ** flushed.) When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already ** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused. ** @@ -50168,7 +50168,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){ ** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that ** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe. ** -** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on +** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on ** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock). The pWal->readLock integer is ** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER. If pWal->readLock==(-1) ** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock. The reader must not @@ -50202,16 +50202,16 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){ ** ** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest ** instances of time. No I/O or other system calls are done while the - ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But + ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But ** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get - ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve, + ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve, ** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock. In that case, ** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free. ** ** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep(). The first few ** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond. Really this ** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay. But on the 10th - ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer, + ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer, ** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds. ** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds. */ @@ -50239,9 +50239,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){ if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){ /* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY. ** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The - ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS - ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the - ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region + ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS + ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the + ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region ** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned. */ rc = WAL_RETRY; @@ -50273,7 +50273,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){ ** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from ** happening, this is usually correct. ** - ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log + ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log ** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0) ** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may ** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before @@ -50346,7 +50346,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){ ** ** This does not guarantee that the copy of the wal-index header is up to ** date before proceeding. That would not be possible without somehow - ** blocking writers. It only guarantees that a dangerous checkpoint or + ** blocking writers. It only guarantees that a dangerous checkpoint or ** log-wrap (either of which would require an exclusive lock on ** WAL_READ_LOCK(mxI)) has not occurred since the snapshot was valid. */ @@ -50426,8 +50426,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame( /* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then ** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early - ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0, - ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the + ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0, + ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the ** WAL were empty. */ if( iLast==0 || pWal->readLock==0 ){ @@ -50440,9 +50440,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame( ** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames). ** ** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend() - ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash - ** table). This means the value just read from the hash - ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the + ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash + ** table). This means the value just read from the hash + ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the ** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the ** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly - ** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume @@ -50450,13 +50450,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame( ** opened remain unmodified. ** ** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner - ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required + ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required ** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table: ** - ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno): + ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno): ** This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions. ** - ** (iFrame<=iLast): + ** (iFrame<=iLast): ** This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash ** table after the current read-transaction had started. */ @@ -50528,7 +50528,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalReadFrame( return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset); } -/* +/* ** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){ @@ -50539,7 +50539,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){ } -/* +/* ** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL. ** ** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call @@ -50615,18 +50615,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){ Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame; Pgno iFrame; - + /* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it - ** was in before the client began writing to the database. + ** was in before the client began writing to the database. */ memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr)); - for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1; - ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax; + for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1; + ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax; iFrame++ ){ /* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number - ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and + ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and ** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op ** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b) ** is false). @@ -50644,10 +50644,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p return rc; } -/* -** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 -** values. This function populates the array with values required to -** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current +/* +** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 +** values. This function populates the array with values required to +** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current ** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){ @@ -50658,7 +50658,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){ aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt; } -/* +/* ** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by ** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array ** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated @@ -50824,7 +50824,7 @@ static int walWriteOneFrame( return rc; } -/* +/* ** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock ** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()). */ @@ -50884,7 +50884,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames( walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]); sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]); - + pWal->szPage = szPage; pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN; pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0]; @@ -50974,7 +50974,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames( pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0; } - /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the + /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the ** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index ** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may ** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten. @@ -51011,7 +51011,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames( return rc; } -/* +/* ** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and ** related interfaces. ** @@ -51056,7 +51056,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint( ** ** If the writer lock cannot be obtained, then a passive checkpoint is ** run instead. Since the checkpointer is not holding the writer lock, - ** there is no point in blocking waiting for any readers. Assuming no + ** there is no point in blocking waiting for any readers. Assuming no ** other error occurs, this function will return SQLITE_BUSY to the caller. */ if( eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){ @@ -51093,7 +51093,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint( } if( isChanged ){ - /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was + /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was ** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now ** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that ** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that @@ -51136,7 +51136,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCallback(Wal *pWal){ ** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive ** lock on the main database file. ** -** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into +** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into ** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE. This means that the pWal->readLock must ** be released. Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the ** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this @@ -51153,8 +51153,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){ assert( pWal->writeLock==0 ); assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 ); - /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a - ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot + /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a + ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot ** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock ** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to ** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error. @@ -51185,10 +51185,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using ** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the -** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. +** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){ return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE ); @@ -51260,16 +51260,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFramesize(Wal *pWal){ ** on Ptr(N) and its subpages have values greater than Key(N-1). And ** so forth. ** -** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the +** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the ** disk where M is the number of entries in the tree. ** -** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate +** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate ** BTrees. Each BTree is identified by the index of its root page. The ** key and data for any entry are combined to form the "payload". A ** fixed amount of payload can be carried directly on the database ** page. If the payload is larger than the preset amount then surplus ** bytes are stored on overflow pages. The payload for an entry -** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each +** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each ** page has a small header which contains the Ptr(N) pointer and other ** information such as the size of key and data. ** @@ -51399,7 +51399,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFramesize(Wal *pWal){ ** contiguous or in order, but cell pointers are contiguous and in order. ** ** Cell content makes use of variable length integers. A variable -** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each +** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each ** byte are used. The integer consists of all bytes that have bit 8 set and ** the first byte with bit 8 clear. The most significant byte of the integer ** appears first. A variable-length integer may not be more than 9 bytes long. @@ -51470,7 +51470,7 @@ typedef struct BtLock BtLock; ** -DSQLITE_FILE_HEADER="..." on the compiler command-line. The ** header must be exactly 16 bytes including the zero-terminator so ** the string itself should be 15 characters long. If you change -** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read +** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read ** databases generated by the standard tools and the standard tools ** will not be able to read databases created by your custom library. */ @@ -51536,7 +51536,7 @@ struct MemPage { /* ** A linked list of the following structures is stored at BtShared.pLock. -** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor +** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor ** is opened on the table with root page BtShared.iTable. Locks are removed ** from this list when a transaction is committed or rolled back, or when ** a btree handle is closed. @@ -51560,7 +51560,7 @@ struct BtLock { ** see the internals of this structure and only deals with pointers to ** this structure. ** -** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be +** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be ** shared between multiple connections. In that case, each connection ** has it own instance of this object. But each instance of this object ** points to the same BtShared object. The database cache and the @@ -51568,7 +51568,7 @@ struct BtLock { ** the BtShared object. ** ** All fields in this structure are accessed under sqlite3.mutex. -** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors +** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors ** in the referenced BtShared that point back to this Btree since those ** cursors have to go through this Btree to find their BtShared and ** they often do so without holding sqlite3.mutex. @@ -51601,7 +51601,7 @@ struct Btree { /* ** An instance of this object represents a single database file. -** +** ** A single database file can be in use at the same time by two ** or more database connections. When two or more connections are ** sharing the same database file, each connection has it own @@ -51718,7 +51718,7 @@ struct CellInfo { ** particular database connection identified BtCursor.pBtree.db. ** ** Fields in this structure are accessed under the BtShared.mutex -** found at self->pBt->mutex. +** found at self->pBt->mutex. ** ** skipNext meaning: ** eState==SKIPNEXT && skipNext>0: Next sqlite3BtreeNext() is no-op. @@ -51759,7 +51759,7 @@ struct BtCursor { ** Potential values for BtCursor.eState. ** ** CURSOR_INVALID: -** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example) +** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example) ** because the table is empty or because BtreeCursorFirst() has not been ** called. ** @@ -51772,9 +51772,9 @@ struct BtCursor { ** operation should be a no-op. ** ** CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK: -** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been +** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been ** modified since the cursor was last used. The cursor position is saved -** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in +** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in ** this state, restoreCursorPosition() can be called to attempt to ** seek the cursor to the saved position. ** @@ -51791,13 +51791,13 @@ struct BtCursor { #define CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK 3 #define CURSOR_FAULT 4 -/* +/* ** The database page the PENDING_BYTE occupies. This page is never used. */ # define PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) PAGER_MJ_PGNO(pBt) /* -** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a +** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a ** database page. The first argument to each is the number of usable ** bytes on each page of the database (often 1024). The second is the ** page number to look up in the pointer map. @@ -51832,10 +51832,10 @@ struct BtCursor { ** PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE: The database page is a root-page. The page-number is not ** used in this case. ** -** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number +** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number ** is not used in this case. ** -** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of +** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of ** overflow pages. The page number identifies the page that ** contains the cell with a pointer to this overflow page. ** @@ -51857,13 +51857,13 @@ struct BtCursor { */ #define btreeIntegrity(p) \ assert( p->pBt->inTransaction!=TRANS_NONE || p->pBt->nTransaction==0 ); \ - assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans ); + assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans ); /* ** The ISAUTOVACUUM macro is used within balance_nonroot() to determine ** if the database supports auto-vacuum or not. Because it is used -** within an expression that is an argument to another macro +** within an expression that is an argument to another macro ** (sqliteMallocRaw), it is not possible to use conditional compilation. ** So, this macro is defined instead. */ @@ -51880,8 +51880,8 @@ struct BtCursor { ** ** The aRef[] array is allocated so that there is 1 bit for each page in ** the database. As the integrity-check proceeds, for each page used in -** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to -** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which +** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to +** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which ** indicate corruption). */ typedef struct IntegrityCk IntegrityCk; @@ -52245,7 +52245,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ #define BTALLOC_LE 2 /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */ /* -** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not +** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not ** defined, or 0 if it is. For example: ** ** bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum); @@ -52260,7 +52260,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */ /* ** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation ** in shared cache. This variable has file scope during normal builds, -** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for +** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for ** test builds. ** ** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER. @@ -52295,7 +52295,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){ ** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store ** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the ** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user - ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary. + ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary. ** So define the lock related functions as no-ops. */ #define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK @@ -52312,15 +52312,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){ /* **** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. *** ** -** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the +** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the ** table with root page iRoot. Return 1 if it does and 0 if not. ** -** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via +** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via ** Btree connection pBtree: ** ** assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) ); ** -** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the +** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the ** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of ** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated, ** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine @@ -52342,7 +52342,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock( BtLock *pLock; /* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading - ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required. + ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required. ** Return true immediately. */ if( (pBtree->sharable==0) @@ -52376,13 +52376,13 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock( iTab = iRoot; } - /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a + /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a ** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a ** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found. */ for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){ - if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree + if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree && (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1)) - && pLock->eLock>=eLockType + && pLock->eLock>=eLockType ){ return 1; } @@ -52415,7 +52415,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock( static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){ BtCursor *p; for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){ - if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot + if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot && p->pBtree!=pBtree && 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){ @@ -52427,7 +52427,7 @@ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){ #endif /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */ /* -** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock +** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock ** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return ** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling ** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not. @@ -52440,14 +52440,14 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){ assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK ); assert( p->db!=0 ); assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 ); - + /* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write - ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there + ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there ** must be an open write transaction on the file itself. */ assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) ); assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE ); - + /* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */ if( !p->sharable ){ return SQLITE_OK; @@ -52462,7 +52462,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){ } for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){ - /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...) + /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...) ** statement is a simplification of: ** ** (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK) @@ -52489,7 +52489,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE /* ** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used -** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or +** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or ** WRITE_LOCK. ** ** This function assumes the following: @@ -52501,7 +52501,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){ ** with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has ** already been called and returned SQLITE_OK). ** -** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM +** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM ** is returned if a malloc attempt fails. */ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){ @@ -52515,11 +52515,11 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){ /* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to ** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained - ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master + ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master ** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans(). */ assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK ); - /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it + /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it ** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock. */ assert( p->sharable ); assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) ); @@ -52564,7 +52564,7 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){ ** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to ** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p. ** -** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write +** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write ** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag ** may be incorrectly cleared. */ @@ -52596,7 +52596,7 @@ static void clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(Btree *p){ pBt->pWriter = 0; pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING); }else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){ - /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its + /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its ** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not ** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other ** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case @@ -52695,8 +52695,8 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors( #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */ /* -** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called -** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf +** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called +** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf ** page. ** ** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure @@ -52722,7 +52722,7 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors( ** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible ** to restore the database to its original configuration. ** -** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is +** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is ** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is ** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list, ** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already @@ -52779,11 +52779,11 @@ static void btreeReleaseAllCursorPages(BtCursor *pCur){ /* -** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey +** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey ** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK. ** ** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID) -** prior to calling this routine. +** prior to calling this routine. */ static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){ int rc; @@ -52798,7 +52798,7 @@ static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){ /* If this is an intKey table, then the above call to BtreeKeySize() ** stores the integer key in pCur->nKey. In this case this value is ** all that is required. Otherwise, if pCur is not open on an intKey - ** table, then malloc space for and store the pCur->nKey bytes of key + ** table, then malloc space for and store the pCur->nKey bytes of key ** data. */ if( 0==pCur->apPage[0]->intKey ){ @@ -52927,9 +52927,9 @@ static int btreeMoveto( /* ** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible) -** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the +** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the ** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be -** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each +** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each ** saveCursorPosition(). */ static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){ @@ -52976,7 +52976,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCursorHasMoved(BtCursor *pCur){ /* ** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it ** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or -** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor). +** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor). ** ** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left ** pointing at exactly the same row. *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor @@ -53021,7 +53021,7 @@ static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){ if( pgno<2 ) return 0; nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1; iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage; - ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2; + ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2; if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){ ret++; } @@ -53161,8 +53161,8 @@ static u8 *findOverflowCell(MemPage *pPage, int iCell){ /* ** Parse a cell content block and fill in the CellInfo structure. There -** are two versions of this function. btreeParseCell() takes a -** cell index as the second argument and btreeParseCellPtr() +** are two versions of this function. btreeParseCell() takes a +** cell index as the second argument and btreeParseCellPtr() ** takes a pointer to the body of the cell as its second argument. */ static void btreeParseCellPtr( @@ -53276,7 +53276,7 @@ static u16 cellSizePtr(MemPage *pPage, u8 *pCell){ } pIter++; if( pPage->intKey ){ - /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length + /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length ** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte ** past the end of the key value. */ pEnd = &pIter[9]; @@ -53374,7 +53374,7 @@ static int defragmentPage(MemPage *pPage){ testcase( pc==iCellLast ); #if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK) /* These conditions have already been verified in btreeInitPage() - ** if SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK is defined + ** if SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK is defined */ if( pc<iCellFirst || pc>iCellLast ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; @@ -53431,7 +53431,7 @@ static int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){ int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */ int rc; /* Integer return code */ int usableSize; /* Usable size of the page */ - + assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) ); assert( pPage->pBt ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) ); @@ -53555,7 +53555,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){ memset(&data[iStart], 0, iSize); } - /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the + /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the ** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted. */ hdr = pPage->hdrOffset; @@ -53569,7 +53569,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){ } if( iFreeBlk>iLast ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 ); - + /* At this point: ** iFreeBlk: First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none ** iPtr: The address of a pointer iFreeBlk @@ -53583,7 +53583,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){ iSize = iEnd - iStart; iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]); } - + /* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist ** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be ** coalesced onto the end of iPtr. @@ -53661,7 +53661,7 @@ static int decodeFlags(MemPage *pPage, int flagByte){ ** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block. ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does -** not contain a well-formed database page, then return +** not contain a well-formed database page, then return ** SQLITE_CORRUPT. Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not ** guarantee that the page is well-formed. It only shows that ** we failed to detect any corruption. @@ -53707,10 +53707,10 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){ testcase( pPage->nCell==MX_CELL(pBt) ); /* A malformed database page might cause us to read past the end - ** of page when parsing a cell. + ** of page when parsing a cell. ** ** The following block of code checks early to see if a cell extends - ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be + ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be ** returned if it does. */ iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*pPage->nCell; @@ -53735,7 +53735,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){ } } if( !pPage->leaf ) iCellLast++; - } + } #endif /* Compute the total free space on the page */ @@ -53745,14 +53745,14 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){ u16 next, size; if( pc<iCellFirst || pc>iCellLast ){ /* Start of free block is off the page */ - return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } next = get2byte(&data[pc]); size = get2byte(&data[pc+2]); if( (next>0 && next<=pc+size+3) || pc+size>usableSize ){ /* Free blocks must be in ascending order. And the last byte of ** the free-block must lie on the database page. */ - return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } nFree = nFree + size; pc = next; @@ -53766,7 +53766,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){ ** area, according to the page header, lies within the page. */ if( nFree>usableSize ){ - return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; + return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } pPage->nFree = (u16)(nFree - iCellFirst); pPage->isInit = 1; @@ -53821,7 +53821,7 @@ static MemPage *btreePageFromDbPage(DbPage *pDbPage, Pgno pgno, BtShared *pBt){ pPage->pBt = pBt; pPage->pgno = pgno; pPage->hdrOffset = pPage->pgno==1 ? 100 : 0; - return pPage; + return pPage; } /* @@ -53882,7 +53882,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3BtreeLastPage(Btree *p){ /* ** Get a page from the pager and initialize it. This routine is just a -** convenience wrapper around separate calls to btreeGetPage() and +** convenience wrapper around separate calls to btreeGetPage() and ** btreeInitPage(). ** ** If an error occurs, then the value *ppPage is set to is undefined. It @@ -53970,11 +53970,11 @@ static int btreeInvokeBusyHandler(void *pArg){ /* ** Open a database file. -** +** ** zFilename is the name of the database file. If zFilename is NULL ** then an ephemeral database is created. The ephemeral database might ** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache. -** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted +** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted ** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called. ** ** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created @@ -54007,7 +54007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen( /* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */ const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0; - /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or + /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or ** false for a file-based database. */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB @@ -54124,7 +54124,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen( assert( sizeof(u32)==4 ); assert( sizeof(u16)==2 ); assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 ); - + pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) ); if( pBt==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; @@ -54143,7 +54143,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen( pBt->db = db; sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt); p->pBt = pBt; - + pBt->pCursor = 0; pBt->pPage1 = 0; if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY; @@ -54179,7 +54179,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen( if( rc ) goto btree_open_out; pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve; assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */ - + #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO) /* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds. */ @@ -54301,7 +54301,7 @@ static int removeFromSharingList(BtShared *pBt){ } /* -** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of +** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of ** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child ** pointer. */ @@ -54316,7 +54316,7 @@ static void allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){ ** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3 ** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from ** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it - ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized + ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized ** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error, ** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here. ** @@ -54369,7 +54369,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClose(Btree *p){ sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); /* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree - ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans + ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans ** up the shared-btree. */ assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 ); @@ -54468,7 +54468,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetPagerFlags( SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSyncDisabled(Btree *p){ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; int rc; - assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) ); + assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) ); sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); assert( pBt && pBt->pPager ); rc = sqlite3PagerNosync(pBt->pPager); @@ -54478,7 +54478,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSyncDisabled(Btree *p){ /* ** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page. -** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY +** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY ** without changing anything. ** ** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536. If the page @@ -54537,7 +54537,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(Btree *p){ ** held. ** ** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is -** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the +** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the ** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter() ** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the ** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior. @@ -54587,7 +54587,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){ if( newFlag>=0 ){ p->pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_SECURE_DELETE; if( newFlag ) p->pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_SECURE_DELETE; - } + } b = (p->pBt->btsFlags & BTS_SECURE_DELETE)!=0; sqlite3BtreeLeave(p); return b; @@ -54597,7 +54597,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){ /* ** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum' ** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it -** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is +** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is ** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){ @@ -54621,7 +54621,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){ } /* -** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is +** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is ** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){ @@ -54648,7 +54648,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){ ** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a ** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned. ** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM -** is returned if we run out of memory. +** is returned if we run out of memory. */ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){ int rc; /* Result code from subfunctions */ @@ -54665,7 +54665,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; /* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is - ** a valid database file. + ** a valid database file. */ nPage = nPageHeader = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData); sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, &nPageFile); @@ -54697,7 +54697,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){ } /* If the write version is set to 2, this database should be accessed - ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then + ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then ** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1. ** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is ** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer @@ -54727,8 +54727,8 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){ } pageSize = (page1[16]<<8) | (page1[17]<<16); if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0 - || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE - || pageSize<=256 + || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE + || pageSize<=256 ){ goto page1_init_failed; } @@ -54815,7 +54815,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){ int r = 0; for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){ if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0) - && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++; + && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++; } return r; } @@ -54824,7 +54824,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){ /* ** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle ** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then -** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which +** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which ** has the effect of releasing the read lock. ** ** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op. @@ -54908,8 +54908,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){ ** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the ** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction. ** -** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any -** changes to the database. None of the following routines +** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any +** changes to the database. None of the following routines ** will work unless a transaction is started first: ** ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() @@ -54923,7 +54923,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){ ** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention ** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler ** if there is one. But if there was previously a read-lock, do not -** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is +** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is ** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock. ** ** Suppose there are two processes A and B. A has a read lock and B has @@ -54958,7 +54958,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){ } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE - /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction + /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction ** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is ** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED. */ @@ -54982,8 +54982,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){ } #endif - /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on - ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock + /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on + ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock ** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */ rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, MASTER_ROOT, READ_LOCK); if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun; @@ -54994,7 +54994,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){ /* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or ** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree() ** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after - ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database + ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database ** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update ** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk. */ @@ -55010,7 +55010,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){ } } } - + if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt); } @@ -55044,7 +55044,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){ /* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old ** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing - ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely + ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely ** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction ** rollback occurs within the transaction. */ @@ -55120,7 +55120,7 @@ set_child_ptrmaps_out: ** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to ** be modified, as follows: ** -** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child +** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child ** page of pPage. ** ** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow @@ -55165,9 +55165,9 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){ } } } - + if( i==nCell ){ - if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE || + if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE || get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } @@ -55181,11 +55181,11 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){ /* -** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the +** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the ** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid. ** ** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that -** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno +** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno ** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that ** page. */ @@ -55202,13 +55202,13 @@ static int relocatePage( Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager; int rc; - assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 || + assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 || eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt ); /* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */ - TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n", + TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n", iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType)); rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -55267,19 +55267,19 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8); /* ** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return -** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in -** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error +** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in +** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error ** occurs, return some other error code. ** -** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so +** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so ** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use. ** ** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain ** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE. ** -** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the -** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE -** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit +** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the +** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE +** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit ** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum. */ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){ @@ -55310,7 +55310,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){ if( bCommit==0 ){ /* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required ** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be - ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't + ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't ** matter if it still contains some garbage entries. */ Pgno iFreePg; @@ -55354,7 +55354,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){ releasePage(pFreePg); }while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin ); assert( iFreePg<iLastPg ); - + rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, bCommit); releasePage(pLastPg); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -55375,7 +55375,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){ /* ** The database opened by the first argument is an auto-vacuum database -** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected +** nOrig pages in size containing nFree free pages. Return the expected ** size of the database in pages following an auto-vacuum operation. */ static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){ @@ -55402,7 +55402,7 @@ static Pgno finalDbSize(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nOrig, Pgno nFree){ ** ** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run, ** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred, -** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code. +** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){ int rc; @@ -55442,7 +55442,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){ ** is committed for an auto-vacuum database. ** ** If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *pnTrunc is set to the number of pages -** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process. +** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process. ** i.e. the database has been reorganized so that only the first *pnTrunc ** pages are in use. */ @@ -55516,7 +55516,7 @@ static int autoVacuumCommit(BtShared *pBt){ ** ** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zMaster points to ** the name of a master journal file that should be written into the -** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file +** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file ** (single database transaction). ** ** When this is called, the master journal should already have been @@ -55567,8 +55567,8 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){ downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p); p->inTrans = TRANS_READ; }else{ - /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the - ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count + /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the + ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count ** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused() ** call below will unlock the pager. */ if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){ @@ -55579,7 +55579,7 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){ } } - /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the + /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the ** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction. */ p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE; unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt); @@ -55600,12 +55600,12 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){ ** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and ** drop locks. ** -** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to +** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to ** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and ** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument -** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file -** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed -** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this +** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file +** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed +** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this ** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer, ** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write ** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have @@ -55620,7 +55620,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(Btree *p, int bCleanup){ sqlite3BtreeEnter(p); btreeIntegrity(p); - /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees + /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees ** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ. */ if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){ @@ -55668,15 +55668,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommit(Btree *p){ ** ** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly ** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only -** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue -** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are +** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue +** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are ** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being ** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root ** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making ** it unsafe for read cursors to continue. ** -** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while -** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors, +** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while +** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors, ** including all read-cursors are tripped. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while @@ -55778,8 +55778,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeRollback(Btree *p, int tripCode, int writeOnly){ /* ** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled -** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction -** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically +** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction +** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically ** if the main transaction commits or rolls back. ** ** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements @@ -55816,11 +55816,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(Btree *p, int iStatement){ /* ** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the -** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value +** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value ** of op. ** ** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is -** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the +** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the ** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different ** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the ** transaction remains open. @@ -55894,9 +55894,9 @@ static int btreeCursor( assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) ); assert( wrFlag==0 || wrFlag==1 ); - /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable - ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks, - ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with + /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable + ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks, + ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with ** this lock. */ assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, wrFlag+1) ); assert( wrFlag==0 || !hasReadConflicts(p, iTable) ); @@ -56066,14 +56066,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(BtCursor *pCur){ /* ** Set *pSize to the size of the buffer needed to hold the value of ** the key for the current entry. If the cursor is not pointing -** to a valid entry, *pSize is set to 0. +** to a valid entry, *pSize is set to 0. ** ** For a table with the INTKEY flag set, this routine returns the key ** itself, not the number of bytes in the key. ** ** The caller must position the cursor prior to invoking this routine. -** -** This routine cannot fail. It always returns SQLITE_OK. +** +** This routine cannot fail. It always returns SQLITE_OK. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeKeySize(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pSize){ assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); @@ -56106,15 +56106,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDataSize(BtCursor *pCur, u32 *pSize){ /* ** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter -** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the +** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the ** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum -** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so. +** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so. ** ** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise: ** -** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is -** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked -** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero. +** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is +** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked +** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero. ** ** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding ** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that @@ -56138,9 +56138,9 @@ static int getOverflowPage( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the - ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in - ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns - ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page + ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in + ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns + ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page ** number ovfl to determine the next page number. */ if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ @@ -56228,9 +56228,9 @@ static int copyPayload( ** or be scattered out on multiple overflow pages. ** ** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages and the -** eOp argument is not 2, this function may allocate space for and lazily -** populates the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). -** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset +** eOp argument is not 2, this function may allocate space for and lazily +** populates the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). +** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset ** more efficient. ** ** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it may be @@ -56246,7 +56246,7 @@ static int accessPayload( BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */ u32 offset, /* Begin reading this far into payload */ u32 amt, /* Read this many bytes */ - unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */ + unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */ int eOp /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */ ){ unsigned char *aPayload; @@ -56377,13 +56377,13 @@ static int accessPayload( #ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ /* If all the following are true: ** - ** 1) this is a read operation, and + ** 1) this is a read operation, and ** 2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and ** 3) the database is file-backed, and ** 4) there is no open write-transaction, and ** 5) the database is not a WAL database, ** 6) all data from the page is being read. - ** 7) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer + ** 7) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer ** ** then data can be read directly from the database file into the ** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds @@ -56482,7 +56482,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeData(BtCursor *pCur, u32 offset, u32 amt, void *p } /* -** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the +** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the ** pCur cursor is pointing to. The pointer is to the beginning of ** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for ** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available @@ -56576,7 +56576,7 @@ static int moveToChild(BtCursor *pCur, u32 newPgno){ #if 0 /* -** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function +** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function ** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th ** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of ** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of @@ -56591,7 +56591,7 @@ static void assertParentIndex(MemPage *pParent, int iIdx, Pgno iChild){ } } #else -# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z) +# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z) #endif /* @@ -56610,13 +56610,13 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){ /* UPDATE: It is actually possible for the condition tested by the assert ** below to be untrue if the database file is corrupt. This can occur if - ** one cursor has modified page pParent while a reference to it is held + ** one cursor has modified page pParent while a reference to it is held ** by a second cursor. Which can only happen if a single page is linked ** into more than one b-tree structure in a corrupt database. */ #if 0 assertParentIndex( - pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1], - pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1], + pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1], + pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1], pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->pgno ); #endif @@ -56633,19 +56633,19 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){ ** ** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point ** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a -** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a +** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a ** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1. ** -** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to +** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to ** CURSOR_INVALID. Otherwise, the cursor is set to point to the first ** cell located on the root (or virtual root) page and the cursor state ** is set to CURSOR_VALID. ** ** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the -** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected +** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected ** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not ** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D, -** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo +** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo ** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index ** b-tree). */ @@ -56685,12 +56685,12 @@ static int moveToRoot(BtCursor *pCur){ /* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor ** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is ** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case, - ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. + ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. ** ** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail ** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e. - ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted - ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table + ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted + ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table ** (or the freelist). */ assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 ); if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){ @@ -56795,14 +56795,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeFirst(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ int rc; - + assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) ); /* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */ if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG - /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point + /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point ** to the last entry in the b-tree. */ int ii; for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){ @@ -56828,16 +56828,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ }else{ pCur->curFlags &= ~BTCF_AtLast; } - + } } return rc; } -/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key +/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key ** specified by pIdxKey or intKey. Return a success code. ** -** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey +** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey ** must be NULL. For index tables, pIdxKey is used and intKey ** is ignored. ** @@ -56847,7 +56847,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ ** before or after the key. ** ** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of -** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is +** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is ** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into ** *pRes is as follows: ** @@ -56880,7 +56880,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked( /* If the cursor is already positioned at the point we are trying ** to move to, then just return without doing any work */ if( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_ValidNKey)!=0 - && pCur->apPage[0]->intKey + && pCur->apPage[0]->intKey ){ if( pCur->info.nKey==intKey ){ *pRes = 0; @@ -56895,8 +56895,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked( if( pIdxKey ){ xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey); pIdxKey->errCode = 0; - assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1 - || pIdxKey->default_rc==0 + assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1 + || pIdxKey->default_rc==0 || pIdxKey->default_rc==-1 ); }else{ @@ -56976,9 +56976,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked( /* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that ** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree ** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte - ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing - ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is - ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first + ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing + ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is + ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first ** 2 bytes of the cell. */ nCell = pCell[0]; @@ -56988,10 +56988,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked( ** b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey); - }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) + }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80) && (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal ){ - /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record + /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record ** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */ testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd ); c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey); @@ -57018,7 +57018,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked( c = xRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey); sqlite3_free(pCellKey); } - assert( + assert( (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0) && (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed) ); @@ -57134,7 +57134,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeNext(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ idx = ++pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]; assert( pPage->isInit ); - /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx + /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx ** to be invalid here. This can only occur if a second cursor modifies ** the page while cursor pCur is holding a reference to it. Which can ** only happen if the database is corrupt in such a way as to link the @@ -57300,7 +57300,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePrevious(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){ ** an error. *ppPage and *pPgno are undefined in the event of an error. ** Do not invoke sqlite3PagerUnref() on *ppPage if an error is returned. ** -** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to +** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to ** locate a page close to the page number "nearby". This can be used in an ** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file, ** which in turn can make database access faster. @@ -57339,7 +57339,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( /* There are pages on the freelist. Reuse one of those pages. */ Pgno iTrunk; u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */ - + /* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map ** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then ** the entire-list will be searched for that page. @@ -57395,8 +57395,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]); /* # of leaves on this trunk page */ if( k==0 && !searchList ){ - /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched. - ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly + /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched. + ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly ** allocated page */ assert( pPrevTrunk==0 ); rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage); @@ -57413,8 +57413,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto end_allocate_page; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM - }else if( searchList - && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) + }else if( searchList + && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunk<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) ){ /* The list is being searched and this trunk page is the page ** to allocate, regardless of whether it has leaves. @@ -57437,13 +57437,13 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4); } }else{ - /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains + /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains ** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk ** page in this case. */ MemPage *pNewTrunk; Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]); - if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){ + if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){ rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; goto end_allocate_page; } @@ -57513,8 +57513,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( goto end_allocate_page; } testcase( iPage==mxPage ); - if( !searchList - || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) + if( !searchList + || (iPage==nearby || (iPage<nearby && eMode==BTALLOC_LE)) ){ int noContent; *pPgno = iPage; @@ -57554,7 +57554,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage( ** not set the no-content flag. This causes the pager to load and journal ** the current page content before overwriting it. ** - ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal + ** Note that the pager will not actually attempt to load or journal ** content for any page that really does lie past the end of the database ** file on disk. So the effects of disabling the no-content optimization ** here are confined to those pages that lie between the end of the @@ -57619,12 +57619,12 @@ end_allocate_page: } /* -** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list. +** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list. ** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list. ** ** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional. -** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object -** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value. +** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object +** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value. ** Otherwise, it may pass NULL. ** ** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument, @@ -57632,7 +57632,7 @@ end_allocate_page: */ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){ MemPage *pTrunk = 0; /* Free-list trunk page */ - Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */ + Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */ MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1; /* Local reference to page 1 */ MemPage *pPage; /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */ int rc; /* Return Code */ @@ -57728,7 +57728,7 @@ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){ /* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the ** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list. - ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the + ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the ** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed ** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list. */ @@ -57793,8 +57793,8 @@ static int clearCell( Pgno iNext = 0; MemPage *pOvfl = 0; if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>btreePagecount(pBt) ){ - /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an - ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the + /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an + ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the ** file the database must be corrupt. */ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } @@ -57806,11 +57806,11 @@ static int clearCell( if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) ) && sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1 ){ - /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference + /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference ** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated. - ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it - ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt. - ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as + ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it + ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt. + ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as ** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is ** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the ** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this @@ -57879,13 +57879,13 @@ static int fillInCell( assert( nZero==0 ); } nHeader += putVarint(&pCell[nHeader], *(u64*)&nKey); - + /* Fill in the payload size */ if( pPage->intKey ){ pSrc = pData; nSrc = nData; nData = 0; - }else{ + }else{ if( NEVER(nKey>0x7fffffff || pKey==0) ){ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; } @@ -57945,8 +57945,8 @@ static int fillInCell( if( pBt->autoVacuum ){ do{ pgnoOvfl++; - } while( - PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) + } while( + PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ); } #endif @@ -57954,9 +57954,9 @@ static int fillInCell( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent ** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map - ** for that page now. + ** for that page now. ** - ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry + ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry ** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot, ** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell() ** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the @@ -58075,8 +58075,8 @@ static void dropCell(MemPage *pPage, int idx, int sz, int *pRC){ ** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if ** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry ** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either -** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index. -** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that +** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index. +** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that ** pPage->nOverflow is incremented. */ static void insertCell( @@ -58253,7 +58253,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){ /* This error condition is now caught prior to reaching this function */ if( pPage->nCell==0 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; - /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of + /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of ** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell ** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed. */ @@ -58272,7 +58272,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){ assemblePage(pNew, 1, &pCell, &szCell); /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map - ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the + ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the ** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these ** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents ** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below. @@ -58286,14 +58286,14 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){ ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pCell, &rc); } } - + /* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell ** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and ** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the ** largest key on pPage). ** - ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most - ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the + ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most + ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the ** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size) ** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value). ** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length @@ -58312,7 +58312,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){ /* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */ put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew); - + /* Release the reference to the new page. */ releasePage(pNew); } @@ -58324,7 +58324,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){ #if 0 /* ** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite. -** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible +** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible ** for setting pointer-map entries. */ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){ @@ -58339,7 +58339,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){ for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){ CellInfo info; u8 *z; - + z = findCell(pPage, j); btreeParseCellPtr(pPage, z, &info); if( info.iOverflow ){ @@ -58364,7 +58364,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){ #endif /* -** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored +** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored ** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then ** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the ** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained @@ -58372,11 +58372,11 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){ ** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo. ** ** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the -** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo. +** MemPage.apOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo. ** ** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage(). ** -** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by +** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by ** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of ** which are called often under normal circumstances. */ @@ -58389,20 +58389,20 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0); int rc; int iData; - - + + assert( pFrom->isInit ); assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr ); assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize ); - + /* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */ iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]); memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData); memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell); - + /* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure ** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under - ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized + ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized ** page pFrom. */ pTo->isInit = 0; @@ -58411,7 +58411,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ *pRC = rc; return; } - + /* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries ** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to. */ @@ -58426,13 +58426,13 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ ** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the ** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the ** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one -** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page +** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page ** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page ** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings ** participate in the balancing. ** -** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by -** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full. +** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by +** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full. ** ** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page ** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen @@ -58443,7 +58443,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ ** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so ** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this ** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct -** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine). +** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine). ** ** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database ** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should @@ -58458,7 +58458,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){ ** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large ** enough for all overflow cells. ** -** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns +** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns ** SQLITE_NOMEM. */ #if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1700 && defined(_M_ARM) @@ -58508,7 +58508,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( #endif /* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if - ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with + ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with ** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function ** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete(). */ @@ -58519,11 +58519,11 @@ static int balance_nonroot( return SQLITE_NOMEM; } - /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent - ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on - ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however, + /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent + ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on + ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however, ** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent - ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken. + ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken. ** ** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This ** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any @@ -58535,7 +58535,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( nxDiv = 0; }else{ assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 ); - if( iParentIdx==0 ){ + if( iParentIdx==0 ){ nxDiv = 0; }else if( iParentIdx==i ){ nxDiv = i-2+bBulk; @@ -58576,7 +58576,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first ** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first ** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use - ** later on. + ** later on. ** ** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode, ** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes. @@ -58613,7 +58613,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( + nMaxCells*sizeof(u16) /* szCell */ + pBt->pageSize /* aSpace1 */ + k*nOld; /* Page copies (apCopy) */ - apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch ); + apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch ); if( apCell==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; goto balance_cleanup; @@ -58642,7 +58642,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( leafData = apOld[0]->intKeyLeaf; for(i=0; i<nOld; i++){ int limit; - + /* Before doing anything else, take a copy of the i'th original sibling ** The rest of this function will use data from the copies rather ** that the original pages since the original pages will be in the @@ -58670,7 +58670,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( szCell[nCell] = cellSizePtr(pOld, apCell[nCell]); nCell++; } - } + } if( i<nOld-1 && !leafData){ u16 sz = (u16)szNew[i]; u8 *pTemp; @@ -58705,7 +58705,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all nCell cells. ** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total ** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index - ** in apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1. + ** in apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1. ** cntNew[k] should equal nCell. ** ** Values computed by this block: @@ -58715,7 +58715,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** cntNew[i]: Index in apCell[] and szCell[] for the first cell to ** the right of the i-th sibling page. ** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling. - ** + ** */ usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection; for(subtotal=k=i=0; i<nCell; i++){ @@ -58754,8 +58754,8 @@ static int balance_nonroot( d = r + 1 - leafData; assert( d<nMaxCells ); assert( r<nMaxCells ); - while( szRight==0 - || (!bBulk && szRight+szCell[d]+2<=szLeft-(szCell[r]+2)) + while( szRight==0 + || (!bBulk && szRight+szCell[d]+2<=szLeft-(szCell[r]+2)) ){ szRight += szCell[d] + 2; szLeft -= szCell[r] + 2; @@ -58780,7 +58780,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( #endif TRACE(("BALANCE: old: %d %d %d ", - apOld[0]->pgno, + apOld[0]->pgno, nOld>=2 ? apOld[1]->pgno : 0, nOld>=3 ? apOld[2]->pgno : 0 )); @@ -58900,9 +58900,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot( if( !pNew->leaf ){ memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4); }else if( leafData ){ - /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves, - ** then there is no divider cell in apCell[]. Instead, the divider - ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of + /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves, + ** then there is no divider cell in apCell[]. Instead, the divider + ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of ** the sibling-page assembled above only. */ CellInfo info; @@ -58915,9 +58915,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot( pCell -= 4; /* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was ** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4 - ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this + ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this ** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of - ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to + ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to ** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now. ** ** Note that this can never happen in an SQLite data file, as all @@ -58955,8 +58955,8 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower" ** sub-algorithm in some documentation. ** - ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent() - ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages + ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent() + ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages ** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied. ** ** The second assert below verifies that the child page is defragmented @@ -58964,13 +58964,13 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** is important if the parent page happens to be page 1 of the database ** image. */ assert( nNew==1 ); - assert( apNew[0]->nFree == - (get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2) + assert( apNew[0]->nFree == + (get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2) ); copyNodeContent(apNew[0], pParent, &rc); freePage(apNew[0], &rc); }else if( ISAUTOVACUUM ){ - /* Fix the pointer-map entries for all the cells that were shifted around. + /* Fix the pointer-map entries for all the cells that were shifted around. ** There are several different types of pointer-map entries that need to ** be dealt with by this routine. Some of these have been set already, but ** many have not. The following is a summary: @@ -58982,7 +58982,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( ** of those. ** ** 2) The pointer-map entries associated with the first overflow - ** page in any overflow chains used by new divider cells. These + ** page in any overflow chains used by new divider cells. These ** have also already been taken care of by the insertCell() code. ** ** 3) If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the child pages of @@ -59022,7 +59022,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( nOverflow = pOld->nOverflow; iOverflow = i + !leafData + pOld->aiOvfl[0]; } - isDivider = !leafData; + isDivider = !leafData; } assert(nOverflow>0 || iOverflow<i ); @@ -59068,7 +59068,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot( #if 0 /* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that - ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while + ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while ** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may ** cause an assert() statement to fail. */ ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew); @@ -59105,15 +59105,15 @@ balance_cleanup: ** ** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root ** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root -** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child +** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child ** pointer pointing to the new page. ** -** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages +** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages ** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The ** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root ** page is also updated. ** -** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child +** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child ** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required ** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs, ** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0. @@ -59127,7 +59127,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){ assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 ); assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) ); - /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new + /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new ** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents ** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page. */ @@ -59168,7 +59168,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){ /* ** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in ** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the -** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing +** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing ** routine. Balancing routines are: ** ** balance_quick() @@ -59194,7 +59194,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){ ** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page ** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The ** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page. - */ + */ assert( (balance_deeper_called++)==0 ); rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -59224,10 +59224,10 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){ /* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which ** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell ** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this - ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent + ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent ** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this ** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[] - ** buffer. + ** buffer. ** ** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a ** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this @@ -59244,24 +59244,24 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){ ** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to ** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop ** will balance the parent page to correct this. - ** + ** ** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells - ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below. + ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below. ** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by ** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first, ** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a - ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot() + ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot() ** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by - ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been + ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been ** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new ** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot(). */ u8 *pSpace = sqlite3PageMalloc(pCur->pBt->pageSize); rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1, pCur->hints); if( pFree ){ - /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used + /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used ** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are - ** now stored either on real database pages or within the + ** now stored either on real database pages or within the ** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */ sqlite3PageFree(pFree); } @@ -59301,8 +59301,8 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){ ** MovetoUnpacked() to seek cursor pCur to (pKey, nKey) has already ** been performed. seekResult is the search result returned (a negative ** number if pCur points at an entry that is smaller than (pKey, nKey), or -** a positive value if pCur points at an entry that is larger than -** (pKey, nKey)). +** a positive value if pCur points at an entry that is larger than +** (pKey, nKey)). ** ** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then the caller guarantees that ** cursor pCur is pointing at the existing copy of a row that is to be @@ -59350,8 +59350,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert( ** ** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For ** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer - ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the - ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the + ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the + ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the ** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes ** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without ** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important @@ -59361,7 +59361,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert( if( rc ) return rc; if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){ - /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob + /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob ** cursors open on the row being replaced */ invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, nKey, 0); @@ -59418,7 +59418,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert( insertCell(pPage, idx, newCell, szNew, 0, 0, &rc); assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 ); - /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance() + /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance() ** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move ** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey ** variables. @@ -59444,7 +59444,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert( rc = balance(pCur); /* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance() - ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise. + ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise. ** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition() ** from trying to save the current position of the cursor. */ pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nOverflow = 0; @@ -59462,12 +59462,12 @@ end_insert: */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur){ Btree *p = pCur->pBtree; - BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; + BtShared *pBt = p->pBt; int rc; /* Return code */ MemPage *pPage; /* Page to delete cell from */ unsigned char *pCell; /* Pointer to cell to delete */ int iCellIdx; /* Index of cell to delete */ - int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */ + int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */ u16 szCell; /* Size of the cell being deleted */ assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) ); @@ -59477,7 +59477,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur){ assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pCur->pKeyInfo!=0, 2) ); assert( !hasReadConflicts(p, pCur->pgnoRoot) ); - if( NEVER(pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]>=pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nCell) + if( NEVER(pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]>=pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nCell) || NEVER(pCur->eState!=CURSOR_VALID) ){ return SQLITE_ERROR; /* Something has gone awry. */ @@ -59502,9 +59502,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur){ } /* Save the positions of any other cursors open on this table before - ** making any modifications. Make the page containing the entry to be - ** deleted writable. Then free any overflow pages associated with the - ** entry and finally remove the cell itself from within the page. + ** making any modifications. Make the page containing the entry to be + ** deleted writable. Then free any overflow pages associated with the + ** entry and finally remove the cell itself from within the page. */ rc = saveAllCursors(pBt, pCur->pgnoRoot, pCur); if( rc ) return rc; @@ -59556,7 +59556,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur){ ** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the ** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has ** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node, - ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as + ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as ** well. */ rc = balance(pCur); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCur->iPage>iCellDepth ){ @@ -59688,7 +59688,7 @@ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, int *piTable, int createTabFlags){ } }else{ pRoot = pPageMove; - } + } /* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */ ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc); @@ -59835,12 +59835,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(BtCursor *pCur){ ** cursors on the table. ** ** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last -** root page in the database file, then the last root page +** root page in the database file, then the last root page ** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by ** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page ** is added to the freelist instead of iTable. In this say, all ** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which -** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the +** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the ** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before ** the move. If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0. ** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of @@ -59857,7 +59857,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){ /* It is illegal to drop a table if any cursors are open on the ** database. This is because in auto-vacuum mode the backend may ** need to move another root-page to fill a gap left by the deleted - ** root page. If an open cursor was using this page a problem would + ** root page. If an open cursor was using this page a problem would ** occur. ** ** This error is caught long before control reaches this point. @@ -59888,7 +59888,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){ if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){ /* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page - ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list. + ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list. */ freePage(pPage, &rc); releasePage(pPage); @@ -59897,7 +59897,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){ } }else{ /* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page - ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the + ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the ** gap left by the deleted root-page. */ MemPage *pMove; @@ -59942,12 +59942,12 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){ }else{ /* If sqlite3BtreeDropTable was called on page 1. ** This really never should happen except in a corrupt - ** database. + ** database. */ zeroPage(pPage, PTF_INTKEY|PTF_LEAF ); releasePage(pPage); } - return rc; + return rc; } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){ int rc; @@ -59966,7 +59966,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){ ** is the number of free pages currently in the database. Meta[1] ** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers. Meta[0] ** is read-only, the others are read/write. -** +** ** The schema layer numbers meta values differently. At the schema ** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of ** free pages is not visible. So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1]. @@ -60026,7 +60026,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(Btree *p, int idx, u32 iMeta){ ** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the ** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry. ** -** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed. +** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed. ** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database ** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned. */ @@ -60041,13 +60041,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){ rc = moveToRoot(pCur); /* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each - ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages). + ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages). */ while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int iIdx; /* Index of child node in parent */ MemPage *pPage; /* Current page of the b-tree */ - /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then + /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then ** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter ** accordingly. */ @@ -60056,7 +60056,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){ nEntry += pPage->nCell; } - /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it + /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it ** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of ** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The ** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell @@ -60080,7 +60080,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){ pPage = pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]; } - /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently + /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently ** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell). */ iIdx = pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]; @@ -60178,7 +60178,7 @@ static int checkRef(IntegrityCk *pCheck, Pgno iPage){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM /* -** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to +** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to ** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message ** to pCheck. */ @@ -60201,7 +60201,7 @@ static void checkPtrmap( if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, - "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)", + "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)", iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent); } } @@ -60282,7 +60282,7 @@ static void checkList( ** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree. Return ** the tree depth. Root pages return 0. Parents of root pages ** return 1, and so forth. -** +** ** These checks are done: ** ** 1. Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap @@ -60299,7 +60299,7 @@ static void checkList( static int checkTreePage( IntegrityCk *pCheck, /* Context for the sanity check */ int iPage, /* Page number of the page to check */ - i64 *pnParentMinKey, + i64 *pnParentMinKey, i64 *pnParentMaxKey ){ MemPage *pPage; @@ -60370,7 +60370,7 @@ static int checkTreePage( } nMaxKey = info.nKey; } - if( (sz>info.nLocal) + if( (sz>info.nLocal) && (&pCell[info.iOverflow]<=&pPage->aData[pBt->usableSize]) ){ int nPage = (sz - info.nLocal + usableSize - 5)/(usableSize - 4); @@ -60411,7 +60411,7 @@ static int checkTreePage( #endif checkTreePage(pCheck, pgno, NULL, !pPage->nCell?NULL:&nMaxKey); } - + /* For intKey leaf pages, check that the min/max keys are in order ** with any left/parent/right pages. */ @@ -60606,11 +60606,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck( /* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain ** references to pointer-map pages. */ - if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 && + if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 && (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %d is never used", i); } - if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 && + if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 && (PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Pointer map page %d is referenced", i); } @@ -60680,7 +60680,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(Btree *p){ /* ** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument. ** -** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open +** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open ** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to. ** ** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART. @@ -60719,20 +60719,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInBackup(Btree *p){ /* ** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with ** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own -** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with +** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with ** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues. ** ** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory -** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent +** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent ** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob -** of memory returned. +** of memory returned. ** ** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been ** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been ** allocated, it is returned as normal. ** -** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the -** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the +** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the +** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the ** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free() ** on the memory, the btree layer does that. */ @@ -60748,8 +60748,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3BtreeSchema(Btree *p, int nBytes, void(*xFree)(void } /* -** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared -** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the +** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared +** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the ** sqlite_master table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){ @@ -60790,11 +60790,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLockTable(Btree *p, int iTab, u8 isWriteLock){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB /* -** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an -** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry. +** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an +** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry. ** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry. ** -** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to +** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to ** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with ** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data, ** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned. @@ -60825,7 +60825,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr); assert( rc==SQLITE_OK ); - /* Check some assumptions: + /* Check some assumptions: ** (a) the cursor is open for writing, ** (b) there is a read/write transaction open, ** (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required), @@ -60844,7 +60844,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1); } -/* +/* ** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){ @@ -60853,14 +60853,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){ #endif /* -** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and +** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and ** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database ** header to iVersion. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){ BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt; int rc; /* Return code */ - + assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 ); /* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the @@ -60917,7 +60917,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsReadonly(Btree *p){ ** May you share freely, never taking more than you give. ** ************************************************************************* -** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX() +** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX() ** API functions and the related features. */ @@ -60952,15 +60952,15 @@ struct sqlite3_backup { ** Once it has been created using backup_init(), a single sqlite3_backup ** structure may be accessed via two groups of thread-safe entry points: ** -** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and +** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and ** backup_finish(). Both these functions obtain the source database -** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared +** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared ** structure, in that order. ** ** * Via the BackupUpdate() and BackupRestart() functions, which are ** invoked by the pager layer to report various state changes in ** the page cache associated with the source database. The mutex -** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always +** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always ** be held when either of these functions are invoked. ** ** The other sqlite3_backup_XXX() API functions, backup_remaining() and @@ -60981,8 +60981,8 @@ struct sqlite3_backup { ** in connection handle pDb. If such a database cannot be found, return ** a NULL pointer and write an error message to pErrorDb. ** -** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this -** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an +** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this +** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an ** error message to pErrorDb. */ static Btree *findBtree(sqlite3 *pErrorDb, sqlite3 *pDb, const char *zDb){ @@ -61100,7 +61100,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init( } /* -** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is +** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is ** considered fatal if encountered during a backup operation. All errors ** are considered fatal except for SQLITE_BUSY and SQLITE_LOCKED. */ @@ -61109,8 +61109,8 @@ static int isFatalError(int rc){ } /* -** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for -** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the +** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for +** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the ** destination database. */ static int backupOnePage( @@ -61141,7 +61141,7 @@ static int backupOnePage( assert( zSrcData ); /* Catch the case where the destination is an in-memory database and the - ** page sizes of the source and destination differ. + ** page sizes of the source and destination differ. */ if( nSrcPgsz!=nDestPgsz && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pDestPager) ){ rc = SQLITE_READONLY; @@ -61167,7 +61167,7 @@ static int backupOnePage( } #endif - /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source + /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source ** page. For each iteration, variable iOff is set to the byte offset ** of the destination page. */ @@ -61186,7 +61186,7 @@ static int backupOnePage( ** Then clear the Btree layer MemPage.isInit flag. Both this module ** and the pager code use this trick (clearing the first byte ** of the page 'extra' space to invalidate the Btree layers - ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked + ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked ** "MUST BE FIRST" for this purpose. */ memcpy(zOut, zIn, nCopy); @@ -61206,7 +61206,7 @@ static int backupOnePage( ** exactly iSize bytes. If pFile is not larger than iSize bytes, then ** this function is a no-op. ** -** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error +** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error ** code if an error occurs. */ static int backupTruncateFile(sqlite3_file *pFile, i64 iSize){ @@ -61265,7 +61265,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ /* Lock the destination database, if it is not locked already. */ if( SQLITE_OK==rc && p->bDestLocked==0 - && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2)) + && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2)) ){ p->bDestLocked = 1; sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p->pDest, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, &p->iDestSchema); @@ -61288,7 +61288,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ if( SQLITE_OK==rc && destMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL && pgszSrc!=pgszDest ){ rc = SQLITE_READONLY; } - + /* Now that there is a read-lock on the source database, query the ** source pager for the number of pages in the database. */ @@ -61316,7 +61316,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ attachBackupObject(p); } } - + /* Update the schema version field in the destination database. This ** is to make sure that the schema-version really does change in ** the case where the source and destination databases have the @@ -61342,12 +61342,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ int nDestTruncate; /* Set nDestTruncate to the final number of pages in the destination ** database. The complication here is that the destination page - ** size may be different to the source page size. + ** size may be different to the source page size. ** - ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size, + ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size, ** round up. In this case the call to sqlite3OsTruncate() below will ** fix the size of the file. However it is important to call - ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the + ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the ** destination file that lie beyond the nDestTruncate page mark are ** journalled by PagerCommitPhaseOne() before they are destroyed ** by the file truncation. @@ -61371,7 +61371,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ ** ** * The destination may need to be truncated, and ** - ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the + ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the ** pending-byte page in the source database may need to be ** copied into the destination database. */ @@ -61383,7 +61383,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ i64 iEnd; assert( pFile ); - assert( nDestTruncate==0 + assert( nDestTruncate==0 || (i64)nDestTruncate*(i64)pgszDest >= iSize || ( nDestTruncate==(int)(PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(p->pDest->pBt)-1) && iSize>=PENDING_BYTE && iSize<=PENDING_BYTE+pgszDest @@ -61393,7 +61393,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ ** database has been stored in the journal for pDestPager and the ** journal synced to disk. So at this point we may safely modify ** the database file in any way, knowing that if a power failure - ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the + ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the ** journal file. */ sqlite3PagerPagecount(pDestPager, &nDstPage); for(iPg=nDestTruncate; rc==SQLITE_OK && iPg<=(Pgno)nDstPage; iPg++){ @@ -61413,8 +61413,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ /* Write the extra pages and truncate the database file as required */ iEnd = MIN(PENDING_BYTE + pgszDest, iSize); for( - iOff=PENDING_BYTE+pgszSrc; - rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd; + iOff=PENDING_BYTE+pgszSrc; + rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd; iOff+=pgszSrc ){ PgHdr *pSrcPg = 0; @@ -61438,7 +61438,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(pDestPager, nDestTruncate); rc = sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(pDestPager, 0, 0); } - + /* Finish committing the transaction to the destination database. */ if( SQLITE_OK==rc && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pDest, 0)) @@ -61447,7 +61447,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ } } } - + /* If bCloseTrans is true, then this function opened a read transaction ** on the source database. Close the read transaction here. There is ** no need to check the return values of the btree methods here, as @@ -61459,7 +61459,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){ TESTONLY( rc2 |= ) sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pSrc, 0); assert( rc2==SQLITE_OK ); } - + if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; } @@ -61533,7 +61533,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_remaining(sqlite3_backup *p){ } /* -** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most +** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most ** recent call to sqlite3_backup_step(). */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){ @@ -61542,7 +61542,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){ /* ** This function is called after the contents of page iPage of the -** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been +** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been ** copied into the destination database, then the data written to the ** destination is now invalidated. The destination copy of iPage needs ** to be updated with the new data before the backup operation is @@ -61578,7 +61578,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupUpdate(sqlite3_backup *pBackup, Pgno iPage, con ** Restart the backup process. This is called when the pager layer ** detects that the database has been modified by an external database ** connection. In this case there is no way of knowing which of the -** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still +** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still ** valid and which are not, so the entire process needs to be restarted. ** ** It is assumed that the mutex associated with the BtShared object @@ -61598,8 +61598,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupRestart(sqlite3_backup *pBackup){ ** Copy the complete content of pBtFrom into pBtTo. A transaction ** must be active for both files. ** -** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything -** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the +** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything +** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the ** transaction is committed before returning. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){ @@ -61631,9 +61631,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){ /* 0x7FFFFFFF is the hard limit for the number of pages in a database ** file. By passing this as the number of pages to copy to - ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes + ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes ** within a single call (unless an error occurs). The assert() statement - ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE + ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE ** or an error code. */ sqlite3_backup_step(&b, 0x7FFFFFFF); @@ -61681,7 +61681,7 @@ copy_finished: ** this: assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pMem) ); */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){ - /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0. + /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0. ** Mem.xDel is might not be initialized if MEM_Dyn is clear. */ assert( (p->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 || p->xDel!=0 ); @@ -61708,7 +61708,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){ ** (4) A static string or blob */ if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob)) && p->n>0 ){ - assert( + assert( ((p->szMalloc>0 && p->z==p->zMalloc)? 1 : 0) + ((p->flags&MEM_Dyn)!=0 ? 1 : 0) + ((p->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 ? 1 : 0) + @@ -61760,7 +61760,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(Mem *pMem, int desiredEnc){ } /* -** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least +** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least ** min(n,32) bytes. ** ** If the bPreserve argument is true, then copy of the content of @@ -61953,7 +61953,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(Mem *pMem, u8 enc, u8 bForce){ /* For a Real or Integer, use sqlite3_snprintf() to produce the UTF-8 ** string representation of the value. Then, if the required encoding ** is UTF-16le or UTF-16be do a translation. - ** + ** ** FIX ME: It would be better if sqlite3_snprintf() could do UTF-16. */ if( fg & MEM_Int ){ @@ -62309,7 +62309,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(Mem *pMem){ } } SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetNull(sqlite3_value *p){ - sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p); + sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p); } /* @@ -62399,7 +62399,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(Mem *p){ } return n>p->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]; } - return 0; + return 0; } #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG @@ -62490,8 +62490,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemMove(Mem *pTo, Mem *pFrom){ ** Change the value of a Mem to be a string or a BLOB. ** ** The memory management strategy depends on the value of the xDel -** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the -** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the +** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the +** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the ** Mem structure. Otherwise, any existing buffer is freed and the ** pointer copied. ** @@ -62615,7 +62615,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree( assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) ); assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pMem) ); - /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert() + /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert() ** that both the BtShared and database handle mutexes are held. */ assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ); if( key ){ @@ -62727,7 +62727,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_value *sqlite3ValueNew(sqlite3 *db){ } /* -** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to +** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to ** valueNew(). See comments above valueNew() for details. */ struct ValueNewStat4Ctx { @@ -62742,10 +62742,10 @@ struct ValueNewStat4Ctx { ** the second argument to this function is NULL, the object is allocated ** by calling sqlite3ValueNew(). ** -** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is +** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is ** being called indirectly by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue(). If it has not -** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that -** that function will return to its caller here. Then return a pointer +** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that +** that function will return to its caller here. Then return a pointer ** an sqlite3_value within the UnpackedRecord.a[] array. */ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){ @@ -62758,7 +62758,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){ int nByte; /* Bytes of space to allocate */ int i; /* Counter variable */ int nCol = pIdx->nColumn; /* Number of index columns including rowid */ - + nByte = sizeof(Mem) * nCol + ROUND8(sizeof(UnpackedRecord)); pRec = (UnpackedRecord*)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte); if( pRec ){ @@ -62779,7 +62779,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){ if( pRec==0 ) return 0; p->ppRec[0] = pRec; } - + pRec->nField = p->iVal+1; return &pRec->aMem[p->iVal]; } @@ -62864,7 +62864,7 @@ static int valueFromExpr( } }else if( op==TK_UMINUS ) { /* This branch happens for multiple negative signs. Ex: -(-5) */ - if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ValueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal) + if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ValueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal) && pVal!=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeMemNumerify(pVal); @@ -62935,7 +62935,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueFromExpr( #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 /* ** The implementation of the sqlite_record() function. This function accepts -** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database +** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database ** record (a blob) containing the argument value. ** ** This is used to convert the value stored in the 'sample' column of the @@ -63051,11 +63051,11 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr( } /* -** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord -** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored +** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord +** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored ** in the sqlite_stat4 table. ** -** A single call to this function attempts to populates field iVal (leftmost +** A single call to this function attempts to populates field iVal (leftmost ** is 0 etc.) of the unpacked record with a value extracted from expression ** pExpr. Extraction of values is possible if: ** @@ -63063,12 +63063,12 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr( ** ** * The expression is a bound variable, and this is a reprepare, or ** -** * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value +** * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value ** from the expression (i.e. the expression is a literal value). ** ** If a value can be extracted, the affinity passed as the 5th argument ** is applied to it before it is copied into the UnpackedRecord. Output -** parameter *pbOk is set to true if a value is extracted, or false +** parameter *pbOk is set to true if a value is extracted, or false ** otherwise. ** ** When this function is called, *ppRec must either point to an object @@ -63106,9 +63106,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue( /* ** Attempt to extract a value from expression pExpr using the methods -** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above. +** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above. ** -** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return +** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return ** SQLITE_OK. If no value can be extracted, but no other error occurs ** (e.g. OOM), return SQLITE_OK and set *ppVal to NULL. Or, if an error ** does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final value of *ppVal @@ -63128,7 +63128,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ValueFromExpr( ** the column value into *ppVal. If *ppVal is initially NULL then a new ** sqlite3_value object is allocated. ** -** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for +** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for ** ensuring that the value written into *ppVal is eventually freed. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4Column( @@ -63243,7 +63243,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueBytes(sqlite3_value *pVal, u8 enc){ ** ************************************************************************* ** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating -** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.) +** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.) */ /* @@ -63313,13 +63313,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSwap(Vdbe *pA, Vdbe *pB){ } /* -** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger +** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger ** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal ** to 1024/sizeof(Op). ** ** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return -** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain -** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be +** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain +** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be ** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe). */ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){ @@ -63327,7 +63327,7 @@ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){ Parse *p = v->pParse; /* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force - ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for + ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for ** simulated OOM faults. SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used ** during testing only. With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array ** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512. Normal @@ -63503,7 +63503,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(Vdbe *v){ int i = p->nLabel++; assert( v->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_INIT ); if( (i & (i-1))==0 ){ - p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel, + p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel, (i*2+1)*sizeof(p->aLabel[0])); } if( p->aLabel ){ @@ -63539,19 +63539,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRunOnlyOnce(Vdbe *p){ /* ** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes -** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may +** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may ** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows: ** ** Op *pOp; ** VdbeOpIter sIter; ** ** memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter)); -** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe* +** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe* ** while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){ ** // Do something with pOp ** } ** sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub); -** +** */ typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter; struct VdbeOpIter { @@ -63584,7 +63584,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){ p->iSub++; p->iAddr = 0; } - + if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){ int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*); int j; @@ -63634,11 +63634,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){ while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){ int opcode = pOp->opcode; - if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename + if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY - || (opcode==OP_FkCounter && pOp->p1==0 && pOp->p2==1) + || (opcode==OP_FkCounter && pOp->p1==0 && pOp->p2==1) #endif - || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull) + || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull) && ((pOp->p1&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p2==OE_Abort)) ){ hasAbort = 1; @@ -63663,8 +63663,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){ ** ** This routine is called once after all opcodes have been inserted. ** -** Variable *pMaxFuncArgs is set to the maximum value of any P2 argument -** to an OP_Function, OP_AggStep or OP_VFilter opcode. This is used by +** Variable *pMaxFuncArgs is set to the maximum value of any P2 argument +** to an OP_Function, OP_AggStep or OP_VFilter opcode. This is used by ** sqlite3VdbeMakeReady() to size the Vdbe.apArg[] array. ** ** The Op.opflags field is set on all opcodes. @@ -63759,12 +63759,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(Vdbe *p){ /* ** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with ** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility -** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the +** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the ** vdbeFreeOpArray() function. ** ** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned -** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and -** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the +** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and +** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the ** returned program. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){ @@ -63942,8 +63942,8 @@ static void freeP4(sqlite3 *db, int p4type, void *p4){ /* ** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the -** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain -** nOp entries. +** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain +** nOp entries. */ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){ if( aOp ){ @@ -63952,7 +63952,7 @@ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){ freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment); -#endif +#endif } } sqlite3DbFree(db, aOp); @@ -64005,7 +64005,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeDeletePriorOpcode(Vdbe *p, u8 op){ ** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc(). ** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the ** first null byte. If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4. -** +** ** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points ** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of ** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer. @@ -64125,7 +64125,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetLineNumber(Vdbe *v, int iLine){ ** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned. That opcode ** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value. ** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning -** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from +** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from ** this routine is a valid pointer. But because the dummy.opcode is 0, ** dummy will never be written to. This is verified by code inspection and ** by running with Valgrind. @@ -64374,13 +64374,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(Vdbe *p, int i){ ** ** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then ** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables -** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle +** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle ** associated with the VM. ** ** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this ** function is a no-op. ** -** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared +** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared ** statement p will ever use. Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask ** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache. Then the runtime of ** this routine is N*N. But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not @@ -64443,7 +64443,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbePrintOp(FILE *pOut, int pc, Op *pOp){ /* NB: The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created ** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the ** information from the vdbe.c source text */ - fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc, + fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc, sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, zP4, pOp->p5, zCom ); @@ -64470,15 +64470,15 @@ static void releaseMemArray(Mem *p, int N){ assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) ); /* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease() - ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is + ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is ** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources. ** - ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to - ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7 - ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if + ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to + ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7 + ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if ** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps - ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table - ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind() + ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table + ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind() ** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction. */ testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg ); @@ -64616,7 +64616,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList( pMem->flags = MEM_Int; pMem->u.i = i; /* Program counter */ pMem++; - + pMem->flags = MEM_Static|MEM_Str|MEM_Term; pMem->z = (char*)sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode); /* Opcode */ assert( pMem->z!=0 ); @@ -64681,7 +64681,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList( sqlite3_snprintf(3, pMem->z, "%.2x", pOp->p5); /* P5 */ pMem->enc = SQLITE_UTF8; pMem++; - + #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, 500) ){ assert( p->db->mallocFailed ); @@ -64838,11 +64838,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRewind(Vdbe *p){ ** creating the virtual machine. This involves things such ** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter. ** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more -** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec(). +** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec(). ** ** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine. ** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready -** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to +** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to ** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited. This routine disconnects ** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the ** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be @@ -64879,11 +64879,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady( nArg = pParse->nMaxArg; nOnce = pParse->nOnce; if( nOnce==0 ) nOnce = 1; /* Ensure at least one byte in p->aOnceFlag[] */ - + /* For each cursor required, also allocate a memory cell. Memory ** cells (nMem+1-nCursor)..nMem, inclusive, will never be used by ** the vdbe program. Instead they are used to allocate space for - ** VdbeCursor/BtCursor structures. The blob of memory associated with + ** VdbeCursor/BtCursor structures. The blob of memory associated with ** cursor 0 is stored in memory cell nMem. Memory cell (nMem-1) ** stores the blob of memory associated with cursor 1, etc. ** @@ -64891,7 +64891,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady( */ nMem += nCursor; - /* Allocate space for memory registers, SQL variables, VDBE cursors and + /* Allocate space for memory registers, SQL variables, VDBE cursors and ** an array to marshal SQL function arguments in. */ zCsr = (u8*)&p->aOp[p->nOp]; /* Memory avaliable for allocation */ @@ -64908,10 +64908,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady( p->expired = 0; /* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in two - ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused space at the + ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused space at the ** end of the opcode array. If we are unable to satisfy all memory ** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second - ** pass will fill in the rest using a fresh allocation. + ** pass will fill in the rest using a fresh allocation. ** ** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from ** the leftover space at the end of the opcode array can significantly @@ -64960,7 +64960,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady( } /* -** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor +** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor ** happens to hold. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){ @@ -65009,7 +65009,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(VdbeFrame *pFrame){ /* ** Close all cursors. ** -** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory +** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory ** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain ** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to ** open cursors. @@ -65055,7 +65055,7 @@ static void Cleanup(Vdbe *p){ sqlite3 *db = p->db; #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG - /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and + /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and ** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up. */ int i; if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 ); @@ -65138,27 +65138,27 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ int needXcommit = 0; #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE - /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply - ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used. + /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply + ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used. */ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); #endif /* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any ** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to - ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is + ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is ** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database ** to the transaction. */ rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p); /* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and - ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not - ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than + ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not + ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than ** one database file has an open write transaction, a master journal ** file is required for an atomic commit. - */ - for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ + */ + for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ){ needXcommit = 1; @@ -65185,8 +65185,8 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ ** master-journal. ** ** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length - ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In - ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the + ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In + ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the ** simple case then too. */ if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt)) @@ -65199,7 +65199,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ } } - /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1. + /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1. ** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an ** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely, ** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error. @@ -65258,7 +65258,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ }while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ /* Open the master journal. */ - rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster, + rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster, SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE| SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL, 0 ); @@ -65267,7 +65267,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ sqlite3DbFree(db, zMaster); return rc; } - + /* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new ** master journal file. If an error occurs at this point close ** and delete the master journal file. All the individual journal files @@ -65299,7 +65299,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ /* Sync the master journal file. If the IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL device ** flag is set this is not required. */ - if( needSync + if( needSync && 0==(sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pMaster)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) && SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsSync(pMaster, SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL)) ){ @@ -65319,7 +65319,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ ** in case the master journal file name was written into the journal ** file before the failure occurred. */ - for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ + for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zMaster); @@ -65352,7 +65352,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ */ disable_simulated_io_errors(); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); - for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ + for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1); @@ -65368,7 +65368,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable ** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are ** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match. @@ -65404,17 +65404,17 @@ static void checkActiveVdbeCnt(sqlite3 *db){ ** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction, ** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement -** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the +** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the ** statement transaction is committed. ** -** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned. +** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned. ** Otherwise SQLITE_OK. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ sqlite3 *const db = p->db; int rc = SQLITE_OK; - /* If p->iStatement is greater than zero, then this Vdbe opened a + /* If p->iStatement is greater than zero, then this Vdbe opened a ** statement transaction that should be closed here. The only exception ** is that an IO error may have occurred, causing an emergency rollback. ** In this case (db->nStatement==0), and there is nothing to do. @@ -65427,7 +65427,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ assert( db->nStatement>0 ); assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) ); - for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ + for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){ int rc2 = SQLITE_OK; Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt ){ @@ -65454,8 +65454,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ } } - /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the - ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when + /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the + ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when ** the statement transaction was opened. */ if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons; @@ -65466,20 +65466,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){ } /* -** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database -** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be +** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database +** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be ** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint ** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. ** -** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns +** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns ** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY ** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){ sqlite3 *db = p->db; - if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0) - || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0) + if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0) + || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0) ){ p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY; p->errorAction = OE_Abort; @@ -65509,7 +65509,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ /* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or ** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the - ** execution of this virtual machine. + ** execution of this virtual machine. ** ** If any of the following errors occur: ** @@ -65548,16 +65548,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ isSpecialError = mrc==SQLITE_NOMEM || mrc==SQLITE_IOERR || mrc==SQLITE_INTERRUPT || mrc==SQLITE_FULL; if( isSpecialError ){ - /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT, - ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint - ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a + /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT, + ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint + ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a ** consistent state. ** ** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform - ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error + ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error ** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database ** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function - ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore + ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore ** the pager to a consistent state. */ if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){ @@ -65578,16 +65578,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0); } - - /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer - ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction. + + /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer + ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction. ** - ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled - ** above has occurred. + ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled + ** above has occurred. */ - if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db) - && db->autoCommit - && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0) + if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db) + && db->autoCommit + && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0) ){ if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){ rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1); @@ -65597,10 +65597,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ return SQLITE_ERROR; } rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY; - }else{ - /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful + }else{ + /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful ** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign - ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit + ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit ** is required. */ rc = vdbeCommit(db, p); } @@ -65631,7 +65631,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ db->autoCommit = 1; } } - + /* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to ** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to ** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement @@ -65651,9 +65651,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ db->autoCommit = 1; } } - + /* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction - ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter. + ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter. */ if( p->changeCntOn ){ if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){ @@ -65684,7 +65684,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){ } /* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held - ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked() + ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked() ** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks. */ if( db->autoCommit ){ @@ -65706,7 +65706,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){ /* ** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed -** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be +** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be ** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()). ** ** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just @@ -65731,7 +65731,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeTransferError(Vdbe *p){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG /* -** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run, +** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run, ** invoke it. */ static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){ @@ -65836,7 +65836,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){ p->magic = VDBE_MAGIC_INIT; return p->rc & db->errMask; } - + /* ** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution. Return an integer which is ** the result code. Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg. @@ -65857,8 +65857,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){ ** the first argument. ** ** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is -** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user -** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of +** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user +** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of ** VM pVdbe, and only then if: ** ** * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting @@ -66108,8 +66108,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){ } /* -** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating -** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the +** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating +** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the ** upper 4 bytes. Return the result. ** ** For most architectures, this is a no-op. @@ -66131,7 +66131,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){ ** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely ** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank ** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware -** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full +** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full ** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard. (This is the ** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.) On such systems, floating point ** byte swapping becomes very complicated. To avoid problems, @@ -66161,7 +66161,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){ #endif /* -** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into +** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into ** buf. It is assumed that the caller has allocated sufficient space. ** Return the number of bytes written. ** @@ -66172,7 +66172,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){ ** Return the number of bytes actually written into buf[]. The number ** of bytes in the zero-filled tail is included in the return value only ** if those bytes were zeroed in buf[]. -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){ u32 len; @@ -66226,7 +66226,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){ ** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate ** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer ** is avoided. -*/ +*/ static u32 SQLITE_NOINLINE serialGet( const unsigned char *buf, /* Buffer to deserialize from */ u32 serial_type, /* Serial type to deserialize */ @@ -66331,7 +66331,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet( ** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within ** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably ** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should -** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the +** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the ** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL ** before returning. ** @@ -66348,7 +66348,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( int nByte; /* Number of bytes required for *p */ /* We want to shift the pointer pSpace up such that it is 8-byte aligned. - ** Thus, we need to calculate a value, nOff, between 0 and 7, to shift + ** Thus, we need to calculate a value, nOff, between 0 and 7, to shift ** it by. If pSpace is already 8-byte aligned, nOff should be zero. */ nOff = (8 - (SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(pSpace) & 7)) & 7; @@ -66370,10 +66370,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( } /* -** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the +** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the ** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the ** contents of the decoded record. -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack( KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* Information about the record format */ int nKey, /* Size of the binary record */ @@ -66381,7 +66381,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack( UnpackedRecord *p /* Populate this structure before returning. */ ){ const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey; - int d; + int d; u32 idx; /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */ u16 u; /* Unsigned loop counter */ u32 szHdr; @@ -66443,13 +66443,13 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug( /* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized. ** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints. - ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing + ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing ** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance ** impact, since this routine is a very high runner. And so, we choose ** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized. */ /* mem1.u.i = 0; // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */ - + idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1); d1 = szHdr1; assert( pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField>=pPKey2->nField || CORRUPT_DB ); @@ -66469,7 +66469,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug( ** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case. */ if( d1+serial_type1+2>(u32)nKey1 - && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1 + && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1 ){ break; } @@ -66515,7 +66515,7 @@ debugCompareEnd: /* ** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values ** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero -** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than +** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than ** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);". */ static int vdbeCompareMemString( @@ -66579,7 +66579,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C f2 = pMem2->flags; combined_flags = f1|f2; assert( (combined_flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 ); - + /* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values ** are NULL, return 0. */ @@ -66629,7 +66629,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C } assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc ); - assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 || + assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE ); /* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if @@ -66644,7 +66644,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C /* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through ** to the blob case and use memcmp(). */ } - + /* Both values must be blobs. Compare using memcmp(). */ return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2); } @@ -66652,7 +66652,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C /* ** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that -** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive +** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive ** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value ** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes ** and returns the value. @@ -66694,7 +66694,7 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){ /* ** This function compares the two table rows or index records ** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero -** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or +** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or ** greater than key2. The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob ** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE. The pPKey2 ** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from @@ -66703,12 +66703,12 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){ ** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already ** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal. ** -** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all -** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is +** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all +** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is ** returned. ** -** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to -** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered, +** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to +** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered, ** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the ** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db). */ @@ -66740,7 +66740,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareWithSkip( }else{ idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1); d1 = szHdr1; - if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){ + if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){ pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT; return 0; /* Corruption */ } @@ -66748,7 +66748,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareWithSkip( } VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */ - assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField+pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nXField>=pPKey2->nField + assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField+pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nXField>=pPKey2->nField || CORRUPT_DB ); assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortOrder!=0 ); assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField>0 ); @@ -66833,7 +66833,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareWithSkip( }else{ int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n); rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp); - if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n; + if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n; } } } @@ -66888,8 +66888,8 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareWithSkip( /* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and ** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc ** value. */ - assert( CORRUPT_DB - || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc) + assert( CORRUPT_DB + || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc) || pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed ); return pPKey2->default_rc; @@ -66903,8 +66903,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare( /* -** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() -** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the +** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() +** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the ** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single ** byte (i.e. is less than 128). ** @@ -66958,7 +66958,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt( testcase( lhs<0 ); break; } - case 8: + case 8: lhs = 0; break; case 9: @@ -66966,11 +66966,11 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt( break; /* This case could be removed without changing the results of running - ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch + ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch ** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and ** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated - ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other - ** compilers might be similar. */ + ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other + ** compilers might be similar. */ case 0: case 7: return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2); @@ -66983,7 +66983,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt( }else if( v<lhs ){ res = pPKey2->r2; }else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){ - /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing + /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing ** fields. */ res = vdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1); }else{ @@ -66997,9 +66997,9 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt( } /* -** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() +** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare() ** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field -** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint +** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint ** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte. */ static int vdbeRecordCompareString( @@ -67013,7 +67013,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareString( getVarint32(&aKey1[1], serial_type); if( serial_type<12 ){ res = pPKey2->r1; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */ - }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){ + }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){ res = pPKey2->r2; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */ }else{ int nCmp; @@ -67064,7 +67064,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){ /* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume ** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record ** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt() - ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the + ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the ** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is ** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each ** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to @@ -67117,7 +67117,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *rowid){ /* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less ** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption. ** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so - ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits + ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits */ assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) ); VVA_ONLY(rc =) sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCur, &nCellKey); @@ -67181,7 +67181,7 @@ idx_rowid_corruption: ** ** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it ** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry -** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes +** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes ** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare( @@ -67216,7 +67216,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare( /* ** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to -** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'. +** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, int nChange){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); @@ -67258,7 +67258,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3 *sqlite3VdbeDb(Vdbe *v){ /* ** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound -** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return +** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return ** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_* ** constants) to the value before returning it. ** @@ -67558,9 +67558,9 @@ static int invokeValueDestructor( return SQLITE_TOOBIG; } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const void *z, - int n, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const void *z, + int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( n>=0 ); @@ -67568,8 +67568,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob( setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel); } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob64( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const void *z, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const void *z, sqlite3_uint64 n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ @@ -67612,8 +67612,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_null(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(pCtx->pOut); } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const char *z, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const char *z, int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ @@ -67621,8 +67621,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text( setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel); } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const char *z, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const char *z, sqlite3_uint64 n, void (*xDel)(void *), unsigned char enc @@ -67638,27 +67638,27 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64( } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const void *z, - int n, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const void *z, + int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel); } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16be( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const void *z, - int n, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const void *z, + int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel); } SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16le( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - const void *z, - int n, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + const void *z, + int n, void (*xDel)(void *) ){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); @@ -67677,7 +67677,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_code(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int errCode){ pCtx->isError = errCode; pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 1; if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Null ){ - sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1, + sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); } } @@ -67687,7 +67687,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) ); pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG; pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 1; - sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1, + sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC); } @@ -67701,7 +67701,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_nomem(sqlite3_context *pCtx){ } /* -** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It +** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It ** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required. */ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -67726,7 +67726,7 @@ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){ ** statement is completely executed or an error occurs. ** ** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step() -** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a +** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a ** schema change has occurred. That detail is handled by the ** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure. */ @@ -67740,15 +67740,15 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){ ** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE. But beginning ** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would ** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error. - ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility, + ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility, ** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by ** definition. ** ** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written - ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE + ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE ** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change. As a ** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the - ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the + ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the ** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED ** or SQLITE_BUSY error. */ @@ -67784,7 +67784,7 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){ db->u1.isInterrupted = 0; } - assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0 + assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0 || (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0) ); @@ -67833,14 +67833,14 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){ p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; } end_of_step: - /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be - ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy + /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be + ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy ** sqlite3_prepare() interface. According to the docs, this can only - ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc - ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize() + ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc + ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize() ** were called on statement p. */ - assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR + assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR || rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE ); assert( p->rc!=SQLITE_ROW && p->rc!=SQLITE_DONE ); @@ -67848,7 +67848,7 @@ end_of_step: /* If this statement was prepared using sqlite3_prepare_v2(), and an ** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the ** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value. - */ + */ rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p); } return (rc&db->errMask); @@ -67882,15 +67882,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_step(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){ assert( v->expired==0 ); } if( rc2!=SQLITE_OK ){ - /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement. - ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded - ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message + /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement. + ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded + ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message ** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement - ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is + ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is ** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via ** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode(). */ - const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr); + const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr); assert( zErr!=0 || db->mallocFailed ); sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg); if( !db->mallocFailed ){ @@ -68024,9 +68024,9 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_get_auxdata(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int iArg){ ** deleted by calling the delete function specified when it was set. */ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_auxdata( - sqlite3_context *pCtx, - int iArg, - void *pAux, + sqlite3_context *pCtx, + int iArg, + void *pAux, void (*xDelete)(void*) ){ AuxData *pAuxData; @@ -68065,7 +68065,7 @@ failed: #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* -** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been +** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been ** called. ** ** This function is deprecated. Do not use it for new code. It is @@ -68110,9 +68110,9 @@ static const Mem *columnNullValue(void){ ** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined ** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical ** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */ - static const Mem nullMem + static const Mem nullMem #if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__) - __attribute__((aligned(8))) + __attribute__((aligned(8))) #endif = { /* .u = */ {0}, @@ -68158,9 +68158,9 @@ static Mem *columnMem(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ } /* -** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a +** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a ** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the -** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If +** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If ** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result ** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM. ** @@ -68197,8 +68197,8 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ const void *val; val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) ); /* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might - ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob() - ** expression. + ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob() + ** expression. */ columnMallocFailure(pStmt); return val; @@ -68281,7 +68281,7 @@ static const void *columnName( Vdbe *p = (Vdbe *)pStmt; int n; sqlite3 *db = p->db; - + assert( db!=0 ); n = sqlite3_column_count(pStmt); if( N<n && N>=0 ){ @@ -68394,11 +68394,11 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_origin_name16(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int N){ /******************************* sqlite3_bind_ *************************** -** +** ** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement. */ /* -** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the +** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the ** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is ** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK. ** @@ -68417,7 +68417,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){ if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN || p->pc>=0 ){ sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE); sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex); - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, "bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql); return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; } @@ -68432,7 +68432,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){ pVar->flags = MEM_Null; sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_OK); - /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then + /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then ** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan. ** ** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-48440-37595 If the specific value bound to host @@ -68487,19 +68487,19 @@ static int bindText( ** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int i, - const void *zData, - int nData, + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int i, + const void *zData, + int nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0); } SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob64( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int i, - const void *zData, - sqlite3_uint64 nData, + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int i, + const void *zData, + sqlite3_uint64 nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC ); @@ -68541,20 +68541,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_null(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){ } return rc; } -SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int i, - const char *zData, - int nData, +SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text( + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int i, + const char *zData, + int nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8); } -SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int i, - const char *zData, - sqlite3_uint64 nData, +SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64( + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int i, + const char *zData, + sqlite3_uint64 nData, void (*xDel)(void*), unsigned char enc ){ @@ -68568,10 +68568,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64( } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text16( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int i, - const void *zData, - int nData, + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int i, + const void *zData, + int nData, void (*xDel)(void*) ){ return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE); @@ -68621,7 +68621,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_zeroblob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, int n){ /* ** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to. -** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite. +** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){ Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt; @@ -68816,8 +68816,8 @@ static int findNextHostParameter(const char *zSql, int *pnToken){ /* ** This function returns a pointer to a nul-terminated string in memory ** obtained from sqlite3DbMalloc(). If sqlite3.nVdbeExec is 1, then the -** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to -** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1, +** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to +** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1, ** then the returned string holds a copy of zRawSql with "-- " prepended ** to each line of text. ** @@ -68852,7 +68852,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql( char zBase[100]; /* Initial working space */ db = p->db; - sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, zBase, sizeof(zBase), + sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, zBase, sizeof(zBase), db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]); out.db = db; if( db->nVdbeExec>1 ){ @@ -68915,7 +68915,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql( nOut = SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT; while( nOut<pVar->n && (pVar->z[nOut]&0xc0)==0x80 ){ nOut++; } } -#endif +#endif sqlite3XPrintf(&out, 0, "'%.*q'", nOut, pVar->z); #ifdef SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT if( nOut<pVar->n ){ @@ -69084,7 +69084,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_found_count = 0; static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){ if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){ M = iSrcLine; - /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and + /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and ** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */ assert( (M & I)==I ); }else{ @@ -69133,7 +69133,7 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( int isBtreeCursor /* True for B-Tree. False for pseudo-table or vtab */ ){ /* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory - ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a + ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a ** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a ** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons: ** @@ -69154,8 +69154,8 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor( int nByte; VdbeCursor *pCx = 0; - nByte = - ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + + nByte = + ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField + (isBtreeCursor?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0); assert( iCur<p->nCursor ); @@ -69215,7 +69215,7 @@ static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){ ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER: ** SQLITE_AFF_REAL: ** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC: -** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a +** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a ** floating-point representation if an integer representation ** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is ** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because @@ -69270,12 +69270,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){ } /* -** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, +** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, ** not the internal Mem* type. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity( - sqlite3_value *pVal, - u8 affinity, + sqlite3_value *pVal, + u8 affinity, u8 enc ){ applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc); @@ -69301,7 +69301,7 @@ static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){ /* ** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or -** none. +** none. ** ** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags. ** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately. @@ -69440,8 +69440,8 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){ #ifdef VDBE_PROFILE -/* -** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing +/* +** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing ** high-performance timing routines. */ /************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of vdbe.c *********************/ @@ -69499,7 +69499,7 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){ __asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val)); return val; } - + #elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__)) __inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ @@ -69541,9 +69541,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ return ((sqlite_uint64)0); } /* ** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It ** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to -** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the +** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the ** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint. -** +** ** Usage: ** ** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) ); @@ -69560,7 +69560,7 @@ static int checkSavepointCount(sqlite3 *db){ /* ** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can. -** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). +** This is the core of sqlite3_step(). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec( Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */ @@ -69659,7 +69659,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec( sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, pc, pOp); } #endif - + /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens ** if we have a special test build. @@ -69722,7 +69722,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec( memAboutToChange(p, &aMem[pOp->p3]); } #endif - + switch( pOp->opcode ){ /***************************************************************************** @@ -69763,7 +69763,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec( /* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * * ** ** An unconditional jump to address P2. -** The next instruction executed will be +** The next instruction executed will be ** the one at index P2 from the beginning of ** the program. ** @@ -69778,7 +69778,7 @@ case OP_Goto: { /* jump */ /* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev, ** OP_VNext, OP_RowSetNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon ** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called - ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. + ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked. ** ** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean. ** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this @@ -69803,7 +69803,7 @@ check_for_interrupt: } } #endif - + break; } @@ -69931,7 +69931,7 @@ case OP_HaltIfNull: { /* in3 */ ** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback ** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort, ** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the -** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. +** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. ** ** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string. ** @@ -69963,7 +69963,7 @@ case OP_Halt: { pc = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame); lastRowid = db->lastRowid; if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){ - /* Instruction pc is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program + /* Instruction pc is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program ** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt ** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing ** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified @@ -69993,7 +69993,7 @@ case OP_Halt: { assert( zType!=0 || pOp->p4.z!=0 ); zLogFmt = "abort at %d in [%s]: %s"; if( zType && pOp->p4.z ){ - sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "%s constraint failed: %s", + sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "%s constraint failed: %s", zType, pOp->p4.z); }else if( pOp->p4.z ){ sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "%s", pOp->p4.z); @@ -70054,7 +70054,7 @@ case OP_Real: { /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' ** -** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed +** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed ** into a String before it is executed for the first time. During ** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored ** as the P1 parameter. @@ -70086,7 +70086,7 @@ case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2-prerelease */ } /* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */ } - + /* Opcode: String P1 P2 * P4 * ** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1) ** @@ -70311,8 +70311,8 @@ case OP_ResultRow: { break; } - /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then - ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows + /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then + ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows ** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that ** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode. ** @@ -70431,15 +70431,15 @@ case OP_Concat: { /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */ ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1] ** ** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2 -** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in -** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is +** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in +** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is ** NULL, the result is NULL. */ /* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * * ** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1] ** -** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by -** register P1 and store the result in register P3. +** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by +** register P1 and store the result in register P3. ** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL. ** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL. */ @@ -70563,7 +70563,7 @@ case OP_CollSeq: { ** successors. The result of the function is stored in register P3. ** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs. ** -** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the +** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the ** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first ** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine ** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the @@ -70710,7 +70710,7 @@ case OP_ShiftRight: { /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */ /* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2 -** +** ** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1. ** The result is always an integer. ** @@ -70725,7 +70725,7 @@ case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */ } /* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * * -** +** ** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value ** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer ** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0 @@ -70774,7 +70774,7 @@ case OP_RealAffinity: { /* in1 */ ** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1]) ** ** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2. -** +** ** <ul> ** <li value="97"> TEXT ** <li value="98"> BLOB @@ -70805,21 +70805,21 @@ case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */ ** Synopsis: if r[P1]<r[P3] goto P2 ** ** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then -** jump to address P2. +** jump to address P2. ** ** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or -** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL +** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL ** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL. ** ** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character - -** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made +** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made ** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the ** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric ** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored ** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause ** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3. ** -** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, +** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, ** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is ** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values ** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in @@ -71000,7 +71000,7 @@ case OP_Ge: { /* same as TK_GE, jump, in1, in3 */ ** of integers in P4. ** ** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has -** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should +** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should ** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare. */ case OP_Permutation: { @@ -71152,7 +71152,7 @@ case OP_Or: { /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */ ** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1] ** ** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the -** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is +** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is ** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2. */ case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */ @@ -71186,7 +71186,7 @@ case OP_BitNot: { /* same as TK_BITNOT, in1, out2 */ /* Opcode: Once P1 P2 * * * ** -** Check the "once" flag number P1. If it is set, jump to instruction P2. +** Check the "once" flag number P1. If it is set, jump to instruction P2. ** Otherwise, set the flag and fall through to the next instruction. ** In other words, this opcode causes all following opcodes up through P2 ** (but not including P2) to run just once and to be skipped on subsequent @@ -71256,7 +71256,7 @@ case OP_IsNull: { /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */ /* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2 ** -** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. +** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL. */ case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; @@ -71273,7 +71273,7 @@ case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */ ** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using ** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional ** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column -** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1) +** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1) ** values in the record, extract a NULL. ** ** The value extracted is stored in register P3. @@ -71413,14 +71413,14 @@ case OP_Column: { */ if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){ /* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try - ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field + ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field */ op_column_read_header: if( pC->iHdrOffset<aOffset[0] ){ /* Make sure zData points to enough of the record to cover the header. */ if( pC->aRow==0 ){ memset(&sMem, 0, sizeof(sMem)); - rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, aOffset[0], + rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, aOffset[0], !pC->isTable, &sMem); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ goto op_column_error; @@ -71429,7 +71429,7 @@ case OP_Column: { }else{ zData = pC->aRow; } - + /* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */ i = pC->nHdrParsed; offset = aOffset[i]; @@ -71459,7 +71459,7 @@ case OP_Column: { sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&sMem); sMem.flags = MEM_Null; } - + /* The record is corrupt if any of the following are true: ** (1) the bytes of the header extend past the declared header size ** (zHdr>zEndHdr) @@ -71616,13 +71616,13 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: { ** like this: ** ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ - ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | + ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------ ** ** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1 ** and so forth. ** - ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the + ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning ** of the record to data0. @@ -71693,7 +71693,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: { goto too_big; } - /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store + /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store ** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to ** be one of the input registers (because the following call to ** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used). @@ -71732,7 +71732,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: { /* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * * ** Synopsis: r[P2]=count() ** -** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index +** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index ** opened by cursor P1 in register P2 */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT @@ -71769,7 +71769,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { zName = pOp->p4.z; /* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open - ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. + ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints. */ assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 ); assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ); @@ -71779,7 +71779,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){ if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ - /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write + /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write ** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles). */ sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "cannot open savepoint - " @@ -71804,7 +71804,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { if( pNew ){ pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1]; memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1); - + /* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special ** "transaction savepoint". */ if( db->autoCommit ){ @@ -71813,7 +71813,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { }else{ db->nSavepoint++; } - + /* Link the new savepoint into the database handle's list. */ pNew->pNext = db->pSavepoint; db->pSavepoint = pNew; @@ -71827,7 +71827,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { /* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an ** an error is returned to the user. */ for( - pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; + pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint; pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName); pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext ){ @@ -71837,18 +71837,18 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "no such savepoint: %s", zName); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; }else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ - /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are + /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are ** active write statements. */ - sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, + sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "cannot release savepoint - SQL statements in progress" ); rc = SQLITE_BUSY; }else{ /* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so, - ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction - ** is committed. + ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction + ** is committed. */ int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint; if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ @@ -71890,8 +71890,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { db->flags = (db->flags | SQLITE_InternChanges); } } - - /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all + + /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all ** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */ while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){ pTmp = db->pSavepoint; @@ -71900,8 +71900,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: { db->nSavepoint--; } - /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on - ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred + /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on + ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred ** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored ** when the savepoint was created. */ if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){ @@ -71952,7 +71952,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: { if( turnOnAC && iRollback && db->nVdbeActive>1 ){ /* If this instruction implements a ROLLBACK and other VMs are ** still running, and a transaction is active, return an error indicating - ** that the other VMs must complete first. + ** that the other VMs must complete first. */ sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "cannot rollback transaction - " "SQL statements in progress"); @@ -71961,7 +71961,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: { #endif if( turnOnAC && !iRollback && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){ /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing - ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. + ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first. */ sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "cannot commit transaction - " "SQL statements in progress"); @@ -71995,7 +71995,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: { (!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":( (iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active": "cannot commit - no transaction is active")); - + rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } break; @@ -72005,7 +72005,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: { ** ** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already ** active. -** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a +** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a ** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction. ** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started. ** @@ -72061,13 +72061,13 @@ case OP_Transaction: { goto abort_due_to_error; } - if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal - && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) + if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal + && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1) ){ assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ); if( p->iStatement==0 ){ assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 ); - db->nStatement++; + db->nStatement++; p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement; } @@ -72093,7 +72093,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: { if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){ sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg); p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed"); - /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie + /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do ** not reload the schema from the database file. ** @@ -72103,7 +72103,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: { ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself - ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within + ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within ** a v-table method. */ if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){ @@ -72148,9 +72148,9 @@ case OP_ReadCookie: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * * ** ** Write the content of register P3 (interpreted as an integer) -** into cookie number P2 of database P1. P2==1 is the schema version. -** P2==2 is the database format. P2==3 is the recommended pager cache -** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the +** into cookie number P2 of database P1. P2==1 is the schema version. +** P2==2 is the database format. P2==3 is the recommended pager cache +** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the ** database file used to store temporary tables. ** ** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode. @@ -72189,8 +72189,8 @@ case OP_SetCookie: { /* in3 */ ** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3 ** ** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is -** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. -** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for +** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3. +** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for ** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached ** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1 ** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers. @@ -72209,9 +72209,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: { /* in3 */ ** SQLITE_BUSY error code. ** ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to -** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo -** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating -** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer +** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo +** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating +** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table. ** ** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx @@ -72238,9 +72238,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: { /* in3 */ ** root page. ** ** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to -** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo -** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating -** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer +** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo +** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating +** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer ** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the ** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used. ** @@ -72344,7 +72344,7 @@ case OP_OpenWrite: { /* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of ** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point ** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has - ** since moved into the btree layer. */ + ** since moved into the btree layer. */ pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO; break; } @@ -72353,7 +72353,7 @@ case OP_OpenWrite: { ** Synopsis: nColumn=P2 ** ** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table. -** The cursor is always opened read/write even if +** The cursor is always opened read/write even if ** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral ** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed. ** @@ -72375,12 +72375,12 @@ case OP_OpenWrite: { ** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient ** indices in joins. */ -case OP_OpenAutoindex: +case OP_OpenAutoindex: case OP_OpenEphemeral: { VdbeCursor *pCx; KeyInfo *pKeyInfo; - static const int vfsFlags = + static const int vfsFlags = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | @@ -72392,7 +72392,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: { if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem; pCx->nullRow = 1; pCx->isEphemeral = 1; - rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBt, + rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBt, BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBt, 1); @@ -72406,7 +72406,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: { if( (pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){ int pgno; assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO ); - rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBt, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); + rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBt, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 ); assert( pKeyInfo->db==db ); @@ -72471,7 +72471,7 @@ case OP_SequenceTest: { ** ** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single ** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory -** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the +** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the ** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2. ** ** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single @@ -72511,13 +72511,13 @@ case OP_Close: { /* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), -** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers -** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers -** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** -** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that -** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that +** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records ** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, @@ -72529,13 +72529,13 @@ case OP_Close: { /* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), -** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers -** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers -** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** -** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that -** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that +** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order, @@ -72544,16 +72544,16 @@ case OP_Close: { ** ** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe */ -/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * +/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), -** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers -** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers -** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** -** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that -** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that +** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than ** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, @@ -72565,13 +72565,13 @@ case OP_Close: { /* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), -** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers -** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers -** that are used as an unpacked index key. +** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys), +** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers +** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers +** that are used as an unpacked index key. ** -** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that -** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records +** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that +** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records ** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2. ** ** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order, @@ -72648,7 +72648,7 @@ case OP_SeekGT: { /* jump, in3 */ assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) ); if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++; } - } + } rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res); pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -72742,7 +72742,7 @@ case OP_Seek: { /* in2 */ pC->deferredMoveto = 1; break; } - + /* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 * ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] @@ -72767,9 +72767,9 @@ case OP_Seek: { /* in2 */ ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. -** +** ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 -** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 +** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1 ** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control ** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the ** matching entry. @@ -72786,7 +72786,7 @@ case OP_Seek: { /* in2 */ ** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If ** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked ** record. -** +** ** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4 ** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the ** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the @@ -72845,7 +72845,7 @@ case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */ }else{ pIdxKey = sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord( pC->pKeyInfo, aTempRec, sizeof(aTempRec), &pFree - ); + ); if( pIdxKey==0 ) goto no_mem; assert( pIn3->flags & MEM_Blob ); assert( (pIn3->flags & MEM_Zero)==0 ); /* zeroblobs already expanded */ @@ -72942,7 +72942,7 @@ case OP_NotExists: { /* jump, in3 */ ** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1. ** Write the sequence number into register P2. ** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this -** instruction. +** instruction. */ case OP_Sequence: { /* out2-prerelease */ assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); @@ -72960,9 +72960,9 @@ case OP_Sequence: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written ** written to register P2. ** -** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds +** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds ** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are -** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, +** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum, ** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the ' ** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the ** AUTOINCREMENT feature. @@ -73113,7 +73113,7 @@ case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** the update hook. ** ** Parameter P4 may point to a string containing the table-name, or -** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook +** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook ** (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked following a successful insert. ** ** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically @@ -73131,7 +73131,7 @@ case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the ** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3. */ -case OP_Insert: +case OP_Insert: case OP_InsertInt: { Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */ Mem *pKey; /* MEM cell holding key for the record */ @@ -73233,10 +73233,10 @@ case OP_Delete: { if( pOp->p4.z && pC->isTable ){ i64 iKey = 0; sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->pCursor, &iKey); - assert( pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); + assert( pC->movetoTarget==iKey ); } #endif - + rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->pCursor); pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE; @@ -73266,7 +73266,7 @@ case OP_ResetCount: { ** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2 ** ** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the -** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that +** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that ** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields ** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared. ** @@ -73325,8 +73325,8 @@ case OP_SorterData: { ** Synopsis: r[P2]=data ** ** Write into register P2 the complete row data for cursor P1. -** There is no interpretation of the data. -** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as +** There is no interpretation of the data. +** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as ** it is found in the database file. ** ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) @@ -73336,8 +73336,8 @@ case OP_SorterData: { ** Synopsis: r[P2]=key ** ** Write into register P2 the complete row key for cursor P1. -** There is no interpretation of the data. -** The key is copied onto the P2 register exactly as +** There is no interpretation of the data. +** The key is copied onto the P2 register exactly as ** it is found in the database file. ** ** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row) @@ -73481,7 +73481,7 @@ case OP_NullRow: { /* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * * ** -** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 +** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1 ** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index. ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through @@ -73540,7 +73540,7 @@ case OP_Sort: { /* jump */ } /* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * * ** -** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 +** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 ** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index. ** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2. ** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through @@ -73744,7 +73744,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ }else{ nKey = pIn2->n; zKey = pIn2->z; - rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pCrsr, zKey, nKey, "", 0, 0, pOp->p3, + rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pCrsr, zKey, nKey, "", 0, 0, pOp->p3, ((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0) ); assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 ); @@ -73758,7 +73758,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */ ** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3] ** ** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form -** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the +** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the ** index opened by cursor P1. */ case OP_IdxDelete: { @@ -73836,9 +73836,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index -** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index -** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index +** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID ** fields at the end. ** ** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value @@ -73847,9 +73847,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index -** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index -** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index +** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID ** fields at the end. ** ** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value @@ -73858,7 +73858,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ** ROWID on the P1 index. @@ -73869,7 +73869,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4] ** -** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index +** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index ** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against ** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ** ROWID on the P1 index. @@ -73936,8 +73936,8 @@ case OP_IdxGE: { /* jump */ ** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all ** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former ** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred - -** is stored in register P2. If no page -** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already +** is stored in register P2. If no page +** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already ** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2. ** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2. ** @@ -73953,8 +73953,8 @@ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2-prerelease */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE iCnt = 0; for(pVdbe=db->pVdbe; pVdbe; pVdbe = pVdbe->pNext){ - if( pVdbe->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN && pVdbe->bIsReader - && pVdbe->inVtabMethod<2 && pVdbe->pc>=0 + if( pVdbe->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN && pVdbe->bIsReader + && pVdbe->inVtabMethod<2 && pVdbe->pc>=0 ){ iCnt++; } @@ -73997,8 +73997,8 @@ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE. ** ** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an -** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change -** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. +** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change +** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. ** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is ** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared. ** @@ -74006,7 +74006,7 @@ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2-prerelease */ */ case OP_Clear: { int nChange; - + nChange = 0; assert( p->readOnly==0 ); assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) ); @@ -74034,7 +74034,7 @@ case OP_Clear: { */ case OP_ResetSorter: { VdbeCursor *pC; - + assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor ); pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1]; assert( pC!=0 ); @@ -74097,7 +74097,7 @@ case OP_CreateTable: { /* out2-prerelease */ /* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 * ** ** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1 -** that match the WHERE clause P4. +** that match the WHERE clause P4. ** ** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine, ** then runs the new virtual machine. It is thus a re-entrant opcode. @@ -74109,7 +74109,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: { InitData initData; /* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes - ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking + ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking ** sqlite3InitCallback(). */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG @@ -74146,7 +74146,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: { if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){ goto no_mem; } - break; + break; } #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) @@ -74159,7 +74159,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: { case OP_LoadAnalysis: { assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb ); rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1); - break; + break; } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */ @@ -74167,7 +74167,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: { ** ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe ** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table -** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep +** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep ** the internal representation of the ** schema consistent with what is on disk. */ @@ -74193,7 +74193,7 @@ case OP_DropIndex: { ** ** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe ** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger -** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep +** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep ** the internal representation of the ** schema consistent with what is on disk. */ @@ -74212,7 +74212,7 @@ case OP_DropTrigger: { ** ** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors. ** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported. -** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are +** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are ** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining. ** ** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integer @@ -74297,7 +74297,7 @@ case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */ i64 val; pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; - if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 + if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 || sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0 ){ /* The boolean index is empty */ @@ -74374,13 +74374,13 @@ case OP_RowSetTest: { /* jump, in1, in3 */ /* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 ** -** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). +** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM). ** -** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory -** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 -** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE -** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address -** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the +** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory +** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2 +** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE +** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address +** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the ** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime. ** ** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program. @@ -74400,17 +74400,17 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */ pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram; pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3]; assert( pProgram->nOp>0 ); - - /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is + + /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is ** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program ** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set ** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear). - ** - ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is - ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one - ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different + ** + ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is + ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one + ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different ** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a - ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token + ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token ** variable. */ if( pOp->p5 ){ t = pProgram->token; @@ -74426,10 +74426,10 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */ /* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state ** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute - ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt + ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt ** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */ if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){ - /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the + /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the ** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory ** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local ** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value. @@ -74495,10 +74495,10 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */ /* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * * ** -** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the -** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory -** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames -** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* +** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the +** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory +** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames +** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.* ** and old.* values. ** ** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding @@ -74509,7 +74509,7 @@ case OP_Param: { /* out2-prerelease */ VdbeFrame *pFrame; Mem *pIn; pFrame = p->pFrame; - pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; + pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1]; sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem); break; } @@ -74521,8 +74521,8 @@ case OP_Param: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2 ** ** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive). -** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented -** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the +** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented +** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the ** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints). */ case OP_FkCounter: { @@ -74540,7 +74540,7 @@ case OP_FkCounter: { ** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2 ** ** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero. -** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next +** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next ** instruction. ** ** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter @@ -74566,7 +74566,7 @@ case OP_FkIfZero: { /* jump */ ** ** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is ** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed -** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of +** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of ** its current value and the value in register P2. ** ** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially @@ -74613,7 +74613,7 @@ case OP_IfPos: { /* jump, in1 */ ** Synopsis: r[P1]+=P3, if r[P1]<0 goto P2 ** ** Register P1 must contain an integer. Add literal P3 to the value in -** register P1 then if the value of register P1 is less than zero, jump to P2. +** register P1 then if the value of register P1 is less than zero, jump to P2. */ case OP_IfNeg: { /* jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; @@ -74630,7 +74630,7 @@ case OP_IfNeg: { /* jump, in1 */ ** Synopsis: r[P1]+=P3, if r[P1]==0 goto P2 ** ** The register P1 must contain an integer. Add literal P3 to the -** value in register P1. If the result is exactly 0, jump to P2. +** value in register P1. If the result is exactly 0, jump to P2. */ case OP_IfZero: { /* jump, in1 */ pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1]; @@ -74758,9 +74758,9 @@ case OP_Checkpoint: { } for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){ sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]); - } + } break; -}; +}; #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA @@ -74785,9 +74785,9 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2-prerelease */ #endif eNew = pOp->p3; - assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE - || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE - || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST + assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE + || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL @@ -74806,7 +74806,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2-prerelease */ zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1); /* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database - ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory + ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory */ if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL && (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */ @@ -74820,18 +74820,18 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2-prerelease */ ){ if( !db->autoCommit || db->nVdbeRead>1 ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; - sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, + sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, db, "cannot change %s wal mode from within a transaction", (eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ? "into" : "out of") ); break; }else{ - + if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){ /* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call - ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log - ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file - ** after a successful return. + ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log + ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file + ** after a successful return. */ rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -74842,7 +74842,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2-prerelease */ ** as an intermediate */ sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF); } - + /* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal ** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal. */ @@ -74913,7 +74913,7 @@ case OP_IncrVacuum: { /* jump */ ** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically ** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2()) ** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA. -** +** ** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero, ** then only the currently executing statement is expired. */ @@ -74931,7 +74931,7 @@ case OP_Expire: { ** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3 ** ** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when -** the shared-cache feature is enabled. +** the shared-cache feature is enabled. ** ** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database ** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or @@ -74945,7 +74945,7 @@ case OP_Expire: { case OP_TableLock: { u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3; if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){ - int p1 = pOp->p1; + int p1 = pOp->p1; assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb ); assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) ); assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 ); @@ -74962,7 +74962,7 @@ case OP_TableLock: { #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 * ** -** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the +** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the ** xBegin method for that table. ** ** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from @@ -75121,7 +75121,7 @@ case OP_VFilter: { /* jump */ ** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2) ** ** Store the value of the P2-th column of -** the row of the virtual-table that the +** the row of the virtual-table that the ** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3. */ case OP_VColumn: { @@ -75186,7 +75186,7 @@ case OP_VNext: { /* jump */ /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during - ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that + ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor. */ @@ -75243,23 +75243,23 @@ case OP_VRename: { ** ** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure. ** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values -** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate -** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the +** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate +** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the ** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate. ** ** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both. ** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3) -** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no -** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new -** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new -** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are +** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no +** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new +** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new +** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are ** the values of columns in the new row. ** ** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of ** a row to delete. ** ** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call -** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() +** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() ** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted. ** ** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to @@ -75274,7 +75274,7 @@ case OP_VUpdate: { Mem **apArg; Mem *pX; - assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback + assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback || pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace ); assert( p->readOnly==0 ); @@ -75462,7 +75462,7 @@ vdbe_error_halt: assert( rc ); p->rc = rc; testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); - sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", + sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s", pc, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg); sqlite3VdbeHalt(p); if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) db->mallocFailed = 1; @@ -75569,7 +75569,7 @@ struct Incrblob { ** sqlite3DbFree(). ** ** If an error does occur, then the b-tree cursor is closed. All subsequent -** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will +** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will ** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT. */ static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){ @@ -75577,8 +75577,8 @@ static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){ char *zErr = 0; /* Error message */ Vdbe *v = (Vdbe *)p->pStmt; - /* Set the value of the SQL statements only variable to integer iRow. - ** This is done directly instead of using sqlite3_bind_int64() to avoid + /* Set the value of the SQL statements only variable to integer iRow. + ** This is done directly instead of using sqlite3_bind_int64() to avoid ** triggering asserts related to mutexes. */ assert( v->aVar[0].flags&MEM_Int ); @@ -75638,7 +75638,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( int nAttempt = 0; int iCol; /* Index of zColumn in row-record */ - /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified + /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified ** db/table/row entry. The reason for using a vdbe program instead ** of writing code to use the b-tree layer directly is that the ** vdbe program will take advantage of the various transaction, @@ -75646,11 +75646,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( ** ** After seeking the cursor, the vdbe executes an OP_ResultRow. ** Code external to the Vdbe then "borrows" the b-tree cursor and - ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and + ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and ** blob_bytes() functions. ** ** The sqlite3_blob_close() function finalizes the vdbe program, - ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the + ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the ** transaction. */ static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(4); @@ -75733,7 +75733,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( } /* If the value is being opened for writing, check that the - ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key. + ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key. ** It is against the rules to open a column to which either of these ** descriptions applies for writing. */ if( flags ){ @@ -75743,7 +75743,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){ /* Check that the column is not part of an FK child key definition. It ** is not necessary to check if it is part of a parent key, as parent - ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this + ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this ** case. */ FKey *pFKey; for(pFKey=pTab->pFKey; pFKey; pFKey=pFKey->pNextFrom){ @@ -75780,14 +75780,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, flags, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, flags, pTab->pSchema->schema_cookie, pTab->pSchema->iGeneration); - sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); + sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1); sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(v, ArraySize(openBlob), openBlob, iLn); /* Make sure a mutex is held on the table to be accessed */ - sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb); + sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb); /* Configure the OP_TableLock instruction */ #ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE @@ -75799,7 +75799,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, 1, pTab->zName, P4_TRANSIENT); #endif - /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2 + /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2 ** parameter of the other to pTab->tnum. */ sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, 3 - flags); sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, 2 + flags, pTab->tnum); @@ -75809,7 +75809,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( ** think that the table has one more column than it really ** does. An OP_Column to retrieve this imaginary column will ** always return an SQL NULL. This is useful because it means - ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type + ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type ** and offset cache without causing any IO. */ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, 2+flags, SQLITE_INT_TO_PTR(pTab->nCol+1),P4_INT32); @@ -75821,7 +75821,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open( sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(v, pParse); } } - + pBlob->flags = flags; pBlob->iCol = iCol; pBlob->db = db; @@ -75874,10 +75874,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){ ** Perform a read or write operation on a blob */ static int blobReadWrite( - sqlite3_blob *pBlob, - void *z, - int n, - int iOffset, + sqlite3_blob *pBlob, + void *z, + int n, + int iOffset, int (*xCall)(BtCursor*, u32, u32, void*) ){ int rc; @@ -75951,8 +75951,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_bytes(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){ ** ** If an error occurs, or if the specified row does not exist or does not ** contain a blob or text value, then an error code is returned and the -** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all -** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close()) +** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all +** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close()) ** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ @@ -76046,7 +76046,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** is like Close() followed by Init() only ** much faster. ** -** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can +** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can ** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind(). Next(), Rowkey(), and ** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e. ** @@ -76054,16 +76054,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** for each record: Write() ** Rewind() ** Rowkey()/Compare() -** Next() +** Next() ** Close() ** ** Algorithm: ** -** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held +** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held ** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds ** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using ** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required -** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records +** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records ** directly from main memory. ** ** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the @@ -76073,10 +76073,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example ** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA. ** -** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing +** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing ** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the -** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to -** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by +** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to +** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by ** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes. ** ** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated @@ -76093,7 +76093,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_WORKER_THREADS, ...). ** -** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a +** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a ** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted ** PMAs within temporary files on disk. ** @@ -76105,16 +76105,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** ** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is ** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has -** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread +** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread ** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds ** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on. ** -** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used +** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used ** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA. ** -** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when -** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used. -** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on +** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when +** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used. +** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on ** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and ** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT ** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality. @@ -76127,7 +76127,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){ ** the main thread to read from. */ -/* +/* ** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various ** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance ** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode. @@ -76149,7 +76149,7 @@ typedef struct SorterList SorterList; /* In-memory list of records */ typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger; /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */ /* -** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data +** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data ** stored in the file. */ struct SorterFile { @@ -76189,17 +76189,17 @@ struct SorterList { ** the MergeEngine.nTree variable. ** ** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing -** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of +** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of ** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the -** aTree element is set to the index of it. +** aTree element is set to the index of it. ** ** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any ** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF ** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored. ** -** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described +** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described ** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders -** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that +** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that ** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused. ** ** Example: @@ -76215,7 +76215,7 @@ struct SorterList { ** ** aTree[] = { X, 5 0, 5 0, 3, 5, 6 } ** -** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by +** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by ** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will ** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is ** "Eggplant": @@ -76256,8 +76256,8 @@ struct MergeEngine { ** each thread requries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in ** as part of comparison operations. ** -** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then, -** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for +** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then, +** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for ** two purposes: ** ** 1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to @@ -76285,7 +76285,7 @@ struct SortSubtask { }; /* -** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each +** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each ** sorter cursor created by the VDBE. ** ** mxKeysize: @@ -76337,21 +76337,21 @@ struct PmaReader { }; /* -** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored +** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored ** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to ** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through ** multiple PMAs simultaneously. ** -** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and -** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1). +** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and +** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1). ** -** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0] -** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in -** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from -** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the -** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off -** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of -** sorted record data from pMerger. +** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0] +** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in +** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from +** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the +** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off +** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of +** sorted record data from pMerger. ** ** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the ** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges @@ -76362,7 +76362,7 @@ struct PmaReader { ** ** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its ** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning -** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a +** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a ** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single ** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with ** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out @@ -76477,7 +76477,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob( assert( p->aBuffer ); - /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next + /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next ** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less ** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data. */ iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer; @@ -76498,11 +76498,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob( assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } - nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf; + nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf; if( nByte<=nAvail ){ /* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this - ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a + ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a ** pointer into the buffer to the caller. */ *ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf]; p->iReadOff += nByte; @@ -76581,7 +76581,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadVarint(PmaReader *p, u64 *pnOut){ /* ** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the -** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted +** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted ** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use ** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL. ** @@ -76602,7 +76602,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterMapFile(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterFile *pFile, u8 **pp){ /* ** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to -** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK +** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK ** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs. */ static int vdbePmaReaderSeek( @@ -76692,11 +76692,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderNext(PmaReader *pReadr){ /* ** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile -** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function -** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the +** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function +** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the ** PMA is empty). ** -** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file +** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file ** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint. */ static int vdbePmaReaderInit( @@ -76729,13 +76729,13 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderInit( /* -** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2, +** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2, ** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences ** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison. ** ** Before returning, object (pTask->pUnpacked) is populated with the -** unpacked version of key2. Or, if pKey2 is passed a NULL pointer, then it -** is assumed that the (pTask->pUnpacked) structure already contains the +** unpacked version of key2. Or, if pKey2 is passed a NULL pointer, then it +** is assumed that the (pTask->pUnpacked) structure already contains the ** unpacked key to use as key2. ** ** If an OOM error is encountered, (pTask->pUnpacked->error_rc) is set @@ -76762,7 +76762,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompare( ** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField ** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX ** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in -** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part +** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part ** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never ** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small ** performance boost. @@ -76868,7 +76868,7 @@ static void vdbeSorterRecordFree(sqlite3 *db, SorterRecord *pRecord){ } /* -** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All +** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All ** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning. */ static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){ @@ -76973,7 +76973,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCreateThread( } /* -** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create +** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create ** level-0 PMAs. */ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){ @@ -76982,10 +76982,10 @@ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){ /* This function is always called by the main user thread. ** - ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called, + ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called, ** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread ** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race - ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join + ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join ** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */ for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){ SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i]; @@ -77153,8 +77153,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterOpenTempFile( } /* -** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord -** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or +** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord +** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or ** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise. */ static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){ @@ -77207,8 +77207,8 @@ static void vdbeSorterMerge( } /* -** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return -** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if +** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return +** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if ** an error occurs. */ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ @@ -77255,8 +77255,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ pList->pList = p; sqlite3_free(aSlot); - assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK - || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM + assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK + || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM ); return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode; } @@ -77297,8 +77297,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){ memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy); p->iBufEnd += nCopy; if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){ - p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, - &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, + p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, + &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart ); p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0; @@ -77313,7 +77313,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){ /* ** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object. ** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined. -** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not +** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not ** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code. ** ** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the @@ -77322,8 +77322,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){ int rc; if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){ - p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, - &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, + p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd, + &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart, p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart ); } @@ -77335,11 +77335,11 @@ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){ } /* -** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return +** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return ** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs. */ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){ - int nByte; + int nByte; u8 aByte[10]; nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal); vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte); @@ -77347,7 +77347,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){ /* ** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0 -** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if +** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if ** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. ** ** The format of a PMA is: @@ -77355,8 +77355,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){ ** * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content ** in the PMA (not including the varint itself). ** -** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys. -** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the +** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys. +** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the ** key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data. */ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ @@ -77365,7 +77365,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){ PmaWriter writer; /* Object used to write to the file */ #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG - /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA. + /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA. ** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function. */ i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof; #endif @@ -77455,7 +77455,7 @@ static int vdbeMergeEngineStep( }else if( pReadr2->pFd==0 ){ iRes = -1; }else{ - iRes = vdbeSorterCompare(pTask, + iRes = vdbeSorterCompare(pTask, pReadr1->aKey, pReadr1->nKey, pKey2, pReadr2->nKey ); } @@ -77519,7 +77519,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){ SortSubtask *pTask = 0; /* Thread context used to create new PMA */ int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1); - /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written. + /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written. ** Or will be, anyhow. */ pSorter->bUsePMA = 1; @@ -77529,7 +77529,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){ ** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running, ** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy, ** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1) - ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final + ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final ** sub-task uses the main thread. */ for(i=0; i<nWorker; i++){ int iTest = (pSorter->iPrev + i + 1) % nWorker; @@ -77596,14 +77596,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite( ** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then ** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is ** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory. - ** + ** ** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents ** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true: ** - ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater + ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater ** than (page-size * cache-size), or ** - ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater + ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater ** than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true. */ nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord); @@ -77737,11 +77737,11 @@ static int vdbeIncrBgPopulate(IncrMerger *pIncr){ ** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the ** beginning. ** -** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading -** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0]. +** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading +** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0]. ** -** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the -** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap +** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the +** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap ** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not ** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread ** to populate the new aFile[1]. @@ -77887,7 +77887,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode); /* ** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this -** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the +** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the ** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion. ** ** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge @@ -77897,8 +77897,8 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode); ** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at ** its first key. ** -** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use -** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data +** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use +** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data ** to pMerger. ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. @@ -77956,13 +77956,13 @@ static int vdbeMergeEngineInit( ** ** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed ** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a -** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are +** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are ** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to ** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point ** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do -** that. +** that. ** -** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately +** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately ** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has ** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since ** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will @@ -78037,7 +78037,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){ #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 /* -** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in +** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in ** background threads. */ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgInit(void *pCtx){ @@ -78050,11 +78050,11 @@ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgInit(void *pCtx){ } /* -** Use a background thread to invoke vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(INCRINIT_TASK) +** Use a background thread to invoke vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(INCRINIT_TASK) ** on the PmaReader object passed as the first argument. ** -** This call will initialize the various fields of the pReadr->pIncr -** structure and, if it is a multi-threaded IncrMerger, launch a +** This call will initialize the various fields of the pReadr->pIncr +** structure and, if it is a multi-threaded IncrMerger, launch a ** background thread to populate aFile[1]. */ static int vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr){ @@ -78070,7 +78070,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr){ ** to NULL and return an SQLite error code. ** ** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the -** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is +** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is ** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last ** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of ** *piOffset is undefined. @@ -78180,12 +78180,12 @@ static int vdbeSorterAddToTree( /* ** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter ** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp -** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that +** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that ** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the ** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an -** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value +** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value ** of *ppOut is undefined. */ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild( @@ -78197,8 +78197,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild( int iTask; #if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0 - /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level - ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly + /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level + ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly ** one PmaReader per sub-task. */ assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 ); if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){ @@ -78303,7 +78303,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterSetupMerge(VdbeSorter *pSorter){ for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTask<pSorter->nTask; iTask++){ PmaReader *p = &pMain->aReadr[iTask]; assert( p->pIncr==0 || p->pIncr->pTask==&pSorter->aTask[iTask] ); - if( p->pIncr ){ + if( p->pIncr ){ if( iTask==pSorter->nTask-1 ){ rc = vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(p, INCRINIT_TASK); }else{ @@ -78357,7 +78357,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){ return rc; } - /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite() + /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite() ** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always ** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards. ** So the list is never empty at this point. */ @@ -78369,7 +78369,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){ vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind"); - /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to + /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to ** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs. */ assert( pSorter->pReader==0 ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -78415,7 +78415,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(sqlite3 *db, const VdbeCursor *pCsr, in } /* -** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the +** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the ** current key. */ static void *vdbeSorterRowkey( @@ -78534,7 +78534,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare( ** be used to service read() and write() requests. The actual file ** on disk is not created or populated until either: ** -** 1) The in-memory representation grows too large for the allocated +** 1) The in-memory representation grows too large for the allocated ** buffer, or ** 2) The sqlite3JournalCreate() function is called. */ @@ -78558,7 +78558,7 @@ struct JournalFile { typedef struct JournalFile JournalFile; /* -** If it does not already exists, create and populate the on-disk file +** If it does not already exists, create and populate the on-disk file ** for JournalFile p. */ static int createFile(JournalFile *p){ @@ -78574,7 +78574,7 @@ static int createFile(JournalFile *p){ } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ /* If an error occurred while writing to the file, close it before - ** returning. This way, SQLite uses the in-memory journal data to + ** returning. This way, SQLite uses the in-memory journal data to ** roll back changes made to the internal page-cache before this ** function was called. */ sqlite3OsClose(pReal); @@ -78710,7 +78710,7 @@ static struct sqlite3_io_methods JournalFileMethods = { 0 /* xShmUnmap */ }; -/* +/* ** Open a journal file. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalOpen( @@ -78759,7 +78759,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalExists(sqlite3_file *p){ return (p->pMethods!=&JournalFileMethods || ((JournalFile *)p)->pReal!=0); } -/* +/* ** Return the number of bytes required to store a JournalFile that uses vfs ** pVfs to create the underlying on-disk files. */ @@ -78851,7 +78851,7 @@ static int memjrnlRead( if( p->readpoint.iOffset!=iOfst || iOfst==0 ){ sqlite3_int64 iOff = 0; - for(pChunk=p->pFirst; + for(pChunk=p->pFirst; ALWAYS(pChunk) && (iOff+JOURNAL_CHUNKSIZE)<=iOfst; pChunk=pChunk->pNext ){ @@ -79000,7 +79000,7 @@ static const struct sqlite3_io_methods MemJournalMethods = { 0 /* xUnfetch */ }; -/* +/* ** Open a journal file. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemJournalOpen(sqlite3_file *pJfd){ @@ -79011,14 +79011,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemJournalOpen(sqlite3_file *pJfd){ } /* -** Return true if the file-handle passed as an argument is -** an in-memory journal +** Return true if the file-handle passed as an argument is +** an in-memory journal */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsMemJournal(sqlite3_file *pJfd){ return pJfd->pMethods==&MemJournalMethods; } -/* +/* ** Return the number of bytes required to store a MemJournal file descriptor. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemJournalSize(void){ @@ -79119,7 +79119,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectExpr(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** Walk the parse trees associated with all subqueries in the ** FROM clause of SELECT statement p. Do not invoke the select ** callback on p, but do invoke it on each FROM clause subquery -** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return +** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return ** WRC_Abort or WRC_Continue; */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ @@ -79136,16 +79136,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ } } return WRC_Continue; -} +} /* ** Call sqlite3WalkExpr() for every expression in Select statement p. ** Invoke sqlite3WalkSelect() for subqueries in the FROM clause and -** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior. +** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior. ** ** If it is not NULL, the xSelectCallback() callback is invoked before ** the walk of the expressions and FROM clause. The xSelectCallback2() -** method, if it is not NULL, is invoked following the walk of the +** method, if it is not NULL, is invoked following the walk of the ** expressions and FROM clause. ** ** Return WRC_Continue under normal conditions. Return WRC_Abort if @@ -79237,7 +79237,7 @@ static void incrAggFunctionDepth(Expr *pExpr, int N){ ** ** The reason for suppressing the TK_AS term when the expression is a simple ** column reference is so that the column reference will be recognized as -** usable by indices within the WHERE clause processing logic. +** usable by indices within the WHERE clause processing logic. ** ** The TK_AS operator is inhibited if zType[0]=='G'. This means ** that in a GROUP BY clause, the expression is evaluated twice. Hence: @@ -79301,7 +79301,7 @@ static void resolveAlias( pDup = sqlite3ExprAddCollateString(pParse, pDup, pExpr->u.zToken); } - /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This + /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This ** prevents ExprDelete() from deleting the Expr structure itself, ** allowing it to be repopulated by the memcpy() on the following line. ** The pExpr->u.zToken might point into memory that will be freed by the @@ -79368,7 +79368,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MatchSpanName( /* ** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up -** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr +** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr ** expression node refer back to that source column. The following changes ** are made to pExpr: ** @@ -79486,7 +79486,7 @@ static int lookupName( for(j=0, pCol=pTab->aCol; j<pTab->nCol; j++, pCol++){ if( sqlite3StrICmp(pCol->zName, zCol)==0 ){ /* If there has been exactly one prior match and this match - ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a + ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a ** USING clause, then skip this match. */ if( cnt==1 ){ @@ -79509,7 +79509,7 @@ static int lookupName( } /* if( pSrcList ) */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER - /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe + /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe ** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference */ if( zDb==0 && zTab!=0 && cntTab==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab!=0 ){ @@ -79525,7 +79525,7 @@ static int lookupName( pTab = 0; } - if( pTab ){ + if( pTab ){ int iCol; pSchema = pTab->pSchema; cntTab++; @@ -79613,7 +79613,7 @@ static int lookupName( assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 ); goto lookupname_end; } - } + } } /* Advance to the next name context. The loop will exit when either @@ -79813,7 +79813,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ SrcList *pSrcList = pNC->pSrcList; struct SrcList_item *pItem; assert( pSrcList && pSrcList->nSrc==1 ); - pItem = pSrcList->a; + pItem = pSrcList->a; pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN; pExpr->pTab = pItem->pTab; pExpr->iTable = pItem->iCursor; @@ -79828,7 +79828,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ case TK_ID: { return lookupName(pParse, 0, 0, pExpr->u.zToken, pNC, pExpr); } - + /* A table name and column name: ID.ID ** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID */ @@ -79901,7 +79901,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ ** likelihood(X,0.9375). */ /* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625. likely() is 0.9375 */ pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 62 : 938; - } + } } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION auth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_FUNCTION, 0, pDef->zName, 0); @@ -79949,7 +79949,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ pNC->ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg; } /* FIX ME: Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return - ** type of the function + ** type of the function */ return WRC_Prune; } @@ -80084,7 +80084,7 @@ static void resolveOutOfRangeError( int i, /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */ int mx /* Largest permissible value of i */ ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%r %s BY term out of range - should be " "between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx); } @@ -80319,7 +80319,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */ Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */ sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */ - + assert( p!=0 ); if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){ @@ -80359,7 +80359,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, p->pOffset) ){ return WRC_Abort; } - + /* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries */ for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){ @@ -80386,14 +80386,14 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ pItem->isCorrelated = (nRef!=0); } } - + /* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to ** resolve the result-set expression list. */ sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg; sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pOuterNC; - + /* Resolve names in the result set. */ pEList = p->pEList; assert( pEList!=0 ); @@ -80403,8 +80403,8 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ return WRC_Abort; } } - - /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY + + /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY ** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions. */ assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 ); @@ -80415,14 +80415,14 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ }else{ sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg; } - + /* If a HAVING clause is present, then there must be a GROUP BY clause. */ if( p->pHaving && !pGroupBy ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a GROUP BY clause is required before HAVING"); return WRC_Abort; } - + /* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the ** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that ** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by @@ -80436,7 +80436,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ if( sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, p->pWhere) ) return WRC_Abort; /* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in - ** outer queries + ** outer queries */ sNC.pNext = 0; sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg; @@ -80452,13 +80452,13 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ if( db->mallocFailed ){ return WRC_Abort; } - - /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure + + /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure ** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions. */ if( pGroupBy ){ struct ExprList_item *pItem; - + if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){ return WRC_Abort; } @@ -80493,7 +80493,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions ** are seen. ** -** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the +** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the ** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where ** ** X: The name of a database. Ex: "main" or "temp" or @@ -80525,7 +80525,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** ** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b; ** -** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is +** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is ** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified. ** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is ** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION. @@ -80535,7 +80535,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss. The number ** if errors is returned. */ -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames( +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames( NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */ Expr *pExpr /* The expression to be analyzed. */ ){ @@ -80665,7 +80665,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ResolveSelfReference( ** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any. ** ** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias, -** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the +** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the ** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned, ** indicating no affinity for the expression. ** @@ -80692,7 +80692,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3ExprAffinity(Expr *pExpr){ return sqlite3AffinityType(pExpr->u.zToken, 0); } #endif - if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_REGISTER) + if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_REGISTER) && pExpr->pTab!=0 ){ /* op==TK_REGISTER && pExpr->pTab!=0 happens when pExpr was originally @@ -80751,7 +80751,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){ assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE || pExpr->op==TK_AS ); pExpr = pExpr->pLeft; } - } + } return pExpr; } @@ -80802,7 +80802,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ break; } } - if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){ + if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){ pColl = 0; } return pColl; @@ -80898,8 +80898,8 @@ static u8 binaryCompareP5(Expr *pExpr1, Expr *pExpr2, int jumpIfNull){ ** it is not considered. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq( - Parse *pParse, - Expr *pLeft, + Parse *pParse, + Expr *pLeft, Expr *pRight ){ CollSeq *pColl; @@ -80951,7 +80951,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH]; if( nHeight>mxHeight ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight ); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; @@ -80997,10 +80997,10 @@ static void heightOfSelect(Select *p, int *pnHeight){ } /* -** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an -** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or +** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an +** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or ** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression -** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other +** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other ** referenced Expr plus one. */ static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){ @@ -81089,7 +81089,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprAlloc( assert( pToken->z!=0 || pToken->n==0 ); if( pToken->n ) memcpy(pNew->u.zToken, pToken->z, pToken->n); pNew->u.zToken[pToken->n] = 0; - if( dequote && nExtra>=3 + if( dequote && nExtra>=3 && ((c = pToken->z[0])=='\'' || c=='"' || c=='[' || c=='`') ){ sqlite3Dequote(pNew->u.zToken); if( c=='"' ) pNew->flags |= EP_DblQuoted; @@ -81098,7 +81098,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprAlloc( } #if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0 pNew->nHeight = 1; -#endif +#endif } return pNew; } @@ -81247,7 +81247,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprFunction(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList, Token * /* ** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard -** in the original SQL statement. +** in the original SQL statement. ** ** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential ** variable number. @@ -81323,7 +81323,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprAssignVarNumber(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){ pParse->azVar[x-1] = sqlite3DbStrNDup(db, z, n); } } - } + } if( !pParse->nErr && pParse->nVar>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_VARIABLE_NUMBER] ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "too many SQL variables"); } @@ -81354,7 +81354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprDelete(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p){ } /* -** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure +** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure ** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE, ** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE. */ @@ -81369,14 +81369,14 @@ static int exprStructSize(Expr *p){ ** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree. They differ in ** how much of the tree is measured. ** -** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure +** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure ** dupedExprNodeSize() Size of Expr + space for token ** dupedExprSize() Expr + token + subtree components ** *************************************************************************** ** -** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together: -** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and +** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together: +** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and ** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be. ** The return values is always one of: ** @@ -81407,7 +81407,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){ nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE; }else{ assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) ); - assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) ); + assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) ); assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_MemToken) ); assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) ); if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){ @@ -81421,7 +81421,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){ } /* -** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy +** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy ** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that ** string is defined.) */ @@ -81434,16 +81434,16 @@ static int dupedExprNodeSize(Expr *p, int flags){ } /* -** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the +** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the ** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a ** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags. ** ** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct ** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any. ** -** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes -** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft -** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or +** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes +** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft +** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or ** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables). */ static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){ @@ -81458,8 +81458,8 @@ static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){ } /* -** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer -** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough +** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer +** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough ** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken ** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions, ** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the @@ -81549,7 +81549,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p, int flags, u8 **pzBuffer){ } /* -** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second +** Create and return a deep copy of the object passed as the second ** argument. If an OOM condition is encountered, NULL is returned ** and the db->mallocFailed flag set. */ @@ -81582,7 +81582,7 @@ static With *withDup(sqlite3 *db, With *p){ ** without effecting the originals. ** ** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(), -** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded +** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded ** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines. ** ** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated. @@ -81608,7 +81608,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags) if( pItem==0 ){ sqlite3DbFree(db, pNew); return 0; - } + } pOldItem = p->a; for(i=0; i<p->nExpr; i++, pItem++, pOldItem++){ Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr; @@ -81625,7 +81625,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags) /* ** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from -** the build, then none of the following routines, except for +** the build, then none of the following routines, except for ** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes ** called with a NULL argument. */ @@ -81765,7 +81765,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppend( } return pList; -no_mem: +no_mem: /* Avoid leaking memory if malloc has failed. */ sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr); sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList); @@ -81872,7 +81872,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprListDelete(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *pList){ ** in a CREATE TABLE statement. The Walker.u.i value is 4 when parsing ** an existing schema and 3 when processing a new statement. A bound ** parameter raises an error for new statements, but is silently converted -** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_master tables that +** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_master tables that ** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions ** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a ** malformed schema error. @@ -82017,7 +82017,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprIsInteger(Expr *p, int *pValue){ ** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL. ** ** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex -** to tell return TRUE. +** to tell return TRUE. ** ** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes ** when we know that a value cannot be NULL. Hence, a false positive @@ -82140,7 +82140,7 @@ static int isCandidateForInOpt(Select *p){ #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY */ /* -** Code an OP_Once instruction and allocate space for its flag. Return the +** Code an OP_Once instruction and allocate space for its flag. Return the ** address of the new instruction. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeOnce(Parse *pParse){ @@ -82167,7 +82167,7 @@ static void sqlite3SetHasNullFlag(Vdbe *v, int iCur, int regHasNull){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY /* -** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the +** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the ** right-hand side. Return TRUE if that list is constant. */ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){ @@ -82227,9 +82227,9 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){ ** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or it ** has a UNIQUE constraint or UNIQUE index. ** -** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used -** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must -** be used unless <column> is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or an index can +** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used +** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must +** be used unless <column> is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or an index can ** be found with <column> as its left-most column. ** ** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and @@ -82241,7 +82241,7 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){ ** ** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function ** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator -** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and +** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and ** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at ** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written ** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a @@ -82264,7 +82264,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(Parse *pParse, Expr *pX, u32 inFlags, int mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0; /* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to - ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new + ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new ** ephemeral table. */ p = (ExprHasProperty(pX, EP_xIsSelect) ? pX->x.pSelect : 0); @@ -82282,7 +82282,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(Parse *pParse, Expr *pX, u32 inFlags, int pTab = p->pSrc->a[0].pTab; pExpr = p->pEList->a[0].pExpr; iCol = (i16)pExpr->iColumn; - + /* Code an OP_Transaction and OP_TableLock for <table>. */ iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema); sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iDb); @@ -82309,7 +82309,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(Parse *pParse, Expr *pX, u32 inFlags, int ** to this collation sequence. */ CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pX->pLeft, pExpr); - /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform the + /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform the ** comparison is the same as the affinity of the column. If ** it is not, it is not possible to use any index. */ @@ -82351,7 +82351,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(Parse *pParse, Expr *pX, u32 inFlags, int ){ eType = IN_INDEX_NOOP; } - + if( eType==0 ){ /* Could not find an existing table or index to use as the RHS b-tree. @@ -82451,7 +82451,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect( affinity = sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft); /* Whether this is an 'x IN(SELECT...)' or an 'x IN(<exprlist>)' - ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is + ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is ** filled with single-field index keys representing the results ** from the SELECT or the <exprlist>. ** @@ -82628,7 +82628,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect( ** if the LHS is NULL or if the LHS is not contained within the RHS and the ** RHS contains one or more NULL values. ** -** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not +** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not ** contained within the RHS. If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS ** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull. If the LHS is contained ** within the RHS then fall through. @@ -82709,7 +82709,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN( sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, labelOk); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regCkNull); }else{ - + /* If the LHS is NULL, then the result is either false or NULL depending ** on whether the RHS is empty or not, respectively. */ @@ -82726,7 +82726,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN( sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); } } - + if( eType==IN_INDEX_ROWID ){ /* In this case, the RHS is the ROWID of table b-tree */ @@ -82737,10 +82737,10 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN( /* In this case, the RHS is an index b-tree. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Affinity, r1, 1, 0, &affinity, 1); - - /* If the set membership test fails, then the result of the + + /* If the set membership test fails, then the result of the ** "x IN (...)" expression must be either 0 or NULL. If the set - ** contains no NULL values, then the result is 0. If the set + ** contains no NULL values, then the result is 0. If the set ** contains one or more NULL values, then the result of the ** expression is also NULL. */ @@ -82761,7 +82761,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN( ** outcome. */ int j1; - + /* First check to see if the LHS is contained in the RHS. If so, ** then the answer is TRUE the presence of NULLs in the RHS does ** not matter. If the LHS is not contained in the RHS, then the @@ -82799,7 +82799,7 @@ static char *dup8bytes(Vdbe *v, const char *in){ ** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point ** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem. ** -** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the +** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the ** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look ** like the continuation of the number. */ @@ -83057,12 +83057,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn( sqlite3ExprCachePinRegister(pParse, p->iReg); return p->iReg; } - } + } assert( v!=0 ); sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTable, iColumn, iReg); if( p5 ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, p5); - }else{ + }else{ sqlite3ExprCacheStore(pParse, iTable, iColumn, iReg); } return iReg; @@ -83241,7 +83241,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) assert( pExpr->u.zToken[0]!=0 ); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Variable, pExpr->iColumn, target); if( pExpr->u.zToken[1]!=0 ){ - assert( pExpr->u.zToken[0]=='?' + assert( pExpr->u.zToken[0]=='?' || strcmp(pExpr->u.zToken, pParse->azVar[pExpr->iColumn-1])==0 ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, pParse->azVar[pExpr->iColumn-1], P4_STATIC); } @@ -83315,7 +83315,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) case TK_BITOR: case TK_SLASH: case TK_LSHIFT: - case TK_RSHIFT: + case TK_RSHIFT: case TK_CONCAT: { assert( TK_AND==OP_And ); testcase( op==TK_AND ); assert( TK_OR==OP_Or ); testcase( op==TK_OR ); @@ -83479,7 +83479,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG ); testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG ); - pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 = + pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 = pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG); } } @@ -83500,7 +83500,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) ** see if it is a column in a virtual table. This is done because ** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to ** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the - ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to + ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to ** "glob(B,A). We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test ** for function overloading. But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)". */ @@ -83511,7 +83511,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) } #endif if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){ - if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl; + if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl; sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Function, constMask, r1, target, @@ -83580,7 +83580,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, r4); break; } - case TK_COLLATE: + case TK_COLLATE: case TK_UPLUS: { inReg = sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pExpr->pLeft, target); break; @@ -83596,7 +83596,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) ** ** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1 ** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1) - ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where + ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where ** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is ** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table. ** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1 @@ -83610,7 +83610,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) ** ** p1==0 -> old.rowid p1==3 -> new.rowid ** p1==1 -> old.a p1==4 -> new.a - ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b + ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b */ Table *pTab = pExpr->pTab; int p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 + pExpr->iColumn; @@ -83630,7 +83630,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT /* If the column has REAL affinity, it may currently be stored as an ** integer. Use OP_RealAffinity to make sure it is really real. */ - if( pExpr->iColumn>=0 + if( pExpr->iColumn>=0 && pTab->aCol[pExpr->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target); @@ -83717,14 +83717,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target) }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target); } - assert( db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0 + assert( db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0 || pParse->iCacheLevel==iCacheLevel ); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel); break; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER case TK_RAISE: { - assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback + assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback || pExpr->affinity==OE_Abort || pExpr->affinity==OE_Fail || pExpr->affinity==OE_Ignore @@ -83866,7 +83866,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int ta ** and modify the expression so that the next time it is evaluated, ** the result is a copy of the cache register. ** -** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple +** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple ** times. They are evaluated once and the results of the expression ** are reused. */ @@ -84071,7 +84071,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewExpr(TreeView *pView, const Expr *pExpr, u8 m ** is set to the column of the pseudo-table to read, or to -1 to ** read the rowid field. */ - sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)", + sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)", pExpr->iTable ? "NEW" : "OLD", pExpr->iColumn); break; } @@ -84199,7 +84199,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeExprList( ** ** x BETWEEN y AND z ** -** The above is equivalent to +** The above is equivalent to ** ** x>=y AND x<=z ** @@ -84376,7 +84376,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprIfTrue(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int } } sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1); - sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2); + sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2); } /* @@ -84591,7 +84591,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTab){ if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pA->x.pList, pB->x.pList, iTab) ) return 2; if( ALWAYS((combinedFlags & EP_Reduced)==0) ){ if( pA->iColumn!=pB->iColumn ) return 2; - if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable + if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable && (pA->iTable!=iTab || NEVER(pB->iTable>=0)) ) return 2; } } @@ -84599,7 +84599,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTab){ } /* -** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical and +** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical and ** non-zero if they differ in any way. ** ** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed @@ -84668,7 +84668,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(Expr *pE1, Expr *pE2, int iTab){ /* ** An instance of the following structure is used by the tree walker -** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an +** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an ** aggregate function, in order to implement the ** sqlite3FunctionThisSrc() routine. */ @@ -84737,7 +84737,7 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){ &i ); return i; -} +} /* ** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array. Return the index of @@ -84746,14 +84746,14 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){ static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){ int i; pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate( - db, + db, pInfo->aFunc, sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]), &pInfo->nFunc, &i ); return i; -} +} /* ** This is the xExprCallback for a tree walker. It is used to @@ -84781,7 +84781,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) ); if( pExpr->iTable==pItem->iCursor ){ /* If we reach this point, it means that pExpr refers to a table - ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query. + ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query. ** ** Make an entry for the column in pAggInfo->aCol[] if there ** is not an entry there already. @@ -84795,7 +84795,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ } } if( (k>=pAggInfo->nColumn) - && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0 + && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0 ){ pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[k]; pCol->pTab = pExpr->pTab; @@ -84841,7 +84841,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){ if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0 && pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2 ){ - /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate + /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate ** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure */ struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc; @@ -85016,9 +85016,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ClearTempRegCache(Parse *pParse){ /* -** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the +** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the ** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TABLE or -** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in +** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in ** the CREATE TABLE or CREATE INDEX statement is replaced with the third ** argument and the result returned. Examples: ** @@ -85046,7 +85046,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc( UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); - /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE + /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE ** statement is that the table name is the first non-space token that ** is immediately followed by a TK_LP or TK_USING token. */ @@ -85080,7 +85080,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc( /* ** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code ** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition -** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the +** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the ** parent table. It is passed three arguments: ** ** 1) The complete text of the CREATE TABLE statement being modified, @@ -85124,7 +85124,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc( if( zParent==0 ) break; sqlite3Dequote(zParent); if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp((const char *)zOld, zParent) ){ - char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"", + char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"", (zOutput?zOutput:""), (int)(z-zInput), zInput, (const char *)zNew ); sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput); @@ -85135,7 +85135,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc( } } - zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput), + zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput), sqlite3_result_text(context, zResult, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC); sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput); } @@ -85143,9 +85143,9 @@ static void renameParentFunc( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER /* This function is used by SQL generated to implement the -** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER -** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE -** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result +** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER +** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE +** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result ** returned. This is analagous to renameTableFunc() above, except for CREATE ** TRIGGER, not CREATE INDEX and CREATE TABLE. */ @@ -85167,7 +85167,7 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc( UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed); - /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER + /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER ** statement is that the table name is the first token that is immediately ** preceded by either TK_ON or TK_DOT and immediately followed by one ** of TK_WHEN, TK_BEGIN or TK_FOR. @@ -85194,12 +85194,12 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc( assert( len>0 ); /* Variable 'dist' stores the number of tokens read since the most - ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN + ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN ** token is read and 'dist' equals 2, the condition stated above ** to be met. ** ** Note that ON cannot be a database, table or column name, so - ** there is no need to worry about syntax like + ** there is no need to worry about syntax like ** "CREATE TRIGGER ... ON ON.ON BEGIN ..." etc. */ dist++; @@ -85245,16 +85245,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFunctions(void){ ** ** name=<constant1> OR name=<constant2> OR ... ** -** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text +** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text ** "name=<constant>" is returned, where <constant> is the quoted version ** of the string passed as argument zConstant. The returned buffer is ** allocated using sqlite3DbMalloc(). It is the responsibility of the ** caller to ensure that it is eventually freed. ** -** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is +** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is ** "<where> OR name=<constant>", where <where> is the contents of zWhere. ** In this case zWhere is passed to sqlite3DbFree() before returning. -** +** */ static char *whereOrName(sqlite3 *db, char *zWhere, char *zConstant){ char *zNew; @@ -85287,7 +85287,7 @@ static char *whereForeignKeys(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ /* ** Generate the text of a WHERE expression which can be used to select all ** temporary triggers on table pTab from the sqlite_temp_master table. If -** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the +** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the ** temporary database, NULL is returned. */ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ @@ -85295,9 +85295,9 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ char *zWhere = 0; const Schema *pTempSchema = pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema; /* Temp db schema */ - /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is + /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is ** returned, loop through the tables list of triggers. For each trigger - ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE + ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE ** expression being built up in zWhere. */ if( pTab->pSchema!=pTempSchema ){ @@ -85321,7 +85321,7 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ ** pTab from the database, including triggers and temporary triggers. ** Argument zName is the name of the table in the database schema at ** the time the generated code is executed. This can be different from -** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an +** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an ** "ALTER TABLE RENAME TO" statement. */ static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){ @@ -85356,8 +85356,8 @@ static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){ sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, iDb, zWhere); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER - /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp - ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined. + /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp + ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined. */ if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, 1, zWhere); @@ -85382,8 +85382,8 @@ static int isSystemTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){ } /* -** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy" -** command. +** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy" +** command. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( Parse *pParse, /* Parser context. */ @@ -85393,7 +85393,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( int iDb; /* Database that contains the table */ char *zDb; /* Name of database iDb */ Table *pTab; /* Table being renamed */ - char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */ + char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */ sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */ int nTabName; /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */ const char *zTabName; /* Original name of the table */ @@ -85404,7 +85404,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( VTable *pVTab = 0; /* Non-zero if this is a v-tab with an xRename() */ int savedDbFlags; /* Saved value of db->flags */ - savedDbFlags = db->flags; + savedDbFlags = db->flags; if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_rename_table; assert( pSrc->nSrc==1 ); assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(pParse->db) ); @@ -85423,7 +85423,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( ** in database iDb. If so, this is an error. */ if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName); goto exit_rename_table; } @@ -85464,7 +85464,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( } #endif - /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. + /* Begin a transaction for database iDb. ** Then modify the schema cookie (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the ** schema). Open a statement transaction if the table is a virtual ** table. @@ -85496,11 +85496,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER) if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){ - /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE + /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE ** statements corresponding to all child tables of foreign key constraints ** for which the renamed table is the parent table. */ if( (zWhere=whereForeignKeys(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){ - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_parent(sql, %Q, %Q) " "WHERE %s;", zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zTabName, zName, zWhere); @@ -85526,8 +85526,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( "'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) " "ELSE name END " "WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND " - "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');", - zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zName, zName, zName, + "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');", + zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zName, zName, zName, #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER zName, #endif @@ -85535,7 +85535,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( ); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT - /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update + /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update ** it with the new table name. */ if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){ @@ -85551,7 +85551,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable( ** the temp database. */ if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){ - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE sqlite_temp_master SET " "sql = sqlite_rename_trigger(sql, %Q), " "tbl_name = %Q " @@ -85648,7 +85648,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){ } #endif - /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a + /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a ** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking ** for an SQL NULL default below. */ @@ -85669,12 +85669,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){ return; } if( (db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys) && pNew->pFKey && pDflt ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Cannot add a REFERENCES column with non-NULL default value"); return; } if( pCol->notNull && !pDflt ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Cannot add a NOT NULL column with default value NULL"); return; } @@ -85704,10 +85704,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){ *zEnd-- = '\0'; } db->flags |= SQLITE_PreferBuiltin; - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET " "sql = substr(sql,1,%d) || ', ' || %Q || substr(sql,%d) " - "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q", + "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q", zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), pNew->addColOffset, zCol, pNew->addColOffset+1, zTab ); @@ -85727,14 +85727,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){ /* ** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in -** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument +** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument ** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered. ** ** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure ** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point ** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition -** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to -** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c +** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to +** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c ** after parsing is finished. ** ** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete @@ -85874,7 +85874,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column: ** integer is the average number of rows in the index that have the same ** value in the first column of the index. The third integer is the average ** number of rows in the index that have the same value for the first two -** columns. The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in +** columns. The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in ** the index which have the same value for the first N-1 columns. For ** a K-column index, there will be K+1 integers in the stat column. If ** the index is unique, then the last integer will be 1. @@ -85884,7 +85884,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column: ** must be separated from the last integer by a single space. If the ** "unordered" keyword is present, then the query planner assumes that ** the index is unordered and will not use the index for a range query. -** +** ** If the sqlite_stat1.idx column is NULL, then the sqlite_stat1.stat ** column contains a single integer which is the (estimated) number of ** rows in the table identified by sqlite_stat1.tbl. @@ -85942,9 +85942,9 @@ exit_begin_add_column: ** number of entries that are strictly less than the sample. The first ** integer in nLt contains the number of entries in the index where the ** left-most column is less than the left-most column of the sample. -** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries +** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries ** where the first K columns are less than the first K columns of the -** sample. The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the +** sample. The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the ** number of distinct entries in the index that are less than the ** sample. ** @@ -86036,9 +86036,9 @@ static void openStatTable( Table *pStat; if( (pStat = sqlite3FindTable(db, zTab, pDb->zName))==0 ){ if( aTable[i].zCols ){ - /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a - ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage - ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important + /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a + ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage + ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important ** because the OpenWrite opcode below will be needing it. */ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "CREATE TABLE %Q.%s(%s)", pDb->zName, zTab, aTable[i].zCols @@ -86047,7 +86047,7 @@ static void openStatTable( aCreateTbl[i] = OPFLAG_P2ISREG; } }else{ - /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries + /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries ** associated with the table zWhere. If zWhere is NULL, delete the ** entire contents of the table. */ aRoot[i] = pStat->tnum; @@ -86102,7 +86102,7 @@ struct Stat4Sample { int iCol; /* If !isPSample, the reason for inclusion */ u32 iHash; /* Tiebreaker hash */ #endif -}; +}; struct Stat4Accum { tRowcnt nRow; /* Number of rows in the entire table */ tRowcnt nPSample; /* How often to do a periodic sample */ @@ -86210,7 +86210,7 @@ static void stat4Destructor(void *pOld){ ** PRIMARY KEY of the table. The covering index that implements the ** original WITHOUT ROWID table as N==K as a special case. ** -** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return +** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return ** value is a pointer to the Stat4Accum object. The datatype of the ** return value is BLOB, but it is really just a pointer to the Stat4Accum ** object. @@ -86240,7 +86240,7 @@ static void statInit( assert( nKeyCol>0 ); /* Allocate the space required for the Stat4Accum object */ - n = sizeof(*p) + n = sizeof(*p) + sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp /* Stat4Accum.anEq */ + sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp /* Stat4Accum.anDLt */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 @@ -86273,7 +86273,7 @@ static void statInit( p->nPSample = (tRowcnt)(sqlite3_value_int64(argv[2])/(mxSample/3+1) + 1); p->current.anLt = &p->current.anEq[nColUp]; p->iPrn = nCol*0x689e962d ^ sqlite3_value_int(argv[2])*0xd0944565; - + /* Set up the Stat4Accum.a[] and aBest[] arrays */ p->a = (struct Stat4Sample*)&p->current.anLt[nColUp]; p->aBest = &p->a[mxSample]; @@ -86284,7 +86284,7 @@ static void statInit( p->a[i].anDLt = (tRowcnt *)pSpace; pSpace += (sizeof(tRowcnt) * nColUp); } assert( (pSpace - (u8*)p)==n ); - + for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){ p->aBest[i].iCol = i; } @@ -86312,19 +86312,19 @@ static const FuncDef statInitFuncdef = { #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 /* -** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for -** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and +** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for +** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and ** considering only any trailing columns and the sample hash value, this ** function returns true if sample pNew is to be preferred over pOld. ** In other words, if we assume that the cardinalities of the selected ** column for pNew and pOld are equal, is pNew to be preferred over pOld. ** ** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of -** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid. +** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid. */ static int sampleIsBetterPost( - Stat4Accum *pAccum, - Stat4Sample *pNew, + Stat4Accum *pAccum, + Stat4Sample *pNew, Stat4Sample *pOld ){ int nCol = pAccum->nCol; @@ -86344,11 +86344,11 @@ static int sampleIsBetterPost( ** Return true if pNew is to be preferred over pOld. ** ** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of -** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid. +** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid. */ static int sampleIsBetter( - Stat4Accum *pAccum, - Stat4Sample *pNew, + Stat4Accum *pAccum, + Stat4Sample *pNew, Stat4Sample *pOld ){ tRowcnt nEqNew = pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol]; @@ -86384,7 +86384,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){ Stat4Sample *pUpgrade = 0; assert( pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol]>0 ); - /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column + /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column ** iCol occurs many times in the table. However, if we have already ** added a sample that shares this prefix, there is no need to add ** this one. Instead, upgrade the priority of the highest priority @@ -86428,7 +86428,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){ ** for the last sample in the p->a[] array. Otherwise, the samples would ** be out of order. */ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4 - assert( p->nSample==0 + assert( p->nSample==0 || pNew->anLt[p->nCol-1] > p->a[p->nSample-1].anLt[p->nCol-1] ); #endif @@ -86496,11 +86496,11 @@ static void samplePushPrevious(Stat4Accum *p, int iChng){ p->current.isPSample = 1; sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0); p->current.isPSample = 0; - }else + }else /* Or if it is a non-periodic sample. Add it in this case too. */ - if( p->nSample<p->mxSample - || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin]) + if( p->nSample<p->mxSample + || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin]) ){ sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0); } @@ -86640,9 +86640,9 @@ static void statGet( /* STAT3 and STAT4 have a parameter on this routine. */ int eCall = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]); assert( argc==2 ); - assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ + assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ || eCall==STAT_GET_ROWID || eCall==STAT_GET_NLT - || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT + || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT ); if( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 ) #else @@ -86652,20 +86652,20 @@ static void statGet( /* Return the value to store in the "stat" column of the sqlite_stat1 ** table for this index. ** - ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing - ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of - ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list + ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing + ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of + ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list ** for each indexed column. This additional integer is an estimate of ** the number of rows matched by a stabbing query on the index using ** a key with the corresponding number of fields. In other words, - ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is + ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is ** "100 10 2", then SQLite estimates that: ** ** * the index contains 100 rows, ** * "WHERE a=?" matches 10 rows, and ** * "WHERE a=? AND b=?" matches 2 rows. ** - ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of + ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of ** rows, then each estimate is computed as: ** ** I = (K+D-1)/D @@ -86715,7 +86715,7 @@ static void statGet( case STAT_GET_NEQ: aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anEq; break; case STAT_GET_NLT: aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anLt; break; default: { - aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt; + aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt; p->iGet++; break; } @@ -86829,7 +86829,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( } #endif - /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level. + /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level. ** Open a read-only cursor on the table. Also allocate a cursor number ** to use for scanning indexes (iIdxCur). No index cursor is opened at ** this time though. */ @@ -86895,9 +86895,9 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( ** end_of_scan: */ - /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate + /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate ** the regPrev array and a trailing rowid (the rowid slot is required - ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of + ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of ** the sqlite_stat4 table. */ pParse->nMem = MAX(pParse->nMem, regPrev+nColTest); @@ -86908,7 +86908,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName)); /* Invoke the stat_init() function. The arguments are: - ** + ** ** (1) the number of columns in the index including the rowid ** (or for a WITHOUT ROWID table, the number of PK columns), ** (2) the number of columns in the key without the rowid/pk @@ -86959,7 +86959,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( addrNextRow = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); if( nColTest==1 && pIdx->nKeyCol==1 && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){ /* For a single-column UNIQUE index, once we have found a non-NULL - ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip + ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip ** subsequent distinctness tests. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, regPrev, endDistinctTest); VdbeCoverage(v); @@ -86968,15 +86968,15 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( char *pColl = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pIdx->azColl[i]); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, i, regChng); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iIdxCur, i, regTemp); - aGotoChng[i] = + aGotoChng[i] = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Ne, regTemp, 0, regPrev+i, pColl, P4_COLLSEQ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NULLEQ); VdbeCoverage(v); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, nColTest, regChng); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, endDistinctTest); - - + + /* ** chng_addr_0: ** regPrev(0) = idx(0) @@ -86992,7 +86992,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endDistinctTest); sqlite3DbFree(db, aGotoChng); } - + /* ** chng_addr_N: ** regRowid = idx(rowid) // STAT34 only @@ -87059,7 +87059,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable( ** be taken */ VdbeCoverageNeverTaken(v); #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3 - sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, + sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTabCur, pIdx->aiColumn[0], regSample); #else for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){ @@ -87225,7 +87225,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Analyze(Parse *pParse, Token *pName1, Token *pName2){ } sqlite3DbFree(db, z); } - } + } } v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); if( v ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Expire); @@ -87303,7 +87303,7 @@ static void decodeIntArray( /* ** This callback is invoked once for each index when reading the -** sqlite_stat1 table. +** sqlite_stat1 table. ** ** argv[0] = name of the table ** argv[1] = name of the index (might be NULL) @@ -87390,7 +87390,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteIndexSamples(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx){ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 /* ** Populate the pIdx->aAvgEq[] array based on the samples currently -** stored in pIdx->aSample[]. +** stored in pIdx->aSample[]. */ static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){ if( pIdx ){ @@ -87425,12 +87425,12 @@ static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){ } /* Set nSum to the number of distinct (iCol+1) field prefixes that - ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of - ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value + ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of + ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value ** only once where there exist duplicate prefixes). */ for(i=0; i<nSample; i++){ if( i==(pIdx->nSample-1) - || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol] + || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol] ){ sumEq += aSample[i].anEq[iCol]; nSum100 += 100; @@ -87464,7 +87464,7 @@ static Index *findIndexOrPrimaryKey( } /* -** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table +** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table ** into the relevant Index.aSample[] arrays. ** ** Arguments zSql1 and zSql2 must point to SQL statements that return @@ -87563,7 +87563,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl( if( zIndex==0 ) continue; pIdx = findIndexOrPrimaryKey(db, zIndex, zDb); if( pIdx==0 ) continue; - /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from + /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from ** the sqlite_stat4 table. In this case ignore stat3 data. */ nCol = pIdx->nSampleCol; if( bStat3 && nCol>1 ) continue; @@ -87597,7 +87597,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl( } /* -** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into +** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into ** the Index.aSample[] arrays of all indices. */ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ @@ -87606,7 +87606,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ assert( db->lookaside.bEnabled==0 ); if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat4", zDb) ){ rc = loadStatTbl(db, 0, - "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx", + "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx", "SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sample FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4", zDb ); @@ -87614,7 +87614,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat3", zDb) ){ rc = loadStatTbl(db, 1, - "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx", + "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx", "SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sqlite_record(sample) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3", zDb ); @@ -87631,11 +87631,11 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ ** Index.aSample[] arrays. ** ** If the sqlite_stat1 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR -** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined -** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is +** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined +** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is ** read from it. ** -** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the +** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the ** sqlite_stat4 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR is ** returned. However, in this case, data is read from the sqlite_stat1 ** table (if it is present) before returning. @@ -87672,7 +87672,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AnalysisLoad(sqlite3 *db, int iDb){ } /* Load new statistics out of the sqlite_stat1 table */ - zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, + zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "SELECT tbl,idx,stat FROM %Q.sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase); if( zSql==0 ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; @@ -87796,7 +87796,7 @@ static void attachFunc( ** * Specified database name already being used. */ if( db->nDb>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]+2 ){ - zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d", + zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d", db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED] ); goto attach_error; @@ -87855,7 +87855,7 @@ static void attachFunc( if( !aNew->pSchema ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; }else if( aNew->pSchema->file_format && aNew->pSchema->enc!=ENC(db) ){ - zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, + zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "attached databases must use the same text encoding as main database"); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } @@ -87887,7 +87887,7 @@ static void attachFunc( zErrDyn = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "Invalid key value"); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; break; - + case SQLITE_TEXT: case SQLITE_BLOB: nKey = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[2]); @@ -87907,7 +87907,7 @@ static void attachFunc( #endif /* If the file was opened successfully, read the schema for the new database. - ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and + ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and ** remove the entry from the db->aDb[] array. i.e. put everything back the way ** we found it. */ @@ -87944,7 +87944,7 @@ static void attachFunc( } goto attach_error; } - + return; attach_error: @@ -88034,7 +88034,7 @@ static void codeAttach( memset(&sName, 0, sizeof(NameContext)); sName.pParse = pParse; - if( + if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pFilename)) || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pDbname)) || SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pKey)) @@ -88078,7 +88078,7 @@ static void codeAttach( */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Expire, (type==SQLITE_ATTACH)); } - + attach_end: sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pFilename); sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDbname); @@ -88422,10 +88422,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthReadCol( /* ** The pExpr should be a TK_COLUMN expression. The table referred to -** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger. +** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger. ** Check to see if it is OK to read this particular column. ** -** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN +** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN ** instruction into a TK_NULL. If the auth function returns SQLITE_DENY, ** then generate an error. */ @@ -88528,7 +88528,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthCheck( */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AuthContextPush( Parse *pParse, - AuthContext *pContext, + AuthContext *pContext, const char *zContext ){ assert( pParse ); @@ -88599,7 +88599,7 @@ struct TableLock { }; /* -** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time. +** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time. ** ** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb. ** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock. @@ -88650,7 +88650,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableLock( */ static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){ int i; - Vdbe *pVdbe; + Vdbe *pVdbe; pVdbe = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); assert( pVdbe!=0 ); /* sqlite3GetVdbe cannot fail: VDBE already allocated */ @@ -88703,7 +88703,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){ ** vdbe program */ v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); - assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite + assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite || sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort)); if( v ){ while( sqlite3VdbeDeletePriorOpcode(v, OP_Close) ){} @@ -88726,7 +88726,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){ ** transaction on each used database and to verify the schema cookie ** on each used database. */ - if( db->mallocFailed==0 + if( db->mallocFailed==0 && (DbMaskNonZero(pParse->cookieMask) || pParse->pConstExpr) ){ int iDb, i; @@ -88752,8 +88752,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){ pParse->nVtabLock = 0; #endif - /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened, - ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the + /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened, + ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the ** shared-cache feature is enabled. */ codeTableLocks(pParse); @@ -88933,8 +88933,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTable( ** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem( - Parse *pParse, - int isView, + Parse *pParse, + int isView, struct SrcList_item *p ){ const char *zDb; @@ -88949,7 +88949,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem( } /* -** Locate the in-memory structure that describes +** Locate the in-memory structure that describes ** a particular index given the name of that index ** and the name of the database that contains the index. ** Return NULL if not found. @@ -89134,10 +89134,10 @@ static void sqliteDeleteColumnNames(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){ ** ** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink ** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy -** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with +** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with ** the table. ** -** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object +** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object ** contains lookaside memory. (Table objects in the schema do not use ** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.) Or the ** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory @@ -89164,7 +89164,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){ pNext = pIndex->pNext; assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema ); if( !db || db->pnBytesFreed==0 ){ - char *zName = pIndex->zName; + char *zName = pIndex->zName; TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert( &pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0 ); @@ -89263,7 +89263,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDbName(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName){ Db *pDb; int n = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); for(i=(db->nDb-1), pDb=&db->aDb[i]; i>=0; i--, pDb--){ - if( (!OMIT_TEMPDB || i!=1 ) && n==sqlite3Strlen30(pDb->zName) && + if( (!OMIT_TEMPDB || i!=1 ) && n==sqlite3Strlen30(pDb->zName) && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pDb->zName, zName) ){ break; } @@ -89275,7 +89275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDbName(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName){ /* ** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or ** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the -** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db +** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db ** does not exist. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){ @@ -89291,7 +89291,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){ ** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example: ** ** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...); -** +** ** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if ** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.: ** @@ -89341,7 +89341,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3TwoPartName( ** is reserved for internal use. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CheckObjectName(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){ - if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0 + if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0 && (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0 && 0==sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7) ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "object name reserved for internal use: %s", zName); @@ -89407,7 +89407,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable( ** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example: ** ** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...); - ** + ** ** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if ** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.: ** @@ -89423,7 +89423,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable( iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName); if( iDb<0 ) return; if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){ - /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless + /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless ** the database name is "temp" anyway. */ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified"); return; @@ -89522,7 +89522,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable( ** the SQLITE_MASTER table. Note in particular that we must go ahead ** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any ** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause - ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the + ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the ** indices. Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated ** now. */ @@ -89538,7 +89538,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable( } #endif - /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set, + /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set, ** set them now. */ reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem; @@ -89644,7 +89644,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pName){ pCol = &p->aCol[p->nCol]; memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0])); pCol->zName = z; - + /* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity ** 'NONE'. If there is a type specified, then sqlite3AddColumnType() will ** be called next to set pCol->affinity correctly. @@ -89671,11 +89671,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddNotNull(Parse *pParse, int onError){ ** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the ** associated affinity type. ** -** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the +** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the ** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is ** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains -** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of -** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT', +** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of +** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT', ** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned. ** ** Substring | Affinity @@ -89762,7 +89762,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3AffinityType(const char *zIn, u8 *pszEst){ ** in the sequence. Use this information to construct a string ** that contains the typename of the column and store that string ** in zType. -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddColumnType(Parse *pParse, Token *pType){ Table *p; Column *pCol; @@ -89811,7 +89811,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddDefaultValue(Parse *pParse, ExprSpan *pSpan){ } /* -** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names +** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names ** of columns that form the primary key. If pList is NULL, then the ** most recently added column of the table is the primary key. ** @@ -89841,7 +89841,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddPrimaryKey( int nTerm; if( pTab==0 || IN_DECLARE_VTAB ) goto primary_key_exit; if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName); goto primary_key_exit; } @@ -89939,7 +89939,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddCollateType(Parse *pParse, Token *pToken){ Index *pIdx; sqlite3DbFree(db, p->aCol[i].zColl); p->aCol[i].zColl = zColl; - + /* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>", ** then an index may have been created on this column before the ** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case. @@ -90033,13 +90033,13 @@ static int identLength(const char *z){ } /* -** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second +** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second ** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at ** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the ** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent, ** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer ** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning. -** +** ** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric ** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword, ** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise, @@ -90083,7 +90083,7 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ n += identLength(pCol->zName) + 5; } n += identLength(p->zName); - if( n<50 ){ + if( n<50 ){ zSep = ""; zSep2 = ","; zEnd = ")"; @@ -90124,10 +90124,10 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER ); testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL ); - + zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_NONE]; len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType); - assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NONE + assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NONE || pCol->affinity==sqlite3AffinityType(zType, 0) ); memcpy(&zStmt[k], zType, len); k += len; @@ -90247,7 +90247,7 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ } /* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index. Or, if this table was originally - ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index. + ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index. */ if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){ ExprList *pList; @@ -90338,7 +90338,7 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ ** the sqlite_master table. We do not want to create it again. ** ** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine -** was called to create a table generated from a +** was called to create a table generated from a ** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement. The column names of ** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT. */ @@ -90421,7 +90421,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable( sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0); - /* + /* ** Initialize zType for the new view or table. */ if( p->pSelect==0 ){ @@ -90479,12 +90479,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable( Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd; n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z); if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n; - zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, + zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z ); } - /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the + /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the ** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all ** the information we've collected. */ @@ -90669,7 +90669,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){ ** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point. ** But the following test is still important as it does come up ** in the following: - ** + ** ** CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a); ** CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1; ** SELECT * FROM temp.ex1; @@ -90723,7 +90723,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){ nErr++; } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */ - return nErr; + return nErr; } #endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE) */ @@ -90759,7 +90759,7 @@ static void sqliteViewResetAll(sqlite3 *db, int idx){ ** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted. ** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might ** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is -** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match +** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match ** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices ** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved. ** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with @@ -90796,7 +90796,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RootPageMoved(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, int iFrom, int iT ** Also write code to modify the sqlite_master table and internal schema ** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst ** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database). -*/ +*/ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); @@ -90812,7 +90812,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){ ** is in register NNN. See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER ** token for additional information. */ - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "UPDATE %Q.%s SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d", pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), iTable, r1, r1); #endif @@ -90836,7 +90836,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ #else /* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM ** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the - ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically + ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically ** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages ** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the ** following were coded: @@ -90846,7 +90846,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ ** OP_Destroy 5 0 ** ** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the - ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the + ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the ** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit ** a free-list page. */ @@ -90928,7 +90928,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in */ pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab); while( pTrigger ){ - assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema || + assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema || pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema ); sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger); pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext; @@ -90955,7 +90955,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in ** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another ** database. */ - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "DELETE FROM %Q.%s WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'", pDb->zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), pTab->zName); if( !isView && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){ @@ -91040,7 +91040,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, int isView, } } #endif - if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 + if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 && sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_stat", 11)!=0 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be dropped", pTab->zName); goto exit_drop_table; @@ -91159,8 +91159,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey( } } if( j>=p->nCol ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, - "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition", + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition", pFromCol->a[i].zName); goto fk_end; } @@ -91180,7 +91180,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey( pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */ assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) ); - pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash, + pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash, pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey ); if( pNextTo==pFKey ){ @@ -91284,7 +91284,7 @@ static void sqlite3RefillIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIndex, int memRootPage){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1); if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb, (char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0)); @@ -91348,8 +91348,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject( } /* -** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index -** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will +** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index +** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will ** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a ** UNIQUE constraint. If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable ** as the table to be indexed. pParse->pNewTable is a table that is @@ -91357,7 +91357,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject( ** ** pList is a list of columns to be indexed. pList will be NULL if this ** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added -** to the table currently under construction. +** to the table currently under construction. ** ** If the index is created successfully, return a pointer to the new Index ** structure. This is used by sqlite3AddPrimaryKey() to mark the index @@ -91407,7 +91407,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( */ if( pTblName!=0 ){ - /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database + /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database ** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db ** before looking up the table. */ @@ -91439,7 +91439,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 ); if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index; if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"", pTab->zName); goto exit_create_index; @@ -91456,7 +91456,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( assert( pTab!=0 ); assert( pParse->nErr==0 ); - if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 + if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0 && db->init.busy==0 #if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION && sqlite3UserAuthTable(pTab->zName)==0 @@ -91480,7 +91480,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( /* ** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another - ** index or table with the same name. + ** index or table with the same name. ** ** Exception: If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the ** sqlite_master table (because some other process changed the schema) and @@ -91562,8 +91562,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( } } - /* - ** Allocate the index structure. + /* + ** Allocate the index structure. */ nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName); nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1; @@ -91605,7 +91605,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( ** TODO: Add a test to make sure that the same column is not named ** more than once within the same index. Only the first instance of ** the column will ever be used by the optimizer. Note that using the - ** same column more than once cannot be an error because that would + ** same column more than once cannot be an error because that would ** break backwards compatibility - it needs to be a warning. */ for(i=0, pListItem=pList->a; i<pList->nExpr; i++, pListItem++){ @@ -91650,7 +91650,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( for(j=0; j<pPk->nKeyCol; j++){ int x = pPk->aiColumn[j]; if( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn, pIndex->nKeyCol, x) ){ - pIndex->nColumn--; + pIndex->nColumn--; }else{ pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x; pIndex->azColl[i] = pPk->azColl[j]; @@ -91708,13 +91708,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){ /* This constraint creates the same index as a previous ** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement. - ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this + ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this ** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit ** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the ** explicitly specified behavior for the index. */ if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0); } if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){ @@ -91727,12 +91727,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( } /* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other - ** in-memory database structures. + ** in-memory database structures. */ if( db->init.busy ){ Index *p; assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pIndex->pSchema) ); - p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, + p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, pIndex->zName, pIndex); if( p ){ assert( p==pIndex ); /* Malloc must have failed */ @@ -91789,7 +91789,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( /* Add an entry in sqlite_master for this index */ - sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, + sqlite3NestedParse(pParse, "INSERT INTO %Q.%s VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);", db->aDb[iDb].zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), pIndex->zName, @@ -91815,7 +91815,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3CreateIndex( ** sure all indices labeled OE_Replace come after all those labeled ** OE_Ignore. This is necessary for the correct constraint check ** processing (in sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks()) as part of - ** UPDATE and INSERT statements. + ** UPDATE and INSERT statements. */ if( db->init.busy || pTblName==0 ){ if( onError!=OE_Replace || pTab->pIndex==0 @@ -91869,8 +91869,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DefaultRowEst(Index *pIdx){ int nCopy = MIN(ArraySize(aVal), pIdx->nKeyCol); int i; - /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated - ** number of rows in the table. Or 10, if the estimated number of rows + /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated + ** number of rows in the table. Or 10, if the estimated number of rows ** in the table is less than that. */ a[0] = pIdx->pTable->nRowLogEst; if( a[0]<33 ) a[0] = 33; assert( 33==sqlite3LogEst(10) ); @@ -92129,7 +92129,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListEnlarge( ** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase ** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name. ** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might -** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase. +** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase. ** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable, ** or with NULL if no database is specified. ** @@ -92249,7 +92249,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm( struct SrcList_item *pItem; sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; if( !p && (pOn || pUsing) ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s", + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s", (pOn ? "ON" : "USING") ); goto append_from_error; @@ -92277,7 +92277,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm( } /* -** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added +** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added ** element of the source-list passed as the second argument. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){ @@ -92286,7 +92286,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pI struct SrcList_item *pItem = &p->a[p->nSrc-1]; assert( pItem->notIndexed==0 && pItem->zIndex==0 ); if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){ - /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y + /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y ** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */ pItem->notIndexed = 1; }else{ @@ -92383,7 +92383,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RollbackTransaction(Parse *pParse){ /* ** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create, -** release or rollback an SQL savepoint. +** release or rollback an SQL savepoint. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){ char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName); @@ -92410,7 +92410,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){ if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){ int rc; Btree *pBt; - static const int flags = + static const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | @@ -92458,7 +92458,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){ } /* -** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each +** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each ** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){ @@ -92504,9 +92504,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){ pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1; } -/* +/* ** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is -** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to +** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to ** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make ** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction. ** @@ -92515,7 +92515,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){ ** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite. This makes ** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm ** go a little faster. But taking advantage of this time dependency -** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in +** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in ** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective ** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen ** to take the safe route and skip the optimization. @@ -92570,8 +92570,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint( sqlite3StrAccumAppendAll(&errMsg, zCol); } zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg); - sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse, - IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY + sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse, + IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY : SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE, onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique); } @@ -92583,7 +92583,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint( SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowidConstraint( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ int onError, /* Conflict resolution algorithm */ - Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */ + Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */ ){ char *zMsg; int rc; @@ -92776,9 +92776,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3KeyInfoOfIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIdx){ } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE -/* -** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a -** WITH clause. +/* +** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a +** WITH clause. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE With *sqlite3WithAdd( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */ @@ -92848,7 +92848,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithDelete(sqlite3 *db, With *pWith){ /************** End of build.c ***********************************************/ /************** Begin file callback.c ****************************************/ /* -** 2005 May 23 +** 2005 May 23 ** ** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of ** a legal notice, here is a blessing: @@ -92917,8 +92917,8 @@ static int synthCollSeq(sqlite3 *db, CollSeq *pColl){ ** This function is responsible for invoking the collation factory callback ** or substituting a collation sequence of a different encoding when the ** requested collation sequence is not available in the desired encoding. -** -** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding +** +** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding ** collation sequence with name zName, length nName. ** ** The return value is either the collation sequence to be used in database @@ -92964,7 +92964,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3GetCollSeq( ** that have not been defined by sqlite3_create_collation() etc. ** ** If required, this routine calls the 'collation needed' callback to -** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work, +** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work, ** an equivalent collating sequence that uses a text encoding different ** from the main database is substituted, if one is available. */ @@ -93019,7 +93019,7 @@ static CollSeq *findCollSeqEntry( pColl[0].zName[nName] = 0; pDel = sqlite3HashInsert(&db->aCollSeq, pColl[0].zName, pColl); - /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will + /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will ** return the pColl pointer to be deleted (because it wasn't added ** to the hash table). */ @@ -93077,7 +93077,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3FindCollSeq( ** is also -1. In other words, we are searching for a function that ** takes a variable number of arguments. ** -** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function +** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function ** regardless of the number of arguments it uses, so return a positive ** match score for any ** @@ -93168,8 +93168,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FuncDefInsert( pHash->a[h] = pDef; } } - - + + /* ** Locate a user function given a name, a number of arguments and a flag @@ -93230,7 +93230,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction( ** have fields overwritten with new information appropriate for the ** new function. But the FuncDefs for built-in functions are read-only. ** So we must not search for built-ins when creating a new function. - */ + */ if( !createFlag && (pBest==0 || (db->flags & SQLITE_PreferBuiltin)!=0) ){ FuncDefHash *pHash = &GLOBAL(FuncDefHash, sqlite3GlobalFunctions); bestScore = 0; @@ -93249,7 +93249,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction( ** exact match for the name, number of arguments and encoding, then add a ** new entry to the hash table and return it. */ - if( createFlag && bestScore<FUNC_PERFECT_MATCH && + if( createFlag && bestScore<FUNC_PERFECT_MATCH && (pBest = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(*pBest)+nName+1))!=0 ){ pBest->zName = (char *)&pBest[1]; pBest->nArg = (u16)nArg; @@ -93267,7 +93267,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction( /* ** Free all resources held by the schema structure. The void* argument points -** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the +** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the ** pointer itself, it just cleans up subsidiary resources (i.e. the contents ** of the schema hash tables). ** @@ -93346,7 +93346,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Schema *sqlite3SchemaGet(sqlite3 *db, Btree *pBt){ ** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains ** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE, ** or UPDATE statement. Look up that table in the symbol table and -** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table +** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table ** name is not found or if any other error occurs. ** ** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc: @@ -93382,12 +93382,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int viewOk){ ** 1) It is a virtual table and no implementation of the xUpdate method ** has been provided, or ** 2) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_master), this call is not - ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not + ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not ** been specified. ** ** In either case leave an error message in pParse and return non-zero. */ - if( ( IsVirtual(pTab) + if( ( IsVirtual(pTab) && sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab)->pMod->pModule->xUpdate==0 ) || ( (pTab->tabFlags & TF_Readonly)!=0 && (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0 @@ -93481,11 +93481,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere( return pWhere; } - /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset + /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset ** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement. For example: ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1 ** becomes: - ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN ( + ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN ( ** SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1 ** ); */ @@ -93576,7 +93576,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( int addrLoop = 0; /* Top of the delete loop */ int addrDelete = 0; /* Jump directly to the delete logic */ int addrEphOpen = 0; /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */ - + #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER int isView; /* True if attempting to delete from a view */ Trigger *pTrigger; /* List of table triggers, if required */ @@ -93684,9 +93684,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION /* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything. ** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5, - ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by + ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by ** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly. */ - if( rcauth==SQLITE_OK && pWhere==0 && !pTrigger && !IsVirtual(pTab) + if( rcauth==SQLITE_OK && pWhere==0 && !pTrigger && !IsVirtual(pTab) && 0==sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) ){ assert( !isView ); @@ -93720,21 +93720,21 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk); } - + /* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row ** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. */ - pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, 0, 0, + pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, 0, 0, WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED|WHERE_DUPLICATES_OK, iTabCur+1); if( pWInfo==0 ) goto delete_from_cleanup; okOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass); - + /* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */ if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1); } - + /* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */ if( pPk ){ for(i=0; i<nPk; i++){ @@ -93747,7 +93747,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( iKey = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, pTab, -1, iTabCur, iKey, 0); if( iKey>pParse->nMem ) pParse->nMem = iKey; } - + if( okOnePass ){ /* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only ** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the @@ -93777,7 +93777,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( nKey = 1; /* OP_Seek always uses a single rowid */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, iRowSet, iKey); } - + /* End of the WHERE loop */ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); if( okOnePass ){ @@ -93786,10 +93786,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, addrBypass); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrDelete); } - - /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are + + /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are ** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the - ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF + ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF ** triggers. */ if( !isView ){ @@ -93799,7 +93799,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iDataCur==iTabCur ); assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iIdxCur==iDataCur+1 ); } - + /* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the ** where-clause loop above. */ @@ -93820,8 +93820,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey); VdbeCoverage(v); assert( nKey==1 ); - } - + } + /* Delete the row */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){ @@ -93837,7 +93837,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur, iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, okOnePass); } - + /* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */ if( okOnePass ){ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass); @@ -93847,8 +93847,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, addrLoop); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop); - } - + } + /* Close the cursors open on the table and its indexes. */ if( !isView && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){ if( !pPk ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, iDataCur); @@ -93866,7 +93866,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom( sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse); } - /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is + /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not ** invoke the callback function. */ @@ -93935,7 +93935,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)", iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk)); - /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists + /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists ** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do ** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers. */ iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); @@ -93945,7 +93945,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists); VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound); } - + /* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to ** use for the old.* references in the triggers. */ if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){ @@ -93962,7 +93962,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( iOld = pParse->nMem+1; pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol); - /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be + /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be ** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld); for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){ @@ -93975,11 +93975,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( /* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */ addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel ); - /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the + /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the ** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved ** the cursor or of already deleted the row that the cursor was ** pointing to. @@ -93991,14 +93991,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( } /* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that - ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables) + ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables) ** are not violated by deleting this row. */ sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0); } /* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really ** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to - ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). */ + ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). */ if( pTab->pSelect==0 ){ sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, (count?OPFLAG_NCHANGE:0)); @@ -94009,16 +94009,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete( /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key - ** to the row just deleted. */ + ** to the row just deleted. */ sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0); /* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */ - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel ); /* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE - ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a + ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a ** RAISE(IGNORE) exception. */ sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel); VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()")); @@ -94100,7 +94100,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete( ** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share ** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already ** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped. -** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK +** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK ** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or ** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index. */ @@ -94125,7 +94125,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GenerateIndexKey( *piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); pParse->iPartIdxTab = iDataCur; sqlite3ExprCachePush(pParse); - sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel, + sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); }else{ *piPartIdxLabel = 0; @@ -94295,7 +94295,7 @@ static void lengthFunc( ** Implementation of the abs() function. ** ** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of -** the numeric argument X. +** the numeric argument X. */ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ assert( argc==1 ); @@ -94312,7 +94312,7 @@ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ return; } iVal = -iVal; - } + } sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal); break; } @@ -94325,7 +94325,7 @@ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ /* Because sqlite3_value_double() returns 0.0 if the argument is not ** something that can be converted into a number, we have: ** IMP: R-57326-31541 Abs(X) return 0.0 if X is a string or blob that - ** cannot be converted to a numeric value. + ** cannot be converted to a numeric value. */ double rVal = sqlite3_value_double(argv[0]); if( rVal<0 ) rVal = -rVal; @@ -94622,7 +94622,7 @@ static void lowerFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ #define noopFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */ /* -** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer. +** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer. */ static void randomFunc( sqlite3_context *context, @@ -94633,11 +94633,11 @@ static void randomFunc( UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2); sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r); if( r<0 ){ - /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000 + /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000 ** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that ** number of you get the same value back again. To do this ** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative - ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the + ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the ** 2s complement of that positive value. The end result can ** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807. */ @@ -94675,8 +94675,8 @@ static void randomBlob( ** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function. */ static void last_insert_rowid( - sqlite3_context *context, - int NotUsed, + sqlite3_context *context, + int NotUsed, sqlite3_value **NotUsed2 ){ sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context); @@ -94776,7 +94776,7 @@ static const struct compareInfo likeInfoAlt = { '%', '_', 0, 0 }; ** it the last character in the list. ** ** Like matching rules: -** +** ** '%' Matches any sequence of zero or more characters ** *** '_' Matches any one character @@ -94800,7 +94800,7 @@ static int patternCompare( u32 matchOther; /* "[" or the escape character */ u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase; /* True if uppercase==lowercase */ const u8 *zEscaped = 0; /* One past the last escaped input char */ - + /* The GLOB operator does not have an ESCAPE clause. And LIKE does not ** have the matchSet operator. So we either have to look for one or ** the other, never both. Hence the single variable matchOther is used @@ -94946,8 +94946,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_like_count = 0; ** the GLOB operator. */ static void likeFunc( - sqlite3_context *context, - int argc, + sqlite3_context *context, + int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ const unsigned char *zA, *zB; @@ -94977,7 +94977,7 @@ static void likeFunc( const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]); if( zEsc==0 ) return; if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){ - sqlite3_result_error(context, + sqlite3_result_error(context, "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1); return; } @@ -94988,7 +94988,7 @@ static void likeFunc( #ifdef SQLITE_TEST sqlite3_like_count++; #endif - + sqlite3_result_int(context, patternCompare(zB, zA, pInfo, escape)); } } @@ -95081,8 +95081,8 @@ static void compileoptionusedFunc( #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */ /* -** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function. -** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options +** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function. +** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options ** used to build SQLite. */ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS @@ -95106,7 +95106,7 @@ static void compileoptiongetFunc( ** digits. */ static const char hexdigits[] = { '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', - '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F' + '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F' }; /* @@ -95141,7 +95141,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ char const *zBlob = sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]); int nBlob = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]); assert( zBlob==sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]) ); /* No encoding change */ - zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4); + zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4); if( zText ){ int i; for(i=0; i<nBlob; i++){ @@ -95190,7 +95190,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ /* ** The unicode() function. Return the integer unicode code-point value -** for the first character of the input string. +** for the first character of the input string. */ static void unicodeFunc( sqlite3_context *context, @@ -95346,7 +95346,7 @@ static void replaceFunc( if( zOut==0 ){ return; } - loopLimit = nStr - nPattern; + loopLimit = nStr - nPattern; for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){ if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){ zOut[j++] = zStr[i]; @@ -95475,7 +95475,7 @@ static void trimFunc( ** Compute the soundex encoding of a word. ** ** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the -** soundex encoding of the string X. +** soundex encoding of the string X. */ static void soundexFunc( sqlite3_context *context, @@ -95556,7 +95556,7 @@ static void loadExt(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx; struct SumCtx { double rSum; /* Floating point sum */ - i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */ + i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */ i64 cnt; /* Number of elements summed */ u8 overflow; /* True if integer overflow seen */ u8 approx; /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */ @@ -95641,13 +95641,13 @@ static void countStep(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED /* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated. But just to make - ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our + ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our ** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be ** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */ assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff || p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) ); #endif -} +} static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){ CountCtx *p; p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0); @@ -95658,8 +95658,8 @@ static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){ ** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions. */ static void minmaxStep( - sqlite3_context *context, - int NotUsed, + sqlite3_context *context, + int NotUsed, sqlite3_value **argv ){ Mem *pArg = (Mem *)argv[0]; @@ -95750,8 +95750,8 @@ static void groupConcatFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){ sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context); }else if( pAccum->accError==STRACCUM_NOMEM ){ sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context); - }else{ - sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1, + }else{ + sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1, sqlite3_free); } } @@ -95796,10 +95796,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive) } sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0); sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0); - sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, + sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, (struct compareInfo*)&globInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0); setLikeOptFlag(db, "glob", SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE); - setLikeOptFlag(db, "like", + setLikeOptFlag(db, "like", caseSensitive ? (SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE) : SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE); } @@ -95812,14 +95812,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive) */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsLikeFunction(sqlite3 *db, Expr *pExpr, int *pIsNocase, char *aWc){ FuncDef *pDef; - if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION - || !pExpr->x.pList + if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION + || !pExpr->x.pList || pExpr->x.pList->nExpr!=2 ){ return 0; } assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_xIsSelect) ); - pDef = sqlite3FindFunction(db, pExpr->u.zToken, + pDef = sqlite3FindFunction(db, pExpr->u.zToken, sqlite3Strlen30(pExpr->u.zToken), 2, SQLITE_UTF8, 0); if( NEVER(pDef==0) || (pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE)==0 ){ @@ -95926,7 +95926,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ AGGREGATE(count, 1, 0, 0, countStep, countFinalize ), AGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize), AGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize), - + LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE), #ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE), @@ -95979,25 +95979,25 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** Foreign keys in SQLite come in two flavours: deferred and immediate. ** If an immediate foreign key constraint is violated, ** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY is returned and the current -** statement transaction rolled back. If a -** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken -** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the +** statement transaction rolled back. If a +** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken +** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the ** transaction before fixing the constraint violation, the attempt fails. ** ** Deferred constraints are implemented using a simple counter associated -** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a -** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed +** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a +** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed ** that causes a foreign key violation, the counter is incremented. Each ** time a statement is executed that removes an existing violation from ** the database, the counter is decremented. When the transaction is ** committed, the commit fails if the current value of the counter is ** greater than zero. This scheme has two big drawbacks: ** -** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint, +** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint, ** there is no way to tell which foreign constraint is not satisfied, ** or which row it is not satisfied for. ** -** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the +** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the ** transaction is opened, this may cause the mechanism to malfunction. ** ** Despite these problems, this approach is adopted as it seems simpler @@ -96009,26 +96009,26 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** the parent table for a match. If none is found increment the ** constraint counter. ** -** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, +** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, ** search the child table for rows that correspond to the new ** row in the parent table. Decrement the counter for each row ** found (as the constraint is now satisfied). ** ** DELETE operations: ** -** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table, -** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the -** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found, +** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table, +** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the +** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found, ** decrement the counter. ** -** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search -** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row +** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search +** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row ** in the parent table. For each found increment the counter. ** ** UPDATE operations: ** ** An UPDATE command requires that all 4 steps above are taken, but only -** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually +** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually ** modified (values must be compared at runtime). ** ** Note that I.1 and D.1 are very similar operations, as are I.2 and D.2. @@ -96037,10 +96037,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** For the purposes of immediate FK constraints, the OR REPLACE conflict ** resolution is considered to delete rows before the new row is inserted. ** If a delete caused by OR REPLACE violates an FK constraint, an exception -** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new +** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new ** row is inserted. ** -** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference +** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference ** is that the counter used is stored as part of each individual statement ** object (struct Vdbe). If, after the statement has run, its immediate ** constraint counter is greater than zero, @@ -96051,7 +96051,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** INSERT violates a foreign key constraint. This is necessary as such ** an INSERT does not open a statement transaction. ** -** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a +** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a ** table be handled? ** ** @@ -96062,7 +96062,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** for those two operations needs to know whether or not the operation ** requires any FK processing and, if so, which columns of the original ** row are required by the FK processing VDBE code (i.e. if FKs were -** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be +** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be ** accessed). No information is required by the code-generator before ** coding an INSERT operation. The functions used by the UPDATE/DELETE ** generation code to query for this information are: @@ -96099,13 +96099,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ /* ** A foreign key constraint requires that the key columns in the parent ** table are collectively subject to a UNIQUE or PRIMARY KEY constraint. -** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey, -** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns. +** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey, +** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns. +** +** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY +** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx +** is set to point to the unique index. ** -** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY -** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx -** is set to point to the unique index. -** ** If the parent key consists of a single column (the foreign key constraint ** is not a composite foreign key), output variable *paiCol is set to NULL. ** Otherwise, it is set to point to an allocated array of size N, where @@ -96128,8 +96128,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterGlobalFunctions(void){ ** PRIMARY KEY, or ** ** 4) No parent key columns were provided explicitly as part of the -** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table -** consists of a different number of columns to the child key in +** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table +** consists of a different number of columns to the child key in ** the child table. ** ** then non-zero is returned, and a "foreign key mismatch" error loaded @@ -96153,9 +96153,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex( assert( !paiCol || *paiCol==0 ); assert( pParse ); - /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it - ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx - ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early. + /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it + ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx + ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early. ** ** Otherwise, for a composite foreign key (more than one column), allocate ** space for the aiCol array (returned via output parameter *paiCol). @@ -96164,7 +96164,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex( if( nCol==1 ){ /* The FK maps to the IPK if any of the following are true: ** - ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly + ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly ** mapped to the primary key of table pParent, or ** 2) The FK is explicitly mapped to a column declared as INTEGER ** PRIMARY KEY. @@ -96181,14 +96181,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex( } for(pIdx=pParent->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ - if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){ + if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){ /* pIdx is a UNIQUE index (or a PRIMARY KEY) and has the right number ** of columns. If each indexed column corresponds to a foreign key ** column of pFKey, then this index is a winner. */ if( zKey==0 ){ - /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to - ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be + /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to + ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be ** identified by the test. */ if( IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){ if( aiCol ){ @@ -96246,15 +96246,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex( } /* -** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the -** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed +** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the +** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed ** on the child table of pFKey, this function is invoked twice for each row ** affected - once to "delete" the old row, and then again to "insert" the ** new row. ** ** Each time it is called, this function generates VDBE code to locate the -** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into -** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no +** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into +** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no ** special action is taken. Otherwise, if the parent row can *not* be ** found in the parent table: ** @@ -96268,7 +96268,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex( ** ** DELETE deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter". ** -** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file +** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file ** (fkey.c) as "I.1" and "D.1". */ static void fkLookupParent( @@ -96291,8 +96291,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent( ** outstanding constraints to resolve. If there are not, there is no need ** to check if deleting this row resolves any outstanding violations. ** - ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If - ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to + ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If + ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to ** search for a matching row in the parent table. */ if( nIncr<0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_FkIfZero, pFKey->isDeferred, iOk); @@ -96309,8 +96309,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent( ** column of the parent table (table pTab). */ int iMustBeInt; /* Address of MustBeInt instruction */ int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); - - /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e. + + /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e. ** apply the affinity of the parent key). If this fails, then there ** is no matching parent key. Before using MustBeInt, make a copy of ** the value. Otherwise, the value inserted into the child key column @@ -96318,7 +96318,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, aiCol[0]+1+regData, regTemp); iMustBeInt = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regTemp, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); - + /* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about ** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation), ** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not @@ -96327,7 +96327,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent( sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Eq, regData, iOk, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL); } - + sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, 0, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, iOk); @@ -96338,19 +96338,19 @@ static void fkLookupParent( int nCol = pFKey->nCol; int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nCol); int regRec = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); - + sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenRead, iCur, pIdx->tnum, iDb); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pIdx); for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, aiCol[i]+1+regData, regTemp+i); } - + /* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about ** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation), ** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not - ** increment the constraint-counter. + ** increment the constraint-counter. ** - ** If any of the parent-key values are NULL, then the row cannot match + ** If any of the parent-key values are NULL, then the row cannot match ** itself. So set JUMPIFNULL to make sure we do the OP_Found if any ** of the parent-key values are NULL (at this point it is known that ** none of the child key values are). @@ -96370,19 +96370,19 @@ static void fkLookupParent( } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, iOk); } - + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regTemp, nCol, regRec, sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(v,pIdx), nCol); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iCur, iOk, regRec, 0); VdbeCoverage(v); - + sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec); sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regTemp, nCol); } } if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs) - && !pParse->pToplevel - && !pParse->isMultiWrite + && !pParse->pToplevel + && !pParse->isMultiWrite ){ /* Special case: If this is an INSERT statement that will insert exactly ** one row into the table, raise a constraint immediately instead of @@ -96460,7 +96460,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn( /* ** This function is called to generate code executed when a row is deleted -** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is +** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is ** deferred, when a row is inserted into the same table. When generating ** code for an SQL UPDATE operation, this function may be called twice - ** once to "delete" the old row and once to "insert" the new row. @@ -96483,7 +96483,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn( ** ** INSERT deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter". ** -** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file +** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file ** (fkey.c) as "I.2" and "D.2". */ static void fkScanChildren( @@ -96526,7 +96526,7 @@ static void fkScanChildren( Expr *pLeft; /* Value from parent table row */ Expr *pRight; /* Column ref to child table */ Expr *pEq; /* Expression (pLeft = pRight) */ - i16 iCol; /* Index of column in child table */ + i16 iCol; /* Index of column in child table */ const char *zCol; /* Name of column in child table */ iCol = pIdx ? pIdx->aiColumn[i] : -1; @@ -96619,7 +96619,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FKey *sqlite3FkReferences(Table *pTab){ } /* -** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the +** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the ** fkActionTrigger() routine. This function deletes the Trigger structure ** and all of its sub-components. ** @@ -96647,7 +96647,7 @@ static void fkTriggerDelete(sqlite3 *dbMem, Trigger *p){ ** ** (a) The table is the parent table of a FK constraint, or ** (b) The table is the child table of a deferred FK constraint and it is -** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK +** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK ** constraint violations in the database, ** ** then the equivalent of "DELETE FROM <tbl>" is executed before dropping @@ -96663,7 +96663,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa assert( v ); /* VDBE has already been allocated */ if( sqlite3FkReferences(pTab)==0 ){ /* Search for a deferred foreign key constraint for which this table - ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without + ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without ** generating any VDBE code. If one can be found, then jump over ** the entire DELETE if there are no outstanding deferred constraints ** when this statement is run. */ @@ -96680,10 +96680,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, sqlite3SrcListDup(db, pName, 0), 0); pParse->disableTriggers = 0; - /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint + /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint ** violations, halt the VDBE and return an error at this point, before ** any modifications to the schema are made. This is because statement - ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes. + ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes. ** ** If the SQLITE_DeferFKs flag is set, then this is not required, as ** the statement transaction will not be rolled back even if FK @@ -96706,7 +96706,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa /* ** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key ** for which pTab is the child table. An UPDATE statement against pTab -** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is +** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is ** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array ** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element ** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement @@ -96733,7 +96733,7 @@ static int fkChildIsModified( /* ** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key ** for which pTab is the parent table. An UPDATE statement against pTab -** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is +** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is ** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array ** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element ** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement @@ -96743,9 +96743,9 @@ static int fkChildIsModified( ** parent key for FK constraint *p are modified. */ static int fkParentIsModified( - Table *pTab, - FKey *p, - int *aChange, + Table *pTab, + FKey *p, + int *aChange, int bChngRowid ){ int i; @@ -96768,7 +96768,7 @@ static int fkParentIsModified( /* ** This function is called when inserting, deleting or updating a row of -** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint +** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint ** processing for the operation. ** ** For a DELETE operation, parameter regOld is passed the index of the @@ -96784,11 +96784,11 @@ static int fkParentIsModified( ** For an UPDATE operation, this function is called twice. Once before ** the original record is deleted from the table using the calling convention ** described for DELETE. Then again after the original record is deleted -** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention. +** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */ - Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */ + Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */ int regOld, /* Previous row data is stored here */ int regNew, /* New row data is stored here */ int *aChange, /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */ @@ -96820,16 +96820,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( int i; int isIgnore = 0; - if( aChange + if( aChange && sqlite3_stricmp(pTab->zName, pFKey->zTo)!=0 - && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0 + && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0 ){ continue; } - /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index - ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these - ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return + /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index + ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these + ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return ** early. */ if( pParse->disableTriggers ){ pTo = sqlite3FindTable(db, pFKey->zTo, zDb); @@ -96870,7 +96870,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( aiCol[i] = -1; } #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION - /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the + /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the ** authorization callback returns SQLITE_IGNORE, behave as if any ** values read from the parent table are NULL. */ if( db->xAuth ){ @@ -96882,21 +96882,21 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( #endif } - /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate - ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns + /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate + ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns ** in the parent table. */ sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTo->tnum, 0, pTo->zName); pParse->nTab++; if( regOld!=0 ){ /* A row is being removed from the child table. Search for the parent. - ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an + ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an ** outstanding foreign key constraint violation. */ fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regOld, -1,isIgnore); } if( regNew!=0 ){ /* A row is being added to the child table. If a parent row cannot - ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint. */ + ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint. */ fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, +1,isIgnore); } @@ -96914,8 +96914,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( continue; } - if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs) - && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite + if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs) + && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite ){ assert( regOld==0 && regNew!=0 ); /* Inserting a single row into a parent table cannot cause an immediate @@ -96938,13 +96938,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( pItem->zName = pFKey->pFrom->zName; pItem->pTab->nRef++; pItem->iCursor = pParse->nTab++; - + if( regNew!=0 ){ fkScanChildren(pParse, pSrc, pTab, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, -1); } if( regOld!=0 ){ /* If there is a RESTRICT action configured for the current operation - ** on the parent table of this FK, then throw an exception + ** on the parent table of this FK, then throw an exception ** immediately if the FK constraint is violated, even if this is a ** deferred trigger. That's what RESTRICT means. To defer checking ** the constraint, the FK should specify NO ACTION (represented @@ -96961,7 +96961,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck( #define COLUMN_MASK(x) (((x)>31) ? 0xffffffff : ((u32)1<<(x))) /* -** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a +** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a ** row contained in table pTab. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask( @@ -96988,17 +96988,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask( /* -** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a +** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a ** row contained in table pTab. If the operation is a DELETE, then ** parameter aChange is passed a NULL value. For an UPDATE, aChange points ** to an array of size N, where N is the number of columns in table pTab. -** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding +** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding ** entry in the aChange[] array is set to -1. If the column is modified, ** the value is 0 or greater. Parameter chngRowid is set to true if the ** UPDATE statement modifies the rowid fields of the table. ** ** If any foreign key processing will be required, this function returns -** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function +** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function ** returns false. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired( @@ -97009,8 +97009,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired( ){ if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){ if( !aChange ){ - /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the - ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any + /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the + ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any ** foreign key constraint. */ return (sqlite3FkReferences(pTab) || pTab->pFKey); }else{ @@ -97033,7 +97033,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired( } /* -** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being +** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being ** compiled on table pTab, which is the parent table of foreign-key pFKey. ** If the current operation is an UPDATE, then the pChanges parameter is ** passed a pointer to the list of columns being modified. If it is a @@ -97045,7 +97045,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired( ** returned (these actions require no special handling by the triggers ** sub-system, code for them is created by fkScanChildren()). ** -** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in +** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in ** the following schema: ** ** CREATE TABLE p(pk PRIMARY KEY); @@ -97058,7 +97058,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired( ** END; ** ** The returned pointer is cached as part of the foreign key object. It -** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by +** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by ** sqlite3FkDelete(). */ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( @@ -97112,7 +97112,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( ** that the affinity and collation sequence associated with the ** parent table are used for the comparison. */ pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, - sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, + sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tOld), sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol) , 0), @@ -97127,22 +97127,22 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( */ if( pChanges ){ pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_IS, - sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, + sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tOld), sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol), 0), - sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, + sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tNew), sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol), 0), 0); pWhen = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pWhen, pEq); } - + if( action!=OE_Restrict && (action!=OE_Cascade || pChanges) ){ Expr *pNew; if( action==OE_Cascade ){ - pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, + pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT, sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tNew), sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol) , 0); @@ -97167,7 +97167,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( if( action==OE_Restrict ){ Token tFrom; - Expr *pRaise; + Expr *pRaise; tFrom.z = zFrom; tFrom.n = nFrom; @@ -97175,7 +97175,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( if( pRaise ){ pRaise->affinity = OE_Abort; } - pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, + pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, pRaise), sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, &tFrom, 0), pWhere, @@ -97188,7 +97188,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( enableLookaside = db->lookaside.bEnabled; db->lookaside.bEnabled = 0; - pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, + pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(Trigger) + /* struct Trigger */ sizeof(TriggerStep) + /* Single step in trigger program */ nFrom + 1 /* Space for pStep->target.z */ @@ -97198,7 +97198,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( pStep->target.z = (char *)&pStep[1]; pStep->target.n = nFrom; memcpy((char *)pStep->target.z, zFrom, nFrom); - + pStep->pWhere = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pWhere, EXPRDUP_REDUCE); pStep->pExprList = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pList, EXPRDUP_REDUCE); pStep->pSelect = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pSelect, EXPRDUP_REDUCE); @@ -97223,12 +97223,12 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger( switch( action ){ case OE_Restrict: - pStep->op = TK_SELECT; + pStep->op = TK_SELECT; break; - case OE_Cascade: - if( !pChanges ){ - pStep->op = TK_DELETE; - break; + case OE_Cascade: + if( !pChanges ){ + pStep->op = TK_DELETE; + break; } default: pStep->op = TK_UPDATE; @@ -97255,9 +97255,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkActions( int *aChange, /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */ int bChngRowid /* True if rowid is UPDATEd */ ){ - /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that - ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK - ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated + /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that + ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK + ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated ** trigger sub-program. */ if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){ FKey *pFKey; /* Iterator variable */ @@ -97335,7 +97335,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDelete(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){ */ /* -** Generate code that will +** Generate code that will ** ** (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then ** (2) open pTab as cursor iCur. @@ -97354,7 +97354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable( assert( !IsVirtual(pTab) ); v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead ); - sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum, + sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum, (opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName); if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nCol); @@ -97371,7 +97371,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable( /* ** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index -** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in +** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in ** the table, according to the affinity of the column: ** ** Character Column affinity @@ -97413,7 +97413,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(Vdbe *v, Index *pIdx){ } pIdx->zColAff[n] = 0; } - + return pIdx->zColAff; } @@ -97468,9 +97468,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableAffinity(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int iReg){ /* ** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices -** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if -** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can -** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT. +** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if +** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can +** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT. */ static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){ Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p); @@ -97557,7 +97557,7 @@ static int autoIncBegin( /* ** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the -** register used by the autoincrement tracker. +** register used by the autoincrement tracker. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){ AutoincInfo *p; /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */ @@ -97906,7 +97906,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( regData = regRowid+1; /* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure - ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and + ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and ** remember the column indices. ** ** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column @@ -97977,7 +97977,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( ** the destination table (template 3). ** ** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one - ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a + ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a ** temp table in the case of row triggers. */ if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){ @@ -98030,7 +98030,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( } /* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary - ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key + ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key ** column index in the original table definition. */ if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){ @@ -98046,7 +98046,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( } } if( pColumn==0 && nColumn && nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied", pTabList, 0, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn); goto insert_cleanup; @@ -98055,7 +98055,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId); goto insert_cleanup; } - + /* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted */ if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){ @@ -98150,7 +98150,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( if( (!useTempTable && !pList) || (pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId) ){ sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, regCols+i+1); }else if( useTempTable ){ - sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1); + sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1); }else{ assert( pSelect==0 ); /* Otherwise useTempTable is true */ sqlite3ExprCodeAndCache(pParse, pList->a[j].pExpr, regCols+i+1); @@ -98167,7 +98167,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( } /* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */ - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop); sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1); @@ -98252,7 +98252,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( if( j<0 || nColumn==0 || (pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId) ){ sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, iRegStore); }else if( useTempTable ){ - sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore); + sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore); }else if( pSelect ){ if( regFromSelect!=regData ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+j, iRegStore); @@ -98293,7 +98293,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert( if( pTrigger ){ /* Code AFTER triggers */ - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop); } @@ -98328,7 +98328,7 @@ insert_end: } /* - ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is + ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not ** invoke the callback function. */ @@ -98478,9 +98478,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( assert( v!=0 ); assert( pTab->pSelect==0 ); /* This table is not a VIEW */ nCol = pTab->nCol; - + /* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for - ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the + ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the ** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table. In other words, nPkField is the ** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */ if( HasRowid(pTab) ){ @@ -98628,10 +98628,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( ** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries. ** ** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers - ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call - ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries - ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry - ** when it is inserted. + ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call + ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries + ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry + ** when it is inserted. ** ** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called, ** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require @@ -98723,7 +98723,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( VdbeComment((v, "for %s", pIdx->zName)); sqlite3ExprCacheAffinityChange(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn); - /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index + /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index ** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the ** primary key, then no collision is possible. The collision detection ** logic below can all be skipped. */ @@ -98734,7 +98734,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( /* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */ onError = pIdx->onError; - if( onError==OE_None ){ + if( onError==OE_None ){ sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn); sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk); continue; /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */ @@ -98744,7 +98744,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( }else if( onError==OE_Default ){ onError = OE_Abort; } - + /* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_NoConflict, iThisCur, addrUniqueOk, regIdx, pIdx->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v); @@ -98774,7 +98774,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( } } if( isUpdate ){ - /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID + /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID ** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually ** different from the old. ** @@ -98784,7 +98784,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol; int op = OP_Ne; int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR); - + for(i=0; i<pPk->nKeyCol; i++){ char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]); x = pPk->aiColumn[i]; @@ -98792,7 +98792,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( addrJump = addrUniqueOk; op = OP_Eq; } - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op, regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ ); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL); @@ -98838,7 +98838,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, ipkTop+1); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, ipkBottom); } - + *pbMayReplace = seenReplace; VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenCnstCks(%d)", seenReplace)); } @@ -99058,7 +99058,7 @@ static int xferCompatibleIndex(Index *pDest, Index *pSrc){ ** ** INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2; ** -** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1. +** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1. ** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves ** performance. Raw index records are transferred in the same way. ** @@ -99202,7 +99202,7 @@ static int xferOptimization( } /* Default values for second and subsequent columns need to match. */ if( i>0 - && ((pDestCol->zDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->zDflt==0) + && ((pDestCol->zDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->zDflt==0) || (pDestCol->zDflt && strcmp(pDestCol->zDflt, pSrcCol->zDflt)!=0)) ){ return 0; /* Default values must be the same for all columns */ @@ -99227,7 +99227,7 @@ static int xferOptimization( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY /* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table constains ** any foreign key constraints. This is more restrictive than necessary. - ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM + ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM ** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints. So ** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably ** not worth the effort. Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e] @@ -99270,7 +99270,7 @@ static int xferOptimization( ** (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields ** of index entries might need to change.) ** - ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization + ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization ** is unable to test uniqueness.) ** ** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback. @@ -99412,7 +99412,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_exec( rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt); /* Invoke the callback function if required */ - if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc || + if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc || (SQLITE_DONE==rc && !callbackIsInit && db->flags&SQLITE_NullCallback)) ){ if( !callbackIsInit ){ @@ -99522,7 +99522,7 @@ exec_out: ** This header file defines the SQLite interface for use by ** shared libraries that want to be imported as extensions into ** an SQLite instance. Shared libraries that intend to be loaded -** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of +** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of ** sqlite3.h. */ #ifndef _SQLITE3EXT_H_ @@ -100009,14 +100009,14 @@ struct sqlite3_api_routines { #endif /* SQLITE_CORE */ #ifndef SQLITE_CORE - /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable + /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable ** extension */ # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1 const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api=0; # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v) sqlite3_api=v; # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3 \ extern const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api; #else - /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the + /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the ** application */ # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1 /*no-op*/ # define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v) (void)v; /* unused parameter */ @@ -100304,8 +100304,8 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = { sqlite3_memory_highwater, sqlite3_memory_used, #ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_OMIT - 0, - 0, + 0, + 0, 0, 0, 0, @@ -100423,7 +100423,7 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = { ** ** Return SQLITE_OK on success and SQLITE_ERROR if something goes wrong. ** -** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with +** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with ** error message text. The calling function should free this memory ** by calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ). */ @@ -100446,7 +100446,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension( /* Shared library endings to try if zFile cannot be loaded as written */ static const char *azEndings[] = { #if SQLITE_OS_WIN - "dll" + "dll" #elif defined(__APPLE__) "dylib" #else @@ -100485,7 +100485,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension( if( pzErrMsg ){ *pzErrMsg = zErrmsg = sqlite3_malloc(nMsg); if( zErrmsg ){ - sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg, + sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg, "unable to open shared library [%s]", zFile); sqlite3OsDlError(pVfs, nMsg-1, zErrmsg); } @@ -100498,9 +100498,9 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension( /* If no entry point was specified and the default legacy ** entry point name "sqlite3_extension_init" was not found, then ** construct an entry point name "sqlite3_X_init" where the X is - ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic + ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic ** character in the filename after the last "/" upto the first ".", - ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib". + ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib". ** Examples: ** ** /usr/local/lib/libExample5.4.3.so ==> sqlite3_example_init @@ -100630,7 +100630,7 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = { 0 }; */ typedef struct sqlite3AutoExtList sqlite3AutoExtList; static SQLITE_WSD struct sqlite3AutoExtList { - int nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */ + int nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */ void (**aExt)(void); /* Pointers to the extension init functions */ } sqlite3Autoext = { 0, 0 }; @@ -101258,7 +101258,7 @@ static const struct sPragmaNames { /* ** Interpret the given string as a safety level. Return 0 for OFF, -** 1 for ON or NORMAL and 2 for FULL. Return 1 for an empty or +** 1 for ON or NORMAL and 2 for FULL. Return 1 for an empty or ** unrecognized string argument. The FULL option is disallowed ** if the omitFull parameter it 1. ** @@ -101314,7 +101314,7 @@ static int getLockingMode(const char *z){ /* ** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value. ** -** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are +** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are ** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively. */ static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){ @@ -101442,7 +101442,7 @@ static const char *actionName(u8 action){ case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break; case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break; case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break; - default: zName = "NO ACTION"; + default: zName = "NO ACTION"; assert( action==OE_None ); break; } return zName; @@ -101475,7 +101475,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3JournalModename(int eMode){ } /* -** Process a pragma statement. +** Process a pragma statement. ** ** Pragmas are of this form: ** @@ -101490,7 +101490,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3JournalModename(int eMode){ ** id and pId2 is any empty string. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( - Parse *pParse, + Parse *pParse, Token *pId1, /* First part of [database.]id field */ Token *pId2, /* Second part of [database.]id field, or NULL */ Token *pValue, /* Token for <value>, or NULL */ @@ -101518,8 +101518,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( iDb<0 ) return; pDb = &db->aDb[iDb]; - /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the - ** pragma, make sure it is open. + /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the + ** pragma, make sure it is open. */ if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){ return; @@ -101592,7 +101592,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( /* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */ switch( aPragmaNames[mid].ePragTyp ){ - + #if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED) /* ** PRAGMA [database.]default_cache_size @@ -101705,7 +101705,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( ** PRAGMA [database.]max_page_count=N ** ** The first form reports the current setting for the - ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The + ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The ** second form attempts to change this setting. Both ** forms return the current setting. ** @@ -101724,7 +101724,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( sqlite3Tolower(zLeft[0])=='p' ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Pagecount, iDb, iReg); }else{ - sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg, sqlite3AbsInt32(sqlite3Atoi(zRight))); } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, iReg, 1); @@ -101869,7 +101869,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( */ rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){ - /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or + /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or ** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database ** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates ** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database. @@ -102021,7 +102021,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( !zRight ){ if( sqlite3_temp_directory ){ sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1); - sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, + sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "temp_store_directory", SQLITE_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0, sqlite3_temp_directory, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1); @@ -102071,7 +102071,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( !zRight ){ if( sqlite3_data_directory ){ sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1); - sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, + sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "data_store_directory", SQLITE_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0, sqlite3_data_directory, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1); @@ -102112,12 +102112,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt); char *proxy_file_path = NULL; sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager); - sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE, + sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE, &proxy_file_path); - + if( proxy_file_path ){ sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1); - sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, + sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "lock_proxy_file", SQLITE_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0, proxy_file_path, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1); @@ -102127,10 +102127,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager); int res; if( zRight[0] ){ - res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, + res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, zRight); } else { - res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, + res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE, NULL); } if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -102140,8 +102140,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( } break; } -#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ - +#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */ + /* ** PRAGMA [database.]synchronous ** PRAGMA [database.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL @@ -102156,7 +102156,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( returnSingleInt(pParse, "synchronous", pDb->safety_level-1); }else{ if( !db->autoCommit ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction"); }else{ pDb->safety_level = getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1; @@ -102193,7 +102193,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( mask==SQLITE_DeferFKs ) db->nDeferredImmCons = 0; } - /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL + /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL ** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all ** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value. */ @@ -102281,14 +102281,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, 2); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, (int)sqlite3LogEstToInt(pTab->szTabRow), 3); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, (int)sqlite3LogEstToInt(pTab->nRowLogEst), 4); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 4); for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 2, 0, pIdx->zName, 0); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, (int)sqlite3LogEstToInt(pIdx->szIdxRow), 3); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, (int)sqlite3LogEstToInt(pIdx->aiRowLogEst[0]), 4); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 4); } @@ -102389,7 +102389,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); pFK = pTab->pFKey; if( pFK ){ - int i = 0; + int i = 0; sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 8); pParse->nMem = 8; sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iDb); @@ -102509,7 +102509,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, 0, iKey, regRow); sqlite3ColumnDefault(v, pTab, iKey, regRow); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_IsNull, regRow, addrOk); VdbeCoverage(v); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regRow, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regRow, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+3); VdbeCoverage(v); }else{ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rowid, 0, regRow); @@ -102531,7 +102531,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( } } sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rowid, 0, regResult+1); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, regResult+2, 0, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, regResult+2, 0, pFK->zTo, P4_TRANSIENT); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, i-1, regResult+3); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, regResult, 4); @@ -102574,7 +102574,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( #endif #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK - /* Pragma "quick_check" is reduced version of + /* Pragma "quick_check" is reduced version of ** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption ** without most of the overhead of a full integrity-check. */ @@ -102734,7 +102734,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, 1, -1); /* Decrement error limit */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 3, 0, "row ", P4_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Concat, 7, 3, 3); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 4, 0, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 4, 0, " missing from index ", P4_STATIC); sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Concat, 4, 3, 3); jmp5 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 4, 0, @@ -102775,7 +102775,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iDataCur, loopTop); VdbeCoverage(v); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, loopTop-1); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 2, 0, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 2, 0, "wrong # of entries in index ", P4_STATIC); for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){ if( pPk==pIdx ) continue; @@ -102791,7 +102791,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 7, 1); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT */ - } + } } addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(v, ArraySize(endCode), endCode, iLn); sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, addr, -mxErr); @@ -102814,7 +102814,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( ** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file ** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the ** default text encoding for the existing database is used. - ** + ** ** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are ** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If ** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH @@ -102856,9 +102856,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( ** will be overwritten when the schema is next loaded. If it does not ** already exists, it will be created to use the new encoding value. */ - if( - !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) || - DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty) + if( + !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) || + DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty) ){ for(pEnc=&encnames[0]; pEnc->zName; pEnc++){ if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(zRight, pEnc->zName) ){ @@ -103014,8 +103014,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( if( zRight ){ sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight)); } - returnSingleInt(pParse, "wal_autocheckpoint", - db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ? + returnSingleInt(pParse, "wal_autocheckpoint", + db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ? SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0); } break; @@ -103108,7 +103108,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma( pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt; if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){ zState = "closed"; - }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zName : 0, + }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zName : 0, SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){ zState = azLockName[j]; } @@ -103204,7 +103204,7 @@ static void corruptSchema( sqlite3SetString(pData->pzErrMsg, db, "malformed database schema (%s)", zObj); if( zExtra ){ - *pData->pzErrMsg = sqlite3MAppendf(db, *pData->pzErrMsg, + *pData->pzErrMsg = sqlite3MAppendf(db, *pData->pzErrMsg, "%s - %s", *pData->pzErrMsg, zExtra); } } @@ -103323,7 +103323,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){ /* ** The master database table has a structure like this */ - static const char master_schema[] = + static const char master_schema[] = "CREATE TABLE sqlite_master(\n" " type text,\n" " name text,\n" @@ -103333,7 +103333,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){ ")" ; #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB - static const char temp_master_schema[] = + static const char temp_master_schema[] = "CREATE TEMP TABLE sqlite_temp_master(\n" " type text,\n" " name text,\n" @@ -103392,7 +103392,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){ } /* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened - ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it + ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it ** will be closed before this function returns. */ sqlite3BtreeEnter(pDb->pBt); if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pDb->pBt) ){ @@ -103497,7 +103497,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){ assert( db->init.busy ); { char *zSql; - zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, + zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s ORDER BY rowid", db->aDb[iDb].zName, zMasterName); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION @@ -103525,7 +103525,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){ } if( rc==SQLITE_OK || (db->flags&SQLITE_RecoveryMode)){ /* Black magic: If the SQLITE_RecoveryMode flag is set, then consider - ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the + ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the ** current sqlite3_prepare() operation will fail, but the following one ** will attempt to compile the supplied statement against whatever subset ** of the schema was loaded before the error occurred. The primary @@ -103566,7 +103566,7 @@ error_out: SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){ int i, rc; int commit_internal = !(db->flags&SQLITE_InternChanges); - + assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); assert( db->init.busy==0 ); rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -103598,7 +103598,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){ sqlite3CommitInternalChanges(db); } - return rc; + return rc; } /* @@ -103639,7 +103639,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){ if( pBt==0 ) continue; /* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened - ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it + ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it ** will be closed immediately after reading the meta-value. */ if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pBt) ){ rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, 0); @@ -103650,7 +103650,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){ openedTransaction = 1; } - /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the + /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the ** value stored as part of the in-memory schema representation, ** set Parse.rc to SQLITE_SCHEMA. */ sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&cookie); @@ -103677,13 +103677,13 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SchemaToIndex(sqlite3 *db, Schema *pSchema){ int i = -1000000; - /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in + /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in ** expr.c is trying to resolve a reference to a transient table (i.e. one - ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this + ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this ** function should never be used. ** ** We return -1000000 instead of the more usual -1 simply because using - ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much + ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much ** more likely to cause a segfault than -1 (of course there are assert() ** statements too, but it never hurts to play the odds). */ @@ -103753,8 +103753,8 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare( ** This thread is currently holding mutexes on all Btrees (because ** of the sqlite3BtreeEnterAll() in sqlite3LockAndPrepare()) so it ** is not possible for another thread to start a new schema change - ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold - ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is + ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold + ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is ** holding them. ** ** Note that setting READ_UNCOMMITTED overrides most lock detection, @@ -103977,7 +103977,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare_v2( ** Compile the UTF-16 encoded SQL statement zSql into a statement handle. */ static int sqlite3Prepare16( - sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ + sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */ int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */ int saveSqlFlag, /* True to save SQL text into the sqlite3_stmt */ @@ -104018,7 +104018,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16( int chars_parsed = sqlite3Utf8CharLen(zSql8, (int)(zTail8-zSql8)); *pzTail = (u8 *)zSql + sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(zSql, chars_parsed); } - sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8); + sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8); rc = sqlite3ApiExit(db, rc); sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); return rc; @@ -104033,7 +104033,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16( ** occurs. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16( - sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ + sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */ int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */ sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */ @@ -104045,7 +104045,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16( return rc; } SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v2( - sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ + sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */ const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */ int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */ sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */ @@ -104275,7 +104275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){ p = apAll[i]; for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){ - if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar + if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar && sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){ jointype |= aKeyword[j].code; break; @@ -104297,9 +104297,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unknown or unsupported join type: " "%T %T%s%T", pA, pB, zSp, pC); jointype = JT_INNER; - }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 + }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0 && (jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=JT_LEFT ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "RIGHT and FULL OUTER JOINs are not currently supported"); jointype = JT_INNER; } @@ -104320,7 +104320,7 @@ static int columnIndex(Table *pTab, const char *zCol){ /* ** Search the first N tables in pSrc, from left to right, looking for a -** table that has a column named zCol. +** table that has a column named zCol. ** ** When found, set *piTab and *piCol to the table index and column index ** of the matching column and return TRUE. @@ -104358,7 +104358,7 @@ static int tableAndColumnIndex( ** ** (tab1.col1 = tab2.col2) ** -** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the +** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the ** (iSrc+1)'th. Column col1 is column iColLeft of tab1, and col2 is ** column iColRight of tab2. */ @@ -104429,7 +104429,7 @@ static void setJoinExpr(Expr *p, int iTable){ p->iRightJoinTable = (i16)iTable; setJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable); p = p->pRight; - } + } } /* @@ -104503,7 +104503,7 @@ static int sqliteProcessJoin(Parse *pParse, Select *p){ } /* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named - ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are + ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are ** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this ** to the WHERE clause: A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z ** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is @@ -104592,7 +104592,7 @@ static void pushOntoSorter( pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat; nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq; if( bSeq ){ - addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr); + addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr); }else{ addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor); } @@ -104713,7 +104713,7 @@ static int checkForMultiColumnSelectError( ** ** If srcTab is negative, then the pEList expressions ** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row. If srcTab is -** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and pEList is used only +** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and pEList is used only ** to get number columns and the datatype for each column. */ static void selectInnerLoop( @@ -104988,7 +104988,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop( /* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open ** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously ** added to the queue. */ - addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0, + addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0, regResult, nResultCol); VdbeCoverage(v); } @@ -105041,7 +105041,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop( ** X extra columns. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3KeyInfoAlloc(sqlite3 *db, int N, int X){ - KeyInfo *p = sqlite3DbMallocZero(0, + KeyInfo *p = sqlite3DbMallocZero(0, sizeof(KeyInfo) + (N+X)*(sizeof(CollSeq*)+1)); if( p ){ p->aSortOrder = (u8*)&p->aColl[N+X]; @@ -105191,7 +105191,7 @@ static void explainTempTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zUsage){ ** where iSub1 and iSub2 are the integers passed as the corresponding ** function parameters, and op is the text representation of the parameter ** of the same name. The parameter "op" must be one of TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT, -** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is +** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is ** false, or the second form if it is true. */ static void explainComposite( @@ -105315,7 +105315,7 @@ static void generateSortTail( } #endif default: { - assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); + assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Output ); testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine ); if( eDest==SRT_Output ){ @@ -105354,14 +105354,14 @@ static void generateSortTail( ** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The ** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression ** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The -** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is +** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is ** considered a column by this function. ** ** SELECT col FROM tbl; ** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl; ** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl); ** SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl); -** +** ** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL. ** ** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not @@ -105370,7 +105370,7 @@ static void generateSortTail( #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E,F) columnTypeImpl(A,B,C,D,E,F) static const char *columnTypeImpl( - NameContext *pNC, + NameContext *pNC, Expr *pExpr, const char **pzOrigDb, const char **pzOrigTab, @@ -105383,7 +105383,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl( #else /* if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA) */ # define columnType(A,B,C,D,E,F) columnTypeImpl(A,B,F) static const char *columnTypeImpl( - NameContext *pNC, + NameContext *pNC, Expr *pExpr, u8 *pEstWidth ){ @@ -105419,19 +105419,19 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl( if( pTab==0 ){ /* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would ** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how - ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer + ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer ** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like ** the following: ** ** CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER); ** SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1; ** - ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the + ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the ** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even ** though it should really be "INTEGER". ** ** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never - ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression + ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression ** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT ** branch below. */ break; @@ -105445,7 +105445,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl( */ if( iCol>=0 && ALWAYS(iCol<pS->pEList->nExpr) ){ /* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the - ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see + ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see ** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL. */ NameContext sNC; @@ -105453,7 +105453,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl( sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pNC; sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse; - zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol, &estWidth); + zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol, &estWidth); } }else if( pTab->pSchema ){ /* A real table */ @@ -105498,13 +105498,13 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl( sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc; sNC.pNext = pNC; sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse; - zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, &estWidth); + zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, &estWidth); break; } #endif } -#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA +#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA if( pzOrigDb ){ assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol ); *pzOrigDb = zOrigDb; @@ -105540,7 +105540,7 @@ static void generateColumnTypes( const char *zOrigCol = 0; zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, 0); - /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other + /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other ** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this ** virtual machine is deleted. */ @@ -105606,7 +105606,7 @@ static void generateColumnNames( zCol = pTab->aCol[iCol].zName; } if( !shortNames && !fullNames ){ - sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME, + sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME, sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pEList->a[i].zSpan), SQLITE_DYNAMIC); }else if( fullNames ){ char *zName = 0; @@ -105732,7 +105732,7 @@ static int selectColumnsFromExprList( /* ** Add type and collation information to a column list based on ** a SELECT statement. -** +** ** The column list presumably came from selectColumnNamesFromExprList(). ** The column list has only names, not types or collations. This ** routine goes through and adds the types and collations. @@ -105835,9 +105835,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Vdbe *sqlite3GetVdbe(Parse *pParse){ ** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the ** pLimit and pOffset expressions. pLimit and pOffset hold the expressions ** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET -** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset -** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute -** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then +** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset +** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute +** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then ** iLimit and iOffset are negative. ** ** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if @@ -105861,7 +105861,7 @@ static void computeLimitRegisters(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int iBreak){ int addr1, n; if( p->iLimit ) return; - /* + /* ** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows. There is some ** controversy about what the correct behavior should be. ** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean @@ -105991,7 +105991,7 @@ static KeyInfo *multiSelectOrderByKeyInfo(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int nExtra){ ** inserted into the Queue table. The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows ** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be ** discarded. If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed. -** +** ** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in ** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle. Without ** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO. @@ -106145,7 +106145,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( ** ** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the ** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query -** in which case this routine will be called recursively. +** in which case this routine will be called recursively. ** ** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination ** of type eDest with parameter iParm. @@ -106278,7 +106278,7 @@ static int multiSelect( p->nSelectRow += pPrior->nSelectRow; if( pPrior->pLimit && sqlite3ExprIsInteger(pPrior->pLimit, &nLimit) - && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > (u64)nLimit + && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > (u64)nLimit ){ p->nSelectRow = nLimit; } @@ -106467,7 +106467,7 @@ static int multiSelect( explainComposite(pParse, p->op, iSub1, iSub2, p->op!=TK_ALL); - /* Compute collating sequences used by + /* Compute collating sequences used by ** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select. ** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables. ** @@ -106560,7 +106560,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine( addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); - /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT + /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT */ if( regPrev ){ int j1, j2; @@ -106604,7 +106604,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine( case SRT_Set: { int r1; assert( pIn->nSdst==1 ); - pDest->affSdst = + pDest->affSdst = sqlite3CompareAffinity(p->pEList->a[0].pExpr, pDest->affSdst); r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, 1, r1, &pDest->affSdst,1); @@ -106653,7 +106653,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine( ** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other ** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output. ** - ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers. + ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers. ** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to ** return the next row of result. */ @@ -106711,7 +106711,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine( ** ** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB. ** -** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which +** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which ** <operator> is used: ** ** @@ -106820,7 +106820,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( /* Patch up the ORDER BY clause */ - op = p->op; + op = p->op; pPrior = p->pPrior; assert( pPrior->pOrderBy==0 ); pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy; @@ -106895,7 +106895,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( } } } - + /* Separate the left and the right query from one another */ p->pPrior = 0; @@ -106940,7 +106940,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_EndCoroutine, regAddrA); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j1); - /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on + /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on ** the right - the "B" select */ addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1; @@ -106949,7 +106949,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( savedLimit = p->iLimit; savedOffset = p->iOffset; p->iLimit = regLimitB; - p->iOffset = 0; + p->iOffset = 0; explainSetInteger(iSub2, pParse->iNextSelectId); sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB); p->iLimit = savedLimit; @@ -106963,7 +106963,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse, p, &destA, pDest, regOutA, regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd); - + /* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B ** select as the next output row of the compound select. */ @@ -106980,7 +106980,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( */ if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){ addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd; - }else{ + }else{ VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine")); addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB); addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd); @@ -106995,7 +106995,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy( if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){ addrEofB = addrEofA; if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow; - }else{ + }else{ VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine")); addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA); sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v); @@ -107083,13 +107083,13 @@ static void substSelect(sqlite3*, Select *, int, ExprList *); /* ** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to ** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th -** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column +** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column ** unchanged.) ** ** This routine is part of the flattening procedure. A subquery ** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the ** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that -** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary +** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary ** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table ** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery. */ @@ -107183,7 +107183,7 @@ static void substSelect( ** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5 ** ** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result -** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might +** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might ** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be ** avoided. ** @@ -107199,7 +107199,7 @@ static void substSelect( ** (4) The subquery is not DISTINCT. ** ** (**) At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT -** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction +** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction ** (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries. ** ** (6) The subquery does not use aggregates or the outer query is not @@ -107235,10 +107235,10 @@ static void substSelect( ** ** (16) The outer query is not an aggregate or the subquery does ** not contain ORDER BY. (Ticket #2942) This used to not matter -** until we introduced the group_concat() function. +** until we introduced the group_concat() function. ** -** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL -** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and +** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL +** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and ** the parent query: ** ** * is not itself part of a compound select, @@ -107259,7 +107259,7 @@ static void substSelect( ** syntax error and return a detailed message. ** ** (18) If the sub-query is a compound select, then all terms of the -** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to +** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to ** columns of the sub-query. ** ** (19) The subquery does not use LIMIT or the outer query does not @@ -107281,7 +107281,7 @@ static void substSelect( ** parent to a compound query confuses the code that handles ** recursive queries in multiSelect(). ** -** (24) The subquery is not an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or +** (24) The subquery is not an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or ** or max() functions. (Without this restriction, a query like: ** "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily ** return the value X for which Y was maximal.) @@ -107368,7 +107368,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery( } /* OBSOLETE COMMENT 1: - ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is + ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is ** not used as the right operand of an outer join. Examples of why this ** is not allowed: ** @@ -107420,7 +107420,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery( testcase( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Aggregate ); assert( pSub->pSrc!=0 ); if( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))!=0 - || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL) + || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL) || pSub1->pSrc->nSrc<1 || pSub->pEList->nExpr!=pSub1->pEList->nExpr ){ @@ -107449,13 +107449,13 @@ static int flattenSubquery( pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext; /* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions - ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must + ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must ** be of the form: ** - ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause> + ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause> ** ** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block - ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or + ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or ** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original ** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple ** select statements in the compound sub-query. @@ -107513,7 +107513,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery( if( db->mallocFailed ) return 1; } - /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause + /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause ** in the outer query. */ pSub = pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect; @@ -107611,10 +107611,10 @@ static int flattenSubquery( memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i])); } pSrc->a[iFrom].jointype = jointype; - - /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for + + /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for ** references to the iParent in the outer query. - ** + ** ** Example: ** ** SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b; @@ -107669,7 +107669,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery( pParent->pHaving = pParent->pWhere; pParent->pWhere = pWhere; pParent->pHaving = substExpr(db, pParent->pHaving, iParent, pSub->pEList); - pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pHaving, + pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pHaving, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pSub->pHaving, 0)); assert( pParent->pGroupBy==0 ); pParent->pGroupBy = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pSub->pGroupBy, 0); @@ -107677,12 +107677,12 @@ static int flattenSubquery( pParent->pWhere = substExpr(db, pParent->pWhere, iParent, pSub->pEList); pParent->pWhere = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pWhere, pWhere); } - + /* The flattened query is distinct if either the inner or the - ** outer query is distinct. + ** outer query is distinct. */ pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct; - + /* ** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y; ** @@ -107720,7 +107720,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery( ** * the argument to the aggregate function is a column value. ** ** If all of the above are true, then WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX -** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the +** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the ** list of arguments passed to the aggregate before returning. ** ** Or, if the conditions above are not met, *ppMinMax is set to 0 and @@ -107753,7 +107753,7 @@ static u8 minMaxQuery(AggInfo *pAggInfo, ExprList **ppMinMax){ /* ** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query. -** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This +** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This ** function tests if the SELECT is of the form: ** ** SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl> @@ -107768,7 +107768,7 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){ assert( !p->pGroupBy ); - if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1 + if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1 || p->pSrc->nSrc!=1 || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect ){ return 0; @@ -107789,8 +107789,8 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){ /* ** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an ** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there -** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return -** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate +** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return +** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate ** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){ @@ -107798,8 +107798,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF Table *pTab = pFrom->pTab; char *zIndex = pFrom->zIndex; Index *pIdx; - for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; - pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndex); + for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; + pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndex); pIdx=pIdx->pNext ); if( !pIdx ){ @@ -107812,7 +107812,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF return SQLITE_OK; } /* -** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with +** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with ** an alternative collating sequence. ** ** SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ... @@ -107881,9 +107881,9 @@ static int convertCompoundSelectToSubquery(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* -** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested -** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by -** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE) +** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested +** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by +** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE) ** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise ** return NULL. ** @@ -107918,7 +107918,7 @@ static struct Cte *searchWith( ** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this ** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack. In this case it ** should be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when -** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT +** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT ** statement with which it is associated. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){ @@ -107931,7 +107931,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){ } /* -** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by +** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by ** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser. And, ** if currently processing a CTE expression, if it is a recursive ** reference to the current CTE. @@ -107946,7 +107946,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){ ** parser and some error code other than SQLITE_OK returned. */ static int withExpand( - Walker *pWalker, + Walker *pWalker, struct SrcList_item *pFrom ){ Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse; @@ -107994,8 +107994,8 @@ static int withExpand( SrcList *pSrc = pFrom->pSelect->pSrc; for(i=0; i<pSrc->nSrc; i++){ struct SrcList_item *pItem = &pSrc->a[i]; - if( pItem->zDatabase==0 - && pItem->zName!=0 + if( pItem->zDatabase==0 + && pItem->zName!=0 && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName) ){ pItem->pTab = pTab; @@ -108006,7 +108006,7 @@ static int withExpand( } } - /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */ + /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */ if( pTab->nRef>2 ){ sqlite3ErrorMsg( pParse, "multiple references to recursive table: %s", pCte->zName @@ -108052,12 +108052,12 @@ static int withExpand( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE /* -** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH +** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH ** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object. ** ** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by ** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table -** names and other FROM clause elements. +** names and other FROM clause elements. */ static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse; @@ -108078,7 +108078,7 @@ static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every ** element of the FROM clause. ** -** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that +** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that ** defines FROM clause. When views appear in the FROM clause, ** fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement ** that implements the view. A copy is made of the view's SELECT @@ -108301,7 +108301,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ if( (pFrom->jointype & JT_NATURAL)!=0 && tableAndColumnIndex(pTabList, i, zName, 0, 0) ){ - /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the + /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the ** table to the right of the join */ continue; } @@ -108373,8 +108373,8 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){ ** ** When this routine is the Walker.xExprCallback then expression trees ** are walked without any actions being taken at each node. Presumably, -** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then -** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every +** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then +** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every ** subquery in the parser tree. */ static int exprWalkNoop(Walker *NotUsed, Expr *NotUsed2){ @@ -108618,7 +108618,7 @@ static void updateAccumulator(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){ } /* Before populating the accumulator registers, clear the column cache. - ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present + ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present ** in registers, sqlite3ExprCode() may use OP_SCopy to copy the value ** to pC->iMem. But by the time the value is used, the original register ** may have been used, invalidating the underlying buffer holding the @@ -108668,7 +108668,7 @@ static void explainSimpleCount( #endif /* -** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument. +** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument. ** ** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure. ** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information. @@ -108725,7 +108725,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue ); assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue ); if( IgnorableOrderby(pDest) ){ - assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union || + assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union || pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard || pDest->eDest==SRT_Queue || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue || pDest->eDest==SRT_Fifo); @@ -108883,7 +108883,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( } #endif - /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and + /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and ** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query ** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this: ** @@ -108893,12 +108893,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( ** ** SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ** - ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be - ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally - ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER + ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be + ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally + ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER ** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other. */ - if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct + if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct && sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, p->pEList, -1)==0 ){ p->selFlags &= ~SF_Distinct; @@ -108912,7 +108912,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( } /* If there is an ORDER BY clause, then this sorting - ** index might end up being unused if the data can be + ** index might end up being unused if the data can be ** extracted in pre-sorted order. If that is the case, then the ** OP_OpenEphemeral instruction will be changed to an OP_Noop once ** we figure out that the sorting index is not needed. The addrSortIndex @@ -108982,7 +108982,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( } } - /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral + /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral ** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral ** into an OP_Noop. */ @@ -109034,8 +109034,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( /* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are - ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause - ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out + ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause + ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out ** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY may use a ** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required ** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the @@ -109044,7 +109044,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pGroupBy, sSort.pOrderBy, -1)==0 ){ orderByGrp = 1; } - + /* Create a label to jump to when we want to abort the query */ addrEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); @@ -109091,12 +109091,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( /* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to ** implement it. Allocate that sorting index now. If it turns out ** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction - ** will be converted into a Noop. + ** will be converted into a Noop. */ sAggInfo.sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++; pKeyInfo = keyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy, 0, 0); - addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen, - sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn, + addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen, + sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn, 0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO); /* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing @@ -109144,7 +109144,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( int nCol; int nGroupBy; - explainTempTable(pParse, + explainTempTable(pParse, (sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ? "DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY"); @@ -109168,7 +109168,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( int r1 = j + regBase; int r2; - r2 = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, + r2 = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, pCol->pTab, pCol->iColumn, pCol->iTable, r1, 0); if( r1!=r2 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, r2, r1); @@ -109197,9 +109197,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( ** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier. ** ** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless. - ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to + ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to ** disable this optimization for testing purposes. */ - if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder) + if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder) && (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo)) ){ sSort.pOrderBy = 0; @@ -109302,7 +109302,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrReset); resetAccumulator(pParse, &sAggInfo); sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Return, regReset); - + } /* endif pGroupBy. Begin aggregate queries without GROUP BY: */ else { ExprList *pDel = 0; @@ -109338,7 +109338,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( ** ** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index. ** - ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only + ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only ** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy. */ if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab); @@ -109373,11 +109373,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( ** SELECT max(x) FROM ... ** ** If it is, then ask the code in where.c to attempt to sort results - ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause. + ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause. ** If where.c is able to produce results sorted in this order, then - ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the - ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is - ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum + ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the + ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is + ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum ** value of x, the only row required). ** ** A special flag must be passed to sqlite3WhereBegin() to slightly @@ -109388,13 +109388,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( ** for x. ** ** + The optimizer code in where.c (the thing that decides which - ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on + ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on ** satisfying the 'ORDER BY' clause than it does in other cases. ** Refer to code and comments in where.c for details. */ ExprList *pMinMax = 0; u8 flag = WHERE_ORDERBY_NORMAL; - + assert( p->pGroupBy==0 ); assert( flag==0 ); if( p->pHaving==0 ){ @@ -109410,7 +109410,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( pMinMax->a[0].pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN; } } - + /* This case runs if the aggregate has no GROUP BY clause. The ** processing is much simpler since there is only a single row ** of output. @@ -109434,12 +109434,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select( sSort.pOrderBy = 0; sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); - selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, -1, 0, 0, + selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, -1, 0, 0, pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd); sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pDel); } sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd); - + } /* endif aggregate query */ if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){ @@ -109529,7 +109529,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewSelect(TreeView *pView, const Select *p, u8 m sqlite3XPrintf(&x, 0, " LEFT-JOIN"); } sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&x); - sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, i<p->pSrc->nSrc-1); + sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, i<p->pSrc->nSrc-1); if( pItem->pSelect ){ sqlite3TreeViewSelect(pView, pItem->pSelect, 0); } @@ -109692,7 +109692,7 @@ malloc_failed: ** at the conclusion of the call. ** ** The result that is written to ***pazResult is held in memory obtained -** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly. +** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly. ** Instead, the entire table should be passed to sqlite3_free_table() when ** the calling procedure is finished using it. */ @@ -109811,7 +109811,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTriggerStep(sqlite3 *db, TriggerStep *pTriggerS } /* -** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to +** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to ** the table. The list is connected by Trigger.pNext pointers. ** ** All of the triggers on pTab that are in the same database as pTab @@ -109838,7 +109838,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Trigger *sqlite3TriggerList(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ for(p=sqliteHashFirst(&pTmpSchema->trigHash); p; p=sqliteHashNext(p)){ Trigger *pTrig = (Trigger *)sqliteHashData(p); if( pTrig->pTabSchema==pTab->pSchema - && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName) + && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName) ){ pTrig->pNext = (pList ? pList : pTab->pTrigger); pList = pTrig; @@ -109981,7 +109981,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BeginTrigger( ** of triggers. */ if( pTab->pSelect && tr_tm!=TK_INSTEAD ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S", + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S", (tr_tm == TK_BEFORE)?"BEFORE":"AFTER", pTableName, 0); goto trigger_cleanup; } @@ -110071,8 +110071,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishTrigger( nameToken.z = pTrig->zName; nameToken.n = sqlite3Strlen30(nameToken.z); sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", &nameToken); - if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list) - || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen) + if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list) + || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen) ){ goto triggerfinish_cleanup; } @@ -110126,7 +110126,7 @@ triggerfinish_cleanup: ** a trigger step. Return a pointer to a TriggerStep structure. ** ** The parser calls this routine when it finds a SELECT statement in -** body of a TRIGGER. +** body of a TRIGGER. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerSelectStep(sqlite3 *db, Select *pSelect){ TriggerStep *pTriggerStep = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerStep)); @@ -110241,7 +110241,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerDeleteStep( return pTriggerStep; } -/* +/* ** Recursively delete a Trigger structure */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){ @@ -110255,7 +110255,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){ } /* -** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema. +** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema. ** ** This may be called directly from the parser and therefore identifies ** the trigger by name. The sqlite3DropTriggerPtr() routine does the @@ -110310,7 +110310,7 @@ static Table *tableOfTrigger(Trigger *pTrigger){ /* -** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger. +** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(Parse *pParse, Trigger *pTrigger){ Table *pTable; @@ -110405,12 +110405,12 @@ static int checkColumnOverlap(IdList *pIdList, ExprList *pEList){ for(e=0; e<pEList->nExpr; e++){ if( sqlite3IdListIndex(pIdList, pEList->a[e].zName)>=0 ) return 1; } - return 0; + return 0; } /* ** Return a list of all triggers on table pTab if there exists at least -** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is +** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is ** performed on the table, and, if that operation is an UPDATE, if at ** least one of the columns in pChanges is being modified. */ @@ -110472,13 +110472,13 @@ static SrcList *targetSrcList( } /* -** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single +** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single ** trigger. */ static int codeTriggerProgram( Parse *pParse, /* The parser context */ TriggerStep *pStepList, /* List of statements inside the trigger body */ - int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */ + int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */ ){ TriggerStep *pStep; Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe; @@ -110506,25 +110506,25 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram( switch( pStep->op ){ case TK_UPDATE: { - sqlite3Update(pParse, + sqlite3Update(pParse, targetSrcList(pParse, pStep), - sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0), - sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0), + sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0), + sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0), pParse->eOrconf ); break; } case TK_INSERT: { - sqlite3Insert(pParse, + sqlite3Insert(pParse, targetSrcList(pParse, pStep), - sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0), - sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList), + sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0), + sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList), pParse->eOrconf ); break; } case TK_DELETE: { - sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, + sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, targetSrcList(pParse, pStep), sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0) ); @@ -110538,7 +110538,7 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram( sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect); break; } - } + } if( pStep->op!=TK_SELECT ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_ResetCount); } @@ -110582,7 +110582,7 @@ static void transferParseError(Parse *pTo, Parse *pFrom){ } /* -** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program +** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program ** implementing trigger pTrigger with ON CONFLICT policy orconf. */ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( @@ -110605,7 +110605,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( assert( pTop->pVdbe ); /* Allocate the TriggerPrg and SubProgram objects. To ensure that they - ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg + ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg ** list of the top-level Parse object sooner rather than later. */ pPrg = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerPrg)); if( !pPrg ) return 0; @@ -110619,7 +110619,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( pPrg->aColmask[0] = 0xffffffff; pPrg->aColmask[1] = 0xffffffff; - /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the + /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the ** trigger sub-program. */ pSubParse = sqlite3StackAllocZero(db, sizeof(Parse)); if( !pSubParse ) return 0; @@ -110634,7 +110634,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pSubParse); if( v ){ - VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)", + VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)", pTrigger->zName, onErrorText(orconf), (pTrigger->tr_tm==TRIGGER_BEFORE ? "BEFORE" : "AFTER"), (pTrigger->op==TK_UPDATE ? "UPDATE" : ""), @@ -110643,18 +110643,18 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( pTab->zName )); #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE - sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, + sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, sqlite3MPrintf(db, "-- TRIGGER %s", pTrigger->zName), P4_DYNAMIC ); #endif /* If one was specified, code the WHEN clause. If it evaluates to false - ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the + ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the ** OP_Halt inserted at the end of the program. */ if( pTrigger->pWhen ){ pWhen = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTrigger->pWhen, 0); - if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen) - && db->mallocFailed==0 + if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen) + && db->mallocFailed==0 ){ iEndTrigger = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pSubParse, pWhen, iEndTrigger, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL); @@ -110692,7 +110692,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger( return pPrg; } - + /* ** Return a pointer to a TriggerPrg object containing the sub-program for ** trigger pTrigger with default ON CONFLICT algorithm orconf. If no such @@ -110714,8 +110714,8 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger( ** process of being coded). If this is the case, then an entry with ** a matching TriggerPrg.pTrigger field will be present somewhere ** in the Parse.pTriggerPrg list. Search for such an entry. */ - for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg; - pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf); + for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg; + pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf); pPrg=pPrg->pNext ); @@ -110728,7 +110728,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger( } /* -** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on +** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on ** table pTab. The reg, orconf and ignoreJump parameters passed to this ** function are the same as those described in the header function for ** sqlite3CodeRowTrigger() @@ -110746,7 +110746,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect( pPrg = getRowTrigger(pParse, p, pTab, orconf); assert( pPrg || pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); - /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program + /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program ** is a pointer to the sub-vdbe containing the trigger program. */ if( pPrg ){ int bRecursive = (p->zName && 0==(pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_RecTriggers)); @@ -110775,7 +110775,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect( ** If there are no triggers that fire at the specified time for the specified ** operation on pTab, this function is a no-op. ** -** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers +** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers ** that contain the values substituted for the new.* and old.* references ** in the trigger program. If N is the number of columns in table pTab ** (a copy of pTab->nCol), then registers are populated as follows: @@ -110792,12 +110792,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect( ** reg+N+N+1 NEW.* value of right-most column of pTab ** ** For ON DELETE triggers, the registers containing the NEW.* values will -** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or -** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway). +** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or +** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway). ** Similarly, for ON INSERT triggers the values stored in the OLD.* registers ** are never accessed, and so are not allocated by the caller. So, for an ** ON INSERT trigger, the value passed to this function as parameter reg -** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through +** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through ** (reg+N+N+1) are. ** ** Parameter orconf is the default conflict resolution algorithm for the @@ -110829,12 +110829,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger( ** or else it must be a TEMP trigger. */ assert( p->pSchema!=0 ); assert( p->pTabSchema!=0 ); - assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema + assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema || p->pSchema==pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema ); /* Determine whether we should code this trigger */ - if( p->op==op - && p->tr_tm==tr_tm + if( p->op==op + && p->tr_tm==tr_tm && checkColumnOverlap(p->pColumns, pChanges) ){ sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(pParse, p, pTab, reg, orconf, ignoreJump); @@ -110843,9 +110843,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger( } /* -** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table. -** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the -** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information +** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table. +** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the +** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information ** may be used by the caller, for example, to avoid having to load the entire ** old.* record into memory when executing an UPDATE or DELETE command. ** @@ -110855,7 +110855,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger( ** are more than 32 columns in the table, and at least one of the columns ** with an index greater than 32 may be accessed, 0xffffffff is returned. ** -** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is +** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is ** accessed by triggers. The caller must always assume that it is. ** ** Parameter isNew must be either 1 or 0. If it is 0, then the mask returned @@ -110931,10 +110931,10 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( /* ** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the -** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the +** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the ** OP_Column to the default value, if any. ** -** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the +** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the ** column definition. This was either supplied by the user when the table ** was created, or added later to the table definition by an ALTER TABLE ** command. If the latter, then the row-records in the table btree on disk @@ -110943,9 +110943,9 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( ** If the former, then all row-records are guaranteed to include a value ** for the column and the P4 value is not required. ** -** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have +** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have ** literal default values specified: a number, null or a string. (If a more -** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated +** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated ** when the ALTER TABLE is executed and one of the literal values written ** into the sqlite_master table.) ** @@ -110955,8 +110955,8 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( ** sqlite3_value objects. ** ** If parameter iReg is not negative, code an OP_RealAffinity instruction -** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is -** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save +** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is +** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save ** space. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){ @@ -110967,7 +110967,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){ Column *pCol = &pTab->aCol[i]; VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zName)); assert( i<pTab->nCol ); - sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc, + sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc, pCol->affinity, &pValue); if( pValue ){ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, (const char *)pValue, P4_MEM); @@ -111049,7 +111049,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( } assert( pTabList->nSrc==1 ); - /* Locate the table which we want to update. + /* Locate the table which we want to update. */ pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTabList); if( pTab==0 ) goto update_cleanup; @@ -111095,7 +111095,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( pParse->nTab++; } - /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[]. + /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[]. ** Initialize aXRef[] and aToOpen[] to their default values. */ aXRef = sqlite3DbMallocRaw(db, sizeof(int) * (pTab->nCol+nIdx) + nIdx+2 ); @@ -111173,7 +111173,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( /* There is one entry in the aRegIdx[] array for each index on the table ** being updated. Fill in aRegIdx[] with a register number that will hold - ** the key for accessing each index. + ** the key for accessing each index. */ for(j=0, pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext, j++){ int reg; @@ -111252,14 +111252,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( ); if( pWInfo==0 ) goto update_cleanup; okOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass); - + /* Remember the rowid of every item to be updated. */ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rowid, iDataCur, regOldRowid); if( !okOnePass ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, regRowSet, regOldRowid); } - + /* End the database scan loop. */ sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo); @@ -111277,7 +111277,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, iPk); addrOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEph, nPk); sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk); - pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, 0, 0, + pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, 0, 0, WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED, iIdxCur); if( pWInfo==0 ) goto update_cleanup; okOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass); @@ -111306,9 +111306,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( labelBreak = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v); if( !isView ){ - /* + /* ** Open every index that needs updating. Note that if any - ** index could potentially invoke a REPLACE conflict resolution + ** index could potentially invoke a REPLACE conflict resolution ** action, then we need to open all indices because we might need ** to be deleting some records. */ @@ -111369,7 +111369,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( ** information is needed */ if( chngPk || hasFK || pTrigger ){ u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0); - oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse, + oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse, pTrigger, pChanges, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onError ); for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ @@ -111396,8 +111396,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( ** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the ** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by ** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The - ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from - ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger + ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from + ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger ** may have modified them). So not loading those that are not going to ** be used eliminates some redundant opcodes. */ @@ -111413,7 +111413,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( if( j>=0 ){ sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, regNew+i); }else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask & MASKBIT32(i)) ){ - /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed + /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed ** into a register. This is done if there are no BEFORE triggers, or ** if there are one or more BEFORE triggers that use this value via ** a new.* reference in a trigger program. @@ -111432,11 +111432,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( */ if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){ sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regNew); - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue); /* The row-trigger may have deleted the row being updated. In this - ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are + ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are ** required. This behavior - what happens when the row being updated ** is deleted or renamed by a BEFORE trigger - is left undefined in the ** documentation. @@ -111449,9 +111449,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( VdbeCoverage(v); } - /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified - ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for - ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their + /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified + ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for + ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their ** registers in case this has happened. */ for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){ @@ -111485,7 +111485,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( VdbeCoverageNeverTaken(v); } sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, aRegIdx); - + /* If changing the record number, delete the old record. */ if( hasFK || chngKey || pPk!=0 ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iDataCur, 0); @@ -111497,26 +111497,26 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( if( hasFK ){ sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid, aXRef, chngKey); } - + /* Insert the new index entries and the new record. */ sqlite3CompleteInsertion(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx, 1, 0, 0); /* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to ** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key - ** to the row just updated. */ + ** to the row just updated. */ if( hasFK ){ sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, pChanges, regOldRowid, aXRef, chngKey); } } - /* Increment the row counter + /* Increment the row counter */ if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows) && !pParse->pTriggerTab){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1); } - sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, + sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue); /* Repeat the above with the next record to be updated, until @@ -111550,7 +111550,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update( } /* - ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is + ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is ** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not ** invoke the callback function. */ @@ -111621,7 +111621,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( SelectDest dest; /* Construct the SELECT statement that will find the new values for - ** all updated rows. + ** all updated rows. */ pEList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3Expr(db, TK_ID, "_rowid_")); if( pRowid ){ @@ -111638,7 +111638,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( pEList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, pEList, pExpr); } pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSrc, pWhere, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0); - + /* Create the ephemeral table into which the update results will ** be stored. */ @@ -111647,7 +111647,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, ephemTab, pTab->nCol+1+(pRowid!=0)); sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, BTREE_UNORDERED); - /* fill the ephemeral table + /* fill the ephemeral table */ sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_Table, ephemTab); sqlite3Select(pParse, pSelect, &dest); @@ -111670,7 +111670,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable( sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, ephemTab, 0); /* Cleanup */ - sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect); + sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect); } #endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */ @@ -111812,7 +111812,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunVacuum(char **pzErrMsg, sqlite3 *db){ return SQLITE_ERROR; } - /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be + /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be ** restored before returning. Then set the writable-schema flag, and ** disable CHECK and foreign key constraints. */ saved_flags = db->flags; @@ -111964,7 +111964,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunVacuum(char **pzErrMsg, sqlite3 *db){ ); if( rc ) goto end_of_vacuum; - /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the + /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the ** vacuum database and the main database. Assuming no error occurs, ** both transactions are closed by this block - the main database ** transaction by sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() and the other by an explicit @@ -112036,7 +112036,7 @@ end_of_vacuum: } /* This both clears the schemas and reduces the size of the db->aDb[] - ** array. */ + ** array. */ sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db); return rc; @@ -112064,7 +112064,7 @@ end_of_vacuum: /* ** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the ** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of -** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of +** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of ** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which ** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods. */ @@ -112147,7 +112147,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_module_v2( /* ** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected. ** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock. -** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur. +** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur. ** ** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked, ** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed. @@ -112159,7 +112159,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabLock(VTable *pVTab){ /* ** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table. -** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access +** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access ** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){ @@ -112193,7 +112193,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlock(VTable *pVTab){ /* ** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the ** p->pVTable list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated -** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity. +** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity. ** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with ** connection db is left in the p->pVTable list. */ @@ -112202,8 +112202,8 @@ static VTable *vtabDisconnectAll(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ VTable *pVTable = p->pVTable; p->pVTable = 0; - /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database - ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments + /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database + ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments ** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why ** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any ** database connection that may have an entry in the p->pVTable list. @@ -112259,7 +112259,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ ** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. ** ** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all -** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the +** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the ** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The ** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows: ** @@ -112272,7 +112272,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ ** or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then ** the database handle mutex is held. ** -** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously +** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously ** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -112298,12 +112298,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){ ** record. ** ** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer -** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable +** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable ** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema. -** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database -** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the +** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database +** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the ** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures -** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated +** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated ** database connection. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){ @@ -112382,7 +112382,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabBeginParse( ** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now. */ if( pTable->azModuleArg ){ - sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName, + sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName, pTable->azModuleArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zName); } #endif @@ -112414,7 +112414,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){ addArgumentToVtab(pParse); pParse->sArg.z = 0; if( pTab->nModuleArg<1 ) return; - + /* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the ** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being ** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_master) then @@ -112433,9 +112433,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){ } zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken); - /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the + /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the ** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all - ** the information we've collected. + ** the information we've collected. ** ** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an ** entry in the sqlite_master table tht was created for this vtab @@ -112459,7 +112459,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Expire, 0, 0); zWhere = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "name='%q' AND type='table'", pTab->zName); sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, iDb, zWhere); - sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VCreate, iDb, 0, 0, + sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VCreate, iDb, 0, 0, pTab->zName, sqlite3Strlen30(pTab->zName) + 1); } @@ -112514,7 +112514,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabArgExtend(Parse *pParse, Token *p){ ** to this procedure. */ static int vtabCallConstructor( - sqlite3 *db, + sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab, Module *pMod, int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**), @@ -112577,7 +112577,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor( }else{ int iCol; /* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure - ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the + ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the ** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden". ** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from ** the type string. */ @@ -112622,7 +112622,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor( /* ** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method -** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned +** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned ** and an error left in pParse. ** ** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table. @@ -112691,7 +112691,7 @@ static void addToVTrans(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ /* ** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method -** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb. +** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb. ** ** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point an an English language ** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned. @@ -112710,8 +112710,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallCreate(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab, zMod = pTab->azModuleArg[0]; pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod); - /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method, - ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an + /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method, + ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an ** error. Otherwise, do nothing. */ if( !pMod ){ @@ -112760,8 +112760,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){ pParse->declareVtab = 1; pParse->db = db; pParse->nQueryLoop = 1; - - if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr) + + if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr) && pParse->pNewTable && !db->mallocFailed && !pParse->pNewTable->pSelect @@ -112780,7 +112780,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } pParse->declareVtab = 0; - + if( pParse->pVdbe ){ sqlite3VdbeFinalize(pParse->pVdbe); } @@ -112831,7 +112831,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab ** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is ** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure. ** -** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks. +** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks. */ static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){ int i; @@ -112879,7 +112879,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSync(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){ } /* -** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the +** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -112888,7 +112888,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){ } /* -** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the +** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the ** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -112910,7 +112910,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ /* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater ** than zero, then this function is being called from within a - ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to + ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to ** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED. */ if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){ @@ -112918,7 +112918,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ } if( !pVTab ){ return SQLITE_OK; - } + } pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule; if( pModule->xBegin ){ @@ -112931,7 +112931,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ } } - /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the + /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the ** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */ rc = growVTrans(db); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -112950,11 +112950,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){ ** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked. ** ** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is -** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is +** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is ** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with ** an open transaction is invoked. ** -** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK, +** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK, ** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this ** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful, ** SQLITE_OK is returned. @@ -113001,7 +113001,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSavepoint(sqlite3 *db, int op, int iSavepoint){ ** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to ** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators. ** -** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a +** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a ** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the ** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag. */ @@ -113033,9 +113033,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction( assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 ); pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule; if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef; - + /* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation - ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function + ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function */ zLowerName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pDef->zName); if( zLowerName ){ @@ -113098,8 +113098,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabMakeWritable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){ ** within an xUpdate method. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){ - static const unsigned char aMap[] = { - SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE + static const unsigned char aMap[] = { + SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE }; assert( OE_Rollback==1 && OE_Abort==2 && OE_Fail==3 ); assert( OE_Ignore==4 && OE_Replace==5 ); @@ -113108,7 +113108,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){ } /* -** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide +** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide ** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior ** of the virtual table being implemented. */ @@ -113305,7 +113305,7 @@ struct WhereLoop { /* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a ** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause. -** See WhereOrSet for additional information +** See WhereOrSet for additional information */ struct WhereOrCost { Bitmask prereq; /* Prerequisites */ @@ -113361,7 +113361,7 @@ struct WherePath { ** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators, ** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR. ** -** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure. +** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure. ** The following identity holds: ** ** WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm @@ -113503,8 +113503,8 @@ struct WhereAndInfo { ** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping ** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm. ** -** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in -** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE +** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in +** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE ** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might ** contain gaps in the numbering sequence. But we want to make maximum ** use of the bits in our bitmasks. This structure provides a mapping @@ -113983,7 +113983,7 @@ static int allowedOp(int op){ ** collating sequence, then COLLATE operators are adjusted to ensure ** that the collating sequence does not change. For example: ** "Y collate NOCASE op X" becomes "X op Y" because any collation sequence on -** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence +** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence ** attached to the right. For the same reason the EP_Collate flag ** is not commuted. */ @@ -114218,7 +114218,7 @@ static WhereTerm *findTerm( static void exprAnalyze(SrcList*, WhereClause*, int); /* -** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause. +** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause. */ static void exprAnalyzeAll( SrcList *pTabList, /* the FROM clause */ @@ -114237,7 +114237,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeAll( ** so and false if not. ** ** In order for the operator to be optimizible, the RHS must be a string -** literal that does not begin with a wildcard. +** literal that does not begin with a wildcard. */ static int isLikeOrGlob( Parse *pParse, /* Parsing and code generating context */ @@ -114264,8 +114264,8 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob( #endif pList = pExpr->x.pList; pLeft = pList->a[1].pExpr; - if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN - || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT + if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN + || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT || IsVirtual(pLeft->pTab) ){ /* IMP: R-02065-49465 The left-hand side of the LIKE or GLOB operator must @@ -114308,7 +114308,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob( ** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program. ** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name() ** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here. - */ + */ int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse); sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1); sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0); @@ -114413,10 +114413,10 @@ static void transferJoinMarkings(Expr *pDerived, Expr *pBase){ ** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T ** ** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form -** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and +** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and ** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN". ** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more -** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND +** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND ** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have ** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object. ** @@ -114586,7 +114586,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm( if( (chngToIN & getMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){ /* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the ** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceded - ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term + ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term ** and use its inversion. */ testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED ); testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); @@ -114634,7 +114634,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm( } /* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies - ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is + ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is ** pTerm converted into an IN operator. */ if( okToChngToIN ){ @@ -114818,7 +114818,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze( for(i=0; i<2; i++){ Expr *pNewExpr; int idxNew; - pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i], + pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i], sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0), sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0), 0); transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr); @@ -114854,7 +114854,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze( ** The last character of the prefix "abc" is incremented to form the ** termination condition "abd". */ - if( pWC->op==TK_AND + if( pWC->op==TK_AND && isLikeOrGlob(pParse, pExpr, &pStr1, &isComplete, &noCase) ){ Expr *pLeft; /* LHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */ @@ -114874,7 +114874,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze( if( noCase ){ /* The point is to increment the last character before the first ** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the - ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the + ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the ** inequality. To avoid this, make sure to also run the full ** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag */ @@ -114886,7 +114886,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze( sCollSeqName.z = noCase ? "NOCASE" : "BINARY"; sCollSeqName.n = 6; pNewExpr1 = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pLeft, 0); - pNewExpr1 = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_GE, + pNewExpr1 = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_GE, sqlite3ExprAddCollateToken(pParse,pNewExpr1,&sCollSeqName), pStr1, 0); transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr1, pExpr); @@ -114929,7 +114929,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze( prereqColumn = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft); if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){ Expr *pNewExpr; - pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH, + pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH, 0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0), 0); idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC); testcase( idxNew==0 ); @@ -115043,17 +115043,17 @@ static int isDistinctRedundant( ){ Table *pTab; Index *pIdx; - int i; + int i; int iBase; /* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of - ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT + ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT ** clause is redundant. */ if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0; iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor; pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab; - /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return + /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return ** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the ** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query. */ @@ -115323,7 +115323,7 @@ static void constructAutomaticIndex( sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_AUTOINDEX); sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop); sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord); - + /* Jump here when skipping the initialization */ sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit); } @@ -115331,7 +115331,7 @@ static void constructAutomaticIndex( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE /* -** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the +** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the ** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure ** by passing the pointer returned by this function to sqlite3_free(). */ @@ -115363,7 +115363,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo( nTerm++; } - /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current + /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current ** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of ** the sqlite3_index_info structure. */ @@ -115476,7 +115476,7 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){ for(i=0; i<p->nConstraint; i++){ if( !p->aConstraint[i].usable && p->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex>0 ){ - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s: xBestIndex returned an invalid plan", pTab->zName); } } @@ -115539,7 +115539,7 @@ static void whereKeyStats( }else{ /* Otherwise, pRec must be smaller than sample $i and larger than ** sample ($i-1). */ - assert( i==pIdx->nSample + assert( i==pIdx->nSample || sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0 || pParse->db->mallocFailed ); assert( i==0 @@ -115583,7 +115583,7 @@ static void whereKeyStats( /* ** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower -** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated +** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated ** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number ** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account. ** @@ -115605,18 +115605,18 @@ static LogEst whereRangeAdjust(WhereTerm *pTerm, LogEst nNew){ } #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 -/* +/* ** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a ** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example: ** ** CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c); ** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?; ** -** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows -** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate +** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows +** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate ** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based -** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple -** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with +** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple +** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with ** by the caller. ** ** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values @@ -115637,7 +115637,7 @@ static LogEst whereRangeAdjust(WhereTerm *pTerm, LogEst nNew){ ** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone ** is left as is. ** -** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise, +** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise, ** SQLITE_OK. */ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( @@ -115656,7 +115656,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( int iCol = p->aiColumn[nEq]; u8 aff = iCol>=0 ? p->pTable->aCol[iCol].affinity : SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER; CollSeq *pColl; - + sqlite3_value *p1 = 0; /* Value extracted from pLower */ sqlite3_value *p2 = 0; /* Value extracted from pUpper */ sqlite3_value *pVal = 0; /* Value extracted from record */ @@ -115688,7 +115688,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( nDiff = (nUpper - nLower); if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1; - /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the + /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the ** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback ** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating ** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows @@ -115735,7 +115735,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( ** ** ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ... ** -** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second +** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second ** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is: ** ** ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ... @@ -115743,13 +115743,13 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst( ** then nEq is set to 0. ** ** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the -** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without -** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, this is the number of +** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without +** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, this is the number of ** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced) ** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper. -** +** ** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be -** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4. +** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4. ** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduces the expected number of ** rows visited by a factor of 64. */ @@ -115770,14 +115770,14 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst( if( p->nSample>0 && nEq<p->nSampleCol - && OptimizationEnabled(pParse->db, SQLITE_Stat3) + && OptimizationEnabled(pParse->db, SQLITE_Stat3) ){ if( nEq==pBuilder->nRecValid ){ UnpackedRecord *pRec = pBuilder->pRec; tRowcnt a[2]; u8 aff; - /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in + /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in ** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The ** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the ** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most @@ -115786,7 +115786,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst( ** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it ** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the ** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even - ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and + ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and ** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values used. ** ** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows @@ -115811,7 +115811,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst( iLower = 0; iUpper = sqlite3LogEstToInt(p->aiRowLogEst[0]); }else{ - /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must + /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must ** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst(). */ whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a); iLower = a[0]; @@ -115888,7 +115888,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst( ** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended ** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the ** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to - ** match 1/64 of the index. */ + ** match 1/64 of the index. */ if( pLower && pUpper ) nNew -= 20; nOut -= (pLower!=0) + (pUpper!=0); @@ -115913,7 +115913,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst( ** for that index. When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is ** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE". ** -** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. +** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return ** non-zero. ** @@ -115965,7 +115965,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst( whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a); WHERETRACE(0x10,("equality scan regions: %d\n", (int)a[1])); *pnRow = a[1]; - + return rc; } #endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 */ @@ -115978,7 +115978,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst( ** ** WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4) ** -** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. +** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK. ** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return ** non-zero. ** @@ -116060,7 +116060,7 @@ static void disableTerm(WhereLevel *pLevel, WhereTerm *pTerm){ /* ** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff -** to the n registers starting at base. +** to the n registers starting at base. ** ** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_NONE entries (which are no-ops) at the ** beginning and end of zAff are ignored. If all entries in zAff are @@ -116100,7 +116100,7 @@ static void codeApplyAffinity(Parse *pParse, int base, int n, char *zAff){ /* ** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality -** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be +** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be ** coded. ** ** The current value for the constraint is left in register iReg. @@ -116189,7 +116189,7 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm( ** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c). ** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10 ** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this -** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two +** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two ** constraints are coded. This routine will generate code to evaluate ** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3). The current values for a and b will be stored ** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned. @@ -116281,7 +116281,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms( assert( pIdx->aiColumn[j]>=0 ); VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->pTable->aCol[pIdx->aiColumn[j]].zName)); } - } + } /* Evaluate the equality constraints */ @@ -116290,7 +116290,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms( int r1; pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j]; assert( pTerm!=0 ); - /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns. + /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns. ** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */ testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 ); testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); @@ -116347,7 +116347,7 @@ static void explainAppendTerm( } /* -** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This +** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This ** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table ** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression. ** @@ -116395,7 +116395,7 @@ static void explainIndexRange(StrAccum *pStr, WhereLoop *pLoop, Table *pTab){ /* ** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN ** command. If the query being compiled is an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN, a single -** record is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in +** record is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in ** pLevel. */ static void explainOneScan( @@ -116538,7 +116538,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( iCur = pTabItem->iCursor; pLevel->notReady = notReady & ~getMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, iCur); bRev = (pWInfo->revMask>>iLevel)&1; - omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 + omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0 && (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_FORCE_TABLE)==0; VdbeModuleComment((v, "Begin WHERE-loop%d: %s",iLevel,pTabItem->pTab->zName)); @@ -116668,7 +116668,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( Expr *pX; /* The expression that defines the start bound */ int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */ - /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding + /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding ** seek opcodes. It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx */ const u8 aMoveOp[] = { @@ -116736,14 +116736,14 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( }else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){ /* Case 4: A scan using an index. ** - ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality + ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality ** terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N ** left-most columns of the index. It may also contain ** inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed - ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only + ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only ** the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must - ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the - ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all + ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the + ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all ** optimized: ** ** x=5 @@ -116764,7 +116764,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( ** This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause ** constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order ** to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY. - */ + */ static const u8 aStartOp[] = { 0, 0, @@ -116802,8 +116802,8 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur; assert( nEq>=pLoop->u.btree.nSkip ); - /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that - ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..." + /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that + ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..." ** query, then the caller will only allow the loop to run for ** a single iteration. This means that the first row returned ** should not have a NULL value stored in 'x'. If column 'x' is @@ -116822,8 +116822,8 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( nExtraReg = 1; } - /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end - ** of the range. + /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end + ** of the range. */ j = nEq; if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){ @@ -116834,7 +116834,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( pRangeEnd = pLoop->aLTerm[j++]; nExtraReg = 1; if( pRangeStart==0 - && (j = pIdx->aiColumn[nEq])>=0 + && (j = pIdx->aiColumn[nEq])>=0 && pIdx->pTable->aCol[j].notNull==0 ){ bSeekPastNull = 1; @@ -116852,7 +116852,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( addrNxt = pLevel->addrNxt; /* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or - ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the + ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the ** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd). */ if( (nEq<pIdx->nKeyCol && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC)) @@ -116884,14 +116884,14 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( if( zStartAff ){ if( sqlite3CompareAffinity(pRight, zStartAff[nEq])==SQLITE_AFF_NONE){ /* Since the comparison is to be performed with no conversions - ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to + ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to ** SQLITE_AFF_NONE. */ zStartAff[nEq] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE; } if( sqlite3ExprNeedsNoAffinityChange(pRight, zStartAff[nEq]) ){ zStartAff[nEq] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE; } - } + } nConstraint++; testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL ); }else if( bSeekPastNull ){ @@ -116974,7 +116974,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( iRowidReg, pPk->nKeyCol); VdbeCoverage(v); } - /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. Disable + /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. Disable ** WHERE clause terms made redundant by the index range scan. */ if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW ){ @@ -117053,7 +117053,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( u16 wctrlFlags; /* Flags for sub-WHERE clause */ Expr *pAndExpr = 0; /* An ".. AND (...)" expression */ Table *pTab = pTabItem->pTab; - + pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[0]; assert( pTerm!=0 ); assert( pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR ); @@ -117084,15 +117084,15 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList; } - /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is + /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is ** equivalent to an empty rowset. Or, create an ephemeral index ** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID. ** - ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction + ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction ** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This ** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps - ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the - ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to + ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the + ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to ** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if ** called on an uninitialized cursor. */ @@ -117117,7 +117117,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( ** ** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is ** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the - ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as + ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as ** indices. ** ** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term @@ -117201,9 +117201,9 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( ** ** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet ** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in - ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no - ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never - ** be tested for. */ + ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no + ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never + ** be tested for. */ if( iSet ){ j1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk); VdbeCoverage(v); @@ -117241,8 +117241,8 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( ** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that ** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term ** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous - ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set - ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will + ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set + ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will ** be available. */ pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop; @@ -117356,7 +117356,7 @@ static Bitmask codeOneLoopStart( } /* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that - ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table. + ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table. */ if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){ pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v); @@ -117559,7 +117559,7 @@ static void whereInfoFree(sqlite3 *db, WhereInfo *pWInfo){ ** by Y. ** ** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought -** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost +** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost ** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted. */ static int whereLoopCheaperProperSubset( @@ -117614,7 +117614,7 @@ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){ if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue; if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 ) continue; if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){ - /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its + /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its ** subset p */ pTemplate->rRun = p->rRun; pTemplate->nOut = p->nOut - 1; @@ -117655,7 +117655,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser( /* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero ** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN ** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */ - assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0 + assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0 || p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup ); /* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index @@ -117719,7 +117719,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser( ** ** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we ** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the -** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following +** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following ** conditions are met: ** ** (1) They have the same iTab. @@ -117765,7 +117765,7 @@ static int whereLoopInsert(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereLoop *pTemplate){ whereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC); } #endif - return SQLITE_OK; + return SQLITE_OK; }else{ p = *ppPrev; } @@ -117861,7 +117861,7 @@ static void whereLoopOutputAdjust( } /* TUNING: If there is at least one equality constraint in the WHERE ** clause that does not have a likelihood() explicitly assigned to it - ** then do not let the estimated number of output rows exceed half + ** then do not let the estimated number of output rows exceed half ** the number of rows in the table. */ if( nEq && pLoop->nOut>nRow-10 ){ pLoop->nOut = nRow - 10; @@ -117879,12 +117879,12 @@ static void whereLoopOutputAdjust( #endif /* -** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the +** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the ** index pIndex. Try to match one more. ** -** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the -** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq -** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this +** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the +** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq +** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this ** function returns. ** ** If pProbe->tnum==0, that means pIndex is a fake index used for the @@ -117946,12 +117946,12 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( /* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints ** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average - ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18. + ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18. ** ** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows ** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index ** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of - ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower. + ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower. ** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly ** more expensive. */ assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) ); @@ -118004,9 +118004,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf; assert( nInMul==0 - || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0 - || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0 - || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 + || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0 + || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0 + || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0 ); if( eOp & WO_IN ){ @@ -118051,7 +118051,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( /* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to ** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the - ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all + ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all ** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates ** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul). */ assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut ); @@ -118072,10 +118072,10 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( }else{ #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 tRowcnt nOut = 0; - if( nInMul==0 - && pProbe->nSample + if( nInMul==0 + && pProbe->nSample && pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol - && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_Stat3) + && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_Stat3) && ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_xIsSelect)) ){ Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr; @@ -118099,8 +118099,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex( { pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]); if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){ - /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a - ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows + /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a + ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows ** as (col=?). */ pNew->nOut += 10; } @@ -118225,18 +118225,18 @@ static int whereUsablePartialIndex(int iTab, WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pWhere){ ** cost = nRow * K // scan of covering index ** cost = nRow * (K+3.0) // scan of non-covering index ** -** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative +** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative ** estimated average size of the index and table records. ** ** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited -** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on +** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on ** the index b-tree: ** ** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit) // covering index ** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit) // non-covering index ** -** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the -** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when +** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the +** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when ** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans. ** ** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount @@ -118266,7 +118266,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree( LogEst rLogSize; /* Logarithm of the number of rows in the table */ WhereClause *pWC; /* The parsed WHERE clause */ Table *pTab; /* Table being queried */ - + pNew = pBuilder->pNew; pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList; @@ -118602,7 +118602,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual( pNew->u.vtab.needFree = 0; } } - } + } whereLoopAddVtab_exit: if( pIdxInfo->needToFreeIdxStr ) sqlite3_free(pIdxInfo->idxStr); @@ -118626,7 +118626,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mExtra){ WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild; WhereOrSet sSum, sCur; struct SrcList_item *pItem; - + pWC = pBuilder->pWC; pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm; pNew = pBuilder->pNew; @@ -118636,14 +118636,14 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mExtra){ for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd && rc==SQLITE_OK; pTerm++){ if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 - && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0 + && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0 ){ WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc; WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm]; WhereTerm *pOrTerm; int once = 1; int i, j; - + sSubBuild = *pBuilder; sSubBuild.pOrderBy = 0; sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur; @@ -118664,7 +118664,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mExtra){ } sCur.n = 0; #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED - WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n", + WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n", (int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm)); if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x400 ){ for(i=0; i<sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm; i++){ @@ -118713,8 +118713,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mExtra){ /* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs ** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding ** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its - ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty - ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that + ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty + ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that ** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the ** following where there is an index on "y": ** @@ -118734,7 +118734,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, Bitmask mExtra){ } /* -** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables +** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables */ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; @@ -118778,17 +118778,17 @@ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ ** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 5th ** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY ** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation. Return N: -** +** ** N>0: N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied ** N==0: No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied -** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied. +** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied. ** ** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as ** strict. With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that ** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another. GROUP BY ** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long ** as equivalent rows are grouped together. Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT -** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the +** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the ** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order. */ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy( @@ -118837,7 +118837,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy( ** row of the WhereLoop. Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically ** order-distinct. A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause ** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being - ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that + ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that ** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct. ** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL. ** @@ -118923,7 +118923,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy( testcase( isOrderDistinct ); isOrderDistinct = 0; } - continue; + continue; } /* Get the column number in the table (iColumn) and sort order @@ -118950,7 +118950,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy( } /* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column - ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off + ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off */ bOnce = 1; isMatch = 0; @@ -119073,7 +119073,7 @@ static const char *wherePathName(WherePath *pPath, int nLoop, WhereLoop *pLast){ #endif /* -** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have +** Return the cost of sorting nRow rows, assuming that the keys have ** nOrderby columns and that the first nSorted columns are already in ** order. */ @@ -119083,13 +119083,13 @@ static LogEst whereSortingCost( int nOrderBy, int nSorted ){ - /* TUNING: Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is + /* TUNING: Estimated cost of a full external sort, where N is ** the number of rows to sort is: ** ** cost = (3.0 * N * log(N)). - ** - ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y - ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the + ** + ** Or, if the order-by clause has X terms but only the last Y + ** terms are out of order, then block-sorting will reduce the ** sorting cost to: ** ** cost = (3.0 * N * log(N)) * (Y/X) @@ -119102,7 +119102,7 @@ static LogEst whereSortingCost( rSortCost = nRow + estLog(nRow) + rScale + 16; /* TUNING: The cost of implementing DISTINCT using a B-TREE is - ** similar but with a larger constant of proportionality. + ** similar but with a larger constant of proportionality. ** Multiply by an additional factor of 3.0. */ if( pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_WANT_DISTINCT ){ rSortCost += 16; @@ -119183,7 +119183,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ ** space for the aSortCost[] array. Each element of the aSortCost array ** is either zero - meaning it has not yet been initialized - or the ** cost of sorting nRowEst rows of data where the first X terms of - ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array + ** the ORDER BY clause are already in order, where X is the array ** index. */ aSortCost = (LogEst*)pX; memset(aSortCost, 0, sizeof(LogEst) * nOrderBy); @@ -119204,7 +119204,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ ** in this case the query may return a maximum of one row, the results ** are already in the requested order. Set isOrdered to nOrderBy to ** indicate this. Or, if nLoop is greater than zero, set isOrdered to - ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered, + ** -1, indicating that the result set may or may not be ordered, ** depending on the loops added to the current plan. */ aFrom[0].isOrdered = nLoop>0 ? -1 : nOrderBy; } @@ -119225,7 +119225,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ if( (pWLoop->prereq & ~pFrom->maskLoop)!=0 ) continue; if( (pWLoop->maskSelf & pFrom->maskLoop)!=0 ) continue; - /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop. + /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop. ** Compute its cost */ rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow); rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted); @@ -119248,7 +119248,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ WHERETRACE(0x002, ("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n", - aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy, + aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy, rUnsorted, rCost)); }else{ rCost = rUnsorted; @@ -119357,8 +119357,8 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ mxCost = aTo[0].rCost; mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow; for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jj<mxChoice; jj++, pTo++){ - if( pTo->rCost>mxCost - || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted) + if( pTo->rCost>mxCost + || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted) ){ mxCost = pTo->rCost; mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted; @@ -119397,7 +119397,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ sqlite3DbFree(db, pSpace); return SQLITE_ERROR; } - + /* Find the lowest cost path. pFrom will be left pointing to that path */ pFrom = aFrom; for(ii=1; ii<nFrom; ii++){ @@ -119437,7 +119437,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ && pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr ){ Bitmask revMask = 0; - int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, + int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy, pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask ); assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 ); @@ -119464,7 +119464,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){ ** times for the common case. ** ** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this -** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the +** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the ** general-purpose query planner. */ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ @@ -119477,7 +119477,7 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ int j; Table *pTab; Index *pIdx; - + pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo; if( pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_FORCE_TABLE ) return 0; assert( pWInfo->pTabList->nSrc>=1 ); @@ -119503,8 +119503,8 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm ); assert( ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)==4 ); if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) - || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0 - || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace) + || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0 + || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace) ) continue; for(j=0; j<pIdx->nKeyCol; j++){ pTerm = findTerm(pWC, iCur, pIdx->aiColumn[j], 0, WO_EQ, pIdx); @@ -119622,7 +119622,7 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){ ** if there is one. If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine ** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL. ** -** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If +** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If ** WHERE_ONETABLE_ONLY is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index ** to use for OR clause processing. The WHERE clause should use this ** specific cursor. If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is @@ -119669,7 +119669,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( } /* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of - ** bits in a Bitmask + ** bits in a Bitmask */ testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS ); if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){ @@ -119677,7 +119677,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( return 0; } - /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in + /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in ** pTabList. But if the WHERE_ONETABLE_ONLY flag is set, then we should ** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that ** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized. @@ -119723,7 +119723,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( initMaskSet(pMaskSet); whereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo); whereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND); - + /* Special case: a WHERE clause that is constant. Evaluate the ** expression and either jump over all of the code or fall thru. */ @@ -119810,7 +119810,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( if( nTabList!=1 || whereShortCut(&sWLB)==0 ){ rc = whereLoopAddAll(&sWLB); if( rc ) goto whereBeginError; - + /* Display all of the WhereLoop objects if wheretrace is enabled */ #ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED /* !=0 */ if( sqlite3WhereTrace ){ @@ -119824,7 +119824,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( } } #endif - + wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0); if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError; if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){ @@ -119905,7 +119905,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( ** the statement to update a single row. */ assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)==0 || pWInfo->nLevel==1 ); - if( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0 + if( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0 && (pWInfo->a[0].pWLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)!=0 ){ pWInfo->okOnePass = 1; if( HasRowid(pTabList->a[0].pTab) ){ @@ -119953,7 +119953,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin( Bitmask b = pTabItem->colUsed; int n = 0; for(; b; b=b>>1, n++){} - sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, + sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, SQLITE_INT_TO_PTR(n), P4_INT32); assert( n<=pTab->nCol ); } @@ -120038,7 +120038,7 @@ whereBeginError: } /* -** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on +** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on ** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){ @@ -120162,7 +120162,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, pTabItem->iCursor); } if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)!=0 - && (ws & (WHERE_IPK|WHERE_AUTO_INDEX))==0 + && (ws & (WHERE_IPK|WHERE_AUTO_INDEX))==0 && pLevel->iIdxCur!=pWInfo->aiCurOnePass[1] ){ sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, pLevel->iIdxCur); @@ -120173,7 +120173,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){ ** from the index instead of from the table where possible. In some cases ** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can ** yield a significant performance boost. - ** + ** ** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and ** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table ** directly. This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes @@ -120327,7 +120327,7 @@ struct AttachKey { int type; Token key; }; pOut->pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, op, pOperand->pExpr, 0, 0); pOut->zStart = pOperand->zStart; pOut->zEnd = &pPostOp->z[pPostOp->n]; - } + } /* A routine to convert a binary TK_IS or TK_ISNOT expression into a ** unary TK_ISNULL or TK_NOTNULL expression. */ @@ -120356,10 +120356,10 @@ struct AttachKey { int type; Token key; }; /* Next is all token values, in a form suitable for use by makeheaders. ** This section will be null unless lemon is run with the -m switch. */ -/* +/* ** These constants (all generated automatically by the parser generator) ** specify the various kinds of tokens (terminals) that the parser -** understands. +** understands. ** ** Each symbol here is a terminal symbol in the grammar. */ @@ -120376,7 +120376,7 @@ struct AttachKey { int type; Token key; }; ** and nonterminals. "int" is used otherwise. ** YYNOCODE is a number of type YYCODETYPE which corresponds ** to no legal terminal or nonterminal number. This -** number is used to fill in empty slots of the hash +** number is used to fill in empty slots of the hash ** table. ** YYFALLBACK If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens ** have fall-back values which should be used if the @@ -120385,7 +120385,7 @@ struct AttachKey { int type; Token key; }; ** and nonterminal numbers. "unsigned char" is ** used if there are fewer than 250 rules and ** states combined. "int" is used otherwise. -** sqlite3ParserTOKENTYPE is the data type used for minor tokens given +** sqlite3ParserTOKENTYPE is the data type used for minor tokens given ** directly to the parser from the tokenizer. ** YYMINORTYPE is the data type used for all minor tokens. ** This is typically a union of many types, one of @@ -120460,7 +120460,7 @@ static const YYMINORTYPE yyzerominor = { 0 }; /* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the ** current state and lookahead token. These tables are used to implement ** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an -** action integer. +** action integer. ** ** Suppose the action integer is N. Then the action is determined as ** follows @@ -120485,7 +120485,7 @@ static const YYMINORTYPE yyzerominor = { 0 }; ** If the index value yy_shift_ofst[S]+X is out of range or if the value ** yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X or if yy_shift_ofst[S] ** is equal to YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT, it means that the action is not in the table -** and that yy_default[S] should be used instead. +** and that yy_default[S] should be used instead. ** ** The formula above is for computing the action when the lookahead is ** a terminal symbol. If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after @@ -120965,7 +120965,7 @@ static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_default[] = { /* The next table maps tokens into fallback tokens. If a construct ** like the following: -** +** ** %fallback ID X Y Z. ** ** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y, @@ -121094,10 +121094,10 @@ static char *yyTracePrompt = 0; #endif /* NDEBUG */ #ifndef NDEBUG -/* +/* ** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace ** and a prompt to preface each trace message. Tracing is turned off -** by making either argument NULL +** by making either argument NULL ** ** Inputs: ** <ul> @@ -121122,71 +121122,71 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){ #ifndef NDEBUG /* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals ** are required. The following table supplies these names */ -static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { - "$", "SEMI", "EXPLAIN", "QUERY", - "PLAN", "BEGIN", "TRANSACTION", "DEFERRED", - "IMMEDIATE", "EXCLUSIVE", "COMMIT", "END", - "ROLLBACK", "SAVEPOINT", "RELEASE", "TO", - "TABLE", "CREATE", "IF", "NOT", - "EXISTS", "TEMP", "LP", "RP", - "AS", "WITHOUT", "COMMA", "ID", - "INDEXED", "ABORT", "ACTION", "AFTER", - "ANALYZE", "ASC", "ATTACH", "BEFORE", - "BY", "CASCADE", "CAST", "COLUMNKW", - "CONFLICT", "DATABASE", "DESC", "DETACH", - "EACH", "FAIL", "FOR", "IGNORE", - "INITIALLY", "INSTEAD", "LIKE_KW", "MATCH", - "NO", "KEY", "OF", "OFFSET", - "PRAGMA", "RAISE", "RECURSIVE", "REPLACE", - "RESTRICT", "ROW", "TRIGGER", "VACUUM", - "VIEW", "VIRTUAL", "WITH", "REINDEX", - "RENAME", "CTIME_KW", "ANY", "OR", - "AND", "IS", "BETWEEN", "IN", - "ISNULL", "NOTNULL", "NE", "EQ", - "GT", "LE", "LT", "GE", - "ESCAPE", "BITAND", "BITOR", "LSHIFT", - "RSHIFT", "PLUS", "MINUS", "STAR", - "SLASH", "REM", "CONCAT", "COLLATE", - "BITNOT", "STRING", "JOIN_KW", "CONSTRAINT", - "DEFAULT", "NULL", "PRIMARY", "UNIQUE", - "CHECK", "REFERENCES", "AUTOINCR", "ON", - "INSERT", "DELETE", "UPDATE", "SET", - "DEFERRABLE", "FOREIGN", "DROP", "UNION", - "ALL", "EXCEPT", "INTERSECT", "SELECT", - "VALUES", "DISTINCT", "DOT", "FROM", - "JOIN", "USING", "ORDER", "GROUP", - "HAVING", "LIMIT", "WHERE", "INTO", - "INTEGER", "FLOAT", "BLOB", "VARIABLE", - "CASE", "WHEN", "THEN", "ELSE", - "INDEX", "ALTER", "ADD", "error", - "input", "cmdlist", "ecmd", "explain", - "cmdx", "cmd", "transtype", "trans_opt", +static const char *const yyTokenName[] = { + "$", "SEMI", "EXPLAIN", "QUERY", + "PLAN", "BEGIN", "TRANSACTION", "DEFERRED", + "IMMEDIATE", "EXCLUSIVE", "COMMIT", "END", + "ROLLBACK", "SAVEPOINT", "RELEASE", "TO", + "TABLE", "CREATE", "IF", "NOT", + "EXISTS", "TEMP", "LP", "RP", + "AS", "WITHOUT", "COMMA", "ID", + "INDEXED", "ABORT", "ACTION", "AFTER", + "ANALYZE", "ASC", "ATTACH", "BEFORE", + "BY", "CASCADE", "CAST", "COLUMNKW", + "CONFLICT", "DATABASE", "DESC", "DETACH", + "EACH", "FAIL", "FOR", "IGNORE", + "INITIALLY", "INSTEAD", "LIKE_KW", "MATCH", + "NO", "KEY", "OF", "OFFSET", + "PRAGMA", "RAISE", "RECURSIVE", "REPLACE", + "RESTRICT", "ROW", "TRIGGER", "VACUUM", + "VIEW", "VIRTUAL", "WITH", "REINDEX", + "RENAME", "CTIME_KW", "ANY", "OR", + "AND", "IS", "BETWEEN", "IN", + "ISNULL", "NOTNULL", "NE", "EQ", + "GT", "LE", "LT", "GE", + "ESCAPE", "BITAND", "BITOR", "LSHIFT", + "RSHIFT", "PLUS", "MINUS", "STAR", + "SLASH", "REM", "CONCAT", "COLLATE", + "BITNOT", "STRING", "JOIN_KW", "CONSTRAINT", + "DEFAULT", "NULL", "PRIMARY", "UNIQUE", + "CHECK", "REFERENCES", "AUTOINCR", "ON", + "INSERT", "DELETE", "UPDATE", "SET", + "DEFERRABLE", "FOREIGN", "DROP", "UNION", + "ALL", "EXCEPT", "INTERSECT", "SELECT", + "VALUES", "DISTINCT", "DOT", "FROM", + "JOIN", "USING", "ORDER", "GROUP", + "HAVING", "LIMIT", "WHERE", "INTO", + "INTEGER", "FLOAT", "BLOB", "VARIABLE", + "CASE", "WHEN", "THEN", "ELSE", + "INDEX", "ALTER", "ADD", "error", + "input", "cmdlist", "ecmd", "explain", + "cmdx", "cmd", "transtype", "trans_opt", "nm", "savepoint_opt", "create_table", "create_table_args", - "createkw", "temp", "ifnotexists", "dbnm", - "columnlist", "conslist_opt", "table_options", "select", - "column", "columnid", "type", "carglist", - "typetoken", "typename", "signed", "plus_num", - "minus_num", "ccons", "term", "expr", - "onconf", "sortorder", "autoinc", "idxlist_opt", - "refargs", "defer_subclause", "refarg", "refact", - "init_deferred_pred_opt", "conslist", "tconscomma", "tcons", - "idxlist", "defer_subclause_opt", "orconf", "resolvetype", + "createkw", "temp", "ifnotexists", "dbnm", + "columnlist", "conslist_opt", "table_options", "select", + "column", "columnid", "type", "carglist", + "typetoken", "typename", "signed", "plus_num", + "minus_num", "ccons", "term", "expr", + "onconf", "sortorder", "autoinc", "idxlist_opt", + "refargs", "defer_subclause", "refarg", "refact", + "init_deferred_pred_opt", "conslist", "tconscomma", "tcons", + "idxlist", "defer_subclause_opt", "orconf", "resolvetype", "raisetype", "ifexists", "fullname", "selectnowith", - "oneselect", "with", "multiselect_op", "distinct", - "selcollist", "from", "where_opt", "groupby_opt", - "having_opt", "orderby_opt", "limit_opt", "values", - "nexprlist", "exprlist", "sclp", "as", - "seltablist", "stl_prefix", "joinop", "indexed_opt", - "on_opt", "using_opt", "joinop2", "idlist", + "oneselect", "with", "multiselect_op", "distinct", + "selcollist", "from", "where_opt", "groupby_opt", + "having_opt", "orderby_opt", "limit_opt", "values", + "nexprlist", "exprlist", "sclp", "as", + "seltablist", "stl_prefix", "joinop", "indexed_opt", + "on_opt", "using_opt", "joinop2", "idlist", "sortlist", "setlist", "insert_cmd", "inscollist_opt", "likeop", "between_op", "in_op", "case_operand", - "case_exprlist", "case_else", "uniqueflag", "collate", + "case_exprlist", "case_else", "uniqueflag", "collate", "nmnum", "trigger_decl", "trigger_cmd_list", "trigger_time", - "trigger_event", "foreach_clause", "when_clause", "trigger_cmd", - "trnm", "tridxby", "database_kw_opt", "key_opt", - "add_column_fullname", "kwcolumn_opt", "create_vtab", "vtabarglist", - "vtabarg", "vtabargtoken", "lp", "anylist", - "wqlist", + "trigger_event", "foreach_clause", "when_clause", "trigger_cmd", + "trnm", "tridxby", "database_kw_opt", "key_opt", + "add_column_fullname", "kwcolumn_opt", "create_vtab", "vtabarglist", + "vtabarg", "vtabargtoken", "lp", "anylist", + "wqlist", }; #endif /* NDEBUG */ @@ -121548,7 +121548,7 @@ static void yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){ } #endif -/* +/* ** This function allocates a new parser. ** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like ** malloc. @@ -121592,7 +121592,7 @@ static void yy_destructor( /* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a ** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed. This can happen ** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a - ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is + ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is ** being destroyed before it is finished parsing. ** ** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those @@ -121703,7 +121703,7 @@ static int yy_pop_parser_stack(yyParser *pParser){ return yymajor; } -/* +/* ** Deallocate and destroy a parser. Destructors are all called for ** all stack elements before shutting the parser down. ** @@ -121754,7 +121754,7 @@ static int yy_find_shift_action( ){ int i; int stateno = pParser->yystack[pParser->yyidx].stateno; - + if( stateno>YY_SHIFT_COUNT || (i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno])==YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT ){ return yy_default[stateno]; @@ -121779,7 +121779,7 @@ static int yy_find_shift_action( #ifdef YYWILDCARD { int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD; - if( + if( #if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0 j>=0 && #endif @@ -121876,7 +121876,7 @@ static void yy_shift( yypParser->yyidxMax = yypParser->yyidx; } #endif -#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 +#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0 if( yypParser->yyidx>=YYSTACKDEPTH ){ yyStackOverflow(yypParser, yypMinor); return; @@ -122260,7 +122260,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( sqlite3ParserARG_FETCH; yymsp = &yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yyidx]; #ifndef NDEBUG - if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno>=0 + if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno>=0 && yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){ fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s].\n", yyTracePrompt, yyRuleName[yyruleno]); @@ -122273,7 +122273,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( ** not set the value of its left-hand side nonterminal. Leaving the ** value of the nonterminal uninitialized is utterly harmless as long ** as the value is never used. So really the only thing this code - ** accomplishes is to quieten purify. + ** accomplishes is to quieten purify. ** ** 2007-01-16: The wireshark project (www.wireshark.org) reports that ** without this code, their parser segfaults. I'm not sure what there @@ -122877,7 +122877,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( { sqlite3WithPush(pParse, yymsp[-7].minor.yy59, 1); sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(pParse, yymsp[-4].minor.yy65, &yymsp[-3].minor.yy0); - sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,"set list"); + sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,"set list"); sqlite3Update(pParse,yymsp[-4].minor.yy65,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,yymsp[0].minor.yy132,yymsp[-5].minor.yy186); } break; @@ -123085,7 +123085,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->x.pList = pList; }else{ sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pList); - } + } if( yymsp[-3].minor.yy328 ) yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_NOT, yygotominor.yy346.pExpr, 0, 0); yygotominor.yy346.zStart = yymsp[-4].minor.yy346.zStart; yygotominor.yy346.zEnd = yymsp[0].minor.yy346.zEnd; @@ -123238,7 +123238,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( break; case 239: /* cmd ::= createkw uniqueflag INDEX ifnotexists nm dbnm ON nm LP idxlist RP where_opt */ { - sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0, + sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0, sqlite3SrcListAppend(pParse->db,0,&yymsp[-4].minor.yy0,0), yymsp[-2].minor.yy14, yymsp[-10].minor.yy328, &yymsp[-11].minor.yy0, yymsp[0].minor.yy132, SQLITE_SO_ASC, yymsp[-8].minor.yy328); } @@ -123341,7 +123341,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( } break; case 278: /* trigger_cmd_list ::= trigger_cmd SEMI */ -{ +{ assert( yymsp[-1].minor.yy473!=0 ); yymsp[-1].minor.yy473->pLast = yymsp[-1].minor.yy473; yygotominor.yy473 = yymsp[-1].minor.yy473; @@ -123350,7 +123350,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( case 280: /* trnm ::= nm DOT nm */ { yygotominor.yy0 = yymsp[0].minor.yy0; - sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, + sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "qualified table names are not allowed on INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE " "statements within triggers"); } @@ -123383,7 +123383,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( break; case 288: /* expr ::= RAISE LP IGNORE RP */ { - yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, 0); + yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, 0); if( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr ){ yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->affinity = OE_Ignore; } @@ -123393,7 +123393,7 @@ static void yy_reduce( break; case 289: /* expr ::= RAISE LP raisetype COMMA nm RP */ { - yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0); + yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0); if( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr ) { yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->affinity = (char)yymsp[-3].minor.yy328; } @@ -123691,7 +123691,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser( #ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL /* A syntax error has occurred. ** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the - ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR". + ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR". ** ** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR: ** @@ -123754,7 +123754,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser( yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminorunion); yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion); yymajor = YYNOCODE; - + #else /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */ /* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR: ** @@ -123836,7 +123836,7 @@ const unsigned char ebcdicToAscii[] = { /* ** The sqlite3KeywordCode function looks up an identifier to determine if -** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is +** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is ** returned. If the input is not a keyword, TK_ID is returned. ** ** The implementation of this routine was generated by a program, @@ -123955,31 +123955,31 @@ static int keywordCode(const char *z, int n){ 521, 524, 529, 534, 540, 544, 549, }; static const unsigned char aCode[124] = { - TK_REINDEX, TK_INDEXED, TK_INDEX, TK_DESC, TK_ESCAPE, - TK_EACH, TK_CHECK, TK_KEY, TK_BEFORE, TK_FOREIGN, - TK_FOR, TK_IGNORE, TK_LIKE_KW, TK_EXPLAIN, TK_INSTEAD, - TK_ADD, TK_DATABASE, TK_AS, TK_SELECT, TK_TABLE, - TK_JOIN_KW, TK_THEN, TK_END, TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE, - TK_EXCEPT, TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION, TK_ON, TK_JOIN_KW, - TK_ALTER, TK_RAISE, TK_EXCLUSIVE, TK_EXISTS, TK_SAVEPOINT, - TK_INTERSECT, TK_TRIGGER, TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO, - TK_OFFSET, TK_OF, TK_SET, TK_TEMP, TK_TEMP, - TK_OR, TK_UNIQUE, TK_QUERY, TK_WITHOUT, TK_WITH, - TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RELEASE, TK_ATTACH, TK_HAVING, TK_GROUP, - TK_UPDATE, TK_BEGIN, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RECURSIVE, TK_BETWEEN, - TK_NOTNULL, TK_NOT, TK_NO, TK_NULL, TK_LIKE_KW, - TK_CASCADE, TK_ASC, TK_DELETE, TK_CASE, TK_COLLATE, - TK_CREATE, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_DETACH, TK_IMMEDIATE, TK_JOIN, - TK_INSERT, TK_MATCH, TK_PLAN, TK_ANALYZE, TK_PRAGMA, - TK_ABORT, TK_VALUES, TK_VIRTUAL, TK_LIMIT, TK_WHEN, - TK_WHERE, TK_RENAME, TK_AFTER, TK_REPLACE, TK_AND, - TK_DEFAULT, TK_AUTOINCR, TK_TO, TK_IN, TK_CAST, - TK_COLUMNKW, TK_COMMIT, TK_CONFLICT, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_CTIME_KW, - TK_CTIME_KW, TK_PRIMARY, TK_DEFERRED, TK_DISTINCT, TK_IS, - TK_DROP, TK_FAIL, TK_FROM, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_LIKE_KW, - TK_BY, TK_IF, TK_ISNULL, TK_ORDER, TK_RESTRICT, - TK_JOIN_KW, TK_ROLLBACK, TK_ROW, TK_UNION, TK_USING, - TK_VACUUM, TK_VIEW, TK_INITIALLY, TK_ALL, + TK_REINDEX, TK_INDEXED, TK_INDEX, TK_DESC, TK_ESCAPE, + TK_EACH, TK_CHECK, TK_KEY, TK_BEFORE, TK_FOREIGN, + TK_FOR, TK_IGNORE, TK_LIKE_KW, TK_EXPLAIN, TK_INSTEAD, + TK_ADD, TK_DATABASE, TK_AS, TK_SELECT, TK_TABLE, + TK_JOIN_KW, TK_THEN, TK_END, TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE, + TK_EXCEPT, TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION, TK_ON, TK_JOIN_KW, + TK_ALTER, TK_RAISE, TK_EXCLUSIVE, TK_EXISTS, TK_SAVEPOINT, + TK_INTERSECT, TK_TRIGGER, TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO, + TK_OFFSET, TK_OF, TK_SET, TK_TEMP, TK_TEMP, + TK_OR, TK_UNIQUE, TK_QUERY, TK_WITHOUT, TK_WITH, + TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RELEASE, TK_ATTACH, TK_HAVING, TK_GROUP, + TK_UPDATE, TK_BEGIN, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RECURSIVE, TK_BETWEEN, + TK_NOTNULL, TK_NOT, TK_NO, TK_NULL, TK_LIKE_KW, + TK_CASCADE, TK_ASC, TK_DELETE, TK_CASE, TK_COLLATE, + TK_CREATE, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_DETACH, TK_IMMEDIATE, TK_JOIN, + TK_INSERT, TK_MATCH, TK_PLAN, TK_ANALYZE, TK_PRAGMA, + TK_ABORT, TK_VALUES, TK_VIRTUAL, TK_LIMIT, TK_WHEN, + TK_WHERE, TK_RENAME, TK_AFTER, TK_REPLACE, TK_AND, + TK_DEFAULT, TK_AUTOINCR, TK_TO, TK_IN, TK_CAST, + TK_COLUMNKW, TK_COMMIT, TK_CONFLICT, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_CTIME_KW, + TK_CTIME_KW, TK_PRIMARY, TK_DEFERRED, TK_DISTINCT, TK_IS, + TK_DROP, TK_FAIL, TK_FROM, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_LIKE_KW, + TK_BY, TK_IF, TK_ISNULL, TK_ORDER, TK_RESTRICT, + TK_JOIN_KW, TK_ROLLBACK, TK_ROW, TK_UNION, TK_USING, + TK_VACUUM, TK_VIEW, TK_INITIALLY, TK_ALL, }; int h, i; if( n<2 ) return TK_ID; @@ -124131,14 +124131,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3KeywordCode(const unsigned char *z, int n){ ** IdChar(X) will be true. Otherwise it is false. ** ** For ASCII, any character with the high-order bit set is -** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters, +** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters, ** sqlite3IsIdChar[X] must be 1. ** ** For EBCDIC, the rules are more complex but have the same ** end result. ** ** Ticket #1066. the SQL standard does not allow '$' in the -** middle of identifiers. But many SQL implementations do. +** middle of identifiers. But many SQL implementations do. ** SQLite will allow '$' in identifiers for compatibility. ** But the feature is undocumented. */ @@ -124167,7 +124167,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsIdChar(u8 c){ return IdChar(c); } /* -** Return the length of the token that begins at z[0]. +** Return the length of the token that begins at z[0]. ** Store the token type in *tokenType before returning. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){ @@ -124346,7 +124346,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){ *tokenType = TK_FLOAT; } if( (z[i]=='e' || z[i]=='E') && - ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1]) + ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1]) || ((z[i+1]=='+' || z[i+1]=='-') && sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+2])) ) ){ @@ -124437,7 +124437,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){ /* ** Run the parser on the given SQL string. The parser structure is ** passed in. An SQLITE_ status code is returned. If an error occurs -** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into +** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into ** memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc() and to make *pzErrMsg point to that ** error message. */ @@ -124555,7 +124555,7 @@ abort_parse: #endif if( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB ){ - /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table + /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table ** structure built up in pParse->pNewTable. The calling code (see vtab.c) ** will take responsibility for freeing the Table structure. */ @@ -124651,7 +124651,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char sqlite3IsEbcdicIdChar[]; ** (2) NORMAL We are in the middle of statement which ends with a single ** semicolon. ** -** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of +** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of ** a statement. ** ** (4) CREATE The keyword CREATE has been seen at the beginning of a @@ -124986,19 +124986,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db); #ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-46656-45156 The sqlite3_version[] string constant -** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro. +** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro. */ SQLITE_API const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION; #endif /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns -** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant. +** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant. */ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; } /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-63124-39300 The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns a ** pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the -** SQLITE_SOURCE_ID C preprocessor macro. +** SQLITE_SOURCE_ID C preprocessor macro. */ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_sourceid(void){ return SQLITE_SOURCE_ID; } @@ -125042,13 +125042,13 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory = 0; SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0; /* -** Initialize SQLite. +** Initialize SQLite. ** ** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation, ** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with ** SQLite. But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT ** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as -** sqlite3_open(). +** sqlite3_open(). ** ** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process, ** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown. @@ -125093,7 +125093,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){ */ if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ) return SQLITE_OK; - /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to + /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to ** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error. ** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex, ** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do. @@ -125165,7 +125165,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){ rc = sqlite3OsInit(); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ - sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage, + sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage); sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1; #ifdef SQLITE_EXTRA_INIT @@ -125287,7 +125287,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){ switch( op ){ /* Mutex configuration options are only available in a threadsafe - ** compile. + ** compile. */ #if defined(SQLITE_THREADSAFE) && SQLITE_THREADSAFE>0 case SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD: { @@ -125418,7 +125418,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){ sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int); break; } - + /* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument. ** The default is NULL. Logging is disabled if the function pointer is ** NULL. @@ -125489,7 +125489,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){ /* ** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection. -** Return SQLITE_OK on success. +** Return SQLITE_OK on success. ** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY. ** ** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot. @@ -125504,7 +125504,7 @@ static int setupLookaside(sqlite3 *db, void *pBuf, int sz, int cnt){ return SQLITE_BUSY; } /* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before - ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for + ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for ** both at the same time. */ if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){ @@ -125669,7 +125669,7 @@ static int binCollFunc( } /* -** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE. +** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE. ** ** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent ** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents @@ -125772,7 +125772,7 @@ static void disconnectAllVtab(sqlite3 *db){ /* ** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared -** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects. +** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects. */ static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){ int j; @@ -125958,7 +125958,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3LeaveMutexAndCloseZombie(sqlite3 *db){ /* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema ** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()). ** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into - ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database + ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database ** structure? */ sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema); @@ -125986,7 +125986,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc(); - /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback(). + /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback(). ** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has ** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken ** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between @@ -126245,7 +126245,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3InvokeBusyHandler(BusyHandler *p){ }else{ p->nBusy++; } - return rc; + return rc; } /* @@ -126273,9 +126273,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_busy_handler( ** be invoked every nOps opcodes. */ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler( - sqlite3 *db, + sqlite3 *db, int nOps, - int (*xProgress)(void*), + int (*xProgress)(void*), void *pArg ){ sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); @@ -126319,7 +126319,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_interrupt(sqlite3 *db){ ** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except ** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is ** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code -** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared. +** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc( sqlite3 *db, @@ -126338,7 +126338,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc( assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); if( zFunctionName==0 || - (xFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) || + (xFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) || (!xFunc && (xFinal && !xStep)) || (!xFunc && (!xFinal && xStep)) || (nArg<-1 || nArg>SQLITE_MAX_FUNCTION_ARG) || @@ -126349,7 +126349,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc( assert( SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT==SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC ); extraFlags = enc & SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC; enc &= (SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK|SQLITE_ANY); - + #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16 /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this ** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the @@ -126376,7 +126376,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc( #else enc = SQLITE_UTF8; #endif - + /* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so, ** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function ** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the @@ -126385,7 +126385,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc( p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0); if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==enc && p->nArg==nArg ){ if( db->nVdbeActive ){ - sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, + sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, "unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements"); assert( !db->mallocFailed ); return SQLITE_BUSY; @@ -126501,7 +126501,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function16( ** ** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then ** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create -** a new one that always throws a run-time error. +** a new one that always throws a run-time error. ** ** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they ** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists. @@ -126528,7 +126528,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_overload_function( #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE /* ** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace -** is returned. +** is returned. ** ** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes. A non-NULL ** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each @@ -126544,8 +126544,8 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_trace(sqlite3 *db, void (*xTrace)(void*,const char*), v return pOld; } /* -** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered -** profile function is returned. +** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered +** profile function is returned. ** ** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes. A non-NULL ** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of @@ -126627,7 +126627,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_rollback_hook( ** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file ** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by ** wal_autocheckpoint()). -*/ +*/ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalDefaultHook( void *pClientData, /* Argument */ sqlite3 *db, /* Connection */ @@ -126737,7 +126737,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2( /* ** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points -** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are +** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are ** checkpointed. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ @@ -126749,9 +126749,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){ ** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is ** not currently open in WAL mode. ** -** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this -** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If -** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is +** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this +** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If +** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is ** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK. ** ** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex @@ -126860,11 +126860,11 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_errmsg16(sqlite3 *db){ 'o', 'u', 't', ' ', 'o', 'f', ' ', 'm', 'e', 'm', 'o', 'r', 'y', 0 }; static const u16 misuse[] = { - 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ', - 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ', - 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ', - 'o', 'u', 't', ' ', - 'o', 'f', ' ', + 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ', + 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ', + 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ', + 'o', 'u', 't', ' ', + 'o', 'f', ' ', 's', 'e', 'q', 'u', 'e', 'n', 'c', 'e', 0 }; @@ -126960,7 +126960,7 @@ static void invalidateCachedKeyInfo(sqlite3 *db){ */ static int createCollation( sqlite3* db, - const char *zName, + const char *zName, u8 enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), @@ -126968,7 +126968,7 @@ static int createCollation( ){ CollSeq *pColl; int enc2; - + assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) ); /* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this @@ -126985,14 +126985,14 @@ static int createCollation( return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT; } - /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation + /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation ** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there ** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements. */ pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0); if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){ if( db->nVdbeActive ){ - sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, + sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY, "unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements"); return SQLITE_BUSY; } @@ -127004,7 +127004,7 @@ static int createCollation( ** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated. ** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need ** to be called. - */ + */ if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){ CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName); int j; @@ -127147,17 +127147,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3 *db, int limitId, int newLimit){ ** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename) ** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain ** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in -** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains +** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains ** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to ** the VFS that should be used to open the database file. *pzFile is set to -** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the +** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the ** responsibility of the caller to eventually call sqlite3_free() to release ** this buffer. ** ** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg -** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error +** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error ** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release ** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free(). */ @@ -127165,7 +127165,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( const char *zDefaultVfs, /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */ const char *zUri, /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */ unsigned int *pFlags, /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */ - sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */ + sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */ char **pzFile, /* OUT: Filename component of URI */ char **pzErrMsg /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */ ){ @@ -127178,7 +127178,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( assert( *pzErrMsg==0 ); - if( ((flags & SQLITE_OPEN_URI) || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bOpenUri) + if( ((flags & SQLITE_OPEN_URI) || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bOpenUri) && nUri>=5 && memcmp(zUri, "file:", 5)==0 /* IMP: R-57884-37496 */ ){ char *zOpt; @@ -127187,7 +127187,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( int iOut = 0; /* Output character index */ int nByte = nUri+2; /* Bytes of space to allocate */ - /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen + /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen ** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name. */ flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI; @@ -127202,7 +127202,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( iIn = 7; while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++; if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){ - *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s", + *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s", iIn-7, &zUri[7]); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; goto parse_uri_out; @@ -127210,8 +127210,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( } #endif - /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer. - ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way. + /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer. + ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way. ** ** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending ** on the parsing context. As follows: @@ -127223,9 +127223,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( eState = 0; while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){ iIn++; - if( c=='%' - && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn]) - && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1]) + if( c=='%' + && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn]) + && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1]) ){ int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4); octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]); @@ -127236,7 +127236,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( ** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or ** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character ** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */ - while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' + while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' && (eState!=0 || c!='?') && (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&')) && (eState!=2 || c!='&') @@ -127268,7 +127268,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( zFile[iOut++] = '\0'; zFile[iOut++] = '\0'; - /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted + /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted ** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that ** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2() ** method. */ @@ -127304,7 +127304,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){ static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = { { "ro", SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY }, - { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE }, + { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE }, { "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE }, { "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY }, { 0, 0 } @@ -127372,7 +127372,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri( /* ** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of -** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename" +** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename" ** is UTF-8 encoded. */ static int openDatabase( @@ -127393,7 +127393,7 @@ static int openDatabase( if( rc ) return rc; #endif - /* Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument. + /* Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument. ** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used. If we ** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger ** assert() statements in deeper layers. Sensible combinations @@ -127440,11 +127440,11 @@ static int openDatabase( flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE | SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB | - SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | - SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB | - SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL | - SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL | - SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | + SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB | + SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB | + SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL | + SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL | + SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX | SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX | @@ -127539,7 +127539,7 @@ static int openDatabase( db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0); /* The default safety_level for the main database is 'full'; for the temp - ** database it is 'NONE'. This matches the pager layer defaults. + ** database it is 'NONE'. This matches the pager layer defaults. */ db->aDb[0].zName = "main"; db->aDb[0].safety_level = 3; @@ -127649,8 +127649,8 @@ opendb_out: ** Open a new database handle. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open( - const char *zFilename, - sqlite3 **ppDb + const char *zFilename, + sqlite3 **ppDb ){ return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb, SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0); @@ -127669,7 +127669,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2( ** Open a new database handle. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16( - const void *zFilename, + const void *zFilename, sqlite3 **ppDb ){ char const *zFilename8; /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */ @@ -127706,9 +127706,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16( ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation( - sqlite3* db, - const char *zName, - int enc, + sqlite3* db, + const char *zName, + int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ){ @@ -127725,9 +127725,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation( ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2( - sqlite3* db, - const char *zName, - int enc, + sqlite3* db, + const char *zName, + int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*), void(*xDel)(void*) @@ -127746,9 +127746,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2( ** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16( - sqlite3* db, + sqlite3* db, const void *zName, - int enc, + int enc, void* pCtx, int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*) ){ @@ -127772,8 +127772,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16( ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed( - sqlite3 *db, - void *pCollNeededArg, + sqlite3 *db, + void *pCollNeededArg, void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*) ){ sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); @@ -127790,8 +127790,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed( ** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory. */ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16( - sqlite3 *db, - void *pCollNeededArg, + sqlite3 *db, + void *pCollNeededArg, void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*) ){ sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex); @@ -127843,14 +127843,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CorruptError(int lineno){ } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MisuseError(int lineno){ testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE, "misuse at line %d of [%.10s]", lineno, 20+sqlite3_sourceid()); return SQLITE_MISUSE; } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CantopenError(int lineno){ testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 ); - sqlite3_log(SQLITE_CANTOPEN, + sqlite3_log(SQLITE_CANTOPEN, "cannot open file at line %d of [%.10s]", lineno, 20+sqlite3_sourceid()); return SQLITE_CANTOPEN; @@ -127934,13 +127934,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_table_column_metadata( /* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned ** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey ** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities: - ** - ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" - ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column. ** - ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an + ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_" + ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column. + ** + ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an ** explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol. - */ + */ if( pCol ){ zDataType = pCol->zType; zCollSeq = pCol->zColl; @@ -127991,7 +127991,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){ pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0); if( pVfs==0 ) return 0; - /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep() + /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep() ** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's. */ rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, 1000*ms)/1000); @@ -128036,7 +128036,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_file_control(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDbName, int op, vo sqlite3BtreeLeave(pBtree); } sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex); - return rc; + return rc; } /* @@ -128117,7 +128117,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ /* ** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd) ** - ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures + ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures ** are benign. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: { @@ -128178,7 +128178,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ ** This action provides a run-time test to see how the ALWAYS and ** NEVER macros were defined at compile-time. ** - ** The return value is ALWAYS(X). + ** The return value is ALWAYS(X). ** ** The recommended test is X==2. If the return value is 2, that means ** ALWAYS() and NEVER() are both no-op pass-through macros, which is the @@ -128215,7 +128215,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ ** 10 little-endian, determined at run-time ** 432101 big-endian, determined at compile-time ** 123410 little-endian, determined at compile-time - */ + */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: { rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN; break; @@ -128237,7 +128237,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N) ** - ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The + ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The ** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled. For normal ** operation N should be 0. The idea is that a test program (like the ** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times @@ -128255,7 +128255,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ ** ** If zWord is a keyword recognized by the parser, then return the ** number of keywords. Or if zWord is not a keyword, return 0. - ** + ** ** This test feature is only available in the amalgamation since ** the SQLITE_N_KEYWORD macro is not defined in this file if SQLite ** is built using separate source files. @@ -128266,12 +128266,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ rc = (sqlite3KeywordCode((u8*)zWord, n)!=TK_ID) ? SQLITE_N_KEYWORD : 0; break; } -#endif +#endif /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_SCRATCHMALLOC, sz, &pNew, pFree); ** - ** Pass pFree into sqlite3ScratchFree(). - ** If sz>0 then allocate a scratch buffer into pNew. + ** Pass pFree into sqlite3ScratchFree(). + ** If sz>0 then allocate a scratch buffer into pNew. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_SCRATCHMALLOC: { void *pFree, **ppNew; @@ -128311,7 +128311,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ /* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr); ** - ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context + ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context ** pointer ptr. */ case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: { @@ -128347,7 +128347,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){ /* ** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks -** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query +** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query ** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter. ** ** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen() @@ -128469,13 +128469,13 @@ static sqlite3 *SQLITE_WSD sqlite3BlockedList = 0; #ifndef NDEBUG /* -** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following +** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following ** properties of the blocked connections list: ** -** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either +** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either ** pUnlockConnection or pBlockingConnection, or both. ** -** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for +** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for ** xUnlockNotify are grouped together. ** ** 3) If the argument db is not NULL, then none of the entries in the @@ -128527,8 +128527,8 @@ static void addToBlockedList(sqlite3 *db){ sqlite3 **pp; assertMutexHeld(); for( - pp=&sqlite3BlockedList; - *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify; + pp=&sqlite3BlockedList; + *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify; pp=&(*pp)->pNextBlocked ); db->pNextBlocked = *pp; @@ -128590,9 +128590,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify( db->xUnlockNotify = 0; db->pUnlockArg = 0; }else if( 0==db->pBlockingConnection ){ - /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a + /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a ** blocking transaction. In either case, invoke the notify callback - ** immediately. + ** immediately. */ xNotify(&pArg, 1); }else{ @@ -128618,7 +128618,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify( } /* -** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement +** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement ** associated with connection db. The operation will return SQLITE_LOCKED ** to the user because it requires a lock that will not be available ** until connection pBlocker concludes its current transaction. @@ -128634,7 +128634,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(sqlite3 *db, sqlite3 *pBlocker){ /* ** This function is called when -** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held +** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held ** by database connection db have been released. ** ** This function loops through each entry in the blocked connections @@ -128694,7 +128694,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){ }else{ /* This occurs when the array of context pointers that need to ** be passed to the unlock-notify callback is larger than the - ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to + ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to ** allocate a larger array from the heap has failed. ** ** This is a difficult situation to handle. Returning an error @@ -128702,17 +128702,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){ ** is returned the transaction on connection db will still be ** closed and the unlock-notify callbacks on blocked connections ** will go unissued. This might cause the application to wait - ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never + ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never ** arrive. ** ** Instead, invoke the unlock-notify callback with the context ** array already accumulated. We can then clear the array and - ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without + ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without ** requiring any dynamic allocation. This is sub-optimal because ** it means that instead of one callback with a large array of ** context pointers the application will receive two or more ** callbacks with smaller arrays of context pointers, which will - ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple + ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple ** connections. But it is the best that can be done under the ** circumstances. */ @@ -128747,7 +128747,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){ } /* -** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is +** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is ** being closed. The connection is removed from the blocked list. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -128824,7 +128824,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){ ** A doclist (document list) holds a docid-sorted list of hits for a ** given term. Doclists hold docids and associated token positions. ** A docid is the unique integer identifier for a single document. -** A position is the index of a word within the document. The first +** A position is the index of a word within the document. The first ** word of the document has a position of 0. ** ** FTS3 used to optionally store character offsets using a compile-time @@ -128849,7 +128849,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){ ** ** Here, array { X } means zero or more occurrences of X, adjacent in ** memory. A "position" is an index of a token in the token stream -** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur +** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur ** in the same logical place as the position element, and act as sentinals ** ending a position list array. POS_END is 0. POS_COLUMN is 1. ** The positions numbers are not stored literally but rather as two more @@ -128873,7 +128873,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){ ** a document record consists of a docid followed by a position-list and ** a doclist consists of one or more document records. ** -** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an +** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an ** array of varint-encoded docids. ** **** Segment leaf nodes **** @@ -129069,7 +129069,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){ #ifndef _FTSINT_H #define _FTSINT_H -#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) +#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) # define NDEBUG 1 #endif @@ -129127,7 +129127,7 @@ SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3 ** When an fts3 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to ** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the ** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer -** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an +** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an ** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to ** be used for the fts3 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments). ** @@ -129159,7 +129159,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { ** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers ** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2". ** - ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error + ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error ** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set ** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic ** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialized by @@ -129180,7 +129180,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { /* ** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller ** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid - ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method). + ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method). */ int (*xOpen)( sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* Tokenizer object */ @@ -129189,7 +129189,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { ); /* - ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this + ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this ** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen(). */ int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor); @@ -129200,7 +129200,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { ** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that ** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code. ** - ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the + ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the ** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or ** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length ** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is @@ -129212,7 +129212,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { ** ** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer ** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call - ** to xNext() or xClose(). + ** to xNext() or xClose(). */ /* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be ** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes @@ -129230,7 +129230,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module { ** Methods below this point are only available if iVersion>=1. */ - /* + /* ** Configure the language id of a tokenizer cursor. */ int (*xLanguageid)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr, int iLangid); @@ -129299,7 +129299,7 @@ struct Fts3Hash { } *ht; }; -/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following +/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following ** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list. ** ** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really @@ -129318,10 +129318,10 @@ struct Fts3HashElem { ** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case ** is respected in comparisons. ** -** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long. +** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long. ** memcmp() is used to compare keys. ** -** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1. +** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1. */ #define FTS3_HASH_STRING 1 #define FTS3_HASH_BINARY 2 @@ -129374,7 +129374,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi /* ** This constant determines the maximum depth of an FTS expression tree -** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform +** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform ** various operations on the query tree, so the disadvantage of a large ** limit is that it may allow very large queries to use large amounts ** of stack space (perhaps causing a stack overflow). @@ -129392,11 +129392,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi #define FTS3_MERGE_COUNT 16 /* -** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the +** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the ** Fts3Table.pendingTerms hash table. Normally, the hash table is ** populated as documents are inserted/updated/deleted in a transaction ** and used to create a new segment when the transaction is committed. -** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new +** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new ** segment is created and the hash table cleared immediately. */ #define FTS3_MAX_PENDING_DATA (1*1024*1024) @@ -129425,7 +129425,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi /* ** FTS4 virtual tables may maintain multiple indexes - one index of all terms ** in the document set and zero or more prefix indexes. All indexes are stored -** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables. +** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables. ** ** It is possible to determine which index a b+-tree belongs to based on the ** value stored in the "%_segdir.level" column. Given this value L, the index @@ -129433,8 +129433,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi ** level values between 0 and 1023 (inclusive) belong to index 0, all levels ** between 1024 and 2047 to index 1, and so on. ** -** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In -** theory though this may happen, but only after at least +** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In +** theory though this may happen, but only after at least ** (FTS3_MERGE_COUNT^1024) separate flushes of the pending-terms tables. */ #define FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL 1024 @@ -129452,11 +129452,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi ** Terminator values for position-lists and column-lists. */ #define POS_COLUMN (1) /* Column-list terminator */ -#define POS_END (0) /* Position-list terminator */ +#define POS_END (0) /* Position-list terminator */ /* ** This section provides definitions to allow the -** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the +** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the ** amalgamation. */ #ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION @@ -129489,7 +129489,7 @@ typedef sqlite3_int64 i64; /* 8-byte signed integer */ /* ** Activate assert() only if SQLITE_TEST is enabled. */ -#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) +#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) # define NDEBUG 1 #endif @@ -129546,8 +129546,8 @@ struct Fts3Table { int nAutoincrmerge; /* Value configured by 'automerge' */ u32 nLeafAdd; /* Number of leaf blocks added this trans */ - /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these - ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call. + /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these + ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call. */ sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[40]; @@ -129564,8 +129564,8 @@ struct Fts3Table { char *zSegmentsTbl; /* Name of %_segments table */ sqlite3_blob *pSegments; /* Blob handle open on %_segments table */ - /* - ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index + /* + ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index ** updates during transactions. All pending updates buffered at any one ** time must share a common language-id (see the FTS4 langid= feature). ** The current language id is stored in variable iPrevLangid. @@ -129575,10 +129575,10 @@ struct Fts3Table { ** terms that appear in the document set. Each subsequent index in aIndex[] ** is an index of prefixes of a specific length. ** - ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the + ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the ** pending data structures, including hash table overhead, but not including ** malloc overhead. When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, all hash - ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most + ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most ** recently inserted record. */ int nIndex; /* Size of aIndex[] */ @@ -129651,10 +129651,10 @@ struct Fts3Cursor { ** ** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ex1 USING fts3(a,b,c,d); ** SELECT docid FROM ex1 WHERE b MATCH 'one two three'; -** +** ** Because the LHS of the MATCH operator is 2nd column "b", ** Fts3Cursor.eSearch will be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+1. (+0 for a, -** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1" +** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1" ** indicating that all columns should be searched, ** then eSearch would be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+4. */ @@ -129708,8 +129708,8 @@ struct Fts3Phrase { int bIncr; /* True if doclist is loaded incrementally */ int iDoclistToken; - /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing - ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase. + /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing + ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase. */ int nToken; /* Number of tokens in the phrase */ int iColumn; /* Index of column this phrase must match */ @@ -129719,10 +129719,10 @@ struct Fts3Phrase { /* ** A tree of these objects forms the RHS of a MATCH operator. ** -** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist -** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results -** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial -** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this +** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist +** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results +** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial +** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this ** buffer. ** ** Variable aMI is used only for FTSQUERY_NEAR nodes to store the global @@ -129734,7 +129734,7 @@ struct Fts3Phrase { ** aMI[iCol*3 + 1] = Number of occurrences ** aMI[iCol*3 + 2] = Number of rows containing at least one instance ** -** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed +** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed ** when the expression node is. */ struct Fts3Expr { @@ -129756,7 +129756,7 @@ struct Fts3Expr { /* ** Candidate values for Fts3Query.eType. Note that the order of the first -** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For +** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For ** example, the following: ** ** "a OR b AND c NOT d NEAR e" @@ -129813,7 +129813,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, Ft SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *); SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(Fts3MultiSegReader *); -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *, +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *, int, int, int, const char *, int, int, int, Fts3MultiSegReader *); /* Flags allowed as part of the 4th argument to SegmentReaderIterate() */ @@ -129875,7 +129875,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3CreateStatTable(int*, Fts3Table*); /* fts3_tokenizer.c */ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *, int *); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(sqlite3 *, Fts3Hash *, const char *); -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *, +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *, sqlite3_tokenizer **, char ** ); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(char); @@ -129910,7 +129910,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart( Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, int, const char*, int); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext( Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, sqlite3_int64 *, char **, int *); -SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **); +SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, int *); SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr); @@ -129942,7 +129942,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(int); /* #include <string.h> */ /* #include <stdarg.h> */ -#ifndef SQLITE_CORE +#ifndef SQLITE_CORE SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1 #endif @@ -129951,7 +129951,7 @@ static int fts3EvalStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr); static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor( Fts3Cursor *, const char *, int, int, Fts3MultiSegReader **); -/* +/* ** Write a 64-bit variable-length integer to memory starting at p[0]. ** The length of data written will be between 1 and FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes. ** The number of bytes written is returned. @@ -129975,7 +129975,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PutVarint(char *p, sqlite_int64 v){ v = (*ptr++); \ if( (v & mask2)==0 ){ var = v; return ret; } -/* +/* ** Read a 64-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0]. ** Return the number of bytes read, or 0 on error. ** The value is stored in *v. @@ -130058,7 +130058,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Dequote(char *z){ int iOut = 0; /* Index of next byte to write to output */ /* If the first byte was a '[', then the close-quote character is a ']' */ - if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']'; + if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']'; while( ALWAYS(z[iIn]) ){ if( z[iIn]==quote ){ @@ -130094,14 +130094,14 @@ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint(char **pp, sqlite3_int64 *pVal){ ** varint is part of. */ static void fts3GetReverseVarint( - char **pp, - char *pStart, + char **pp, + char *pStart, sqlite3_int64 *pVal ){ sqlite3_int64 iVal; char *p; - /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are + /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are ** interested in. So, unless the doclist is corrupt, the 0x80 bit is ** clear on character p[-1]. */ for(p = (*pp)-2; p>=pStart && *p&0x80; p--); @@ -130197,7 +130197,7 @@ static int fts3DestroyMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ ** passed as the first argument. This is done as part of the xConnect() ** and xCreate() methods. ** -** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. +** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc ** before returning. */ @@ -130220,7 +130220,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){ /* Create the whole "CREATE TABLE" statement to pass to SQLite */ zSql = sqlite3_mprintf( - "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)", + "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)", zCols, p->zName, zLanguageid ); if( !zCols || !zSql ){ @@ -130239,7 +130239,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){ ** Create the %_stat table if it does not already exist. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3CreateStatTable(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){ - fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db, + fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db, "CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS %Q.'%q_stat'" "(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, value BLOB);", p->zDb, p->zName @@ -130275,9 +130275,9 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){ zContentCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z, langid", zContentCols, zLanguageid); } if( zContentCols==0 ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; - + /* Create the content table */ - fts3DbExec(&rc, db, + fts3DbExec(&rc, db, "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_content'(%s)", p->zDb, p->zName, zContentCols ); @@ -130285,11 +130285,11 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){ } /* Create other tables */ - fts3DbExec(&rc, db, + fts3DbExec(&rc, db, "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segments'(blockid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB);", p->zDb, p->zName ); - fts3DbExec(&rc, db, + fts3DbExec(&rc, db, "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segdir'(" "level INTEGER," "idx INTEGER," @@ -130302,7 +130302,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){ p->zDb, p->zName ); if( p->bHasDocsize ){ - fts3DbExec(&rc, db, + fts3DbExec(&rc, db, "CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_docsize'(docid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, size BLOB);", p->zDb, p->zName ); @@ -130317,7 +130317,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){ /* ** Store the current database page-size in bytes in p->nPgsz. ** -** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. +** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op. ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc ** before returning. */ @@ -130326,7 +130326,7 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){ int rc; /* Return code */ char *zSql; /* SQL text "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" */ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; /* Compiled "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" statement */ - + zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA %Q.page_size", p->zDb); if( !zSql ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; @@ -130352,11 +130352,11 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){ ** ** <key> = <value> ** -** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The <value> +** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The <value> ** term may be quoted, but the <key> may not. */ static int fts3IsSpecialColumn( - const char *z, + const char *z, int *pnKey, char **pzValue ){ @@ -130433,7 +130433,7 @@ static char *fts3QuoteId(char const *zInput){ } /* -** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that +** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that ** could be used in a SELECT statement such as the following: ** ** SELECT <list of expressions> FROM %_content AS x ... @@ -130484,7 +130484,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){ fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, ", x.%Q", p->zLanguageid); } } - fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x", + fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x", p->zDb, (p->zContentTbl ? p->zContentTbl : p->zName), (p->zContentTbl ? "" : "_content") @@ -130499,7 +130499,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){ ** ** If argument zFunc is not NULL, then all but the first question mark ** is preceded by zFunc and an open bracket, and followed by a closed -** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three +** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three ** user-defined text columns, the following string is returned: ** ** "?, zip(?), zip(?), zip(?)" @@ -130536,11 +130536,11 @@ static char *fts3WriteExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){ /* ** This function interprets the string at (*pp) as a non-negative integer -** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then +** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then ** sets *pp to point to the byte immediately following the last byte of ** the integer value. ** -** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value. +** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value. ** ** If *pp does not being with a decimal digit SQLITE_ERROR is returned and ** the output value undefined. Otherwise SQLITE_OK is returned. @@ -130649,7 +130649,7 @@ static int fts3ContentColumns( int *pnStr /* OUT: Bytes of string content */ ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ - char *zSql; /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */ + char *zSql; /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Compiled version of zSql */ zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT * FROM %Q.%Q", zDb, zTbl); @@ -130788,9 +130788,9 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( char *zVal; /* Check if this is a tokenizer specification */ - if( !pTokenizer + if( !pTokenizer && strlen(z)>8 - && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8) + && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8) && 0==sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(z[8]) ){ rc = sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(pHash, &z[9], &pTokenizer, pzErr); @@ -130854,8 +130854,8 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( break; case 4: /* ORDER */ - if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3)) - && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4)) + if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3)) + && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4)) ){ *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unrecognized order: %s", zVal); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; @@ -130901,17 +130901,17 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( ** TABLE statement, use all columns from the content table. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zContent ){ - sqlite3_free(zCompress); - sqlite3_free(zUncompress); + sqlite3_free(zCompress); + sqlite3_free(zUncompress); zCompress = 0; zUncompress = 0; if( nCol==0 ){ - sqlite3_free((void*)aCol); + sqlite3_free((void*)aCol); aCol = 0; rc = fts3ContentColumns(db, argv[1], zContent, &aCol, &nCol, &nString); /* If a languageid= option was specified, remove the language id - ** column from the aCol[] array. */ + ** column from the aCol[] array. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zLanguageid ){ int j; for(j=0; j<nCol; j++){ @@ -130998,7 +130998,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( /* Fill in the azColumn array */ for(iCol=0; iCol<nCol; iCol++){ - char *z; + char *z; int n = 0; z = (char *)sqlite3Fts3NextToken(aCol[iCol], &n); memcpy(zCsr, z, n); @@ -131015,7 +131015,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( for(i=0; i<nNotindexed; i++){ char *zNot = azNotindexed[i]; if( zNot && n==(int)strlen(zNot) - && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(p->azColumn[iCol], zNot, n) + && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(p->azColumn[iCol], zNot, n) ){ p->abNotindexed[iCol] = 1; sqlite3_free(zNot); @@ -131039,7 +131039,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab( p->zWriteExprlist = fts3WriteExprList(p, zCompress, &rc); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto fts3_init_out; - /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the + /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the ** database. TODO: For xConnect(), it could verify that said tables exist. */ if( isCreate ){ @@ -131122,11 +131122,11 @@ static void fts3SetEstimatedRows(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, i64 nRow){ #endif } -/* +/* ** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS3 tables. There ** are three possible strategies, in order of preference: ** -** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid. +** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid. ** 2. Full-text search using a MATCH operator on a non-docid column. ** 3. Linear scan of %_content table. */ @@ -131141,7 +131141,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){ int iIdx; /* By default use a full table scan. This is an expensive option, - ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient + ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient ** strategy is possible. */ pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLSCAN_SEARCH; @@ -131177,12 +131177,12 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){ ** ** If there is more than one MATCH constraint available, use the first ** one encountered. If there is both a MATCH constraint and a direct - ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even + ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even ** though the rowid/docid lookup is faster than a MATCH query, selecting - ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested + ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested ** context" error. */ - if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH + if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH && pCons->iColumn>=0 && pCons->iColumn<=p->nColumn ){ pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH + pCons->iColumn; @@ -131191,7 +131191,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){ } /* Equality constraint on the langid column */ - if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ + if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ && pCons->iColumn==p->nColumn + 2 ){ iLangidCons = i; @@ -131216,22 +131216,22 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){ if( iCons>=0 ){ pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].argvIndex = iIdx++; pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].omit = 1; - } + } if( iLangidCons>=0 ){ pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_LANGID; pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iLangidCons].argvIndex = iIdx++; - } + } if( iDocidGe>=0 ){ pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_GE; pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidGe].argvIndex = iIdx++; - } + } if( iDocidLe>=0 ){ pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_LE; pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidLe].argvIndex = iIdx++; - } + } /* Regardless of the strategy selected, FTS can deliver rows in rowid (or - ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible. + ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible. */ if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 ){ struct sqlite3_index_orderby *pOrder = &pInfo->aOrderBy[0]; @@ -131258,7 +131258,7 @@ static int fts3OpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab); /* Allocate a buffer large enough for an Fts3Cursor structure. If the - ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, + ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, ** if the allocation fails, return SQLITE_NOMEM. */ *ppCsr = pCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Cursor)); @@ -131314,7 +131314,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeekStmt(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt){ /* ** Position the pCsr->pStmt statement so that it is on the row ** of the %_content table that contains the last match. Return -** SQLITE_OK on success. +** SQLITE_OK on success. */ static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -131348,7 +131348,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ /* ** This function is used to process a single interior node when searching -** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this +** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this ** function via the zNode/nNode parameters. The term to search for is ** passed in zTerm/nTerm. ** @@ -131377,9 +131377,9 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode( int isFirstTerm = 1; /* True when processing first term on page */ sqlite3_int64 iChild; /* Block id of child node to descend to */ - /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every + /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every ** interior node. Then load the blockid of the left-child of the b-tree - ** node into variable iChild. + ** node into variable iChild. ** ** Even if the data structure on disk is corrupted, this (reading two ** varints from the buffer) does not risk an overread. If zNode is a @@ -131395,13 +131395,13 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode( if( zCsr>zEnd ){ return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB; } - + while( zCsr<zEnd && (piFirst || piLast) ){ int cmp; /* memcmp() result */ int nSuffix; /* Size of term suffix */ int nPrefix = 0; /* Size of term prefix */ int nBuffer; /* Total term size */ - + /* Load the next term on the node into zBuffer. Use realloc() to expand ** the size of zBuffer if required. */ if( !isFirstTerm ){ @@ -131409,7 +131409,7 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode( } isFirstTerm = 0; zCsr += fts3GetVarint32(zCsr, &nSuffix); - + if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<0 || &zCsr[nSuffix]>zEnd ){ rc = FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB; goto finish_scan; @@ -131431,8 +131431,8 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode( /* Compare the term we are searching for with the term just loaded from ** the interior node. If the specified term is greater than or equal - ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree - ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search + ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree + ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search ** iChild. ** ** If the interior node term is larger than the specified term, then @@ -131468,20 +131468,20 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode( ** node for the range of leaf nodes that may contain the specified term ** or terms for which the specified term is a prefix. ** -** If piLeaf is not NULL, then *piLeaf is set to the blockid of the +** If piLeaf is not NULL, then *piLeaf is set to the blockid of the ** left-most leaf node in the tree that may contain the specified term. ** If piLeaf2 is not NULL, then *piLeaf2 is set to the blockid of the ** right-most leaf node that may contain a term for which the specified ** term is a prefix. ** -** It is possible that the range of returned leaf nodes does not contain -** the specified term or any terms for which it is a prefix. However, if the +** It is possible that the range of returned leaf nodes does not contain +** the specified term or any terms for which it is a prefix. However, if the ** segment does contain any such terms, they are stored within the identified ** range. Because this function only inspects interior segment nodes (and ** never loads leaf nodes into memory), it is not possible to be sure. ** ** If an error occurs, an error code other than SQLITE_OK is returned. -*/ +*/ static int fts3SelectLeaf( Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */ const char *zTerm, /* Term to select leaves for */ @@ -131527,7 +131527,7 @@ static int fts3SelectLeaf( } /* -** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3 +** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3 ** varints. Each call to this function appends a single varint to a list. */ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint( @@ -131541,11 +131541,11 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint( } /* -** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the +** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the ** start of a position-list. After it returns, *ppPoslist points to the ** first byte after the position-list. ** -** A position list is list of positions (delta encoded) and columns for +** A position list is list of positions (delta encoded) and columns for ** a single document record of a doclist. So, in other words, this ** routine advances *ppPoslist so that it points to the next docid in ** the doclist, or to the first byte past the end of the doclist. @@ -131558,12 +131558,12 @@ static void fts3PoslistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){ char *pEnd = *ppPoslist; char c = 0; - /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3 + /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3 ** varint. A single POS_END (0) byte. Except, if the 0 byte is preceded by ** a byte with the 0x80 bit set, then it is not a varint 0, but the tail ** of some other, multi-byte, value. ** - ** The following while-loop moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not + ** The following while-loop moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not ** immediately preceded by a byte with the 0x80 bit set. Then increments ** pEnd once more so that it points to the byte immediately following the ** last byte in the position-list. @@ -131585,7 +131585,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){ } /* -** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the +** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the ** start of a column-list. After it returns, *ppPoslist points to the ** to the terminator (POS_COLUMN or POS_END) byte of the column-list. ** @@ -131635,7 +131635,7 @@ static void fts3ColumnlistCopy(char **pp, char **ppPoslist){ ** (in which case **pp will be a terminator bytes POS_END (0) or ** (1)). ** -** If *pp points past the end of the current position-list, set *pi to +** If *pp points past the end of the current position-list, set *pi to ** POSITION_LIST_END and return. Otherwise, read the next varint from *pp, ** increment the current value of *pi by the value read, and set *pp to ** point to the next value before returning. @@ -131663,7 +131663,7 @@ static void fts3ReadNextPos( ** the value of iCol encoded as a varint to *pp. This will start a new ** column list. ** -** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before +** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before ** returning (do not modify it if iCol==0). Return the total number of bytes ** written (0 if iCol==0). */ @@ -131716,7 +131716,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge( /* At this point, both p1 and p2 point to the start of column-lists ** for the same column (the column with index iCol1 and iCol2). - ** A column-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each + ** A column-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each ** incremented by 2 before being stored. Each list is terminated by a ** POS_END (0) or POS_COLUMN (1). The following block merges the two lists ** and writes the results to buffer p. p is left pointing to the byte @@ -131726,7 +131726,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge( fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p1, &i1); fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &i2); do { - fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2); + fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2); iPrev -= 2; if( i1==i2 ){ fts3ReadNextPos(&p1, &i1); @@ -131767,7 +131767,7 @@ static void fts3PoslistMerge( ** When this function returns, both *pp1 and *pp2 are left pointing to the ** byte following the 0x00 terminator of their respective position lists. ** -** If isSaveLeft is 0, an entry is added to the output position list for +** If isSaveLeft is 0, an entry is added to the output position list for ** each position in *pp2 for which there exists one or more positions in ** *pp1 so that (pos(*pp2)>pos(*pp1) && pos(*pp2)-pos(*pp1)<=nToken). i.e. ** when the *pp1 token appears before the *pp2 token, but not more than nToken @@ -131793,11 +131793,11 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge( assert( isSaveLeft==0 || isExact==0 ); assert( p!=0 && *p1!=0 && *p2!=0 ); - if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){ + if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){ p1++; p1 += fts3GetVarint32(p1, &iCol1); } - if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){ + if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){ p2++; p2 += fts3GetVarint32(p2, &iCol2); } @@ -131820,8 +131820,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge( fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &iPos2); iPos2 -= 2; while( 1 ){ - if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken - || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken) + if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken + || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken) ){ sqlite3_int64 iSave; iSave = isSaveLeft ? iPos1 : iPos2; @@ -131856,8 +131856,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge( /* Advance pointer p1 or p2 (whichever corresponds to the smaller of ** iCol1 and iCol2) so that it points to either the 0x00 that marks the - ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next - ** column-number in the position list. + ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next + ** column-number in the position list. */ else if( iCol1<iCol2 ){ fts3ColumnlistCopy(0, &p1); @@ -131886,14 +131886,14 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge( /* ** Merge two position-lists as required by the NEAR operator. The argument -** position lists correspond to the left and right phrases of an expression +** position lists correspond to the left and right phrases of an expression ** like: ** ** "phrase 1" NEAR "phrase number 2" ** -** Position list *pp1 corresponds to the left-hand side of the NEAR -** expression and *pp2 to the right. As usual, the indexes in the position -** lists are the offsets of the last token in each phrase (tokens "1" and "2" +** Position list *pp1 corresponds to the left-hand side of the NEAR +** expression and *pp2 to the right. As usual, the indexes in the position +** lists are the offsets of the last token in each phrase (tokens "1" and "2" ** in the example above). ** ** The output position list - written to *pp - is a copy of *pp2 with those @@ -131933,7 +131933,7 @@ static int fts3PoslistNearMerge( return res; } -/* +/* ** An instance of this function is used to merge together the (potentially ** large number of) doclists for each term that matches a prefix query. ** See function fts3TermSelectMerge() for details. @@ -131954,7 +131954,7 @@ struct TermSelect { ** from *pp. *pp is then set to point 1 byte past the end of the read varint. ** ** If bDescIdx is false, the value read is added to *pVal before returning. -** If it is true, the value read is subtracted from *pVal before this +** If it is true, the value read is subtracted from *pVal before this ** function returns. */ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint3( @@ -131982,9 +131982,9 @@ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint3( ** end of the value written. ** ** If *pbFirst is zero when this function is called, the value written to -** the buffer is that of parameter iVal. +** the buffer is that of parameter iVal. ** -** If *pbFirst is non-zero when this function is called, then the value +** If *pbFirst is non-zero when this function is called, then the value ** written is either (iVal-*piPrev) (if bDescIdx is zero) or (*piPrev-iVal) ** (if bDescIdx is non-zero). ** @@ -132015,7 +132015,7 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint3( /* ** This macro is used by various functions that merge doclists. The two ** arguments are 64-bit docid values. If the value of the stack variable -** bDescDoclist is 0 when this macro is invoked, then it returns (i1-i2). +** bDescDoclist is 0 when this macro is invoked, then it returns (i1-i2). ** Otherwise, (i2-i1). ** ** Using this makes it easier to write code that can merge doclists that are @@ -132025,7 +132025,7 @@ static void fts3PutDeltaVarint3( /* ** This function does an "OR" merge of two doclists (output contains all -** positions contained in either argument doclist). If the docids in the +** positions contained in either argument doclist). If the docids in the ** input doclists are sorted in ascending order, parameter bDescDoclist ** should be false. If they are sorted in ascending order, it should be ** passed a non-zero value. @@ -132064,12 +132064,12 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge( ** current and previous docid (a positive number - since the list is in ** ascending order). ** - ** The first docid written to the output is therefore encoded using the + ** The first docid written to the output is therefore encoded using the ** same number of bytes as it is in whichever of the input lists it is - ** read from. And each subsequent docid read from the same input list + ** read from. And each subsequent docid read from the same input list ** consumes either the same or less bytes as it did in the input (since ** the difference between it and the previous value in the output must - ** be a positive value less than or equal to the delta value read from + ** be a positive value less than or equal to the delta value read from ** the input list). The same argument applies to all but the first docid ** read from the 'other' list. And to the contents of all position lists ** that will be copied and merged from the input to the output. @@ -132081,9 +132081,9 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge( ** ** The space required to store the output is therefore the sum of the ** sizes of the two inputs, plus enough space for exactly one of the input - ** docids to grow. + ** docids to grow. ** - ** A symetric argument may be made if the doclists are in descending + ** A symetric argument may be made if the doclists are in descending ** order. */ aOut = sqlite3_malloc(n1+n2+FTS3_VARINT_MAX-1); @@ -132124,7 +132124,7 @@ static int fts3DoclistOrMerge( ** exactly nDist tokens before it. ** ** If the docids in the input doclists are sorted in ascending order, -** parameter bDescDoclist should be false. If they are sorted in ascending +** parameter bDescDoclist should be false. If they are sorted in ascending ** order, it should be passed a non-zero value. ** ** The right-hand input doclist is overwritten by this function. @@ -132257,7 +132257,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectFinishMerge(Fts3Table *p, TermSelect *pTS){ int nNew; char *aNew; - int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, + int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, pTS->aaOutput[i], pTS->anOutput[i], aOut, nOut, &aNew, &nNew ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -132324,7 +132324,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge( char *aNew; int nNew; - int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge, + int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge, pTS->aaOutput[iOut], pTS->anOutput[iOut], &aNew, &nNew ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -132335,7 +132335,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge( if( aMerge!=aDoclist ) sqlite3_free(aMerge); sqlite3_free(pTS->aaOutput[iOut]); pTS->aaOutput[iOut] = 0; - + aMerge = aNew; nMerge = nNew; if( (iOut+1)==SizeofArray(pTS->aaOutput) ){ @@ -132352,7 +132352,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge( ** Append SegReader object pNew to the end of the pCsr->apSegment[] array. */ static int fts3SegReaderCursorAppend( - Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr, + Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr, Fts3SegReader *pNew ){ if( (pCsr->nSegment%16)==0 ){ @@ -132391,10 +132391,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement to iterate through segments */ int rc2; /* Result of sqlite3_reset() */ - /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader + /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader ** for the pending-terms. If this is a scan, then this call must be being ** made by an fts4aux module, not an FTS table. In this case calling - ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by + ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by ** fts4aux are not completely populated. So it's easiest to filter these ** calls out here. */ if( iLevel<0 && p->aIndex ){ @@ -132428,10 +132428,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor( if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished; if( isPrefix==0 && isScan==0 ) iLeavesEndBlock = iStartBlock; } - - rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1, + + rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1, (isPrefix==0 && isScan==0), - iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock, + iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock, iEndBlock, zRoot, nRoot, &pSeg ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished; @@ -132447,7 +132447,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor( } /* -** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a +** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a ** single level therein. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor( @@ -132463,7 +132463,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor( ){ assert( iIndex>=0 && iIndex<p->nIndex ); assert( iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL - || iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING + || iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING || iLevel>=0 ); assert( iLevel<FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL ); @@ -132489,20 +132489,20 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursorAddZero( int nTerm, /* Number of bytes in zTerm */ Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr /* Fts3MultiSegReader to modify */ ){ - return fts3SegReaderCursor(p, + return fts3SegReaderCursor(p, iLangid, 0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 0, 0,pCsr ); } /* ** Open an Fts3MultiSegReader to scan the doclist for term zTerm/nTerm. Or, -** if isPrefix is true, to scan the doclist for all terms for which +** if isPrefix is true, to scan the doclist for all terms for which ** zTerm/nTerm is a prefix. If successful, return SQLITE_OK and write ** a pointer to the new Fts3MultiSegReader to *ppSegcsr. Otherwise, return ** an SQLite error code. ** ** It is the responsibility of the caller to free this object by eventually -** passing it to fts3SegReaderCursorFree() +** passing it to fts3SegReaderCursorFree() ** ** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs, otherwise an SQLite error code. ** Output parameter *ppSegcsr is set to 0 if an error occurs. @@ -132527,7 +132527,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor( for(i=1; bFound==0 && i<p->nIndex; i++){ if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm ){ bFound = 1; - rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, + rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 0, 0, pSegcsr ); pSegcsr->bLookup = 1; @@ -132537,7 +132537,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor( for(i=1; bFound==0 && i<p->nIndex; i++){ if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm+1 ){ bFound = 1; - rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, + rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 1, 0, pSegcsr ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -132550,7 +132550,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor( } if( bFound==0 ){ - rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, + rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid, 0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, isPrefix, 0, pSegcsr ); pSegcsr->bLookup = !isPrefix; @@ -132598,7 +132598,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect( rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(p, pSegcsr, &filter); while( SQLITE_OK==rc - && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr)) + && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr)) ){ rc = fts3TermSelectMerge(p, &tsc, pSegcsr->aDoclist, pSegcsr->nDoclist); } @@ -132627,7 +132627,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect( ** ** If the isPoslist argument is true, then it is assumed that the doclist ** contains a position-list following each docid. Otherwise, it is assumed -** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded +** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded ** varints. */ static int fts3DoclistCountDocids(char *aList, int nList){ @@ -132782,7 +132782,7 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod( assert( p->base.zErrMsg==0 ); rc = sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(p->pTokenizer, pCsr->iLangid, - p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr, + p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr, &p->base.zErrMsg ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -132823,15 +132823,15 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod( return fts3NextMethod(pCursor); } -/* -** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this +/* +** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this ** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set. */ static int fts3EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){ return ((Fts3Cursor *)pCursor)->isEof; } -/* +/* ** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to ** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. fts3 ** exposes %_content.docid as the rowid for the virtual table. The @@ -132843,7 +132843,7 @@ static int fts3RowidMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* +/* ** This is the xColumn method, called by SQLite to request a value from ** the row that the supplied cursor currently points to. ** @@ -132867,7 +132867,7 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod( assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<=p->nColumn+2 ); if( iCol==p->nColumn+1 ){ - /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an + /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an ** alias for "rowid", use the xRowid() method to obtain the value. */ sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, pCsr->iPrevId); @@ -132878,7 +132878,7 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod( }else if( iCol==p->nColumn+2 && pCsr->pExpr ){ sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, pCsr->iLangid); }else{ - /* The requested column is either a user column (one that contains + /* The requested column is either a user column (one that contains ** indexed data), or the language-id column. */ rc = fts3CursorSeek(0, pCsr); @@ -132899,8 +132899,8 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod( return rc; } -/* -** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by +/* +** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by ** FTS3 virtual tables. It is invoked by SQLite each time a row is to be ** inserted, updated or deleted. */ @@ -132935,7 +132935,7 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ ** ** Of course, updating the input segments also involves deleting a bunch ** of blocks from the segments table. But this is not considered overhead - ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input + ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input ** segments. */ const u32 nMinMerge = 64; /* Minimum amount of incr-merge work to do */ @@ -132943,8 +132943,8 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table*)pVtab; int rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p); - if( rc==SQLITE_OK - && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16) + if( rc==SQLITE_OK + && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16) && p->nAutoincrmerge && p->nAutoincrmerge!=0xff ){ int mxLevel = 0; /* Maximum relative level value in db */ @@ -132988,7 +132988,7 @@ static int fts3SetHasStat(Fts3Table *p){ } /* -** Implementation of xBegin() method. +** Implementation of xBegin() method. */ static int fts3BeginMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table*)pVtab; @@ -133042,8 +133042,8 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){ char c = 0; while( p>pStart && (c=*p--)==0 ); - while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){ - c = *p--; + while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){ + c = *p--; } if( p>pStart ){ p = &p[2]; } while( *p++&0x80 ); @@ -133055,7 +133055,7 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){ ** offsets() and optimize() SQL functions. ** ** If the value passed as the third argument is a blob of size -** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the +** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the ** output variable *ppCsr and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an error ** message is written to context pContext and SQLITE_ERROR returned. The ** string passed via zFunc is used as part of the error message. @@ -133067,7 +133067,7 @@ static int fts3FunctionArg( Fts3Cursor **ppCsr /* OUT: Store cursor handle here */ ){ Fts3Cursor *pRet; - if( sqlite3_value_type(pVal)!=SQLITE_BLOB + if( sqlite3_value_type(pVal)!=SQLITE_BLOB || sqlite3_value_bytes(pVal)!=sizeof(Fts3Cursor *) ){ char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("illegal first argument to %s", zFunc); @@ -133101,7 +133101,7 @@ static void fts3SnippetFunc( assert( nVal>=1 ); if( nVal>6 ){ - sqlite3_result_error(pContext, + sqlite3_result_error(pContext, "wrong number of arguments to function snippet()", -1); return; } @@ -133141,8 +133141,8 @@ static void fts3OffsetsFunc( } } -/* -** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This +/* +** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This ** function merges all segments in the database to a single segment. ** Example usage is: ** @@ -133251,10 +133251,10 @@ static int fts3RenameMethod( /* At this point it must be known if the %_stat table exists or not. ** So bHasStat may not be 2. */ rc = fts3SetHasStat(p); - + /* As it happens, the pending terms table is always empty here. This is - ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction - ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method + ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction + ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method ** flushes the pending terms table. But leave the (no-op) call to ** PendingTermsFlush() in in case that changes. */ @@ -133378,7 +133378,7 @@ static void hashDestroy(void *p){ } /* -** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are +** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are ** implemented in files fts3_tokenizer1.c, fts3_porter.c and fts3_icu.c ** respectively. The following three forward declarations are for functions ** declared in these files used to retrieve the respective implementations. @@ -133442,10 +133442,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){ /* Load the built-in tokenizers into the hash table */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ if( sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "simple", 7, (void *)pSimple) - || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter) + || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter) #ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE - || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode) + || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode) #endif #ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU || (pIcu && sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "icu", 4, (void *)pIcu)) @@ -133461,11 +133461,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){ } #endif - /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload + /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload ** the two scalar functions. If this is successful, register the ** module with sqlite. */ - if( SQLITE_OK==rc + if( SQLITE_OK==rc && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(db, pHash, "fts3_tokenizer")) && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "snippet", -1)) && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "offsets", 1)) @@ -133499,7 +133499,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){ /* ** Allocate an Fts3MultiSegReader for each token in the expression headed -** by pExpr. +** by pExpr. ** ** An Fts3SegReader object is a cursor that can seek or scan a range of ** entries within a single segment b-tree. An Fts3MultiSegReader uses multiple @@ -133509,7 +133509,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){ ** If the allocated Fts3MultiSegReader just seeks to a single entry in a ** segment b-tree (if the term is not a prefix or it is a prefix for which ** there exists prefix b-tree of the right length) then it may be traversed -** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory +** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory ** doclist and then traversed. */ static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders( @@ -133526,7 +133526,7 @@ static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders( *pnToken += nToken; for(i=0; i<nToken; i++){ Fts3PhraseToken *pToken = &pExpr->pPhrase->aToken[i]; - int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr, + int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr, pToken->z, pToken->n, pToken->isPrefix, &pToken->pSegcsr ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -133725,7 +133725,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){ sqlite3_free(aPoslist); return SQLITE_NOMEM; } - + pPhrase->doclist.pList = aOut; if( fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(&aOut, nDistance, 0, 1, &p1, &p2) ){ pPhrase->doclist.bFreeList = 1; @@ -133749,7 +133749,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){ #define MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS 4 /* -** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query +** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query ** expression to initialize the mechanism for returning rows. Once this ** function has been called successfully on an Fts3Phrase, it may be ** used with fts3EvalPhraseNext() to iterate through the matching docids. @@ -133767,12 +133767,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){ /* Determine if doclists may be loaded from disk incrementally. This is ** possible if the bOptOk argument is true, the FTS doclists will be - ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of + ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of ** MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS or fewer tokens, none of which are are "^first" ** tokens or prefix tokens that cannot use a prefix-index. */ int bHaveIncr = 0; - int bIncrOk = (bOptOk - && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx + int bIncrOk = (bOptOk + && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx && p->nToken<=MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS && p->nToken>0 && p->nToken<=MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS && p->nToken>0 #ifdef SQLITE_TEST @@ -133809,12 +133809,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){ } /* -** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start) +** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start) ** through doclists. It is used by this module to iterate through phrase ** doclists in reverse and by the fts3_write.c module to iterate through ** pending-terms lists when writing to databases with "order=desc". ** -** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or +** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or ** descending (parameter bDescIdx==1) order of docid. Regardless, this ** function iterates from the end of the doclist to the beginning. */ @@ -133917,7 +133917,7 @@ static void fts3EvalDlPhraseNext( ){ char *pIter; /* Used to iterate through aAll */ char *pEnd = &pDL->aAll[pDL->nAll]; /* 1 byte past end of aAll */ - + if( pDL->pNextDocid ){ pIter = pDL->pNextDocid; }else{ @@ -133965,12 +133965,12 @@ struct TokenDoclist { }; /* -** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a +** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a ** multi-token phrase. Advance it to the next matching document in the ** database and populate output variable *p with the details of the new ** entry. Or, if the iterator has reached EOF, set *pbEof to true. ** -** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return +** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return ** SQLITE_OK. */ static int incrPhraseTokenNext( @@ -134011,18 +134011,18 @@ static int incrPhraseTokenNext( /* ** The phrase iterator passed as the second argument: ** -** * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and +** * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and ** ** * does not contain any deferred tokens. ** ** Advance it to the next matching documnent in the database and populate -** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields. +** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields. ** ** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to ** 1 before returning. Otherwise, if no error occurs and the iterator is ** successfully advanced, *pbEof is set to 0. ** -** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return +** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return ** SQLITE_OK. */ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext( @@ -134040,7 +134040,7 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext( assert( p->bIncr==1 ); if( p->nToken==1 && p->bIncr ){ - rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr, + rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr, &pDL->iDocid, &pDL->pList, &pDL->nList ); if( pDL->pList==0 ) bEof = 1; @@ -134070,8 +134070,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext( /* Keep advancing iterators until they all point to the same document */ for(i=0; i<p->nToken; i++){ - while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0 - && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0 + while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0 + && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0 ){ rc = incrPhraseTokenNext(pTab, p, i, &a[i], &bEof); if( DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)>0 ){ @@ -134117,8 +134117,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext( } /* -** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid. -** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return +** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid. +** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return ** SQLITE_OK. ** ** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to @@ -134137,7 +134137,7 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseNext( if( p->bIncr ){ rc = fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(pCsr, p, pbEof); }else if( pCsr->bDesc!=pTab->bDescIdx && pDL->nAll ){ - sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll, + sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll, &pDL->pNextDocid, &pDL->iDocid, &pDL->nList, pbEof ); pDL->pList = pDL->pNextDocid; @@ -134195,7 +134195,7 @@ static void fts3EvalStartReaders( ** Tokens are divided into AND/NEAR clusters. All tokens in a cluster belong ** to phrases that are connected only by AND and NEAR operators (not OR or ** NOT). When determining tokens to defer, each AND/NEAR cluster is considered -** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in +** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in ** Fts3TokenAndCost.pRoot. */ typedef struct Fts3TokenAndCost Fts3TokenAndCost; @@ -134263,7 +134263,7 @@ static void fts3EvalTokenCosts( ** write this value to *pnPage and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return ** an SQLite error code. ** -** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating +** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating ** determining the average size in bytes, B. If B is less than the amount ** of data that will fit on a single leaf page of an intkey table in ** this database, then the average docsize is 1. Otherwise, it is 1 plus @@ -134272,10 +134272,10 @@ static void fts3EvalTokenCosts( static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){ if( pCsr->nRowAvg==0 ){ /* The average document size, which is required to calculate the cost - ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required + ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required ** data from the %_stat table to calculate it. ** - ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3 + ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3 ** varints, where nCol is the number of columns in the FTS3 table. ** The first varint is the number of documents currently stored in ** the table. The following nCol varints contain the total amount of @@ -134307,7 +134307,7 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){ pCsr->nDoc = nDoc; pCsr->nRowAvg = (int)(((nByte / nDoc) + p->nPgsz) / p->nPgsz); - assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 ); + assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 ); rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } @@ -134317,11 +134317,11 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){ } /* -** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be +** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be ** deferred. The array aTC[] has already been populated when this is ** called. ** -** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the +** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the ** expression. Each invocation determines which tokens to defer within ** the cluster with root node pRoot. See comments above the definition ** of struct Fts3TokenAndCost for more details. @@ -134371,8 +134371,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred( assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nDocSize>0 ); - /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order - ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer + /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order + ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer ** to retrieve the entire doclist for the token from the full-text index. ** Load the doclists for tokens that are either: ** @@ -134383,7 +134383,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred( ** ** After each token doclist is loaded, merge it with the others from the ** same phrase and count the number of documents that the merged doclist - ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in + ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in ** any phrase doclist for which 1 or more token doclists have been loaded. ** Let nOther be the number of other phrases for which it is certain that ** one or more tokens will not be deferred. @@ -134399,8 +134399,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred( /* Set pTC to point to the cheapest remaining token. */ for(iTC=0; iTC<nTC; iTC++){ - if( aTC[iTC].pToken && aTC[iTC].pRoot==pRoot - && (!pTC || aTC[iTC].nOvfl<pTC->nOvfl) + if( aTC[iTC].pToken && aTC[iTC].pRoot==pRoot + && (!pTC || aTC[iTC].nOvfl<pTC->nOvfl) ){ pTC = &aTC[iTC]; } @@ -134409,7 +134409,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred( if( ii && pTC->nOvfl>=((nMinEst+(nLoad4/4)-1)/(nLoad4/4))*nDocSize ){ /* The number of overflow pages to load for this (and therefore all - ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages + ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages ** that will be loaded if all subsequent tokens are deferred. */ Fts3PhraseToken *pToken = pTC->pToken; @@ -134418,7 +134418,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred( pToken->pSegcsr = 0; }else{ /* Set nLoad4 to the value of (4^nOther) for the next iteration of the - ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from + ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from ** overflowing the 32-bit integer it is stored in. */ if( ii<12 ) nLoad4 = nLoad4*4; @@ -134536,7 +134536,7 @@ static void fts3EvalInvalidatePoslist(Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){ ** close to a position in the *paPoslist position list are removed. If this ** leaves 0 positions, zero is returned. Otherwise, non-zero. ** -** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit +** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit ** associated with pPhrase. And *pnToken is set to the number of tokens in ** pPhrase. */ @@ -134550,8 +134550,8 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim( int nParam1 = nNear + pPhrase->nToken; int nParam2 = nNear + *pnToken; int nNew; - char *p2; - char *pOut; + char *p2; + char *pOut; int res; assert( pPhrase->doclist.pList ); @@ -134598,19 +134598,19 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim( ** ** 1. Deferred tokens are not taken into account. If a phrase consists ** entirely of deferred tokens, it is assumed to match every row in -** the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all. +** the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all. ** ** Or, if a phrase contains one or more deferred tokens and one or -** more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the +** more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the ** next possible match, considering only non-deferred tokens. In other ** words, if the phrase is "A B C", and "B" is deferred, the expression -** is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C", +** is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C", ** where "*" may match any single token. The position list in this case ** is populated as for "A * C" before returning. ** -** 2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is +** 2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is ** advanced to point to the next row that matches "x AND y". -** +** ** See fts3EvalTestDeferredAndNear() for details on testing if a row is ** really a match, taking into account deferred tokens and NEAR operators. */ @@ -134661,7 +134661,7 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow( } break; } - + case FTSQUERY_OR: { Fts3Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; Fts3Expr *pRight = pExpr->pRight; @@ -134701,9 +134701,9 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow( fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pLeft, pRc); if( pLeft->bEof==0 ){ - while( !*pRc - && !pRight->bEof - && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0 + while( !*pRc + && !pRight->bEof + && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0 ){ fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pRight, pRc); } @@ -134728,14 +134728,14 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow( ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK, or if pExpr is not the root node of a NEAR ** cluster, then this function returns 1 immediately. ** -** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR -** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists -** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression. +** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR +** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists +** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression. ** ** If the current row is a match, the position list associated with each ** phrase in the NEAR expression is edited in place to contain only those ** phrase instances sufficiently close to their peers to satisfy all NEAR -** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not +** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not ** match the current row, 0 is returned. The position lists may or may not ** be edited if 0 is returned. */ @@ -134758,16 +134758,16 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){ ** | | ** "w" "x" ** - ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The + ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The ** left-hand child may be either a phrase or a NEAR node. There are ** no exceptions to this - it's the way the parser in fts3_expr.c works. */ - if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK - && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR + if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK + && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR && pExpr->bEof==0 && (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR) ){ - Fts3Expr *p; + Fts3Expr *p; int nTmp = 0; /* Bytes of temp space */ char *aTmp; /* Temp space for PoslistNearMerge() */ @@ -134817,12 +134817,12 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){ /* ** This function is a helper function for fts3EvalTestDeferredAndNear(). ** Assuming no error occurs or has occurred, It returns non-zero if the -** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr +** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr ** currently points to, or zero if it does not. ** ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op. -** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to -** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is +** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to +** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is ** undefined. */ static int fts3EvalTestExpr( @@ -134841,10 +134841,10 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr( && fts3EvalNearTest(pExpr, pRc) ); - /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for + /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for ** all phrases involved in the NEAR. This is because the snippet(), - ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize - ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries. + ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize + ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries. ** For example if this expression: ** ** ... MATCH 'a OR (b NEAR c)' @@ -134856,8 +134856,8 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr( ** then any snippet() should ony highlight the "a" term, not the "b" ** (as "b" is part of a non-matching NEAR clause). */ - if( bHit==0 - && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR + if( bHit==0 + && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR && (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR) ){ Fts3Expr *p; @@ -134889,7 +134889,7 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr( default: { #ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS4_DEFERRED - if( pCsr->pDeferred + if( pCsr->pDeferred && (pExpr->iDocid==pCsr->iPrevId || pExpr->bDeferred) ){ Fts3Phrase *pPhrase = pExpr->pPhrase; @@ -134945,7 +134945,7 @@ static int fts3EvalTestDeferredAndNear(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc){ ** memory and scan it to determine the position list for each deferred ** token. Then, see if this row is really a match, considering deferred ** tokens and NEAR operators (neither of which were taken into account - ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()). + ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()). */ if( pCsr->pDeferred ){ rc = fts3CursorSeek(0, pCsr); @@ -135000,7 +135000,7 @@ static int fts3EvalNext(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ /* ** Restart interation for expression pExpr so that the next call to -** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental +** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental ** loading or merging of phrase doclists for this iteration. ** ** If *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is @@ -135042,11 +135042,11 @@ static void fts3EvalRestart( } /* -** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the +** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the ** expression rooted at pExpr, the cursor iterates through all rows matched ** by pExpr, calling this function for each row. This function increments ** the values in Fts3Expr.aMI[] according to the position-list currently -** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase +** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase ** expression nodes. */ static void fts3EvalUpdateCounts(Fts3Expr *pExpr){ @@ -135141,9 +135141,9 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats( pCsr->isRequireSeek = 1; pCsr->isMatchinfoNeeded = 1; pCsr->iPrevId = pRoot->iDocid; - }while( pCsr->isEof==0 - && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR - && fts3EvalTestDeferredAndNear(pCsr, &rc) + }while( pCsr->isEof==0 + && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR + && fts3EvalTestDeferredAndNear(pCsr, &rc) ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCsr->isEof==0 ){ @@ -135158,7 +135158,7 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats( pRoot->bEof = bEof; }else{ /* Caution: pRoot may iterate through docids in ascending or descending - ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the + ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the ** do loop can not be written: ** ** do {...} while( pRoot->iDocid<iDocid && rc==SQLITE_OK ); @@ -135175,10 +135175,10 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats( } /* -** This function is used by the matchinfo() module to query a phrase +** This function is used by the matchinfo() module to query a phrase ** expression node for the following information: ** -** 1. The total number of occurrences of the phrase in each column of +** 1. The total number of occurrences of the phrase in each column of ** the FTS table (considering all rows), and ** ** 2. For each column, the number of rows in the table for which the @@ -135192,12 +135192,12 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats( ** ** Caveats: ** -** * If a phrase consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all output +** * If a phrase consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all output ** values are set to the number of documents in the table. In other -** words we assume that very common tokens occur exactly once in each +** words we assume that very common tokens occur exactly once in each ** column of each row of the table. ** -** * If a phrase contains some deferred tokens (and some non-deferred +** * If a phrase contains some deferred tokens (and some non-deferred ** tokens), count the potential occurrence identified by considering ** the non-deferred tokens instead of actual phrase occurrences. ** @@ -135235,14 +135235,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhraseStats( /* ** The expression pExpr passed as the second argument to this function -** must be of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE. +** must be of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE. ** ** The returned value is either NULL or a pointer to a buffer containing ** a position-list indicating the occurrences of the phrase in column iCol -** of the current row. +** of the current row. ** -** More specifically, the returned buffer contains 1 varint for each -** occurrence of the phrase in the column, stored using the normal (delta+2) +** More specifically, the returned buffer contains 1 varint for each +** occurrence of the phrase in the column, stored using the normal (delta+2) ** compression and is terminated by either an 0x01 or 0x00 byte. For example, ** if the requested column contains "a b X c d X X" and the position-list ** for 'X' is requested, the buffer returned may contain: @@ -135264,7 +135264,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( int iThis; sqlite3_int64 iDocid; - /* If this phrase is applies specifically to some column other than + /* If this phrase is applies specifically to some column other than ** column iCol, return a NULL pointer. */ *ppOut = 0; assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<pTab->nColumn ); @@ -135283,8 +135283,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( Fts3Expr *p; /* Used to iterate from pExpr to root */ Fts3Expr *pNear; /* Most senior NEAR ancestor (or pExpr) */ - /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not, - ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid + /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not, + ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid ** pCsr->iPrevId may lie earlier in the doclist buffer. Or, if the ** tree that the node is part of has been marked as EOF, but the node ** itself is not EOF, then it may point to an earlier entry. */ @@ -135311,9 +135311,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPhrase->bIncr==0 ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } - + iMul = ((pCsr->bDesc==bDescDoclist) ? 1 : -1); - while( bTreeEof==1 + while( bTreeEof==1 && pNear->bEof==0 && (DOCID_CMP(pNear->iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId) * iMul)<0 ){ @@ -135336,12 +135336,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( ** last entry in the doclist at pPhrase->doclist.aAll[]. Variable ** iDocid is already set for this entry, so all that is required is ** to set pIter to point to the first byte of the last position-list - ** in the doclist. + ** in the doclist. ** ** It would also be correct to set pIter and iDocid to zero. In ** this case, the first call to sqltie3Fts4DoclistPrev() below - ** would also move the iterator to point to the last entry in the - ** doclist. However, this is expensive, as to do so it has to + ** would also move the iterator to point to the last entry in the + ** doclist. However, this is expensive, as to do so it has to ** iterate through the entire doclist from start to finish (since ** it does not know the docid for the last entry). */ pIter = &pPhrase->doclist.aAll[pPhrase->doclist.nAll-1]; @@ -135349,7 +135349,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( } while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)>0 ) && bEof==0 ){ sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev( - bDescDoclist, pPhrase->doclist.aAll, pPhrase->doclist.nAll, + bDescDoclist, pPhrase->doclist.aAll, pPhrase->doclist.nAll, &pIter, &iDocid, &dummy, &bEof ); } @@ -135360,7 +135360,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist( } while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)<0 ) && bEof==0 ){ sqlite3Fts3DoclistNext( - bDescDoclist, pPhrase->doclist.aAll, pPhrase->doclist.nAll, + bDescDoclist, pPhrase->doclist.aAll, pPhrase->doclist.nAll, &pIter, &iDocid, &bEof ); } @@ -135426,7 +135426,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Corrupt(){ __declspec(dllexport) #endif SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_init( - sqlite3 *db, + sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg, const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi ){ @@ -135519,11 +135519,11 @@ static int fts3auxConnectMethod( */ if( argc!=4 && argc!=5 ) goto bad_args; - zDb = argv[1]; + zDb = argv[1]; nDb = (int)strlen(zDb); if( argc==5 ){ if( nDb==4 && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp("temp", zDb, 4) ){ - zDb = argv[3]; + zDb = argv[3]; nDb = (int)strlen(zDb); zFts3 = argv[4]; }else{ @@ -135587,7 +135587,7 @@ static int fts3auxDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ ** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause. */ static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod( - sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, + sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo ){ int i; @@ -135600,14 +135600,14 @@ static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod( UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab); /* This vtab delivers always results in "ORDER BY term ASC" order. */ - if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 - && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0 + if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 + && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0 && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].desc==0 ){ pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1; } - /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column. + /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column. ** And equality constraints on the hidden "languageid" column. */ for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){ if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable ){ @@ -135688,11 +135688,11 @@ static int fts3auxCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){ static int fts3auxGrowStatArray(Fts3auxCursor *pCsr, int nSize){ if( nSize>pCsr->nStat ){ struct Fts3auxColstats *aNew; - aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat, + aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat, sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * nSize ); if( aNew==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM; - memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0, + memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0, sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * (nSize - pCsr->nStat) ); pCsr->aStat = aNew; @@ -135752,8 +135752,8 @@ static int fts3auxNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){ /* State 1. In this state we are expecting either a 1, indicating ** that the following integer will be a column number, or the - ** start of a position list for column 0. - ** + ** start of a position list for column 0. + ** ** The only difference between state 1 and state 2 is that if the ** integer encountered in state 1 is not 0 or 1, then we need to ** increment the column 0 "nDoc" count for this term. @@ -135866,7 +135866,7 @@ static int fts3auxFilterMethod( pCsr->nStop = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[iLe]); if( pCsr->zStop==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM; } - + if( iLangid>=0 ){ iLangVal = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[iLangid]); @@ -136004,14 +136004,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){ ****************************************************************************** ** ** This module contains code that implements a parser for fts3 query strings -** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported +** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported ** syntax is relatively simple, the whole tokenizer/parser system is -** hand-coded. +** hand-coded. */ #if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3) /* -** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been +** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been ** traditionally used by fts3. Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS ** is defined, then it uses the new syntax. The differences between ** the new and the old syntaxes are: @@ -136020,7 +136020,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){ ** ** b) The new syntax supports the AND and NOT operators. The old does not. ** -** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not +** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not ** supported by the new syntax (it is replaced by the NOT operator). ** ** d) When using the old syntax, the OR operator has a greater precedence @@ -136029,7 +136029,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){ ** ** If compiled with SQLITE_TEST defined, then this module exports the ** symbol "int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses". Setting this variable -** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to +** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to ** non-zero the new syntax is activated. This is so both syntaxes can ** be tested using a single build of testfixture. ** @@ -136058,7 +136058,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){ #ifdef SQLITE_TEST SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0; #else -# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS +# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS # define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 1 # else # define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 0 @@ -136076,7 +136076,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0; /* ** isNot: ** This variable is used by function getNextNode(). When getNextNode() is -** called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a +** called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a ** FTSQUERY_PHRASE with a unary "-" attached to it. i.e. "mysql" in the ** FTS3 query "sqlite -mysql". Otherwise, ParseContext.isNot is set to ** zero. @@ -136095,7 +136095,7 @@ struct ParseContext { }; /* -** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function. +** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function. ** ** The standard isspace() can be awkward to use safely, because although it ** is defined to accept an argument of type int, its behavior when passed @@ -136111,7 +136111,7 @@ static int fts3isspace(char c){ /* ** Allocate nByte bytes of memory using sqlite3_malloc(). If successful, -** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful, +** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful, ** return NULL. */ static void *fts3MallocZero(int nByte){ @@ -136159,7 +136159,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParse(ParseContext *, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **, int *); ** structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE containing a phrase consisting of this ** single token and set *ppExpr to point to it. If the end of the buffer is ** reached before a token is found, set *ppExpr to zero. It is the -** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated +** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated ** Fts3Expr structure (if any) by passing it to sqlite3_free(). ** ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation @@ -136213,8 +136213,8 @@ static int getNextToken( } while( 1 ){ - if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses - && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-' + if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses + && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-' ){ pParse->isNot = 1; iStart--; @@ -136234,7 +136234,7 @@ static int getNextToken( pModule->xClose(pCursor); } - + *ppExpr = pRet; return rc; } @@ -136256,7 +136256,7 @@ static void *fts3ReallocOrFree(void *pOrig, int nNew){ ** Buffer zInput, length nInput, contains the contents of a quoted string ** that appeared as part of an fts3 query expression. Neither quote character ** is included in the buffer. This function attempts to tokenize the entire -** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE +** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE ** containing the results. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppExpr set to point at the @@ -136281,7 +136281,7 @@ static int getNextString( int nToken = 0; /* The final Fts3Expr data structure, including the Fts3Phrase, - ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single + ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single ** allocation so that the expression can be freed with a single call to ** sqlite3_free(). Setting this up requires a two pass approach. ** @@ -136290,7 +136290,7 @@ static int getNextString( ** to assemble data in two dynamic buffers: ** ** Buffer p: Points to the Fts3Expr structure, followed by the Fts3Phrase - ** structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken + ** structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken ** structures. This pass only populates the Fts3PhraseToken array. ** ** Buffer zTemp: Contains copies of all tokens. @@ -136375,7 +136375,7 @@ no_mem: } /* -** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr +** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr ** structure, or set to 0 if the end of the input buffer is reached. ** ** Returns an SQLite error code. SQLITE_OK if everything works, SQLITE_NOMEM @@ -136411,7 +136411,7 @@ static int getNextNode( pParse->isNot = 0; /* Skip over any whitespace before checking for a keyword, an open or - ** close bracket, or a quoted string. + ** close bracket, or a quoted string. */ while( nInput>0 && fts3isspace(*zInput) ){ nInput--; @@ -136447,10 +136447,10 @@ static int getNextNode( /* At this point this is probably a keyword. But for that to be true, ** the next byte must contain either whitespace, an open or close - ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF. + ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF. */ cNext = zInput[nKey]; - if( fts3isspace(cNext) + if( fts3isspace(cNext) || cNext=='"' || cNext=='(' || cNext==')' || cNext==0 ){ pRet = (Fts3Expr *)fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr)); @@ -136500,15 +136500,15 @@ static int getNextNode( } } - /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or + /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or ** the end of the input. Read a regular token using the sqlite3_tokenizer ** interface. Before doing so, figure out if there is an explicit - ** column specifier for the token. + ** column specifier for the token. ** ** TODO: Strangely, it is not possible to associate a column specifier ** with a quoted phrase, only with a single token. Not sure if this was ** an implementation artifact or an intentional decision when fts3 was - ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the + ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the ** limitation. */ iCol = pParse->iDefaultCol; @@ -136516,8 +136516,8 @@ static int getNextNode( for(ii=0; ii<pParse->nCol; ii++){ const char *zStr = pParse->azCol[ii]; int nStr = (int)strlen(zStr); - if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':' - && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0 + if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':' + && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0 ){ iCol = ii; iColLen = (int)((zInput - z) + nStr + 1); @@ -136562,7 +136562,7 @@ static int opPrecedence(Fts3Expr *p){ } /* -** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query +** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query ** expression tree being parsed. pPrev is the expression node most recently ** inserted into the tree. This function adds pNew, which is always a binary ** operator node, into the expression tree based on the relative precedence @@ -136592,7 +136592,7 @@ static void insertBinaryOperator( /* ** Parse the fts3 query expression found in buffer z, length n. This function -** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched +** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched ** closing bracket - ')' - is encountered. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned, *ppExpr is set to point to the @@ -136624,8 +136624,8 @@ static int fts3ExprParse( if( p ){ int isPhrase; - if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses - && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot + if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses + && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot ){ /* Create an implicit NOT operator. */ Fts3Expr *pNot = fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr)); @@ -136746,13 +136746,13 @@ exprparse_out: } /* -** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed +** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed ** as the only argument is more than nMaxDepth. */ static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( p ){ - if( nMaxDepth<0 ){ + if( nMaxDepth<0 ){ rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG; }else{ rc = fts3ExprCheckDepth(p->pLeft, nMaxDepth-1); @@ -136767,12 +136767,12 @@ static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){ /* ** This function attempts to transform the expression tree at (*pp) to ** an equivalent but more balanced form. The tree is modified in place. -** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the -** new root expression node. +** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the +** new root expression node. ** ** nMaxDepth is the maximum allowable depth of the balanced sub-tree. ** -** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and +** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and ** expression (*pp) freed. */ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){ @@ -136886,7 +136886,7 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){ } pRoot = p; }else{ - /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array + /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array ** and pFree list. Everything else is cleaned up by the call to ** sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(pRoot) below. */ Fts3Expr *pDel; @@ -136917,9 +136917,9 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){ ** differences: ** ** 1. It does not do expression rebalancing. -** 2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the +** 2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the ** maximum allowable depth. -** 3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an +** 3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an ** expression tree. It should be deleted using sqlite3Fts3ExprFree() ** in this case. */ @@ -136958,7 +136958,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced( if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sParse.nNest ){ rc = SQLITE_ERROR; } - + return rc; } @@ -136977,7 +136977,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced( ** The first parameter, pTokenizer, is passed the fts3 tokenizer module to ** use to normalize query tokens while parsing the expression. The azCol[] ** array, which is assumed to contain nCol entries, should contain the names -** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right. +** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right. ** Column names must be nul-terminated strings. ** ** The iDefaultCol parameter should be passed the index of the table column @@ -137000,7 +137000,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse( int rc = fts3ExprParseUnbalanced( pTokenizer, iLangid, azCol, bFts4, nCol, iDefaultCol, z, n, ppExpr ); - + /* Rebalance the expression. And check that its depth does not exceed ** SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && *ppExpr ){ @@ -137015,7 +137015,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse( *ppExpr = 0; if( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ){ *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf( - "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", + "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH ); rc = SQLITE_ERROR; @@ -137078,8 +137078,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(Fts3Expr *pDel){ ** Function to query the hash-table of tokenizers (see README.tokenizers). */ static int queryTestTokenizer( - sqlite3 *db, - const char *zName, + sqlite3 *db, + const char *zName, const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp ){ int rc; @@ -137105,11 +137105,11 @@ static int queryTestTokenizer( /* ** Return a pointer to a buffer containing a text representation of the ** expression passed as the first argument. The buffer is obtained from -** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use +** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use ** sqlite3_free() to release the memory. If an OOM condition is encountered, ** NULL is returned. ** -** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to +** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to ** the returned expression text and then freed using sqlite3_free(). */ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){ @@ -137123,7 +137123,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){ zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf( "%zPHRASE %d 0", zBuf, pPhrase->iColumn); for(i=0; zBuf && i<pPhrase->nToken; i++){ - zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf, + zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf, pPhrase->aToken[i].n, pPhrase->aToken[i].z, (pPhrase->aToken[i].isPrefix?"+":"") ); @@ -137156,7 +137156,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){ } /* -** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the +** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the ** expression parser. It should be called as follows: ** ** fts3_exprtest(<tokenizer>, <expr>, <column 1>, ...); @@ -137187,7 +137187,7 @@ static void fts3ExprTest( sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context); if( argc<3 ){ - sqlite3_result_error(context, + sqlite3_result_error(context, "Usage: fts3_exprtest(tokenizer, expr, col1, ...", -1 ); return; @@ -137256,15 +137256,15 @@ exprtest_out: } /* -** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest() -** with database connection db. +** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest() +** with database connection db. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprInitTestInterface(sqlite3* db){ int rc = sqlite3_create_function( db, "fts3_exprtest", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, 0, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0 ); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ - rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance", + rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void *)1, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0 ); } @@ -137326,8 +137326,8 @@ static void fts3HashFree(void *p){ ** fields of the Hash structure. ** ** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized. -** keyClass is one of the constants -** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass +** keyClass is one of the constants +** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass ** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is ** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and ** false if it should just use the supplied pointer. @@ -137404,7 +137404,7 @@ static int fts3BinCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){ /* ** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class. ** -** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some +** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some ** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation: ** ** The name of the function is "ftsHashFunction". The function takes a @@ -137464,7 +137464,7 @@ static void fts3HashInsertElement( /* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets. -** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail +** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail ** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails. ** ** Return non-zero if a memory allocation error occurs. @@ -137509,7 +137509,7 @@ static Fts3HashElem *fts3FindElementByHash( count = pEntry->count; xCompare = ftsCompareFunction(pH->keyClass); while( count-- && elem ){ - if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){ + if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){ return elem; } elem = elem->next; @@ -137528,7 +137528,7 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash( ){ struct _fts3ht *pEntry; if( elem->prev ){ - elem->prev->next = elem->next; + elem->prev->next = elem->next; }else{ pH->first = elem->next; } @@ -137556,8 +137556,8 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash( } SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem( - const Fts3Hash *pH, - const void *pKey, + const Fts3Hash *pH, + const void *pKey, int nKey ){ int h; /* A hash on key */ @@ -137571,7 +137571,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem( return fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1)); } -/* +/* ** Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key ** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is ** found, or NULL if there is no match. @@ -137743,7 +137743,7 @@ static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){ /* ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input ** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor -** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in +** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in ** *ppCursor. */ static int porterOpen( @@ -137796,7 +137796,7 @@ static const char cType[] = { /* ** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in ** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according -** to Porter ruls. +** to Porter ruls. ** ** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'. ** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant, @@ -137916,11 +137916,11 @@ static int star_oh(const char *z){ /* ** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem -** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the +** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the ** ending to zTo. ** ** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo -** is in normal order. +** is in normal order. ** ** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not ** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and @@ -137989,9 +137989,9 @@ static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){ ** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and ** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes ** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies. -** -** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not -** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just +** +** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not +** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just ** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII ** case folding. ** @@ -138036,11 +138036,11 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){ } } - /* Step 1b */ + /* Step 1b */ z2 = z; if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){ /* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */ - }else if( + }else if( (stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel)) && z!=z2 ){ @@ -138079,7 +138079,7 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){ stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0); break; case 'l': - if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0) + if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0) && !stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0) && !stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0) && !stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0) @@ -138354,7 +138354,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PorterTokenizerModule( /* #include <string.h> */ /* -** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying +** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying ** hash table. This function may be called as follows: ** ** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>); @@ -138515,7 +138515,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer( if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ *pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer"); }else{ - (*ppTok)->pModule = m; + (*ppTok)->pModule = m; } sqlite3_free((void *)aArg); } @@ -138531,7 +138531,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer( /* #include <string.h> */ /* -** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers +** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers ** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This ** function must be called with two or more arguments: ** @@ -138543,9 +138543,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer( ** ** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl ** list. For each token in the <input-string>, three elements are -** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the +** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the ** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the -** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example, +** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example, ** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer: ** ** SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how'); @@ -138553,7 +138553,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer( ** will return the string: ** ** "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}" -** +** */ static void testFunc( sqlite3_context *context, @@ -138648,8 +138648,8 @@ finish: static int registerTokenizer( - sqlite3 *db, - char *zName, + sqlite3 *db, + char *zName, const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p ){ int rc; @@ -138670,8 +138670,8 @@ int registerTokenizer( static int queryTokenizer( - sqlite3 *db, - char *zName, + sqlite3 *db, + char *zName, const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp ){ int rc; @@ -138752,23 +138752,23 @@ static void intTestFunc( /* ** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of ** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must -** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy +** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy ** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to: ** ** sqlite3Fts3HashInit(pHash, FTS3_HASH_STRING, 1); ** ** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above ** scalarFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is -** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header -** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both +** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header +** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both ** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash. ** ** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name ** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable( - sqlite3 *db, - Fts3Hash *pHash, + sqlite3 *db, + Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *zName ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -138920,7 +138920,7 @@ static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){ /* ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor -** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in +** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in ** *ppCursor. */ static int simpleOpen( @@ -139075,8 +139075,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule( ** ** input = <string> ** -** The virtual table module tokenizes this <string>, using the FTS3 -** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE +** The virtual table module tokenizes this <string>, using the FTS3 +** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ** statement and returns one row for each token in the result. With ** fields set as follows: ** @@ -139144,7 +139144,7 @@ static int fts3tokQueryTokenizer( /* ** The second argument, argv[], is an array of pointers to nul-terminated -** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a +** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a ** single block of memory. It then dequotes any of the strings that appear ** to be quoted. ** @@ -139200,7 +139200,7 @@ static int fts3tokDequoteArray( ** and xCreate are identical operations. ** ** argv[0]: module name -** argv[1]: database name +** argv[1]: database name ** argv[2]: table name ** argv[3]: first argument (tokenizer name) */ @@ -139280,16 +139280,16 @@ static int fts3tokDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ ** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause. */ static int fts3tokBestIndexMethod( - sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, + sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo ){ int i; UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab); for(i=0; i<pInfo->nConstraint; i++){ - if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable - && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0 - && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ + if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable + && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0 + && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ ){ pInfo->idxNum = 1; pInfo->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex = 1; @@ -139519,7 +139519,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){ ** This file is part of the SQLite FTS3 extension module. Specifically, ** this file contains code to insert, update and delete rows from FTS3 ** tables. It also contains code to merge FTS3 b-tree segments. Some -** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query +** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query ** code in fts3.c. */ @@ -139534,7 +139534,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){ /* ** When full-text index nodes are loaded from disk, the buffer that they -** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end +** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end ** of it. i.e. if a full-text index node is 900 bytes in size, then a buffer ** of 920 bytes is allocated for it. ** @@ -139551,10 +139551,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){ ** method before retrieving all query results (as may happen, for example, ** if a query has a LIMIT clause). ** -** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD +** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD ** bytes and larger. Nodes are loaded in chunks of FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE bytes. -** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values -** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful +** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values +** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful ** for testing purposes. ** ** If this module is built with SQLITE_TEST defined, these constants may @@ -139567,7 +139567,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4; # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE test_fts3_node_chunksize # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold #else -# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024) +# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024) # define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD (FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE*4) #endif @@ -139581,7 +139581,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4; /* ** If FTS_LOG_MERGES is defined, call sqlite3_log() to report each automatic -** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for +** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for ** debugging FTS only, it should not usually be turned on in production ** systems. */ @@ -139667,7 +139667,7 @@ struct Fts3SegReader { char *aDoclist; /* Pointer to doclist of current entry */ int nDoclist; /* Size of doclist in current entry */ - /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate + /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate ** through the current doclist (aDoclist/nDoclist). */ char *pOffsetList; @@ -139712,11 +139712,11 @@ struct SegmentWriter { ** fts3NodeFree() ** ** When a b+tree is written to the database (either as a result of a merge -** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the +** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the ** database file as soon as they are completely populated. The interior of ** the tree is assembled in memory and written out only once all leaves have ** been populated and stored. This is Ok, as the b+-tree fanout is usually -** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively +** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively ** little memory. */ struct SegmentNode { @@ -139737,7 +139737,7 @@ struct SegmentNode { */ #define SQL_DELETE_CONTENT 0 #define SQL_IS_EMPTY 1 -#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2 +#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGMENTS 3 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGDIR 4 #define SQL_DELETE_ALL_DOCSIZE 5 @@ -139785,7 +139785,7 @@ struct SegmentNode { ** Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned and *pp is set to 0. ** ** If argument apVal is not NULL, then it must point to an array with -** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound +** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound ** parameters. The values are bound to the statements parameters before ** returning. */ @@ -139809,7 +139809,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt( /* 10 */ "SELECT coalesce((SELECT max(blockid) FROM %Q.'%q_segments') + 1, 1)", /* 11 */ "REPLACE INTO %Q.'%q_segdir' VALUES(?,?,?,?,?,?)", - /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ + /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ /* 12 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root " "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? ORDER BY idx ASC", /* 13 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root " @@ -139842,7 +139842,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt( " ORDER BY (level %% 1024) ASC LIMIT 1", /* Estimate the upper limit on the number of leaf nodes in a new segment -** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See +** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See ** function sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge() for details. */ /* 29 */ "SELECT 2 * total(1 + leaves_end_block - start_block) " " FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx < ?", @@ -139857,7 +139857,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt( /* 31 */ "UPDATE %Q.'%q_segdir' SET idx = ? WHERE level=? AND idx=?", /* SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR -** Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute +** Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute ** level :1 with index value :2. */ /* 32 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root " "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx = ?", @@ -139881,7 +139881,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt( ** Return the largest relative level in the FTS index or indexes. */ /* 36 */ "SELECT max( level %% 1024 ) FROM %Q.'%q_segdir'", - /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ + /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/ /* 37 */ "SELECT level, idx, end_block " "FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? " "ORDER BY level DESC, idx ASC", @@ -139897,7 +139897,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt( assert( SizeofArray(azSql)==SizeofArray(p->aStmt) ); assert( eStmt<SizeofArray(azSql) && eStmt>=0 ); - + pStmt = p->aStmt[eStmt]; if( !pStmt ){ char *zSql; @@ -140000,7 +140000,7 @@ static void fts3SqlExec( sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; int rc; if( *pRC ) return; - rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal); + rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_step(pStmt); rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt); @@ -140010,22 +140010,22 @@ static void fts3SqlExec( /* -** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive -** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before +** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive +** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before ** writing data to the fts3 table. If this lock is not acquired first, then ** the caller may end up attempting to take this lock as part of committing -** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or +** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or ** LOCKED_SHAREDCACHEto a COMMIT command. ** -** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when -** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back. -** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. -** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly +** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when +** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back. +** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. +** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly ** instead of accessing them via FTS. */ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; - + if( p->nPendingData==0 ){ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0); @@ -140042,7 +140042,7 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){ /* ** FTS maintains a separate indexes for each language-id (a 32-bit integer). ** Within each language id, a separate index is maintained to store the -** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS +** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS ** "prefix=" option). And each index consists of multiple levels ("relative ** levels"). ** @@ -140052,14 +140052,14 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){ ** separate component values into the single 64-bit integer value that ** can be used to query the %_segdir table. ** -** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024 +** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024 ** 64-bit integer level values ("absolute levels"). The main terms index ** for language-id 0 is allocate values 0-1023. The first prefix index ** (if any) for language-id 0 is allocated values 1024-2047. And so on. ** Language 1 indexes are allocated immediately following language 0. ** ** So, for a system with nPrefix prefix indexes configured, the block of -** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index +** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index ** iIndex starts at absolute level ((iLangid * (nPrefix+1) + iIndex) * 1024). */ static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel( @@ -140080,7 +140080,7 @@ static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel( /* ** Set *ppStmt to a statement handle that may be used to iterate through ** all rows in the %_segdir table, from oldest to newest. If successful, -** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement, +** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement, ** return an SQLite error code. ** ** There is only ever one instance of this SQL statement compiled for @@ -140111,16 +140111,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3AllSegdirs( if( iLevel<0 ){ /* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? ORDER BY ..." */ rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL_RANGE, &pStmt, 0); - if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0)); - sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, + sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1) ); } }else{ /* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level = ? ORDER BY ..." */ rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0); - if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ + if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex,iLevel)); } } @@ -140264,7 +140264,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAddOne( } if( fts3PendingListAppend(&pList, p->iPrevDocid, iCol, iPos, &rc) ){ if( pList==fts3HashInsert(pHash, zToken, nToken, pList) ){ - /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only + /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only ** happen if there was no previous entry for this token. */ assert( 0==fts3HashFind(pHash, zToken, nToken) ); @@ -140310,7 +140310,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd( assert( pTokenizer && pModule ); /* If the user has inserted a NULL value, this function may be called with - ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and + ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and ** return early. */ if( zText==0 ){ *pnWord = 0; @@ -140341,8 +140341,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd( rc = fts3PendingTermsAddOne( p, iCol, iPos, &p->aIndex[0].hPending, zToken, nToken ); - - /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too + + /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too ** short for. */ for(i=1; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<p->nIndex; i++){ struct Fts3Index *pIndex = &p->aIndex[i]; @@ -140358,8 +140358,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd( return (rc==SQLITE_DONE ? SQLITE_OK : rc); } -/* -** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to +/* +** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to ** fts3PendingTermsAdd() are to add term/position-list pairs for the ** contents of the document with docid iDocid. */ @@ -140376,9 +140376,9 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid( ** buffer was half empty, that would let the less frequent terms ** generate longer doclists. */ - if( iDocid<=p->iPrevDocid + if( iDocid<=p->iPrevDocid || p->iPrevLangid!=iLangid - || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData + || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData ){ int rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; @@ -140389,7 +140389,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid( } /* -** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables. +** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){ int i; @@ -140414,9 +140414,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){ ** fts3InsertData(). Parameter iDocid is the docid of the new row. */ static int fts3InsertTerms( - Fts3Table *p, - int iLangid, - sqlite3_value **apVal, + Fts3Table *p, + int iLangid, + sqlite3_value **apVal, u32 *aSz ){ int i; /* Iterator variable */ @@ -140479,7 +140479,7 @@ static int fts3InsertData( rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_CONTENT_INSERT, &pContentInsert, &apVal[1]); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && p->zLanguageid ){ rc = sqlite3_bind_int( - pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2, + pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2, sqlite3_value_int(apVal[p->nColumn+4]) ); } @@ -140506,8 +140506,8 @@ static int fts3InsertData( if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } - /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the - ** new docid value. + /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the + ** new docid value. */ sqlite3_step(pContentInsert); rc = sqlite3_reset(pContentInsert); @@ -140557,7 +140557,7 @@ static int langidFromSelect(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_stmt *pSelect){ ** (an integer) of a row about to be deleted. Remove all terms from the ** full-text index. */ -static void fts3DeleteTerms( +static void fts3DeleteTerms( int *pRC, /* Result code */ Fts3Table *p, /* The FTS table to delete from */ sqlite3_value *pRowid, /* The docid to be deleted */ @@ -140603,7 +140603,7 @@ static void fts3DeleteTerms( */ static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int); -/* +/* ** This function allocates a new level iLevel index in the segdir table. ** Usually, indexes are allocated within a level sequentially starting ** with 0, so the allocated index is one greater than the value returned @@ -140612,17 +140612,17 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int); ** SELECT max(idx) FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iLevel ** ** However, if there are already FTS3_MERGE_COUNT indexes at the requested -** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the +** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the ** allocated index is 0. ** ** If successful, *piIdx is set to the allocated index slot and SQLITE_OK ** returned. Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned. */ static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx( - Fts3Table *p, + Fts3Table *p, int iLangid, /* Language id */ int iIndex, /* Index for p->aIndex */ - int iLevel, + int iLevel, int *piIdx ){ int rc; /* Return Code */ @@ -140670,7 +140670,7 @@ static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx( ** This function reads data from a single row of the %_segments table. The ** specific row is identified by the iBlockid parameter. If paBlob is not ** NULL, then a buffer is allocated using sqlite3_malloc() and populated -** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the +** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the ** identified table row is. Whether or not paBlob is NULL, *pnBlob is set ** to the size of the blob in bytes before returning. ** @@ -140747,14 +140747,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(Fts3Table *p){ sqlite3_blob_close(p->pSegments); p->pSegments = 0; } - + static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){ int nRead; /* Number of bytes to read */ int rc; /* Return code */ nRead = MIN(pReader->nNode - pReader->nPopulate, FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE); rc = sqlite3_blob_read( - pReader->pBlob, + pReader->pBlob, &pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate], nRead, pReader->nPopulate @@ -140774,10 +140774,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){ static int fts3SegReaderRequire(Fts3SegReader *pReader, char *pFrom, int nByte){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; - assert( !pReader->pBlob + assert( !pReader->pBlob || (pFrom>=pReader->aNode && pFrom<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]) ); - while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK + while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK && (pFrom - pReader->aNode + nByte)>pReader->nPopulate ){ rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader); @@ -140803,7 +140803,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSetEof(Fts3SegReader *pSeg){ ** SQLITE_DONE. Otherwise, an SQLite error code. */ static int fts3SegReaderNext( - Fts3Table *p, + Fts3Table *p, Fts3SegReader *pReader, int bIncr ){ @@ -140838,7 +140838,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext( fts3SegReaderSetEof(pReader); - /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf + /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf ** blocks have already been traversed. */ assert( pReader->iCurrentBlock<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock ); if( pReader->iCurrentBlock>=pReader->iLeafEndBlock ){ @@ -140846,7 +140846,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext( } rc = sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock( - p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode, + p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode, (bIncr ? &pReader->nPopulate : 0) ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; @@ -140862,13 +140862,13 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext( rc = fts3SegReaderRequire(pReader, pNext, FTS3_VARINT_MAX*2); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; - - /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is + + /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is ** safe (no risk of overread) even if the node data is corrupted. */ pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nPrefix); pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nSuffix); - if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0 - || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] + if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0 + || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] ){ return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB; } @@ -140894,10 +140894,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext( pReader->pOffsetList = 0; /* Check that the doclist does not appear to extend past the end of the - ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either + ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either ** of these statements is untrue, then the data structure is corrupt. */ - if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] + if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode] || (pReader->nPopulate==0 && pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist-1]) ){ return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB; @@ -140918,7 +140918,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){ pReader->iDocid = 0; pReader->nOffsetList = 0; sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(0, - pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList, + pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList, &pReader->iDocid, &pReader->nOffsetList, &bEof ); }else{ @@ -140934,8 +140934,8 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){ /* ** Advance the SegReader to point to the next docid in the doclist ** associated with the current term. -** -** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then +** +** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then ** *ppOffsetList is set to point to the first column-offset list ** in the doclist entry (i.e. immediately past the docid varint). ** *pnOffsetList is set to the length of the set of column-offset @@ -140978,22 +140978,22 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid( ** following block advances it to point one byte past the end of ** the same offset list. */ while( 1 ){ - + /* The following line of code (and the "p++" below the while() loop) is - ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired + ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired ** position. The exception is if this node is being loaded from disk ** incrementally and pointer "p" now points to the first byte past ** the populated part of pReader->aNode[]. */ while( *p | c ) c = *p++ & 0x80; assert( *p==0 ); - + if( pReader->pBlob==0 || p<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate] ) break; rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; } p++; - + /* If required, populate the output variables with a pointer to and the ** size of the previous offset-list. */ @@ -141004,7 +141004,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid( /* List may have been edited in place by fts3EvalNearTrim() */ while( p<pEnd && *p==0 ) p++; - + /* If there are no more entries in the doclist, set pOffsetList to ** NULL. Otherwise, set Fts3SegReader.iDocid to the next docid and ** Fts3SegReader.pOffsetList to point to the next offset list before @@ -141031,7 +141031,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid( SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl( - Fts3Cursor *pCsr, + Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3MultiSegReader *pMsr, int *pnOvfl ){ @@ -141046,8 +141046,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl( for(ii=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && ii<pMsr->nSegment; ii++){ Fts3SegReader *pReader = pMsr->apSegment[ii]; - if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader) - && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader) + if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader) + && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader) ){ sqlite3_int64 jj; for(jj=pReader->iStartBlock; jj<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock; jj++){ @@ -141065,7 +141065,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl( } /* -** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the +** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the ** second argument. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFree(Fts3SegReader *pReader){ @@ -141214,7 +141214,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending( }else{ /* The query is a simple term lookup that matches at most one term in - ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup. + ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup. ** ** Because the stack address of pE may be accessed via the aElem pointer ** below, the "Fts3HashElem *pE" must be declared so that it is valid @@ -141248,7 +141248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending( } /* -** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures. +** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures. ** Comparison is as follows: ** ** 1) EOF is greater than not EOF. @@ -141319,7 +141319,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderDoclistCmpRev(Fts3SegReader *pLhs, Fts3SegReader *pRhs){ /* ** Compare the term that the Fts3SegReader object passed as the first argument -** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm. +** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm. ** ** If the pSeg iterator is already at EOF, return 0. Otherwise, return ** -ve if the pSeg term is less than zTerm/nTerm, 0 if the two terms are @@ -141380,7 +141380,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSort( #endif } -/* +/* ** Insert a record into the %_segments table. */ static int fts3WriteSegment( @@ -141421,7 +141421,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, int *pnMax){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** Insert a record into the %_segdir table. */ static int fts3WriteSegdir( @@ -141458,7 +141458,7 @@ static int fts3WriteSegdir( /* ** Return the size of the common prefix (if any) shared by zPrev and -** zNext, in bytes. For example, +** zNext, in bytes. For example, ** ** fts3PrefixCompress("abc", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 3 ** fts3PrefixCompress("abX", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 2 @@ -141482,7 +141482,7 @@ static int fts3PrefixCompress( */ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */ - SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */ + SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */ int isCopyTerm, /* True if zTerm/nTerm is transient */ const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */ int nTerm /* Size of term in bytes */ @@ -141491,7 +141491,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( int rc; SegmentNode *pNew; - /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if + /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if ** this is possible. */ if( pTree ){ @@ -141511,8 +141511,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( ** and the static node buffer (p->nNodeSize bytes) is not large ** enough. Use a separately malloced buffer instead This wastes ** p->nNodeSize bytes, but since this scenario only comes about when - ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB, - ** this is not expected to be a serious problem. + ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB, + ** this is not expected to be a serious problem. */ assert( pTree->aData==(char *)&pTree[1] ); pTree->aData = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(nReq); @@ -141556,7 +141556,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( ** If this is the first node in the tree, the term is added to it. ** ** Otherwise, the term is not added to the new node, it is left empty for - ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree + ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree ** has no parent, one is created here. */ pNew = (SegmentNode *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(SegmentNode) + p->nNodeSize); @@ -141581,7 +141581,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( pTree->zMalloc = 0; }else{ pNew->pLeftmost = pNew; - rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm); + rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm); } *ppTree = pNew; @@ -141592,8 +141592,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm( ** Helper function for fts3NodeWrite(). */ static int fts3TreeFinishNode( - SegmentNode *pTree, - int iHeight, + SegmentNode *pTree, + int iHeight, sqlite3_int64 iLeftChild ){ int nStart; @@ -141606,15 +141606,15 @@ static int fts3TreeFinishNode( /* ** Write the buffer for the segment node pTree and all of its peers to the -** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of -** pTree and its peers to the database. +** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of +** pTree and its peers to the database. ** ** Except, if pTree is a root node, do not write it to the database. Instead, ** set output variables *paRoot and *pnRoot to contain the root node. ** ** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and output variable *piLast is ** set to the largest blockid written to the database (or zero if no -** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is +** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is ** returned. */ static int fts3NodeWrite( @@ -141642,7 +141642,7 @@ static int fts3NodeWrite( for(pIter=pTree->pLeftmost; pIter && rc==SQLITE_OK; pIter=pIter->pRight){ int nStart = fts3TreeFinishNode(pIter, iHeight, iNextLeaf); int nWrite = pIter->nData - nStart; - + rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, iNextFree, &pIter->aData[nStart], nWrite); iNextFree++; iNextLeaf += (pIter->nEntry+1); @@ -141688,7 +141688,7 @@ static void fts3NodeFree(SegmentNode *pTree){ */ static int fts3SegWriterAdd( Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */ - SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */ + SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */ int isCopyTerm, /* True if buffer zTerm must be copied */ const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */ int nTerm, /* Size of term in bytes */ @@ -141848,12 +141848,12 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush( pWriter->iFirst, pWriter->iFree, &iLast, &zRoot, &nRoot); } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ - rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, + rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, pWriter->iFirst, iLastLeaf, iLast, pWriter->nLeafData, zRoot, nRoot); } }else{ /* The entire tree fits on the root node. Write it to the segdir table. */ - rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, + rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx, 0, 0, 0, pWriter->nLeafData, pWriter->aData, pWriter->nData); } p->nLeafAdd++; @@ -141861,7 +141861,7 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush( } /* -** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the +** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the ** first argument. */ static void fts3SegWriterFree(SegmentWriter *pWriter){ @@ -141911,9 +141911,9 @@ static int fts3IsEmpty(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pRowid, int *pisEmpty){ ** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if not. */ static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel( - Fts3Table *p, + Fts3Table *p, int iLangid, - int iIndex, + int iIndex, sqlite3_int64 *pnMax ){ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; @@ -141929,7 +141929,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel( rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0)); - sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, + sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1) ); if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){ @@ -141958,7 +141958,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentIsMaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, i64 iAbsLevel, int *pbMax){ int rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, iAbsLevel+1); - sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, + sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2, ((iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL)+1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL ); @@ -141996,9 +141996,9 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegment( ** This function is used after merging multiple segments into a single large ** segment to delete the old, now redundant, segment b-trees. Specifically, ** it: -** -** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with -** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third +** +** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with +** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third ** argument, and ** ** 2) deletes all %_segdir entries with level iLevel, or all %_segdir @@ -142030,7 +142030,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir( rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_RANGE, &pDelete, 0); if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0)); - sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2, + sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1) ); } @@ -142052,7 +142052,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir( } /* -** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains +** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains ** a position list that may (or may not) feature multiple columns. This ** function adjusts the pointer *ppList and the length *pnList so that they ** identify the subset of the position list that corresponds to column iCol. @@ -142079,7 +142079,7 @@ static void fts3ColumnFilter( while( 1 ){ char c = 0; while( p<pEnd && (c | *p)&0xFE ) c = *p++ & 0x80; - + if( iCol==iCurrent ){ nList = (int)(p - pList); break; @@ -142159,7 +142159,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext( rc = fts3SegReaderNextDocid(p, apSegment[0], &pList, &nList); j = 1; - while( rc==SQLITE_OK + while( rc==SQLITE_OK && j<nMerge && apSegment[j]->pOffsetList && apSegment[j]->iDocid==iDocid @@ -142202,7 +142202,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderStart( int i; int nSeg = pCsr->nSegment; - /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search + /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search ** for, then advance each segment iterator until it points to a term of ** equal or greater value than the specified term. This prevents many ** unnecessary merge/sort operations for the case where single segment @@ -142286,7 +142286,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart( ** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart() ** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep() ** -** then the entire doclist for the term is available in +** then the entire doclist for the term is available in ** MultiSegReader.aDoclist/nDoclist. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr){ @@ -142334,9 +142334,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep( do { int nMerge; int i; - + /* Advance the first pCsr->nAdvance entries in the apSegment[] array - ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again. + ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again. */ for(i=0; i<pCsr->nAdvance; i++){ Fts3SegReader *pSeg = apSegment[i]; @@ -142358,34 +142358,34 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep( pCsr->zTerm = apSegment[0]->zTerm; /* If this is a prefix-search, and if the term that apSegment[0] points - ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all + ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all ** required callbacks have been made. In this case exit early. ** ** Similarly, if this is a search for an exact match, and the first term ** of segment apSegment[0] is not a match, exit early. */ if( pFilter->zTerm && !isScan ){ - if( pCsr->nTerm<pFilter->nTerm + if( pCsr->nTerm<pFilter->nTerm || (!isPrefix && pCsr->nTerm>pFilter->nTerm) - || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm) + || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm) ){ break; } } nMerge = 1; - while( nMerge<nSegment + while( nMerge<nSegment && apSegment[nMerge]->aNode - && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm + && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm && 0==memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, apSegment[nMerge]->zTerm, pCsr->nTerm) ){ nMerge++; } assert( isIgnoreEmpty || (isRequirePos && !isColFilter) ); - if( nMerge==1 - && !isIgnoreEmpty - && !isFirst + if( nMerge==1 + && !isIgnoreEmpty + && !isFirst && (p->bDescIdx==0 || fts3SegReaderIsPending(apSegment[0])==0) ){ pCsr->nDoclist = apSegment[0]->nDoclist; @@ -142430,7 +142430,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep( if( !isIgnoreEmpty || nList>0 ){ - /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged + /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged ** doclist. */ sqlite3_int64 iDelta; if( p->bDescIdx && nDoclist>0 ){ @@ -142455,7 +142455,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep( if( isFirst ){ char *a = &pCsr->aBuffer[nDoclist]; int nWrite; - + nWrite = sqlite3Fts3FirstFilter(iDelta, pList, nList, a); if( nWrite ){ iPrev = iDocid; @@ -142505,18 +142505,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish( } /* -** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT -** statement passed as the first argument. +** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT +** statement passed as the first argument. ** ** The "end_block" field may contain either an integer, or a text field -** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated -** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock -** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second, +** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated +** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock +** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second, ** set *piEndBlock to the first value and *pnByte to the second. */ static void fts3ReadEndBlockField( - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, - int iCol, + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, + int iCol, i64 *piEndBlock, i64 *pnByte ){ @@ -142562,10 +142562,10 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments( i64 iLast = (iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL + 1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL - 1; i64 nLimit = (nByte*3)/2; - /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to + /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to ** segments in this index on levels greater than iAbsLevel. If there is - ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all - ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be + ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all + ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be ** promoted to level iAbsLevel. */ sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 1, iAbsLevel+1); sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 2, iLast); @@ -142573,7 +142573,7 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments( i64 nSize = 0, dummy; fts3ReadEndBlockField(pRange, 2, &dummy, &nSize); if( nSize<=0 || nSize>nLimit ){ - /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not + /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not ** contain a size value. This happens if it was written by an ** old version of FTS. In this case it is not possible to determine ** the size of the segment, and so segment promotion does not @@ -142639,18 +142639,18 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments( } /* -** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single +** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single ** iLevel+1 segment. Or, if iLevel<0, merge all segments into a -** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level +** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level ** currently present in the database. ** ** If this function is called with iLevel<0, but there is only one -** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately. -** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs, +** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately. +** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs, ** an SQLite error code is returned. */ static int fts3SegmentMerge( - Fts3Table *p, + Fts3Table *p, int iLangid, /* Language id to merge */ int iIndex, /* Index in p->aIndex[] to merge */ int iLevel /* Level to merge */ @@ -142694,7 +142694,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge( }else{ /* This call is to merge all segments at level iLevel. find the next ** available segment index at level iLevel+1. The call to - ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to + ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to ** a single iLevel+2 segment if necessary. */ assert( FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING==-1 ); iNewLevel = getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, iLevel+1); @@ -142715,7 +142715,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge( while( SQLITE_OK==rc ){ rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, &csr); if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ) break; - rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1, + rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1, csr.zTerm, csr.nTerm, csr.aDoclist, csr.nDoclist); } if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished; @@ -142743,13 +142743,13 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge( } -/* -** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments. +/* +** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(Fts3Table *p){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; int i; - + for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<p->nIndex; i++){ rc = fts3SegmentMerge(p, p->iPrevLangid, i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING); if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -142851,7 +142851,7 @@ static void fts3InsertDocsize( /* ** Record 0 of the %_stat table contains a blob consisting of N varints, ** where N is the number of user defined columns in the fts3 table plus -** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the +** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the ** varints are set as follows: ** ** Varint 0: Total number of rows in the table. @@ -142935,7 +142935,7 @@ static void fts3UpdateDocTotals( } /* -** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each +** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each ** iIndex/iLangid combination. */ static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){ @@ -142973,7 +142973,7 @@ static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){ ** ** INSERT INTO <tbl>(<tbl>) VALUES('rebuild'); ** -** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one +** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one ** created using the content=xxx option, then the new index is based on ** the current contents of the xxx table. Otherwise, it is rebuilt based ** on the contents of the %_content table. @@ -143053,9 +143053,9 @@ static int fts3DoRebuild(Fts3Table *p){ /* -** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an +** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an ** incremental merge operation. Specifically, it opens a cursor to scan -** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute +** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute ** level iAbsLevel. */ static int fts3IncrmergeCsr( @@ -143065,7 +143065,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeCsr( Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr /* Cursor object to populate */ ){ int rc; /* Return Code */ - sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */ + sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */ int nByte; /* Bytes allocated at pCsr->apSegment[] */ /* Allocate space for the Fts3MultiSegReader.aCsr[] array */ @@ -143120,7 +143120,7 @@ struct Blob { }; /* -** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree +** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree ** nodes (blocks). */ struct NodeWriter { @@ -143189,12 +143189,12 @@ static void blobGrowBuffer(Blob *pBlob, int nMin, int *pRc){ /* ** Attempt to advance the node-reader object passed as the first argument to -** the next entry on the node. +** the next entry on the node. ** -** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible). +** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible). ** Otherwise return SQLITE_OK. If there is no next entry on the node ** (e.g. because the current entry is the last) set NodeReader->aNode to -** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output +** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output ** variables for the new entry. */ static int nodeReaderNext(NodeReader *p){ @@ -143242,7 +143242,7 @@ static void nodeReaderRelease(NodeReader *p){ /* ** Initialize a node-reader object to read the node in buffer aNode/nNode. ** -** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to +** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to ** point to the first entry on the node (if any). Otherwise, an SQLite ** error code is returned. */ @@ -143291,7 +143291,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush( int nSpace; /* Figure out how much space the key will consume if it is written to - ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression, + ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression, ** the space required changes depending on which node the key is to ** be added to. */ nPrefix = fts3PrefixCompress(pNode->key.a, pNode->key.n, zTerm, nTerm); @@ -143299,9 +143299,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush( nSpace = sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nPrefix); nSpace += sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nSuffix) + nSuffix; - if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){ + if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){ /* If the current node of layer iLayer contains zero keys, or if adding - ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize + ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize ** bytes in size, write the key here. */ Blob *pBlk = &pNode->block; @@ -143357,12 +143357,12 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush( ** A node header is a single 0x00 byte for a leaf node, or a height varint ** followed by the left-hand-child varint for an internal node. ** -** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a +** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a ** leaf node, the doclist is passed as aDoclist/nDoclist. For an internal ** node, both aDoclist and nDoclist must be passed 0. ** ** If the size of the value in blob pPrev is zero, then this is the first -** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the +** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the ** previous term. Before this function returns, it is updated to contain a ** copy of zTerm/nTerm. ** @@ -143379,7 +143379,7 @@ static int fts3AppendToNode( const char *zTerm, /* New term to write */ int nTerm, /* Size of zTerm in bytes */ const char *aDoclist, /* Doclist (or NULL) to write */ - int nDoclist /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */ + int nDoclist /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */ ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */ int bFirst = (pPrev->n==0); /* True if this is the first term written */ @@ -143453,7 +143453,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeAppend( rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pLeaf->iBlock, pLeaf->block.a, pLeaf->block.n); pWriter->nWork++; - /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the + /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the ** parent must: ** ** a) be greater than the largest term on the leaf node just written @@ -143518,7 +143518,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease( NodeWriter *pRoot; /* NodeWriter for root node */ int rc = *pRc; /* Error code */ - /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment + /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment ** root node. If the segment fits entirely on a single leaf node, iRoot ** will be set to 0. If the root node is the parent of the leaves, iRoot ** will be 1. And so on. */ @@ -143536,17 +143536,17 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease( /* The entire output segment fits on a single node. Normally, this means ** the node would be stored as a blob in the "root" column of the %_segdir - ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that - ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the - ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated. - ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle + ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that + ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the + ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated. + ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle ** segments that fit entirely on the root node with start_block!=0. ** - ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a + ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a ** pointer to the single content node. So that the segment consists of a ** single leaf and a single interior (root) node. ** - ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments + ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments ** table until we are sure it is needed. */ if( iRoot==0 ){ @@ -143574,7 +143574,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease( /* Write the %_segdir record. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ - rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, + rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, pWriter->iAbsLevel+1, /* level */ pWriter->iIdx, /* idx */ pWriter->iStart, /* start_block */ @@ -143613,11 +143613,11 @@ static int fts3TermCmp( /* -** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is +** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is ** NULL. If no error occurs and the entry is NULL, set *pbRes 1 before -** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0. +** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0. ** -** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite +** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite ** error code. The final value of *pbRes is undefined in this case. ** ** This is used to test if a segment is an "appendable" segment. If it @@ -143635,14 +143635,14 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){ if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pCheck) ) bRes = 1; rc = sqlite3_reset(pCheck); } - + *pbRes = bRes; return rc; } /* ** This function is called when initializing an incremental-merge operation. -** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level +** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level ** (iAbsLevel+1) can be appended to by the incremental merge. If it can, the ** merge-writer object *pWriter is initialized to write to it. ** @@ -143651,7 +143651,7 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){ ** * It was initially created as an appendable segment (with all required ** space pre-allocated), and ** -** * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is +** * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is ** greater than the largest key currently stored in the potential ** output segment. */ @@ -143781,13 +143781,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeLoad( /* ** Determine the largest segment index value that exists within absolute ** level iAbsLevel+1. If no error occurs, set *piIdx to this value plus -** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all +** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all ** within level iAbsLevel, set *piIdx to zero. ** ** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. The final value of ** *piIdx is undefined in this case. */ -static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( +static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( Fts3Table *p, /* FTS Table handle */ sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel, /* Absolute index of input segments */ int *piIdx /* OUT: Next free index at iAbsLevel+1 */ @@ -143806,7 +143806,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( return rc; } -/* +/* ** Allocate an appendable output segment on absolute level iAbsLevel+1 ** with idx value iIdx. ** @@ -143820,7 +143820,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( ** When an appendable segment is allocated, it is estimated that the ** maximum number of leaf blocks that may be required is the sum of the ** number of leaf blocks consumed by the input segments, plus the number -** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack +** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack ** variable nLeafEst. ** ** A total of 16*nLeafEst blocks are allocated when an appendable segment @@ -143829,10 +143829,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx( ** of interior nodes that are parents of the leaf nodes start at block ** (start_block + (1 + end_block - start_block) / 16). And so on. ** -** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the +** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the ** pre-processor macro FTS_MAX_APPENDABLE_HEIGHT. */ -static int fts3IncrmergeWriter( +static int fts3IncrmergeWriter( Fts3Table *p, /* Fts3 table handle */ sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel, /* Absolute level of input segments */ int iIdx, /* Index of new output segment */ @@ -143870,7 +143870,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter( if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; /* Insert the marker in the %_segments table to make sure nobody tries - ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify + ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify ** appendable segments. */ rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pWriter->iEnd, 0, 0); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc; @@ -143887,13 +143887,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter( } /* -** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the +** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the ** following two statements: ** ** DELETE FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx = :iIdx ** UPDATE %_segdir SET idx = idx - 1 WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx > :iIdx ** -** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE +** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE ** statement ensures that the remaining segments have contiguously allocated ** idx values. */ @@ -144015,8 +144015,8 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode( pNew->n = 0; /* Populate new node buffer */ - for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode); - rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode; + for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode); + rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode; rc = nodeReaderNext(&reader) ){ if( pNew->n==0 ){ @@ -144043,7 +144043,7 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode( } /* -** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute +** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute ** level iAbsLevel. This may involve deleting entries from the %_segments ** table, and modifying existing entries in both the %_segments and %_segdir ** tables. @@ -144166,9 +144166,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeChomp( } *pnRem = 0; }else{ - /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this + /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this ** segment to the upper level. The segment is modified in place - ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */ + ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */ const char *zTerm = pSeg->zTerm; int nTerm = pSeg->nTerm; rc = fts3TruncateSegment(p, iAbsLevel, pSeg->iIdx, zTerm, nTerm); @@ -144203,7 +144203,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintStore(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){ } /* -** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one +** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one ** exists, is stored in the rowid==1 row of the %_stat table. ** ** If successful, populate blob *pHint with the value read from the %_stat @@ -144240,7 +144240,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintLoad(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){ /* ** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op. ** Otherwise, append an entry to the hint stored in blob *pHint. Each entry -** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments +** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments ** and the number of input segments. ** ** If successful, leave *pRc set to SQLITE_OK and return. If an error occurs, @@ -144261,7 +144261,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeHintPush( /* ** Read the last entry (most recently pushed) from the hint blob *pHint -** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and +** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and ** *pnInput before returning. ** ** If no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK. If the hint blob in *pHint does @@ -144287,10 +144287,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintPop(Blob *pHint, i64 *piAbsLevel, int *pnInput){ /* ** Attempt an incremental merge that writes nMerge leaf blocks. ** -** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments -** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest -** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains -** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to +** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments +** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest +** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains +** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to ** write the quota of nMerge leaf blocks. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){ @@ -144321,7 +144321,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){ /* Search the %_segdir table for the absolute level with the smallest ** relative level number that contains at least nMin segments, if any. ** If one is found, set iAbsLevel to the absolute level number and - ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found, + ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found, ** set nSeg to -1. */ rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_FIND_MERGE_LEVEL, &pFindLevel, 0); @@ -144336,7 +144336,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){ /* If the hint read from the %_stat table is not empty, check if the ** last entry in it specifies a relative level smaller than or equal - ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this + ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this ** iteration of the loop will work on merging at the hinted level. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && hint.n ){ @@ -144362,11 +144362,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){ ** Exit early in this case. */ if( nSeg<0 ) break; - /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg - ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using + /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg + ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using ** the 'hint' parameters, it is possible that there are less than nSeg ** segments available in level iAbsLevel. In this case, no work is - ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop + ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop ** to start work on some other level. */ memset(pWriter, 0, nAlloc); pFilter->flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS; @@ -144633,7 +144633,7 @@ static u64 fts3ChecksumIndex( ** to true and return SQLITE_OK. Or if the contents do not match, set *pbOk ** to false before returning. ** -** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error +** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error ** code. The final value of *pbOk is undefined in this case. */ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){ @@ -144664,7 +144664,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){ sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = p->pTokenizer->pModule; sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; char *zSql; - + zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s" , p->zReadExprlist); if( !zSql ){ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; @@ -144724,7 +144724,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){ ** the FTS index are correct, return SQLITE_OK. Or, if the contents of the ** FTS index are incorrect, return SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB. ** -** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite +** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite ** error code. ** ** The integrity-check works as follows. For each token and indexed token @@ -144733,7 +144733,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){ ** ** + The index number (0 for the main index, 1 for the first prefix ** index etc.), -** + The token (or token prefix) text itself, +** + The token (or token prefix) text itself, ** + The language-id of the row it appears in, ** + The docid of the row it appears in, ** + The column it appears in, and @@ -144744,7 +144744,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){ ** ** The integrity-check code calculates the same checksum in two ways: ** -** 1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and +** 1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and ** 2. By scanning and tokenizing the content table. ** ** If the two checksums are identical, the integrity-check is deemed to have @@ -144765,7 +144765,7 @@ static int fts3DoIntegrityCheck( ** ** "INSERT INTO tbl(tbl) VALUES(<expr>)" ** -** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only +** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only ** meaningful value to insert is the text 'optimize'. */ static int fts3SpecialInsert(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pVal){ @@ -144817,7 +144817,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ } /* -** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to +** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to ** this list using sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(). */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredTokens(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ @@ -144845,14 +144845,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ int i; /* Used to iterate through table columns */ sqlite3_int64 iDocid; /* Docid of the row pCsr points to */ Fts3DeferredToken *pDef; /* Used to iterate through deferred tokens */ - + Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table *)pCsr->base.pVtab; sqlite3_tokenizer *pT = p->pTokenizer; sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = pT->pModule; - + assert( pCsr->isRequireSeek==0 ); iDocid = sqlite3_column_int64(pCsr->pStmt, 0); - + for(i=0; i<p->nColumn && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){ if( p->abNotindexed[i]==0 ){ const char *zText = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, i+1); @@ -144893,8 +144893,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){ } SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList( - Fts3DeferredToken *p, - char **ppData, + Fts3DeferredToken *p, + char **ppData, int *pnData ){ char *pRet; @@ -144914,7 +144914,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList( nSkip = sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(p->pList->aData, &dummy); *pnData = p->pList->nData - nSkip; *ppData = pRet; - + memcpy(pRet, &p->pList->aData[nSkip], *pnData); return SQLITE_OK; } @@ -144934,7 +144934,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken( } memset(pDeferred, 0, sizeof(*pDeferred)); pDeferred->pToken = pToken; - pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred; + pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred; pDeferred->iCol = iCol; pCsr->pDeferred = pDeferred; @@ -144951,8 +144951,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken( ** of subsiduary data structures accordingly. */ static int fts3DeleteByRowid( - Fts3Table *p, - sqlite3_value *pRowid, + Fts3Table *p, + sqlite3_value *pRowid, int *pnChng, /* IN/OUT: Decrement if row is deleted */ u32 *aSzDel ){ @@ -144990,14 +144990,14 @@ static int fts3DeleteByRowid( ** This function does the work for the xUpdate method of FTS3 virtual ** tables. The schema of the virtual table being: ** -** CREATE TABLE <table name>( +** CREATE TABLE <table name>( ** <user columns>, -** <table name> HIDDEN, -** docid HIDDEN, +** <table name> HIDDEN, +** docid HIDDEN, ** <langid> HIDDEN ** ); ** -** +** */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, /* FTS3 vtab object */ @@ -145018,7 +145018,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( assert( p->bHasStat==0 || p->bHasStat==1 ); assert( p->pSegments==0 ); - assert( + assert( nArg==1 /* DELETE operations */ || nArg==(2 + p->nColumn + 3) /* INSERT or UPDATE operations */ ); @@ -145027,9 +145027,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( ** ** INSERT INTO xyz(xyz) VALUES('command'); */ - if( nArg>1 - && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL - && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL + if( nArg>1 + && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL + && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL ){ rc = fts3SpecialInsert(p, apVal[p->nColumn+2]); goto update_out; @@ -145068,24 +145068,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( pNewRowid = apVal[1]; } - if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && ( + if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && ( sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL || sqlite3_value_int64(apVal[0])!=sqlite3_value_int64(pNewRowid) )){ /* The new rowid is not NULL (in this case the rowid will be - ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and + ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and ** the statement is either an INSERT or an UPDATE that modifies the ** rowid column. So if the conflict mode is REPLACE, then delete any - ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid. + ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid. ** - ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into + ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into ** the %_content table. If we hit the duplicate rowid constraint (or any ** other error) while doing so, return immediately. ** ** This branch may also run if pNewRowid contains a value that cannot - ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual + ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual ** call to fts3InsertData() (either just below or further on in this - ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is + ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is ** invoked, it will delete zero rows (since no row will have ** docid=$pNewRowid if $pNewRowid is not an integer value). */ @@ -145107,7 +145107,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( rc = fts3DeleteByRowid(p, apVal[0], &nChng, aSzDel); isRemove = 1; } - + /* If this is an INSERT or UPDATE operation, insert the new record. */ if( nArg>1 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ int iLangid = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[2 + p->nColumn + 2]); @@ -145140,10 +145140,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod( return rc; } -/* +/* ** Flush any data in the pending-terms hash table to disk. If successful, -** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if -** there was any data to flush) into a single segment. +** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if +** there was any data to flush) into a single segment. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){ int rc; @@ -145196,7 +145196,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){ #define FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS 'x' /* 3*nCol*nPhrase values */ /* -** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo(). +** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo(). */ #define FTS3_MATCHINFO_DEFAULT "pcx" @@ -145213,7 +145213,7 @@ struct LoadDoclistCtx { }; /* -** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the +** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the ** fts3BestSnippet() routine. */ typedef struct SnippetIter SnippetIter; @@ -145246,7 +145246,7 @@ struct SnippetFragment { }; /* -** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while +** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while ** accumulating the data returned by the matchinfo() function. */ typedef struct MatchInfo MatchInfo; @@ -145329,7 +145329,7 @@ static int fts3ExprIterate2( ** are part of a sub-tree that is the right-hand-side of a NOT operator. ** For each phrase node found, the supplied callback function is invoked. ** -** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK, +** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK, ** the iteration is abandoned and the error code returned immediately. ** Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is returned after a callback has been made for ** all eligible phrase nodes. @@ -145363,11 +145363,11 @@ static int fts3ExprLoadDoclistsCb(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){ /* ** Load the doclists for each phrase in the query associated with FTS3 cursor -** pCsr. +** pCsr. ** -** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable -** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or -** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If +** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable +** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or +** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If ** pnToken is not NULL, then it is set to the number of tokens in all ** matchable phrases of the expression. */ @@ -145398,7 +145398,7 @@ static int fts3ExprPhraseCount(Fts3Expr *pExpr){ } /* -** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two +** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two ** arguments so that it points to the first element with a value greater ** than or equal to parameter iNext. */ @@ -145467,7 +145467,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetNextCandidate(SnippetIter *pIter){ } /* -** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet +** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet ** iterator pIter. */ static void fts3SnippetDetails( @@ -145543,7 +145543,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){ pPhrase->iTail = iFirst; }else{ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || ( - pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0 + pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0 )); } @@ -145551,14 +145551,14 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){ } /* -** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens +** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens ** from column iCol that represent the "best" snippet. The best snippet ** is the snippet with the highest score, where scores are calculated ** by adding: ** ** (a) +1 point for each occurrence of a matchable phrase in the snippet. ** -** (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in +** (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in ** the snippet for which the corresponding mCovered bit is not set. ** ** The selected snippet parameters are stored in structure *pFragment before @@ -145618,7 +145618,7 @@ static int fts3BestSnippet( } } - /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in + /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in ** *pFragment. Store its associated 'score' in iBestScore. */ pFragment->iCol = iCol; @@ -145689,8 +145689,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend( ** ** ........X.....X ** -** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the -** document so that there are approximately the same number of +** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the +** document so that there are approximately the same number of ** non-highlighted terms to the right of the final highlighted term as there ** are to the left of the first highlighted term. For example, to this: ** @@ -145698,8 +145698,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend( ** ** This is done as part of extracting the snippet text, not when selecting ** the snippet. Snippet selection is done based on doclists only, so there -** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document -** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term. +** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document +** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term. */ static int fts3SnippetShift( Fts3Table *pTab, /* FTS3 table snippet comes from */ @@ -145788,7 +145788,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText( int iCol = pFragment->iCol+1; /* Query column to extract text from */ sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pMod; /* Tokenizer module methods object */ sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pC; /* Tokenizer cursor open on zDoc/nDoc */ - + zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol); if( zDoc==0 ){ if( sqlite3_column_type(pCsr->pStmt, iCol)!=SQLITE_NULL ){ @@ -145828,7 +145828,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText( if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){ /* Special case - the last token of the snippet is also the last token ** of the column. Append any punctuation that occurred between the end - ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output. + ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output. ** Then break out of the loop. */ rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, &zDoc[iEnd], -1); } @@ -145845,7 +145845,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText( /* Now that the shift has been done, check if the initial "..." are ** required. They are required if (a) this is not the first fragment, - ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column. + ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (iPos>0 || iFragment>0) ){ rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, zEllipsis, -1); @@ -145877,8 +145877,8 @@ static int fts3SnippetText( /* -** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a -** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single +** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a +** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single ** row). When this function is called, *ppCollist should point to the ** beginning of the first varint in the column-list (the varint that ** contains the position of the first matching term in the column data). @@ -145906,11 +145906,11 @@ static int fts3ColumnlistCount(char **ppCollist){ /* ** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "global" matchinfo stats -** for a single query. +** for a single query. ** ** fts3ExprIterate() callback to load the 'global' elements of a -** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements -** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the +** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements +** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the ** current query. ** ** Argument pCtx is actually a pointer to a struct of type MatchInfo. This @@ -145926,7 +145926,7 @@ static int fts3ColumnlistCount(char **ppCollist){ ** at least one instance of phrase iPhrase. ** ** If the phrase pExpr consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all X and -** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the +** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the ** file system. This is done because the full-text index doclist is required ** to calculate these values properly, and the full-text index doclist is ** not available for deferred tokens. @@ -145944,7 +145944,7 @@ static int fts3ExprGlobalHitsCb( /* ** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "local" part of the -** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the +** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the ** array that are different for each row returned by the query. */ static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb( @@ -145971,7 +145971,7 @@ static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb( } static int fts3MatchinfoCheck( - Fts3Table *pTab, + Fts3Table *pTab, char cArg, char **pzErr ){ @@ -145994,8 +145994,8 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSize(MatchInfo *pInfo, char cArg){ switch( cArg ){ case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC: - case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE: - case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL: + case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE: + case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL: nVal = 1; break; @@ -146041,7 +146041,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSelectDoctotal( } /* -** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while +** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while ** iterating through a multi-column position-list corresponding to the ** hits for a single phrase on a single row in order to calculate the ** values for a matchinfo() FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS request. @@ -146054,7 +146054,7 @@ struct LcsIterator { int iPos; /* Current position */ }; -/* +/* ** If LcsIterator.iCol is set to the following value, the iterator has ** finished iterating through all offsets for all columns. */ @@ -146091,16 +146091,16 @@ static int fts3LcsIteratorAdvance(LcsIterator *pIter){ pIter->pRead = pRead; return rc; } - + /* -** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag. +** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag. ** ** If the call is successful, the longest-common-substring lengths for each -** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] +** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] ** array before returning. SQLITE_OK is returned in this case. ** ** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the -** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is +** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is ** undefined. */ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){ @@ -146172,7 +146172,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){ /* ** Populate the buffer pInfo->aMatchinfo[] with an array of integers to -** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the +** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the ** format string passed as the second argument to matchinfo (or the ** default value "pcx" if no second argument was specified). The format ** string has already been validated and the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] array @@ -146183,7 +146183,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){ ** rows (i.e. FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE, NCOL, NDOC, AVGLENGTH and part of HITS) ** have already been populated. ** -** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error +** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error ** occurs. If a value other than SQLITE_OK is returned, the state the ** pInfo->aMatchinfo[] buffer is left in is undefined. */ @@ -146208,7 +146208,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues( case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL: if( bGlobal ) pInfo->aMatchinfo[0] = pInfo->nCol; break; - + case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC: if( bGlobal ){ sqlite3_int64 nDoc = 0; @@ -146217,7 +146217,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues( } break; - case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH: + case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH: if( bGlobal ){ sqlite3_int64 nDoc; /* Number of rows in table */ const char *a; /* Aggregate column length array */ @@ -146287,7 +146287,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues( /* -** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The +** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The ** 'matchinfo' data is an array of 32-bit unsigned integers (C type u32). */ static int fts3GetMatchinfo( @@ -146303,8 +146303,8 @@ static int fts3GetMatchinfo( sInfo.pCursor = pCsr; sInfo.nCol = pTab->nColumn; - /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the - ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard + /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the + ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard ** the cached data. */ if( pCsr->zMatchinfo && strcmp(pCsr->zMatchinfo, zArg) ){ assert( pCsr->aMatchinfo ); @@ -146314,7 +146314,7 @@ static int fts3GetMatchinfo( } /* If Fts3Cursor.aMatchinfo[] is NULL, then this is the first time the - ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case + ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case ** allocate the array used to accumulate the matchinfo data and ** initialize those elements that are constant for every row. */ @@ -146374,7 +146374,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet( /* The returned text includes up to four fragments of text extracted from ** the data in the current row. The first iteration of the for(...) loop - ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in + ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in ** size that contains at least one instance of all phrases in the query ** expression that appear in the current row. If such a fragment of text ** cannot be found, the second iteration of the loop attempts to locate @@ -146441,7 +146441,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet( assert( nFToken>0 ); for(i=0; i<nSnippet && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){ - rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i], + rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i], i, (i==nSnippet-1), nFToken, zStart, zEnd, zEllipsis, &res ); } @@ -146539,7 +146539,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets( sCtx.iDocid = pCsr->iPrevId; sCtx.pCsr = pCsr; - /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to + /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to ** string-buffer res for each column. */ for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nColumn; iCol++){ @@ -146552,7 +146552,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets( const char *zDoc; int nDoc; - /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is + /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is ** no way that this operation can fail, so the return code from ** fts3ExprIterate() can be discarded. */ @@ -146560,11 +146560,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets( sCtx.iTerm = 0; (void)fts3ExprIterate(pCsr->pExpr, fts3ExprTermOffsetInit, (void *)&sCtx); - /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored + /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored ** in column iCol, jump immediately to the next iteration of the loop. ** If an OOM occurs while retrieving the data (this can happen if SQLite - ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM - ** to the caller. + ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM + ** to the caller. */ zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1); nDoc = sqlite3_column_bytes(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1); @@ -146611,7 +146611,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets( } if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ char aBuffer[64]; - sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer, + sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer, "%d %d %d %d ", iCol, pTerm-sCtx.aTerm, iStart, iEnd-iStart ); rc = fts3StringAppend(&res, aBuffer, -1); @@ -146807,7 +146807,7 @@ static int unicodeDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){ ** ** For each codepoint in the zIn/nIn string, this function checks if the ** sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() function already returns the desired result. -** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the +** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the ** unicode_tokenizer.aiException[] array. For the purposes of tokenization, ** the return value of sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() is inverted for all ** codepoints in the aiException[] array. @@ -146833,8 +146833,8 @@ static int unicodeAddExceptions( while( z<zTerm ){ READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode); assert( (sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode) & 0xFFFFFFFE)==0 ); - if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum - && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0 + if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum + && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0 ){ nEntry++; } @@ -146851,7 +146851,7 @@ static int unicodeAddExceptions( z = (const unsigned char *)zIn; while( z<zTerm ){ READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode); - if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum + if( sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(iCode)!=bAlnum && sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)==0 ){ int i, j; @@ -146951,7 +146951,7 @@ static int unicodeCreate( /* ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor -** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in +** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in ** *ppCursor. */ static int unicodeOpen( @@ -147015,7 +147015,7 @@ static int unicodeNext( const unsigned char *zTerm = &pCsr->aInput[pCsr->nInput]; /* Scan past any delimiter characters before the start of the next token. - ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of + ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of ** the input. */ while( z<zTerm ){ READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode); @@ -147047,7 +147047,7 @@ static int unicodeNext( /* If the cursor is not at EOF, read the next character */ if( z>=zTerm ) break; READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode); - }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode) + }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode) || sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode) ); @@ -147062,7 +147062,7 @@ static int unicodeNext( } /* -** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module +** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module ** structure for the unicode tokenizer. */ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3UnicodeTokenizer(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const **ppModule){ @@ -147117,11 +147117,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){ ** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e. ** codepoints for which this function should return 0). ** - ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first + ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first ** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store - ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value - ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint - ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints + ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value + ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint + ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints ** using this format. */ static const unsigned int aEntry[] = { @@ -147246,30 +147246,30 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){ */ static int remove_diacritic(int c){ unsigned short aDia[] = { - 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995, - 2024, 2040, 2060, 2110, 2168, 2206, 2264, 2286, - 2344, 2383, 2472, 2488, 2516, 2596, 2668, 2732, - 2782, 2842, 2894, 2954, 2984, 3000, 3028, 3336, - 3456, 3696, 3712, 3728, 3744, 3896, 3912, 3928, - 3968, 4008, 4040, 4106, 4138, 4170, 4202, 4234, - 4266, 4296, 4312, 4344, 4408, 4424, 4472, 4504, - 6148, 6198, 6264, 6280, 6360, 6429, 6505, 6529, - 61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726, - 61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122, - 62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536, - 62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730, - 62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390, + 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995, + 2024, 2040, 2060, 2110, 2168, 2206, 2264, 2286, + 2344, 2383, 2472, 2488, 2516, 2596, 2668, 2732, + 2782, 2842, 2894, 2954, 2984, 3000, 3028, 3336, + 3456, 3696, 3712, 3728, 3744, 3896, 3912, 3928, + 3968, 4008, 4040, 4106, 4138, 4170, 4202, 4234, + 4266, 4296, 4312, 4344, 4408, 4424, 4472, 4504, + 6148, 6198, 6264, 6280, 6360, 6429, 6505, 6529, + 61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726, + 61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122, + 62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536, + 62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730, + 62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390, }; char aChar[] = { - '\0', 'a', 'c', 'e', 'i', 'n', 'o', 'u', 'y', 'y', 'a', 'c', - 'd', 'e', 'e', 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k', 'l', 'n', 'o', 'r', - 's', 't', 'u', 'u', 'w', 'y', 'z', 'o', 'u', 'a', 'i', 'o', - 'u', 'g', 'k', 'o', 'j', 'g', 'n', 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', 'r', - 'u', 's', 't', 'h', 'a', 'e', 'o', 'y', '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', - '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a', 'b', 'd', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g', 'h', - 'h', 'i', 'k', 'l', 'l', 'm', 'n', 'p', 'r', 'r', 's', 't', - 'u', 'v', 'w', 'w', 'x', 'y', 'z', 'h', 't', 'w', 'y', 'a', - 'e', 'i', 'o', 'u', 'y', + '\0', 'a', 'c', 'e', 'i', 'n', 'o', 'u', 'y', 'y', 'a', 'c', + 'd', 'e', 'e', 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k', 'l', 'n', 'o', 'r', + 's', 't', 'u', 'u', 'w', 'y', 'z', 'o', 'u', 'a', 'i', 'o', + 'u', 'g', 'k', 'o', 'j', 'g', 'n', 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', 'r', + 'u', 's', 't', 'h', 'a', 'e', 'o', 'y', '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', + '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a', 'b', 'd', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g', 'h', + 'h', 'i', 'k', 'l', 'l', 'm', 'n', 'p', 'r', 'r', 's', 't', + 'u', 'v', 'w', 'w', 'x', 'y', 'z', 'h', 't', 'w', 'y', 'a', + 'e', 'i', 'o', 'u', 'y', }; unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007; @@ -147390,19 +147390,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){ {42802, 1, 62}, {42873, 1, 4}, {42877, 76, 1}, {42878, 1, 10}, {42891, 0, 1}, {42893, 74, 1}, {42896, 1, 4}, {42912, 1, 10}, {42922, 72, 1}, - {65313, 14, 26}, + {65313, 14, 26}, }; static const unsigned short aiOff[] = { - 1, 2, 8, 15, 16, 26, 28, 32, - 37, 38, 40, 48, 63, 64, 69, 71, - 79, 80, 116, 202, 203, 205, 206, 207, - 209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 217, 218, 219, - 775, 7264, 10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721, - 54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274, - 57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406, - 65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462, - 65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511, - 65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529, + 1, 2, 8, 15, 16, 26, 28, 32, + 37, 38, 40, 48, 63, 64, 69, 71, + 79, 80, 116, 202, 203, 205, 206, 207, + 209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 217, 218, 219, + 775, 7264, 10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721, + 54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274, + 57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406, + 65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462, + 65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511, + 65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529, }; int ret = c; @@ -147439,7 +147439,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){ if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = remove_diacritic(ret); } - + else if( c>=66560 && c<66600 ){ ret = c + 40; } @@ -147470,7 +147470,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){ ** Database Format of R-Tree Tables ** -------------------------------- ** -** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three +** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three ** native SQLite tables declared as follows. In each case, the '%' character ** in the table name is replaced with the user-supplied name of the r-tree ** table. @@ -147495,7 +147495,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){ ** of the node contain the tree depth as a big-endian integer. ** For non-root nodes, the first 2 bytes are left unused. ** -** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently +** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently ** stored in the node. ** ** 3. The remainder of the node contains the node entries. Each entry @@ -147544,7 +147544,7 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint; #define RTREE_MAX_DIMENSIONS 5 /* Size of hash table Rtree.aHash. This hash table is not expected to -** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is +** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is ** used. */ #define HASHSIZE 97 @@ -147553,13 +147553,13 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint; ** the number of rows in the virtual table to calculate the costs of ** various strategies. If possible, this estimate is loaded from the ** sqlite_stat1 table (with RTREE_MIN_ROWEST as a hard-coded minimum). -** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use +** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use ** RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST. */ #define RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST 1048576 #define RTREE_MIN_ROWEST 100 -/* +/* ** An rtree virtual-table object. */ struct Rtree { @@ -147571,13 +147571,13 @@ struct Rtree { u8 nBytesPerCell; /* Bytes consumed per cell */ int iDepth; /* Current depth of the r-tree structure */ char *zDb; /* Name of database containing r-tree table */ - char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */ + char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */ int nBusy; /* Current number of users of this structure */ i64 nRowEst; /* Estimated number of rows in this table */ /* List of nodes removed during a CondenseTree operation. List is ** linked together via the pointer normally used for hash chains - - ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree + ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree ** headed by the node (leaf nodes have RtreeNode.iNode==0). */ RtreeNode *pDeleted; @@ -147598,7 +147598,7 @@ struct Rtree { sqlite3_stmt *pWriteParent; sqlite3_stmt *pDeleteParent; - RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */ + RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */ }; /* Possible values for Rtree.eCoordType: */ @@ -147638,7 +147638,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint { }; /* -** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the +** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the ** maximum. In Gutman's notation: ** ** m = M/3 @@ -147653,7 +147653,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint { /* ** The smallest possible node-size is (512-64)==448 bytes. And the largest ** supported cell size is 48 bytes (8 byte rowid + ten 4 byte coordinates). -** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since +** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since ** 2^40 is greater than 2^64, an r-tree structure always has a depth of ** 40 or less. */ @@ -147667,7 +147667,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint { */ #define RTREE_CACHE_SZ 5 -/* +/* ** An rtree cursor object. */ struct RtreeCursor { @@ -147739,7 +147739,7 @@ struct RtreeConstraint { #define RTREE_QUERY 0x47 /* G: New-style sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() */ -/* +/* ** An rtree structure node. */ struct RtreeNode { @@ -147754,7 +147754,7 @@ struct RtreeNode { /* Return the number of cells in a node */ #define NCELL(pNode) readInt16(&(pNode)->zData[2]) -/* +/* ** A single cell from a node, deserialized */ struct RtreeCell { @@ -147769,11 +147769,11 @@ struct RtreeCell { ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() and which appear on the right of MATCH ** operators in order to constrain a search. ** -** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions. Exactly one of +** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions. Exactly one of ** xGeom and xQueryFunc fields is non-NULL, depending on whether the ** SQL function was created using sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback() or ** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback(). -** +** ** This object is deleted automatically by the destructor mechanism in ** sqlite3_create_function_v2(). */ @@ -147821,22 +147821,22 @@ static int readInt16(u8 *p){ } static void readCoord(u8 *p, RtreeCoord *pCoord){ u32 i = ( - (((u32)p[0]) << 24) + - (((u32)p[1]) << 16) + - (((u32)p[2]) << 8) + + (((u32)p[0]) << 24) + + (((u32)p[1]) << 16) + + (((u32)p[2]) << 8) + (((u32)p[3]) << 0) ); *(u32 *)pCoord = i; } static i64 readInt64(u8 *p){ return ( - (((i64)p[0]) << 56) + - (((i64)p[1]) << 48) + - (((i64)p[2]) << 40) + - (((i64)p[3]) << 32) + - (((i64)p[4]) << 24) + - (((i64)p[5]) << 16) + - (((i64)p[6]) << 8) + + (((i64)p[0]) << 56) + + (((i64)p[1]) << 48) + + (((i64)p[2]) << 40) + + (((i64)p[3]) << 32) + + (((i64)p[4]) << 24) + + (((i64)p[5]) << 16) + + (((i64)p[6]) << 8) + (((i64)p[7]) << 0) ); } @@ -148017,7 +148017,7 @@ static int nodeAcquire( } /* If no error has occurred so far, check if the "number of entries" - ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to + ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to ** SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB. */ if( pNode && rc==SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -148205,7 +148205,7 @@ static int rtreeInit( sqlite3 *, void *, int, const char *const*, sqlite3_vtab **, char **, int ); -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xCreate method. */ static int rtreeCreate( @@ -148218,7 +148218,7 @@ static int rtreeCreate( return rtreeInit(db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr, 1); } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xConnect method. */ static int rtreeConnect( @@ -148258,7 +148258,7 @@ static void rtreeRelease(Rtree *pRtree){ } } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xDisconnect method. */ static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ @@ -148266,7 +148266,7 @@ static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xDestroy method. */ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ @@ -148276,7 +148276,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_node';" "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_rowid';" "DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_parent';", - pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, + pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName ); @@ -148293,7 +148293,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xOpen method. */ static int rtreeOpen(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCursor){ @@ -148330,7 +148330,7 @@ static void freeCursorConstraints(RtreeCursor *pCsr){ } } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xClose method. */ static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){ @@ -148347,7 +148347,7 @@ static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){ /* ** Rtree virtual table module xEof method. ** -** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid +** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid ** record (i.e if the scan has finished), or zero otherwise. */ static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){ @@ -148396,7 +148396,7 @@ static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){ /* ** Check the RTree node or entry given by pCellData and p against the MATCH -** constraint pConstraint. +** constraint pConstraint. */ static int rtreeCallbackConstraint( RtreeConstraint *pConstraint, /* The constraint to test */ @@ -148441,7 +148441,7 @@ static int rtreeCallbackConstraint( return rc; } -/* +/* ** Check the internal RTree node given by pCellData against constraint p. ** If this constraint cannot be satisfied by any child within the node, ** set *peWithin to NOT_WITHIN. @@ -148459,7 +148459,7 @@ static void rtreeNonleafConstraint( */ pCellData += 8 + 4*(p->iCoord&0xfe); - assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE + assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE || p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ ); switch( p->op ){ case RTREE_LE: @@ -148498,7 +148498,7 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint( ){ RtreeDValue xN; /* Coordinate value converted to a double */ - assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE + assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE || p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ ); pCellData += 8 + p->iCoord*4; RTREE_DECODE_COORD(eInt, pCellData, xN); @@ -148513,12 +148513,12 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint( } /* -** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit +** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit ** integer value equal to iRowid. Return the index of this cell. */ static int nodeRowidIndex( - Rtree *pRtree, - RtreeNode *pNode, + Rtree *pRtree, + RtreeNode *pNode, i64 iRowid, int *piIndex ){ @@ -148659,7 +148659,7 @@ static RtreeSearchPoint *rtreeSearchPointNew( pFirst = rtreeSearchPointFirst(pCur); pCur->anQueue[iLevel]++; if( pFirst==0 - || pFirst->rScore>rScore + || pFirst->rScore>rScore || (pFirst->rScore==rScore && pFirst->iLevel>iLevel) ){ if( pCur->bPoint ){ @@ -148832,7 +148832,7 @@ static int rtreeStepToLeaf(RtreeCursor *pCur){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xNext method. */ static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){ @@ -148846,7 +148846,7 @@ static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xRowid method. */ static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){ @@ -148860,7 +148860,7 @@ static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){ return rc; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xColumn method. */ static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){ @@ -148891,8 +148891,8 @@ static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* -** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with +/* +** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with ** rowid iRowid. If successful, set *ppLeaf to point to the node and ** return SQLITE_OK. If there is no such record in the table, set ** *ppLeaf to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs, set *ppLeaf @@ -148935,7 +148935,7 @@ static int deserializeGeometry(sqlite3_value *pValue, RtreeConstraint *pCons){ /* Check that the blob is roughly the right size. */ nBlob = sqlite3_value_bytes(pValue); - if( nBlob<(int)sizeof(RtreeMatchArg) + if( nBlob<(int)sizeof(RtreeMatchArg) || ((nBlob-sizeof(RtreeMatchArg))%sizeof(RtreeDValue))!=0 ){ return SQLITE_ERROR; @@ -148967,11 +148967,11 @@ static int deserializeGeometry(sqlite3_value *pValue, RtreeConstraint *pCons){ return SQLITE_OK; } -/* +/* ** Rtree virtual table module xFilter method. */ static int rtreeFilter( - sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, + sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, int idxNum, const char *idxStr, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ @@ -149011,8 +149011,8 @@ static int rtreeFilter( pCsr->atEOF = 1; } }else{ - /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array - ** with the configured constraints. + /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array + ** with the configured constraints. */ rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot); if( rc==SQLITE_OK && argc>0 ){ @@ -149086,7 +149086,7 @@ static void setEstimatedRows(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, i64 nRow){ /* ** Rtree virtual table module xBestIndex method. There are three -** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to +** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to ** least desirable): ** ** idxNum idxStr Strategy @@ -149096,8 +149096,8 @@ static void setEstimatedRows(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo, i64 nRow){ ** ------------------------------------------------ ** ** If strategy 1 is used, then idxStr is not meaningful. If strategy -** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each -** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to +** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each +** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to ** the constraint in sqlite3_index_info.aConstraintUsage[] with ** (argvIndex==1) etc. ** @@ -149144,11 +149144,11 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){ pIdxInfo->aConstraintUsage[jj].omit = 1; /* This strategy involves a two rowid lookups on an B-Tree structures - ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be - ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which + ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be + ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which ** sqlite uses an internal cost of 0.0). It is expected to return ** a single row. - */ + */ pIdxInfo->estimatedCost = 30.0; setEstimatedRows(pIdxInfo, 1); return SQLITE_OK; @@ -149164,7 +149164,7 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){ case SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE: op = RTREE_GE; break; default: assert( p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH ); - op = RTREE_MATCH; + op = RTREE_MATCH; break; } zIdxStr[iIdx++] = op; @@ -149240,8 +149240,8 @@ static int cellContains(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p1, RtreeCell *p2){ for(ii=0; ii<(pRtree->nDim*2); ii+=2){ RtreeCoord *a1 = &p1->aCoord[ii]; RtreeCoord *a2 = &p2->aCoord[ii]; - if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f)) - || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i)) + if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f)) + || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i)) ){ return 0; } @@ -149262,9 +149262,9 @@ static RtreeDValue cellGrowth(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p, RtreeCell *pCell){ } static RtreeDValue cellOverlap( - Rtree *pRtree, - RtreeCell *p, - RtreeCell *aCell, + Rtree *pRtree, + RtreeCell *p, + RtreeCell *aCell, int nCell ){ int ii; @@ -149373,7 +149373,7 @@ static int AdjustTree( cellUnion(pRtree, &cell, pCell); nodeOverwriteCell(pRtree, pParent, &cell, iCell); } - + p = pParent; } return SQLITE_OK; @@ -149404,7 +149404,7 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int); /* ** Arguments aIdx, aDistance and aSpare all point to arrays of size -** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to +** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to ** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values ** in aIdx according to the indexed values in aDistance. For ** example, assuming the inputs: @@ -149420,9 +149420,9 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int); ** sorting algorithm. */ static void SortByDistance( - int *aIdx, - int nIdx, - RtreeDValue *aDistance, + int *aIdx, + int nIdx, + RtreeDValue *aDistance, int *aSpare ){ if( nIdx>1 ){ @@ -149476,7 +149476,7 @@ static void SortByDistance( /* ** Arguments aIdx, aCell and aSpare all point to arrays of size -** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to +** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to ** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values ** in aIdx according to dimension iDim of the cells in aCell. The ** minimum value of dimension iDim is considered first, the @@ -149487,10 +149487,10 @@ static void SortByDistance( */ static void SortByDimension( Rtree *pRtree, - int *aIdx, - int nIdx, - int iDim, - RtreeCell *aCell, + int *aIdx, + int nIdx, + int iDim, + RtreeCell *aCell, int *aSpare ){ if( nIdx>1 ){ @@ -149587,8 +149587,8 @@ static int splitNodeStartree( int nLeft; for( - nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree); - nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree)); + nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree); + nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree)); nLeft++ ){ RtreeCell left; @@ -149643,9 +149643,9 @@ static int splitNodeStartree( static int updateMapping( - Rtree *pRtree, - i64 iRowid, - RtreeNode *pNode, + Rtree *pRtree, + i64 iRowid, + RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight ){ int (*xSetMapping)(Rtree *, sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_int64); @@ -149681,7 +149681,7 @@ static int SplitNode( RtreeCell leftbbox; RtreeCell rightbbox; - /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and + /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and ** all cells from node pLeft. Then zero the original node. */ aCell = sqlite3_malloc((sizeof(RtreeCell)+sizeof(int))*(nCell+1)); @@ -149798,14 +149798,14 @@ splitnode_out: } /* -** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is +** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is ** still NULL, load all ancestor nodes of pLeaf into memory and populate ** the pLeaf->pParent chain all the way up to the root node. ** ** This operation is required when a row is deleted (or updated - an update ** is implemented as a delete followed by an insert). SQLite provides the ** rowid of the row to delete, which can be used to find the leaf on which -** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this +** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this ** function is called to determine its ancestry. */ static int fixLeafParent(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pLeaf){ @@ -149876,7 +149876,7 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){ if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3_reset(pRtree->pDeleteParent)) ){ return rc; } - + /* Remove the node from the in-memory hash table and link it into ** the Rtree.pDeleted list. Its contents will be re-inserted later on. */ @@ -149891,9 +149891,9 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){ static int fixBoundingBox(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode){ RtreeNode *pParent = pNode->pParent; - int rc = SQLITE_OK; + int rc = SQLITE_OK; if( pParent ){ - int ii; + int ii; int nCell = NCELL(pNode); RtreeCell box; /* Bounding box for pNode */ nodeGetCell(pRtree, pNode, 0, &box); @@ -149948,9 +149948,9 @@ static int deleteCell(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iCell, int iHeight){ } static int Reinsert( - Rtree *pRtree, - RtreeNode *pNode, - RtreeCell *pCell, + Rtree *pRtree, + RtreeNode *pNode, + RtreeCell *pCell, int iHeight ){ int *aOrder; @@ -150004,7 +150004,7 @@ static int Reinsert( for(ii=0; ii<nCell; ii++){ aDistance[ii] = RTREE_ZERO; for(iDim=0; iDim<pRtree->nDim; iDim++){ - RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) - + RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) - DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2])); aDistance[ii] += (coord-aCenterCoord[iDim])*(coord-aCenterCoord[iDim]); } @@ -150049,7 +150049,7 @@ static int Reinsert( } /* -** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a +** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a ** subtree iHeight high (leaf nodes have iHeight==0). */ static int rtreeInsertCell( @@ -150139,8 +150139,8 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){ /* Obtain a reference to the root node to initialize Rtree.iDepth */ rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot); - /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry - ** about to be deleted. + /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry + ** about to be deleted. */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){ rc = findLeafNode(pRtree, iDelete, &pLeaf, 0); @@ -150167,11 +150167,11 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){ } /* Check if the root node now has exactly one child. If so, remove - ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and + ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and ** reduce the tree height by one. ** ** This is equivalent to copying the contents of the child into - ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform + ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform ** in this scenario). */ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pRtree->iDepth>0 && NCELL(pRoot)==1 ){ @@ -150244,9 +150244,9 @@ static RtreeValue rtreeValueUp(sqlite3_value *v){ ** The xUpdate method for rtree module virtual tables. */ static int rtreeUpdate( - sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, - int nData, - sqlite3_value **azData, + sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, + int nData, + sqlite3_value **azData, sqlite_int64 *pRowid ){ Rtree *pRtree = (Rtree *)pVtab; @@ -150296,7 +150296,7 @@ static int rtreeUpdate( } } - /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in + /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in ** the table. If so, the constraint has failed. */ if( sqlite3_value_type(azData[2])!=SQLITE_NULL ){ cell.iRowid = sqlite3_value_int64(azData[2]); @@ -150371,8 +150371,8 @@ static int rtreeRename(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNewName){ "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_node' RENAME TO \"%w_node\";" "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_parent' RENAME TO \"%w_parent\";" "ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_rowid' RENAME TO \"%w_rowid\";" - , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName - , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName + , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName + , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName ); if( zSql ){ @@ -150446,10 +150446,10 @@ static sqlite3_module rtreeModule = { }; static int rtreeSqlInit( - Rtree *pRtree, - sqlite3 *db, - const char *zDb, - const char *zPrefix, + Rtree *pRtree, + sqlite3 *db, + const char *zDb, + const char *zPrefix, int isCreate ){ int rc = SQLITE_OK; @@ -150509,7 +150509,7 @@ static int rtreeSqlInit( for(i=0; i<N_STATEMENT && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){ char *zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azSql[i], zDb, zPrefix); if( zSql ){ - rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, appStmt[i], 0); + rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, appStmt[i], 0); }else{ rc = SQLITE_NOMEM; } @@ -150551,9 +150551,9 @@ static int getIntFromStmt(sqlite3 *db, const char *zSql, int *piVal){ ** table already exists. In this case the node-size is determined by inspecting ** the root node of the tree. ** -** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size. -** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the -** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries +** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size. +** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the +** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries ** would fit in a single node, use a smaller node-size. */ static int getNodeSize( @@ -150591,7 +150591,7 @@ static int getNodeSize( return rc; } -/* +/* ** This function is the implementation of both the xConnect and xCreate ** methods of the r-tree virtual table. ** @@ -150704,7 +150704,7 @@ static int rtreeInit( ** ** The human readable string takes the form of a Tcl list with one ** entry for each cell in the r-tree node. Each entry is itself a -** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the +** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the ** <num-dimension>*2 coordinates. */ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ @@ -150748,7 +150748,7 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ zText = sqlite3_mprintf("{%s}", zCell); } } - + sqlite3_result_text(ctx, zText, -1, sqlite3_free); } @@ -150763,10 +150763,10 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ */ static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg); - if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB + if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB || sqlite3_value_bytes(apArg[0])<2 ){ - sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1); + sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1); }else{ u8 *zBlob = (u8 *)sqlite3_value_blob(apArg[0]); sqlite3_result_int(ctx, readInt16(zBlob)); @@ -150775,7 +150775,7 @@ static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ /* ** Register the r-tree module with database handle db. This creates the -** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar +** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar ** function "rtreenode". */ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RtreeInit(sqlite3 *db){ @@ -150872,7 +150872,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback( pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = 0; pGeomCtx->xDestructor = 0; pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext; - return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY, + return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY, (void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback ); } @@ -150897,7 +150897,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_query_callback( pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = xQueryFunc; pGeomCtx->xDestructor = xDestructor; pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext; - return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY, + return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY, (void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback ); } @@ -150933,9 +150933,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init( ************************************************************************* ** $Id: icu.c,v 1.7 2007/12/13 21:54:11 drh Exp $ ** -** This file implements an integration between the ICU library -** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library -** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses +** This file implements an integration between the ICU library +** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library +** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses ** ICU to provide the following to SQLite: ** ** * An implementation of the SQL regexp() function (and hence REGEXP @@ -150946,7 +150946,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init( ** ** * Integration of ICU and SQLite collation sequences. ** -** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to +** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to ** provide case-independent matching. */ @@ -150982,7 +150982,7 @@ static void xFree(void *p){ /* ** Compare two UTF-8 strings for equality where the first string is -** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and +** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and ** false (0) if they are different. */ static int icuLikeCompare( @@ -151017,7 +151017,7 @@ static int icuLikeCompare( uint8_t c; /* Skip any MATCH_ALL or MATCH_ONE characters that follow a - ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the + ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the ** test string. */ while( (c=zPattern[iPattern]) == MATCH_ALL || c == MATCH_ONE ){ @@ -151070,15 +151070,15 @@ static int icuLikeCompare( ** ** A LIKE B ** -** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E, +** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E, ** ** A LIKE B ESCAPE E ** ** is mapped to like(B, A, E). */ static void icuLikeFunc( - sqlite3_context *context, - int argc, + sqlite3_context *context, + int argc, sqlite3_value **argv ){ const unsigned char *zA = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]); @@ -151104,7 +151104,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc( if( zE==0 ) return; U8_NEXT(zE, i, nE, uEsc); if( i!=nE){ - sqlite3_result_error(context, + sqlite3_result_error(context, "ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1); return; } @@ -151119,7 +151119,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc( ** This function is called when an ICU function called from within ** the implementation of an SQL scalar function returns an error. ** -** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is +** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is ** loaded with an error message based on the following two args. */ static void icuFunctionError( @@ -151145,7 +151145,7 @@ static void icuRegexpDelete(void *p){ /* ** Implementation of SQLite REGEXP operator. This scalar function takes ** two arguments. The first is a regular expression pattern to compile -** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either +** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either ** argument is an SQL NULL, then NULL Is returned. Otherwise, the result ** is 1 if the string matches the pattern, or 0 otherwise. ** @@ -151169,8 +151169,8 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ (void)nArg; /* Unused parameter */ - /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL, - ** then the result is also NULL. + /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL, + ** then the result is also NULL. */ if( !zString ){ return; @@ -151208,7 +151208,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ } /* Set the text that the regular expression operates on to a NULL - ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than + ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than ** leaving the regular expression object configured with an invalid ** pointer after this function returns. */ @@ -151219,7 +151219,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ } /* -** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and +** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and ** lower(). Function upper() converts its input to upper-case (ABC). ** Function lower() converts to lower-case (abc). ** @@ -151227,7 +151227,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){ ** "language specific". Refer to ICU documentation for the differences ** between the two. ** -** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar +** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar ** functions are invoked with one argument: ** ** upper('ABC') -> 'abc' @@ -151319,7 +151319,7 @@ static int icuCollationColl( /* ** Implementation of the scalar function icu_load_collation(). ** -** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation +** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation ** types to an SQLite database connection. It is intended to be called ** as follows: ** @@ -151330,8 +151330,8 @@ static int icuCollationColl( ** collation sequence to create. */ static void icuLoadCollation( - sqlite3_context *p, - int nArg, + sqlite3_context *p, + int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg ){ sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(p); @@ -151356,7 +151356,7 @@ static void icuLoadCollation( } assert(p); - rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator, + rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator, icuCollationColl, icuCollationDel ); if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){ @@ -151412,7 +151412,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db){ __declspec(dllexport) #endif SQLITE_API int sqlite3_icu_init( - sqlite3 *db, + sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg, const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi ){ @@ -151513,7 +151513,7 @@ static int icuDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){ /* ** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input ** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor -** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in +** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in ** *ppCursor. */ static int icuOpen( @@ -151555,7 +151555,7 @@ static int icuOpen( pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[(nChar+3)&~3]; pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput; - U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c); + U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c); while( c>0 ){ int isError = 0; c = u_foldCase(c, opt); |